SERVICE HANDBOOK
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c
File No. SHE050003B0
R05032182700-TTEC
Ver02_2005-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE SERVICE FOR
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c
The installation and service should be done by a qualified service
technician.
1) Transportation/Installation
-
When transporting/installing the equipment, employ four persons and be sure to hold the posi-
tions as shown in the figure.
The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 113 kg (249 lb), therefore pay full atten-
tion when handling it.
-
-
Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when trans-
porting the equipment.
Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110 V / 13.2 A, 115 V or 127 V / 12 A, 220-240 V or 240
V / 8 A for its power source.
-
-
The equipment must be grounded for safety.
Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and
direct sunlight.
-
-
Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.
To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80
cm (32”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) on the rear.
The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be accessible.
Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over
it.
-
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2) General Precautions at Service
-
-
-
Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable during service (except for the service
should be done with the power turned ON).
Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once
a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise
noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to install small parts such as
screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers in the wrong places.
-
-
Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband
since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity.
Caution: Before using the wristband, unplug the power cable of the equipment and
make sure that there are no charged objects which are not insulated in the
vicinity.
-
Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to
expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver
on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting
service.
-
-
Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, fuser unit, damp
heater and areas around them.
Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, 2nd transfer roller,
developer, IH control circuit, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for
the LCD backlight and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not
be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the
power is turned OFF.
-
Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g.
rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys, fans and laser beam exit of the laser
optical unit).
-
-
Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges
underneath.
When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam.
Use designated jigs and tools.
-
-
-
Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents.
Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished.
3) Important Service Parts for Safety
-
The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, IC-RAMs including lithium
batteries, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly. If
these parts are short-circuited and their functions become ineffective, they may result in fatal
accidents such as burnout. Do not allow a short-circuit or do not use the parts not recommended
by Toshiba TEC Corporation.
4) Cautionary Labels
During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as “Unplug the
-
power cable during service”, “CAUTION. HOT”, “CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE”, “CAUTION.
LASER BEAM”, etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the
equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5) Disposal of the Equipment, Supplies, Packing Materials, Used Batteries and IC-RAMs
-
Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, packing materials, used batter-
ies and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTENTS
1.1 Specifications.......................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Accessories .........................................................................................................................1-7
1.3 Options ................................................................................................................................1-8
1.4 Supplies...............................................................................................................................1-9
1.5 System List ........................................................................................................................1-10
2.1 Error Code List.....................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 Jam...........................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 Service call...............................................................................................................2-7
2.1.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function..............................................................2-13
2.1.4 Printer function error...............................................................................................2-21
2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes ........................................................................................................ 2-23
2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03)....................................................................................2-25
2.2.2 Output check (test mode 03)..................................................................................2-34
2.2.3 Test print mode (test mode 04) ..............................................................................2-37
2.2.4 Adjustment mode (05)............................................................................................2-38
2.2.5 Setting mode (08)...................................................................................................2-85
2.2.6 Pixel counter.........................................................................................................2-198
2.2.7 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08)..........................2-208
3. ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Adjustment Order (Image Related Adjustment)...................................................................3-1
3.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor .................................................................................3-2
3.3 Performing Image Quality Control .......................................................................................3-5
3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment...........................................................................................3-6
3.4.1 General description ..................................................................................................3-6
3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller .................................................................3-8
3.4.3 Printer related adjustment ........................................................................................3-9
3.4.4 Scanner related adjustment ...................................................................................3-14
3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function) ..................................................................3-21
3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment................................................................................3-21
3.5.2 Color Deviation Adjustment....................................................................................3-22
3.5.3 Density adjustment.................................................................................................3-28
3.5.4 Color balance adjustment.......................................................................................3-29
3.5.5 Gamma balance adjustment ..................................................................................3-30
3.5.6 Offsetting adjustment for background processing..................................................3-30
3.5.7 Judgment threshold for ACS ..................................................................................3-31
3.5.8 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................3-31
3.5.9 Setting range correction .........................................................................................3-32
3.5.10 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ...................................3-32
3.5.11 Adjustment of smudged/faint text...........................................................................3-33
3.5.12 Adaptation to highlighter.........................................................................................3-33
3.5.13 Beam level conversion setting................................................................................3-34
3.5.14 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type..................................................3-34
3.5.15 Maximum text density adjustment..........................................................................3-35
3.5.16 Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment..............................................................3-35
3.5.17 Black reproduction switching at the Twin color copy mode....................................3-36
3.5.18 Background adjustment(Black Mode) ....................................................................3-36
3.6 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function) ...................................................................3-37
3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment................................................................................3-37
3.6.2 Color deviation adjustment.....................................................................................3-38
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c CONTENTS
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.6.3 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode) ............................................................3-38
3.6.4 Color balance adjustment (Color Mode).................................................................3-39
3.6.5 Adjustment of smudged/faint text...........................................................................3-39
3.6.6 Upper limit value at Toner Saving Mode ................................................................3-40
3.6.7 Dot size adjustment in black printing......................................................................3-40
3.6.8 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type..................................................3-40
3.6.9 Image processing: Gamma correction table all clearing.........................................3-40
3.7 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function) ................................................................3-41
3.7.1 Gamma balance adjustment ..................................................................................3-41
3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode)...........................................................................3-42
3.7.3 Background adjustment (Gray Scale Mode) ..........................................................3-43
3.7.4 Background adjustment (Color Mode)....................................................................3-43
3.7.5 Judgment threshold for ACS ..................................................................................3-44
3.7.6 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................3-44
3.7.7 Setting range correction .........................................................................................3-45
3.7.8 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ...................................3-45
3.7.9 Fine adjustment of black density............................................................................3-46
3.7.10 RGB conversion method selection.........................................................................3-46
3.7.11 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (black) .......................................3-47
3.7.12 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (color)........................................3-47
3.8 High-Voltage Transformer Setting .....................................................................................3-48
3.8.1 General description ................................................................................................3-48
3.8.2 Setting at the replacement of high-voltage transformer .........................................3-48
3.9 Adjustment of the Scanner Section ...................................................................................3-49
3.9.1 Carriages................................................................................................................3-49
3.9.2 Lens unit................................................................................................................. 3-53
3.10 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System .........................................................................3-55
3.10.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding ..............................................3-55
3.11 Adjustment of the Developer Unit......................................................................................3-57
3.11.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (black developer unit)...........................................................3-57
3.11.2 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (color developer unit) ...........................................................3-59
3.11.3 Black developer unit lift up/down timing adjustment...............................................3-61
3.12 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3018)..................................................................................3-63
3.12.1 Adjustment of RADF Position.................................................................................3-63
3.12.2 Adjustment of RADF Height ...................................................................................3-68
3.12.3 Adjustment of Skew................................................................................................3-70
3.12.4 Adjustment of the Leading Edge Position ..............................................................3-73
3.12.5 Adjustment of Horizontal Position ..........................................................................3-74
3.12.6 Adjustment of Copy Ratio.......................................................................................3-76
3.12.7 Adjustment of RADF Opening/Closing Sensor.......................................................3-77
3.13 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022)................................................................................3-78
3.13.1 Adjusting the jogging plate width............................................................................3-78
3.13.2 Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate .................................................................3-80
3.13.3 Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag .................................................................3-81
3.13.4 Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt .......................................3-82
3.13.5 Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate ....................................................3-84
3.13.6 Adjustment of the upper tray angle ........................................................................3-85
3.13.7 DIP switch functions...............................................................................................3-87
3.14 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/1024).......................................................................3-89
3.14.1 Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit)......................................................3-89
3.14.2 Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit)............................................................3-90
3.14.3 Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)................................................3-91
3.14.4 Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit) ..........................3-94
3.14.5 Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit)...............................................................3-94
3.14.6 Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit) ..........................................3-95
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c CONTENTS
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)............................................................................ 4-1
4.1 PM Support Mode................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 General description ..................................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 Operational flow and operational screen..................................................................4-1
4.1.3 Work flow of parts replacement................................................................................4-8
4.2 General Descriptions for PM Procedure..............................................................................4-9
4.3 Operational Items in Overhauling ......................................................................................4-10
4.4 Preventive Maintenance Checklist.....................................................................................4-11
4.5 PM KIT...............................................................................................................................4-28
4.6 Jig List ...............................................................................................................................4-29
4.7 Grease List ........................................................................................................................4-30
4.8 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies .................................................................4-31
4.8.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies ............................................................4-31
4.8.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum...................................................4-31
4.8.4 Handling of drum cleaner brush .............................................................................4-32
4.8.5 Handling of transfer belt .........................................................................................4-32
4.8.6 Checking and cleaning of fuser belt and pressure roller ........................................4-33
4.8.7 Checking and replacing the oil roller and cleaning roller........................................4-33
4.8.8 Checking and cleaning of discharge brush ............................................................4-34
5. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code.................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Paper transport jam (paper exit section) ..................................................................5-1
5.1.2 Paper misfeeding .....................................................................................................5-3
5.1.3 Paper transport jam................................................................................................5-10
5.1.4 Other paper jam .....................................................................................................5-18
5.1.5 Cover open jam......................................................................................................5-20
5.1.6 RADF jam...............................................................................................................5-24
5.1.7 Finisher jam............................................................................................................5-29
5.1.8 Drive system related service call............................................................................5-43
5.1.9 Paper feeding system related service call..............................................................5-44
5.1.10 Scanning system related service call .....................................................................5-50
5.1.11 Fuser unit related service call.................................................................................5-51
5.1.12 Communication related service call........................................................................5-54
5.1.13 RADF related service call.......................................................................................5-55
5.1.14 Circuit related service call ......................................................................................5-55
5.1.15 Laser optical unit related service call .....................................................................5-57
5.1.16 Finisher related service call....................................................................................5-58
5.1.17 Image control related service call...........................................................................5-69
5.1.18 Copy process related service call...........................................................................5-72
5.1.19 Toner density control related service call...............................................................5-76
5.1.20 Other service call....................................................................................................5-80
5.1.21 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function..............................................................5-81
5.2 Troubleshooting for the Image...........................................................................................5-95
5.3 Replacement of PC Boards and HDD .............................................................................5-127
5.3.1 Replacing HDD.....................................................................................................5-127
5.3.2 Replacing SYS board...........................................................................................5-129
5.3.3 Replacing SLG board...........................................................................................5-130
5.3.4 Replacing or clearing NVRAM..............................................................................5-130
5.3.5 Cautions when Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is installed ....................................5-131
5.3.6 HDD information display.......................................................................................5-132
5.4 Other errors .....................................................................................................................5-134
6. FIRMWARE UPDATING ............................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig ................................................................................6-2
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c CONTENTS
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) .............................................................................6-4
6.1.3 K-PWA-DLM-320....................................................................................................6-15
6.2 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device...................................................................6-26
6.2.1 Appendix ................................................................................................................6-41
7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1 Output Channel ...................................................................................................................7-1
7.2 Fuse.....................................................................................................................................7-3
7.3 Configuration of Power Supply Unit.....................................................................................7-4
8. REMOTE SERVICE....................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Auto Supply Order ...............................................................................................................8-1
8.1.1 Outline......................................................................................................................8-1
8.1.2 Setting Item ..............................................................................................................8-2
8.1.3 Setting procedure.....................................................................................................8-4
8.1.4 Order Sheet Format ...............................................................................................8-11
8.2 Service Notification............................................................................................................8-13
8.2.1 Outline....................................................................................................................8-13
8.2.2 Setting ....................................................................................................................8-13
8.2.3 Items to be notified.................................................................................................8-19
9. DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE ......................................................... 9-1
10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS........................................................... 10-1
10.1 AC Wire Harness...............................................................................................................10-1
10.2 DC Wire Harness....................................................................................................... Appendix
10.3 Electric Parts Layout.................................................................................................. Appendix
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c CONTENTS
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1.1 Specifications
1
yCopy process ..........................Indirect electrophotographic process (dry)
yType.........................................Desktop type (Console type: when optional Paper Feed Pedestal
(PFP) or optional Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) is installed.)
yOriginal table ...........................Fixed type (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals)
yAccepted originals...................Original type: Sheets, books and 3-dimensional objects
Note that when the optional Reversing Automatic Document Feeder is
used, carbon, bounded or stapled originals cannot be accepted, and
2
paper type of the original should be 35-157g/m (9.3 lb. Bond -58 lb.
2
Cover) for single-sided copy and 50-157 g/m (13.3 lb. Bond -58 lb.
Cover) for double-sided copy.
Maximum size: A3/LD
•
Copy speed (Copies/min.)
e-STUDIO281c
Paper supply
Bypass feed
LCF
(A4/LT only)
Drawer
PFP
Size not
Paper size
Size specified
specified
A4, LT
28 (11)
28 (11)
16 (5)
28 (11)
28 (11)
B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG
-
-
-
-
21 (5)
18 (5)
16 (5)
21 (5)
18 (5)
16 (5)
16 (5)
16 (5)
16 (5)
21 (5)
18 (5)
16 (5)
A3, LD
e-STUDIO351c
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Paper size
LCF
(A4/LT only)
Drawer
PFP
Size not
Size specified
specified
A4, LT
35 (11)
35 (11)
21 (5)
35 (11)
35 (11)
B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG
-
-
-
-
28 (5)
24 (5)
21 (5)
28 (5)
24 (5)
21 (5)
21 (5)
21 (5)
21 (5)
28 (5)
24 (5)
21 (5)
A3, LD
e-STUDIO451c
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Paper size
LCF
(A4/LT only)
Drawer
PFP
Size not
Size specified
specified
A4, LT
45 (11)
45 (11)
22 (5)
45 (11)
45 (11)
B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG
-
-
-
-
32 (5)
26 (5)
22 (5)
32 (5)
26 (5)
22 (5)
22 (5)
22 (5)
22 (5)
32 (5)
26 (5)
22 (5)
A3, LD
*
*
*
*
"-" means "Not acceptable".
When originals are manually placed for single-sided, continuous copying.
Plain paper is selected for the paper type.
When the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder is used, copying in the speed of 28, 35 and 45
sheets per minute are only possible under the following conditions:
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
•
Original: A4 or LT (single-sided)
Mode: APS and Automatic density not selected, Plain paper mode
Number of copies:
Black mode: 28 sheets or more (e-STUDIO281c), 35 sheets or more (e-STUDIO351c), 45 sheets
or more (e-STUDIO451c)
Color mode: 11 sheets or more
•
Reproduction ratio: 100%
*
The values in ( ) can be realized in the color mode.
Thick paper / OHP
e-STUDIO281c
2
2
Thick1 (81 g/m to 105 g/m , 21 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Paper size
LCF
(A4/LT only)
Drawer
PFP
Size not
Size specified
specified
A4, LT
28 (11)
28 (11)
16 (5)
28 (11)
28 (11)
B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG
-
-
-
-
20 (5)
18 (5)
16 (5)
20 (5)
18 (5)
16 (5)
16 (5)
16 (5)
16 (5)
20 (5)
18 (5)
16 (5)
A3, LD
2
2
Thick2 (106 g/m to 163 g/m , 29 lb. Bond to 90 lb. Index)
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Paper size
LCF
(A4/LT only)
Drawer
PFP
Size not
Size specified
specified
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG
-
-
-
-
20 (6)
14 (3)
11 (3)
10 (2)
10 (2)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10 (2)
10 (2)
A3, LD
10 (2)
2
2
Thick3 (164 g/m to 209 g/m , 91 lb. Index to 110 lb. Index)
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Paper size
LCF
(A4/LT only)
Drawer
PFP
Size not
Size specified
specified
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG
-
-
-
-
20 (2)
14 (2)
11 (2)
10 (2)
10 (2)
10 (2)
10 (2)
10 (2)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A3, LD
OHP
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Paper size
LCF
(A4/LT only)
Drawer
PFP
Size not
Size specified
specified
A4, LT
-
10 (3)
-
-
-
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1 - 2
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e-STUDIO351c
2
2
Thick1 (81 g/m to 105 g/m , 21 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)
Bypass feed
1
Paper supply
Paper size
LCF
(A4/LT only)
Drawer
PFP
Size not
specified
Size specified
A4, LT
30 (11)
30 (11)
16 (5)
30 (11)
30 (11)
B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG
-
-
-
-
23 (5)
19 (5)
16 (5)
23 (5)
19 (5)
16 (5)
16 (5)
16 (5)
16 (5)
23 (5)
19 (5)
16 (5)
A3, LD
2
2
Thick2 (106 g/m to 163 g/m , 29 lb. Bond to 90 lb. Index)
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Paper size
LCF
(A4/LT only)
Drawer
PFP
Size not
Size specified
specified
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG
-
-
-
-
20 (6)
14 (3)
11 (3)
10 (2)
10 (2)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10 (2)
10 (2)
A3, LD
10 (2)
2
2
Thick3 (164 g/m to 209 g/m , 91 lb. Index to 110 lb. Index)
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Paper size
LCF
(A4/LT only)
Drawer
PFP
Size not
Size specified
specified
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG
-
-
-
-
20 (2)
14 (2)
11 (2)
10 (2)
10 (2)
10 (2)
10 (2)
10 (2)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A3, LD
OHP
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Paper size
LCF
(A4/LT only)
Drawer
PFP
Size not
Size specified
specified
A4, LT
-
10 (3)
-
-
-
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e-STUDIO451c
2
2
Thick1 (81 g/m to 105 g/m , 21 lb. Bond to 28 lb. Bond)
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Paper size
LCF
(A4/LT only)
Drawer
PFP
Size not
specified
Size specified
A4, LT
30 (11)
30 (11)
16 (5)
30 (11)
30 (11)
B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG
-
-
-
-
23 (5)
19 (5)
16 (5)
23 (5)
19 (5)
16 (5)
16 (5)
16 (5)
16 (5)
23 (5)
19 (5)
16 (5)
A3, LD
2
2
Thick2 (106 g/m to 163 g/m , 29 lb. Bond to 90 lb. Index)
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Paper size
LCF
(A4/LT only)
Drawer
PFP
Size not
Size specified
specified
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG
-
-
-
-
20 (6)
14 (3)
11 (3)
10 (2)
10 (2)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10 (2)
10 (2)
A3, LD
10 (2)
2
2
Thick3 (164 g/m to 209 g/m , 91 lb. Index to 110 lb. Index)
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Paper size
LCF
(A4/LT only)
Drawer
PFP
Size not
Size specified
specified
A4, LT, B5, A5-R, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, LG
-
-
-
-
20 (2)
14 (2)
11 (2)
10 (2)
10 (2)
10 (2)
10 (2)
10 (2)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
A3, LD
OHP
Bypass feed
Paper supply
Paper size
LCF
(A4/LT only)
Drawer
PFP
Size not
Size specified
specified
A4, LT
-
10 (3)
-
-
-
*
*
*
*
"-" means "Not acceptable".
When originals are manually placed for single side, continuous copying.
The bypass copying speed is measured with the paper size specified.
The values in ( ) can be realized in the color mode.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1 - 4
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*
System copy speed
Sec.
Copy mode
e-STUDIO281c
31.26 (71.97)
e-STUDIO351c
28.15 (71.97)
61.02 (182.19)
95.19 (289.94)
29.65 (81.63)
64.92 (189.38)
101.75 (299.04)
63.54 (138.12)
134.25 (355.91)
205.69 (574.51)
58.76 (128.31)
126.57 (347.08)
194.49 (565.02)
e-STUDIO451c
24.99 (71.97)
1
Single-sided originals
↓
Single-sided copies
1 set
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
74.07 (182.19)
116.64 (289.94)
32.61 (81.63)
50.03 (182.19)
76.63 (289.94)
28.49 (81.63)
Single-sided originals
↓
Double-sided copies
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
74.69 (189.38)
117.45 (299.04)
64.24 (138.12)
150.73 (355.91)
234.59 (574.51)
58.85 (128.31)
143.68 (347.08)
228.58 (565.02)
60.76 (189.38)
92.2 (299.04)
Double-sided originals
↓
Double-sided copies
63.01 (138.12)
126.36 (355.91)
189.67 (574.51)
58.09 (128.31)
110.94 (347.08)
165.19 (565.02)
3 sets
5 sets
1 set
Double-sided originals
↓
Single-sided copies
3 sets
5 sets
*
*
Shows the period of time from when the [START] button is pressed until the message "Ready" is dis-
played. (10 sheets of A4/LT size original are set on the RADF and one of the copy modes above is
selected.)
Setting: when in the Text/Photo mode with Automatic density and APS/AMS set to OFF, or when in
the sort mode with paper fed from the upper drawer.
*
*
The Saddle Stitch Finisher and hole punch unit not installed.
The values in ( ) are the speeds of when in the color mode.
•
Copy paper
Drawer
ADU
PFP
LCF
Bypass copy
Remarks
Size
A3 to A6-R, LD to ST-R, 13"
LG, 8.5"SQ, 305 x 457 mm
(12" x 18")
(Non-standard or userspec-
ified sizes can be set.)
A3 to A5-R,
LD to ST-R,
13" LG,
A4, LT
8.5"SQ
2
64 to 209 g/m , 17 lb. Bond
to 110 lb. Index
2
64 to 105 g/m
17 to 28 lb.
(Continuous feeding)
Weight
2
64 to 209 g/m , 17 lb. Bond
Bond
to 110 lb. Index
(Single paper feeding)
Special
paper
Labels, OHP film
(thickness: 80µm or thicker)
Special paper recom-
mended by Toshiba Tec
-
yFirst copy time.........................Approx. 6.8 sec. or less (black), approx. 16.2 sec. or less (color)
(A4/LT, upper drawer, 100%, original placed manually)
yWarming-up time.....................Approx. 40 sec. (Stand-alone, temperature: 20°C)
yMultiple copying.......................Up to 999 copies; Key in set numbers
yReproduction ratio...................Actual ratio: 100±0.5%
Zooming: 25 to 400% in increments of 1%
(25 to 200% when using RADF)
yResolution/Gradation...............Scanning: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Printing: Equivalent to 2400 dpi x 600 dpi (black)
Equivalent to 600 dpi x 600 dpi (color)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
yEliminated portion....................Leading edges: 3.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.0±2.0 mm (black
copy)
Leading edges: 5.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.0±2.0 mm (color
copy)
Leading / trailing edges: 5.0±2.0 mm, Side edges: 5.0±2.0 mm (black /
color print)
yPaper feeding..........................Standard drawers:
2 drawers (stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64 to 80 g/
2
m (17 to 22 lb. Bond))
PFP:
Option (One drawer or two: stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550
2
sheets; 64 to 80 g/m (17 to 22 lb. Bond))
LCF:
Option (Stack height 137.5 mm x 2: equivalent to 2500 sheets; 64 to 80
2
g/m (17 to 22 lb. Bond))
Bypass feeding:
2
Stack height 11 mm: equivalent to 100 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m (17 to 22
lb. Bond)
yCapacity of originals in the reversing automatic document feeder (Option)
..................................................A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R:
2
100 sheets / 80 g/m (Stack height 16 mm or less)
yAutomatic duplexing unit .........Stackless, Switchback type
yToner supply............................Automatic toner density detection/supply
Toner cartridge replacing method
yDensity control.........................Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11
steps
yWeight .....................................Approximately 113 kg (249 lb.)
yPower requirements ................AC 110 V / 13.2 A, 115 V or 127 V / 12 A
220-240 V or 240 V / 8 A (50/60 Hz)
*
The acceptable value of each voltage is ±10%.
yPower consumption.................1.5 kW or less (100 V series), 17 kW or less (200 V series)
The electric power is supplied to the RADF, Finisher, PFP and LCF through the equipment.
*
yTotal counter............................Electronical counter
yDimensions of the equipment...................... See the figure below (W 660 x D 758 x H 739 (mm))
*
When the tilt angle of the control panel is 45 degrees.
45°
Fig.1-1
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1 - 6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2 Accessories
1
Unpacking/Setup instruction
Operator’s manual
Operator's manual pocket
Power cable
1 set
4 pcs. (except for MJD and ASU)
1 pc.
1 pc.
Warranty sheet
1 pc. (for NAD)
1 set (for NAD, MJD and CND)
1 pc. (for MJD)
1 pc.
Setup report
PM sticker
Drum (installed inside of the equipment)
Control panel stopper
Color developer holder
Rubber plug
1 pc.
6 pc.
4 pcs.
Blind seal (small / large)
CD-ROM
3 pcs. /1 pc.
3 pcs.
Developer material (Y, M, C, K)
Screw M4 x 8
1 pc. each (for CND)
1 pc.
Guide
1 pc.
Approval sheet
1 set (for CND)
1 pc. each (for CND)
1 pc. (for CND)
Toner cartridge (Y, M, C, K)
Platen cover
*
Machine version
NAD:
North America
Europe
MJD:
AUD:
Australia
ASD:
TWD:
SAD
ASU
CND
Asia, Argentine
Taiwan
Saudi Arabia
Saudi Arabia, Asia
China
KRD
Korea
JPD:
Japan
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3 Options
Platen cover
KA-3511PC / -C
MR-3018
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)
Drawer module
MY-1021 / -C
Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)
Hanging Finisher
KD-1011 / -C
KD-1012 A4/LT / A4-C
MJ-1022 / -C
Finisher
MJ-1023 / -C
Saddle Stitch Finisher
Hole punch unit
MJ-1024 / -C
MJ-6004 N/E/F/S / E-C
Staple cartridge
STAPLE-1600 (for MJ-1022)
STAPLE-2000 (for MJ-1023/1024)
STAPLE-600
(for saddle stitcher of MJ-1024)
Bridge kit
KN-3511 / -C
KK-3511 / -C
MF-3511U/E
GD-1200 NA/AU/AS/EU/C/TW
GD-1160 NA/EU-N/C/TW
GC-1181
Work table
Damp heater kit
FAX unit
2nd line for fax unit
128 MB Expansion memory
512 MB Expansion memory
Wireless LAN module
PCI slot
GC-1230
GN-1040/1041
GO-1060
Scrambler board
Bluetooth module
Antenna
GP-1040
GN-2010
GN-3010
Parallel interface kit
Data overwrite kit
Desk
GF-1140
GP-1060
MH-1700
Harness kit for coin controller
GQ-1020
Notes:
1. The bridge kit (KN-3511) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022, MJ-1023 or MJ-
1024).
2. The finisher (MJ-1023 or MJ-1024) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-
6004N/E/F/S).
3. The PCI slot (GO-1060) is necessary for the installation of the scrambler board (GP-1040)
and the parallel interface kit (GF-1140).
4. The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1040/1041)
and the bluetooth module (GN-2010).
5. Up to 1 antenna (GN-3010) can be connected to the wireless LAN module (GN-1040/1041).
6. When the wireless LAN module (GN-1040/1041) and the bluetooth module (GN-2010) are
installed together, only 1 antenna (GN-3010) can be connected to each.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1 - 8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 Supplies
1
Drum
OD-3511N
Toner bag
PS-TB-281C/ C-E/ C-C
D-3511-K
Developer (K)
Developer (Y)
Developer (M)
Developer (C)
Toner cartridge (K)
D-281C-Y
D-281C-M
D-281C-C
PS-ZT281C-K(4)
PS-ZT281C-EK(1)
PS-ZT3511DK
PS-ZT3511TK
PS-ZT3511CK
PS-ZT281C-Y(4)
PS-ZT281C-EY(1)
PS-ZT3511DY
PS-ZT3511TY
PS-ZT3511CY
PS-ZT281C-M(4)
PS-ZT281C-EM(1)
PS-ZT3511DM
PS-ZT3511TM
PS-ZT3511CM
PS-ZT281C-C(4)
PS-ZT281C-EC(1)
PS-ZT3511DC
PS-ZT3511TC
PS-ZT3511CC
NAD
MJD
Others
TWD
CND
NAD
Toner cartridge (Y)
Toner cartridge (M)
Toner cartridge (C)
MJD
Others
TWD
CND
NAD
MJD
Others
TWD
CND
NAD
MJD
Others
TWD
CND
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2.1 Error Code List
The following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen when the “CLEAR PAPER” or “CALL
SERVICE” symbol is blinking.
2
2.1.1
Jam
Error code
Classification
Paper exit jam
Contents
Troubleshooting
E010
Jam not reaching the exit sensor : The paper which
has passed through the fuser unit does not reach
the exit sensor.
E020
Paper exit jam
Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the
paper does not pass the exit sensor after its leading
edge has reached this sensor.
E030
E061
Other paper jam
Power-ON jam: The paper is remaining on the
paper transport path when power is turned ON.
Incorrect paper size setting for upper drawer: The
size of paper in the 1st drawer differs from size set-
ting of the equipment.
E062
E063
E064
E065
E090
Incorrect paper size setting for lower drawer: The
size of paper in the 2nd drawer differs from size set-
ting of the equipment.
Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer:
The size of paper in the 3rd drawer differs from size
setting of the equipment.
Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer:
The size of paper in the 4th drawer differs from size
setting of the equipment.
Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray: The
size of paper in the bypass tray differs from size
setting of the equipment.
Image data delay jam: Image data to be printed
cannot be prepared.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error code
Classification
Contents
Troubleshooting
E110
Paper misfeeding
ADU misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registra-
tion sensor): The paper which has passed through
ADU does not reach the registration sensor during
duplex printing.
E120
E130
Bypass misfeeding (Paper not reaching the regis-
tration sensor): The paper fed from the bypass tray
does not reach the registration sensor.
Upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the
upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the
upper drawer does not reach the upper drawer feed
sensor.
E140
E150
E160
Lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the
lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the
lower drawer does not reach the lower drawer feed
sensor.
PFP upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching
the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed
from the PFP upper drawer does not reach the PFP
upper drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching
the PFP lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed
from the PFP lower drawer does not reach the PFP
lower drawer feed sensor.
E190
E200
LCF misfeeding (Paper not reaching the LCF feed
sensor): The paper fed from the LCF does not
reach the LCF feed sensor.
Paper transport jam
Upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the
registration sensor): The paper does not reach the
registration sensor after it has passed the upper
drawer feed sensor.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 2
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error code
Classification
Contents
Troubleshooting
E210
Paper transport jam
Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the
registration sensor): The paper does not reach the
registration sensor after it has passed the upper
drawer feed sensor.
E220
E300
E310
E320
E330
E340
E350
E360
Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the
upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not
reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the lower drawer feed sensor.
2
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reach-
ing the registration sensor): The paper does not
reach the registration sensor after it has passed the
upper drawer feed sensor.
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reach-
ing the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the lower drawer feed sensor.
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reach-
ing the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reach-
ing the registration sensor): The paper does not
reach the registration sensor after it has passed the
upper drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reach-
ing the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the lower drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reach-
ing the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does
not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has
passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reach-
ing the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper
does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor
after it has passed the PFP lower drawer feed sen-
sor.
E400
E410
E420
E430
E440
E450
E480
E510
Cover open jam
Cover open jam
Jam access cover open jam: The jam access cover
has opened during printing.
Front cover open jam: The front cover has opened
during printing.
PFP side cover open jam: The PFP side cover has
opened during printing.
ADU open jam: The ADU has opened during print-
ing.
Side cover open jam: The side cover has opened
during printing.
LCF side cover open jam: The LCF side cover has
opened during printing.
Bridge unit open jam: The bridge unit has opened
during printing.
Paper transport jam
(ADU section)
Jam not reaching the ADU entrance sensor: The
paper does not reach the ADU entrance sensor
after it is switchbacked in the exit section.
E520
Stop jam in the ADU: The paper does not reach the
ADU exit sensor after it has passed the ADU
entrance sensor.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error code
Classification
Contents
Troubleshooting
E550
Other paper jam
Paper remaining jam on the transport path: The
paper is remaining on the transport path when print-
ing is finished (caused by a multiple paper feeding).
E712
E713
RADF jam
Jam not reaching the original registration sensor:
The original fed from the original feeding tray does
not reach the original registration sensor.
Cover open jam in the read ready status: Jam
caused by opening of the RADF jam access cover
or front cover while the RADF is waiting for the
scanning start signal from the equipment.
E714
E721
Feed signal reception jam: The feed signal is
received even no original exists on the original
feeding tray.
Jam not reaching the read sensor: The original
does not reach the read sensor after it has passed
the registration sensor (when scanning obverse
side) or the reverse sensor (when scanning reverse
side).
E722
E724
Jam not reaching the original exit/reverse sensor
(during scanning): The original which passed the
read sensor does not reach the original exit/reverse
sensor when it is transported from the scanning
section to exit section.
Stop jam at the original registration sensor: The
trailing edge of the original does not pass the origi-
nal registration sensor after its leading edge has
reached this sensor.
E725
E731
Stop jam at the read sensor: The trailing edge of the
original does not pass the read sensor after its lead-
ing edge has reached this sensor.
Stop jam at the original exit/reverse sensor: The
trailing edge of the original does not pass the origi-
nal exit/reverse sensor after its leading edge has
reached this sensor.
E860
E870
E910
RADF jam access cover open: The RADF jam
access cover has opened during RADF operation.
RADF open jam: RADF has opened during RADF
operation.
Finisher jam
(Bridge unit)
Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The
paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sen-
sor 1 after it has passed the exit sensor.
E920
E930
E940
E9F0
Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The
trailing edge of the paper does not pass the bridge
unit transport sensor 1 after its leading edge has
reached the sensor.
Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The trail-
ing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge unit
transport sensor 2 after its leading edge has
reached the bridge unit transport sensor 1.
Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The
trailing edge of the paper does not pass the bridge
unit transport sensor 2 after its leading edge has
reached the bridge unit transport sensor 2.
Finisher jam
(Punch unit)
Punching jam: Punching is not performed properly.
[MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 4
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/07
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error code
Classification
Finisher jam
(Finisher section)
Contents
Troubleshooting
EA10
Paper transport delay jam: The paper which has
passed the bridge
unit does not reach the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/
1023/1024]
EA20
Paper transport stop jam:
(1) The paper does not pass through the inlet sen-
sor.
[MJ-1022/1023/1024]
2
(2) The paper has passed through the inlet sensor
but does not reach or pass the feed path sensor
or processing tray sensor.
[MJ-1023/1024]
EA30
EA40
Power-ON jam:
(1) Paper exists at the inlet sensor when power is
turned ON.
[MJ-1022/1023/1024]
(2) Paper exists at the feed path sensor or pro-
cessing tray sensor when power is turned ON.
[MJ-1023/1024]
Finisher jam
(Finisher section)
Door open jam:
1) The finisher has been released from the equip-
ment during printing. [MJ-1022]
2) The upper/front cover of the finisher section or
the upper/ front door of the puncher section has
opened during printing. [MJ-1023/1024]
EA50
EA60
Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly.
[MJ-1022/1023/1024]
Early arrival jam: The inlet sensor detects the paper
earlier than a specified timing. [MJ-1022/1023/
1024]
EA70
Stack delivery jam: It cannot deliver the stack of
paper on the intermediary process tray to the stack
tray. [MJ-1022]
EA80
EA90
EAA0
Finisher jam
(Saddle stitcher sec-
tion)
Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly.
[MJ-1024]
Door open jam: The delivery cover or inlet cover
has opened dur-ing printing [MJ-1024].
Power-ON jam: Paper exists at No.1 paper sensor,
No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, vertical
path paper sensor or delivery sensor when power is
turned ON. [MJ-1024]
EAB0
Transport stop jam: The paper which passed
through the inlet sensor does not reach or pass
No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper
sensor or delivery sensor. [MJ-1024]
EAC0
EAD0
Transport delay jam: The paper which has reached
the inlet sensor does not pass through the inlet sen-
sor. [MJ-1024]
Other paper jam
Finisher jam
Print end command time-out jam: The printing has
not finished normally because of the communica-
tion error between the SYS board and LGC board
at the end of printing.
EAE0
Receiving time time-out jam: The printing has been
interrupted because of the communication error
between the equipment and finisher when the
paper is transported from the equipment to the fin-
isher.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error code
Classification
Finisher jam
(Finisher section)
Contents
Troubleshooting
EAF0
Stack return jam: It cannot load the paper which
passed through the delivery roller on the intermedi-
ary process tray. [MJ-1022]
EB30
Finisher jam
Ready time time-out jam: The equipment judges
that the paper transport to the finisher is disabled
because of the communication error between the
equipment and finisher at the start of printing.
EB50
EB60
Paper transport jam
Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple
feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding
of upcoming paper.
Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple
feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding
of upcoming paper (redetection after no jam is
detected at [EB50]).
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.1.2
Service call
Error code
Classification
Contents
Troubleshooting
C010
Drive system related
service call
Main motor abnormality: The main motor is not
rotating normally.
C020
C030
C040
Developer motor abnormality: The developer motor
is not rotating normally.
2
Transport motor abnormality: The transport motor is
not rotating normally.
Paper feeding system PFP motor abnormality: The PFP motor is not rotat-
related service call
ing normally. (the case that paper can be fed from
any drawer except the PFP)
C130
Upper drawer tray abnormality: The upper drawer
tray-up motor is not rotating or the upper drawer
tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper
can be fed from any drawer except the upper
drawer)
C140
C150
Lower drawer tray abnormality: The lower drawer
tray-up motor is not rotating or the lower drawer tray
is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be
fed from any drawer except the lower drawer)
PFP upper drawer tray abnormality: The PFP upper
drawer tray-up motor is not rotating or the PFP
upper drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case
that paper can be fed from any drawer except the
PFP upper drawer)
C160
PFP lower drawer tray abnormality: The PFP lower
drawer tray-up motor is not rotating or the PFP
lower drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case
that paper can be fed from any drawer except the
PFP lower drawer)
C180
C1A0
LCF tray-up motor abnormality: The LCF tray-up
motor is not rotating or the LCF tray is not moving
normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any
drawer except the LCF)
LCF end fence motor abnormality: The LCF end
fence motor is not rotating or the LCF end fence is
not moving normally. (the case that paper can be
fed from any drawer except the LCF)
C1B0
C260
C270
C280
LCF transport motor abnormality: The LCF trans-
port motor is not rotating normally. (the case that
paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF)
Scanning system
related service call
Peak detection error: Lighting of the exposure lamp
(white reference) is not detected when power is
turned ON.
Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF
within a specified period of time: The carriage does
not shift from its home position in a specified time.
Carriage home position sensor not turning ON
within a specified period of time: The carriage does
not reach to its home position in a specified period
of time.
C360
Copy process related
service call
Charger cleaner motor abnormality: Charger
cleaner motor is not rotating or wire cleaner is not
moving normally.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error code
Classification
Contents
Troubleshooting
C411
Fuser unit related ser- Thermistor or heater abnormality at power-ON:
vice call
Abnormality of the thermistor is detected when
power is turned ON or the temperature of the fuser
roller does not rise in a specified period of time after
power is turned ON.
C412
Thermistor/heater abnormality at power-ON: Ther-
mistor abnormality is detected at power-ON or the
fuser roller temperature does not rise within a spec-
ified period of time after power-ON.
C443
C445
C446
C447
C449
C471
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment (not
reaching to intermediate temperature)
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment
(pre-running end temperature abnormality)
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment
(pre-running end temperature abnormality)
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment
(temperature abnormality at ready status)
Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment
(overheating)
IH power voltage abnormality or IH initial abnormal-
ity
(IH board initial abnormality)
C472
C475
C480
C490
IH power voltage abnormality (power supply abnor-
mality)
IH power voltage abnormality (power supply abnor-
mality when door is opened)
Overheating of IGBT: The temperature of the IGBT
rises abnormally.
IH control circuit or IH coil abnormality: Abnormality
is detected in IH control circuit or IH coil is broken/
shorted.
C4B0
C550
Fuser unit counter abnormality
Optional communica-
RADF I/F error: Communication error has occurred
tion related service call between the RADF and the scanner.
C570
C580
C900
Communication error between Engine-CPU and
IPC board
Communication error between IPC board and fin-
isher
Circuit related service Connection error between SYS board and LGC
call
board
C940
C950
C960
Engine-CPU abnormality
LGC board memory abnormality
Connection error between LGC board and DRV
board, ID abnormality
C970
C9E0
CA10
CA20
Process related ser-
vice call
High-voltage transformer abnormality: Leakage of
the main charger is detected.
Circuit related service Connection error between SLG board and SYS
call
board, ID abnormality
Laser optical unit
related service call
Polygonal motor abnormality: The polygonal motor
is not rotating normally.
H-Sync detection error: H-Sync signal detection PC
board cannot detect laser beams.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error code
Classification
Contents
Troubleshooting
CB20
Finisher related ser-
vice call
Delivery motor abnormality: Delivery motor or deliv-
ery roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1022]
CB30
CB40
CB50
CB60
CB80
Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor abnormality: Tray 1/Tray 2
shift motor is not rotating or delivery tray is not mov-
ing normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
Rear aligning plate motor abnormality: Rear align-
ing plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not
moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
2
Staple motor abnormality: Staple motor is not rotat-
ing or stapler is not moving normally. [MJ-1022/
1023/1024]
Stapler shift motor abnormality: Stapler shift motor
is not rotating or staple unit is not moving normally.
[MJ-1023/1024]
Backup RAM data abnormality:
1) Abnormality of checksum value on finisher con-
troller PC board is detected when the power is
turned ON. [MJ-1023/1024]
2) Abnormality of checksum value on punch con-
troller PC board is detected when the power is
turned ON. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is
installed)]
CB90
CBA0
CBB0
CBC0
Paper pushing plate motor abnormality: Paper
pushing plate motor is not rotating or paper pushing
plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024]
Stitch motor (front) abnormality: Stitch motor (front)
is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally.
[MJ-1024]
Stitch motor (rear) abnormality: Stitch motor (rear)
is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally.
[MJ-1024]
Alignment motor abnormality: Alignment motor is
not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally.
[MJ-1024]
CBD0
CBE0
Guide motor abnormality: Guide motor is not rotat-
ing or guide is not moving normally. [MJ-1024]
Paper folding motor abnormality: Paper folding
motor or paper folding roller is not rotating normally.
[MJ-1024]
CBF0
CC00
Paper positioning plate motor abnormality: Paper
positioning plate motor is not rotating or paper posi-
tioning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024]
Sensor connector abnormality: Connector of guide
home position sensor, paper pushing plate home
position sensor or paper pushing plate top position
sensor is disconnected. [MJ-1024]
CC10
Micro switch abnormality: With all covers closed,
inlet door switch, delivery door switch or front cover
switch is open. [MJ-1024]
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error code
Classification
Contents
Troubleshooting
CC20
Finisher related ser-
vice call
Communication error between finisher and saddle
stitcher: Communication error between finisher con-
troller PC board and saddle stitcher controller board
[MJ-1023/1024]
CC30
CC40
CC50
Stack processing motor abnormality: The stack pro-
cessing motor is not rotating or the stack delivery
belt is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Swing motor abnormality: Swing motor is not rotat-
ing or swing unit is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/
1024]
Horizontal registration motor abnormality: Horizon-
tal registration motor is not rotating or puncher is
not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-
6004 is installed)]
CC60
CC80
Punch motor abnormality: Punch motor is not rotat-
ing or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/
1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
Front alignment motor abnormality: Front alignment
motor is not rotating or front aligning plate is not
moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Front aligning plate motor abnormality: Front align-
ing plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not
moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
CC90
CCA0
CCB0
CCD0
CCE0
Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality: The upper
stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the upper stack
tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality: The lower
stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the lower stack
tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Rear jogging motor abnormality: The rear jogging
motor is not rotating or the rear jogging plate is not
moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Stack ejection motor abnormality: Stack ejection
motor or stack ejection roller is not rotating nor-
mally. [MJ-1023/1024]
Paper trailing edge assist motor abnormality: Paper
trailing edge assist motor is not rotating or paper
trailing edge assist is not moving normally. [MJ-
1023/1024]
CCF0
CE00
Gear changing motor abnormality: Gear changing
motor is not rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
Communication error between finisher and punch
unit: Communication error between finisher control-
ler PC board and punch controller PC board [MJ-
1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
CE10
CE20
Image control related
service call
Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level): The
output value of this sensor is out of a specified
range when sensor light source is OFF.
Image quality sensor abnormality (no pattern level):
The output value of this sensor is out of a specified
range when the image quality control test pattern is
not formed.
CE40
CE50
CE90
Image quality control test pattern abnormality: The
test pattern is not formed normally.
Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality: The out-
put value of this sensor is out of a specified range.
Drum thermistor abnormality: The output value of
the drum thermistor is out of a specified range.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 10
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error code
Classification
Contents
Troubleshooting
CEA0
Copy process related
service call
Revolver home position detection abnormality: It
cannot detect that the revolver is at its home posi-
tion.
CEB0
CEC0
CEE0
CEE1
Black developer unit lifting movement abnormality:
The black developer unit does not move up or down
normally (lifting cam does not operate normally).
Copy process related
service call
2nd transfer roller position detection abnormality:
The 2nd transfer roller does not contact/release
normally.
2
Transfer belt position detection abnormality (normal
speed): The home position of the transfer belt can-
not be detected.
Transfer belt position detection abnormality (when
decelerating): Reference position of the transfer
belt cannot be detected.
CEF0
CF20
Revolver motor abnormality: Revolver motor is not
rotating or revolver is not moving normally.
Toner density control
related service call
Toner density detection voltage abnormality: The
output value of the color auto-toner sensor in print-
ing is out of a specified range.
CF30
CF40
Reference plate detection voltage abnormality: The
output value of the color auto-toner sensor against
the reference plate is out of a specified range at the
light amount correction during an auto-toner adjust-
ment or when a print job has finished.
Light amount correction voltage abnormality: The
light amount correction is not finished normally dur-
ing an auto-toner adjustment or when a print job
has finished, or the output value of the sensor is out
of a specified range when the light amount correc-
tion has finished.
CF50
F070
Color auto-toner sensor abnormality: The connec-
tion of the color auto-toner sensor cannot be
detected at the initialization, or the output value of
color auto-toner sensor when the revolver starts
rotating for initialization is out of a specified range.
Communication
related service call
Communication error between System-CPU and
Engine-CPU
F090
F091
F092
F100
Circuit related service SRAM abnormality on the SYS board
call
NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board
SRAM and NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board
Other service call
HDD format error: HDD cannot be initialized nor-
mally.
F101
HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be
detected.
F102
F103
HDD start error: HDD cannot become ‘Ready’ state.
HDD transfer time-out: Reading/writing cannot be
performed in the specified period of time.
F104
HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the data
of HDD.
F105
F106
F107
F108
HDD other error
Point and Print partition damage
/BOX partition damage
/SHA partition damage
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error code
Classification
Contents
Troubleshooting
F110
Communication
related service call
Communication error between System-CPU and
Scanner-CPU
F111
F120
Scanner response abnormality
Other service call
Database abnormality: Database is not operating
normally.
F130
F200
F350
Invalid MAC address
Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is taken off
Circuit related service SLG board abnormality
call
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 12
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.1.3
Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function
1) Internet FAX related error
Error code
Classification
Troubleshooting
-
1C10
1C11
1C12
1C13
1C14
1C15
1C20
1C21
1C22
1C30
1C31
1C32
1C33
1C40
1C60
1C61
1C62
1C63
1C64
1C65
1C66
1C67
1C68
1C69
1C6A
1C6B
1C6C
1C6D
1C70
1C71
1C72
1C80
1C81
1C82
1CC0
1CC1
System access abnormality
Insufficient memory
Message reception error
Message transmission error
Invalid parameter
2
Exceeding file capacity
System management module access abnormality
Job control module access abnormality
Job control module access abnormality
Directory creation failure
File creation failure
File deletion failure
File access failure
Image conversion abnormality
HDD full failure during processing
Address Book reading failure
Memory acquiring failure
Terminal IP address unset
Terminal mail address unset
SMTP address unset
Server time time-out error
NIC time time-out error
NIC access error
SMTP server connection error
HOST NAME error
Terminal mail address error
Destination mail address error
System error
SMTP client OFF
SMTP authentication error
POP before SMTP error
Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Onramp Gateway transmission failure
Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received
Job canceling
Power failure
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2) RFC related error
Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
2500
Syntax error, command unrecog-
nized
HOST NAME error(RFC: 500)
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 500)
Terminal mail address error
(RFC: 500)
2501
Syntax error in parameters or argu-
ments
HOST NAME error(RFC: 501)
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 501)
Terminal mail address error
(RFC: 501)
2503
2504
2550
2551
2552
Bad sequence of commands
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 503)
Command parameter not imple-
mented
HOST NAME error
(RFC: 504)
Mailbox unavailable
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 550)
User not local
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 551)
Insufficient system storage
Terminal/Destination mail address
error
(RFC: 552)
2553
Mailbox name not allowed
Destination mail address error
(RFC: 553)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 14
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3) Electronic Filing related error
Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
2B10
There was no applicable job.
No applicable job error in job control
module
2B11
2B20
2B30
Job status failed.
JOB status abnormality
File library function error
Failed to access file.
Insufficient disk space.
Insufficient disk space in /BOX parti-
tion
2
2B31
2B32
Failed to access Electronic Filing.
Status of specified Electronic Filing
or folder is undefined or being cre-
ated/deleted
Failed to print Electronic Filing docu- Electronic Filing printing failure:
ment.
Specified document can not be
printed because of client’s access
(being edited, etc.).
2B50
2B51
2B71
Failed to process image.
Image library error
List library error
Failed to process print image.
-
Document(s) expire(s) in a few days Documents expiring in a few days
exist
2B80
Hard Disk space for Electronic Filing Hard disk space in /BOX partition is
-
nearly full.
nearly full (90%).
2B90
2BA0
2BB0
2BB1
2BC0
2BC1
Insufficient Memory.
Invalid Box password specified.
Job canceled
Insufficient memory capacity
Invalid Box password
Job canceling
-
Power failure occurred
System fatal error.
Power failure
Fatal failure occurred
Failed to acquire resource.
System management module
resource acquiring failure
2BD0
Power failure occurred during e-Fil-
ing restoring.
Power failure occurred during restor-
ing of Electronic Filing
2BE0
2BF0
Failed to get machine parameter.
Machine parameter reading failure
Maximum number of page range is
reached.
Exceeding maximum number of
pages
2BF1
2BF2
Maximum number of document
range is reached.
Exceeding maximum number of doc-
uments
Maximum number of folder range is
reached.
Exceeding maximum number of fold-
ers
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4) E-mail related error
Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Illegal Job status
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
2C10
2C11
2C12
2C13
2C14
2C15
System access abnormality
Insufficient memory
Not enough memory
Illegal Job status
Message reception error
Message transmission error
Invalid parameter
Illegal Job status
Invalid parameter specified
Message size exceeded limit or max- Exceeding file capacity
imum size
2C20
2C21
2C22
Illegal Job status
Illegal Job status
Illegal Job status
System management module access
abnormality
Job control module access abnor-
mality
Job control module access abnor-
mality
2C30
2C31
2C32
2C33
2C40
2C60
Failed to create directory
Failed to create file
Directory creation failure
File creation failure
Failed to delete file
File deletion failure
Failed to create file
File access failure
Failed to convert image file format
Image conversion abnormality
HDD full failure during processing
Failed to process your Job. Insuffi-
cient disk space.
2C61
2C62
2C63
2C64
2C65
2C66
2C67
2C68
2C69
2C6A
2C6B
Failed to read AddressBook
Not enough memory
Address Book reading failure
Memory acquiring failure
Terminal IP address unset
Terminal mail address unset
SMTP address unset
Invalid Domain Address
Invalid Domain Address
Failed to connect to SMTP server
Failed to connect to SMTP server
Failed to send E-Mail message
Failed to send E-Mail message
Failed to connect to SMTP server
Failed to send E-Mail message
Server time time-out error
NIC time time-out error
NIC access error
SMTP server connection error
HOST NAME error (No RFC error)
Terminal mail address error
Invalid address specified in From:
field
2C6C
Invalid address specified in To: field
Destination mail address error (No
RFC error)
2C6D
2C70
2C71
2C72
NIC system error
System error
SMTP service is not available
Failed SMTP Authentication
SMTP client OFF
SMTP authentication error
POP before SMTP error
POP Before SMTP Authentication
Failed
2C80
Failed to process received E-mail job E-mail transmission failure when pro-
cessing E-mail job received
2C81
2CC0
2CC1
Failed to process received Fax job
Job canceled
Process failure of FAX job received
Job canceling
-
Power failure occurred
Power failure
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 16
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5) File sharing related error
Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Illegal Job status
Not enough memory
Illegal Job status
Illegal Job status
Invalid parameter specified
There are too many documents in the Exceeding document number
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
2D10
2D11
2D12
2D13
2D14
2D15
System access abnormality
Insufficient memory
Message reception error
Message transmission error
Invalid parameter
2
folder. Failed in creating new docu-
ment.
2D20
2D21
2D22
Illegal Job status
Illegal Job status
Illegal Job status
System management module access
abnormality
Job control module access abnor-
mality
Job control module access abnor-
mality
2D30
2D31
2D32
2D33
2D40
2D60
2D61
2D62
Failed to create directory
Failed to create file
Failed to delete file
Failed to create file
Failed to convert image file format
Failed to copy file
Invalid parameter specified
Failed to connect to network destina- File server connection error
tion. Check destination path
Directory creation failure
File creation failure
File deletion failure
File access failure
Image conversion abnormality
File library access abnormality
Invalid parameter
2D63
2D64
2D65
Specified network path is invalid.
Check destination path
Logon to file server failed. Check
username and password
There are too many documents in the Exceeding documents in folder:
folder. Failed in creating new docu-
ment.
Invalid network path
Login failure
Creating new document is failed.
2D66
Failed to process your Job. Insuffi-
cient disk space.
HDD full failure during processing
2D67
2D68
2DA0
FTP service is not available
File Sharing service is not available
Expired scan documents deleted
from share folder.
FTP service not available
File sharing service not available
Periodical deletion of scanned docu-
ments completed properly.
-
2DA1
2DA2
2DA3
2DA4
2DA5
Expired Sent Fax documents deleted Periodical deletion of transmitted
-
-
-
-
-
from shared folder.
FAX documents completed properly.
Expired Received Fax documents
deleted from shared folder.
Periodical deletion of received FAX
documents completed properly.
Scanned documents in shared folder Manual deletion of scanned docu-
deleted upon user’s request. ments completed properly.
Sent Fax Documents in shared folder Manual deletion of transmitted FAX
deleted upon user’s request.
documents completed properly.
Received Fax Documents in shared
folder deleted upon user’s request.
Manual deletion of received FAX
documents completed properly.
2DA6
2DA7
2DC0
2DC1
Failed to delete file.
Failed to acquire resource.
Job canceled
File deletion failure
Resource acquiring failure
Job canceling
-
Power failure occurred
Power failure
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6) E-mail reception related error
Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
3A10
MIME Error has been detected in the E-mail MIME error
received mail.
3A11
3A12
MIME Error has been detected in the
received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
MIME Error has been detected in the
received mail. This mail could not be
transferred to the administrator.
3A20
3A21
Analyze Error has been detected in
the received mail.
Analyze Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
E-mail analysis error
3A22
Analyze Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail could not
be transferred to the administrator.
3A30
3A40
3A50
3A51
Whole partial mails were not reached Partial mail time-out error
by timeout.
Partial Mail Error has been detected Partial mail related error
in the received mail.
HDD Full Error has been occurred in Insufficient HDD capacity error
this mail.
HDD Full Error has been occurred in
this mail. This mail has been trans-
ferred to the administrator.
3A52
HDD Full Error has been occurred in
this mail. This mail could not be
transferred to the administrator.
3A60
3A61
HDD Full Warning has been occurred Warning of insufficient HDD capacity
in this mail.
HDD Full Warning has been occurred
in this mail. This mail could not be
transferred to the administrator.
3A62
3A70
HDD Full Warning has been occurred
in this mail. This mail could not be
transferred to the administrator.
Receiving partial mail was aborted
since the partial mail setting has
been changed to Disable.
Partial mail was received during the
partial mail setting is disabled.
Partial mail was received during the
partial mail setting is disabled. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Warning of partial mail interruption
Partial mail reception setting OFF
3A80
3A81
3A82
Partial mail was received during the
partial mail setting is disabled. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
3B10
3B11
Format Error has been detected in
the received mail.
Format Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
E-mail format error
3B12
Format Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail could not
be transferred to the administrator.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 18
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Content-Type Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Error code
Contents
Content-Type error
Troubleshooting
3B20
3B21
3B22
Content-Type Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Content-Type Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
2
3B30
3B31
Charset Error has been detected in
the received mail.
Charset Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
Charset error
3B32
Charset Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail could not
be transferred to the administrator.
3B40
3B41
Decode Error has been detected in
the received mail.
Decode Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail has been
transferred to the administrator.
E-mail decode error
3B42
Decode Error has been detected in
the received mail. This mail could not
be transferred to the administrator.
3C10
3C11
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected TIFF analysis error
in the received mail.
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected
in the received mail. This mail has
been transferred to the administrator.
3C12
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected
in the received mail. This mail could
not be transferred to the administra-
tor.
3C13
3C20
3C21
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected
in the received mail.
Tiff Compression Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Tiff Compression Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
E-mail format error
3C22
Tiff Compression Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
3C30
3C31
Tiff Resolution Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Tiff Resolution Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Content-Type error
3C32
Tiff Resolution Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message displayed in
the TopAccess screen
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
3C40
Tiff Paper Size Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Charset error
3C41
3C42
Tiff Paper Size Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
Tiff Paper Size Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
3C50
3C51
Offramp Destination Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Offramp Destination Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
E-mail decode error
3C52
Offramp Destination Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
3C60
3C61
Offramp Security Error has been
detected in the received mail.
Offramp Security Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail has been transferred to the
administrator.
TIFF analysis error
3C62
Offramp Security Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail could not be transferred to the
administrator.
3C70
3D10
Power Failure has been occurred in
Email receiving.
SMTP Destination Error has been
detected in the received mail. This
mail was deleted.
Power failure error
Destination address error
3D20
Offramp Destination limitation Error
has been detected in the received
mail.
Offramp destination limitation error
3D30
3E10
3E20
3E30
3E40
Fax Board Error has been occurred
in the received mail.
POP3 Connection Error has been
occurred in the received mail.
POP3 Connection Timeout Error has POP3 server connection time-out
been occurred in the received mail. error
POP3 Login Error has been occurred POP3 login error
in the received mail.
FAX board error
POP3 server connection error
POP3 Login Error occurred in the
received mail.
POP3 login method error
3F00
3F10
3F20
3F30
3F40
File I/O Error has been occurred in
this mail. The mail could not be
received until File I/O is recovered.
File I/O error
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 20
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.1.4
Printer function error
Following codes are displayed at the end of the user name on the print job log screen.
Error code
Contents
Troubleshooting
402F
Page memory size error - 1200 dpi network print is performed by the equip-
ment with 128 MB (standard) memory.
4031
4032
4033
HDD full during print - Large quantity image data by private print or invalid
network print are saved in HDD.
Private-print-only error: Jobs other than Private print jobs cannot be per-
formed.
Printing data storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the
HDD temporarily (Proof print, Private print, Scheduled print, etc.) cannot be
performed.
2
4034
4035
4036
A221
A222
A290
e-Filing storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the HDD
(print and e-Filing, print to e-Filing, etc.) cannot be performed.
Local file storing limitation error: Network FAX or Internet FAX cannot be sent
when "Local" is selected for the destination of the file to save.
User authentication error: The user who intended to print a document is not
registered as a user.
Print job cancellation - Print job (copy, list print, network print) is deleted from
the print job screen.
Print job power failure - The power of the equipment is turned OFF during
print job (copy, list print, network print).
Limit over error (Black): The numbers of output pages have exceeded those
specified with both of the department code and the user code at the same
time.
A291
A292
A2A0
Limit over error (Black): The number of output pages has exceeded the one
specified with the user code.
Limit over error (Black): The number of output pages has exceeded the one
specified with the department code.
Limit over error (Color): The numbers of output pages have exceeded those
specified with both of the department code and the user code at the same
time.
A2A1
A2A2
Limit over error (Color): The number of output pages has exceeded the one
specified with the user code.
Limit over error (Color): The number of output pages has exceeded the one
specified with the department code.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<<Error history>>
In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed.
Display example
EA10
99999999
05 06 14 17 57 32
064
064
23621000000
ABCDEFHIJLO
11 digits
Error code
4 digits
Total counter YY MM DD HH MM SS
MMM
NNN
3 digits
8 digits
12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits
with its last two digits.)
A
B
Paper source
0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: Upper drawer 4: Lower drawer 5: PFP upper drawer
6: PFP lower drawer 7: Unused 8: Unused
Paper size code
0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT, 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5,
A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG G: Unsed H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5"SQ
K: A3-wide L: 305×457 mm M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K Z: Not selected
C
Sort mode/staple mode
0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple
8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch
D
E
F
ADF mode
0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED
APS/AMS mode
0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS
Duplex mode
0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying
8: Single-sided/Duplex copying
G
H
Unused
Image shift
0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right
I
Editing
0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Unused
J
Edge erase/Dual-page
0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page
K
L
Unused
Function
0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing
4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission
MMM
NNN
O
Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Mx256)+(Mx16)+M
Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Nx256)+(Nx16)+N
Color mode
0: Auto color 1: Full color 2: Black 3: Unused 4: Twin color copy 5: Gray scale
6: Unused 7: Image smoothing
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 22
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes
Mode
For start
[0]+[1]+
[POWER]
Contents
For exit
Display
Control panel
check mode
All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all
the LCD pixels blink.
[POWER]
OFF/ON
-
Test mode
[0]+[3]+
[POWER]
Checks the status of input/output signals.
Outputs the test patterns.
Adjusts various items.
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% C A4
TEST MODE
2
Test print mode [0]+[4]+
[POWER]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% P A4
TEST PRINT
Adjustment
mode
[0]+[5]+
[POWER]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% A A4
TEST MODE
Setting mode
[0]+[8]+
[POWER]
Sets various items.
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% D
TEST MODE
List print mode [9]+[START]+ Prints out the data lists of the codes 05 and
[POWER] 08, PM support mode and pixel counter.
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% UA A4
LIST PRINT
PM support
mode
[6]+[START]+ Clears each counter.
[POWER]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
100% K
TEST MODE
Firmware
update mode
[8]+[9]+
[POWER]
Performs updating of the system firmware.
[POWER]
OFF/ON
-
Note:
To enter the desired mode, turn ON the power while two digital keys designated to each mode
(e.g. [0] and [5]) are pressed simultaneously.
To exit from Adjustment mode and Setting mode:
Shut down the equipment. When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equip-
ment by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds.
<Operation procedure>
•
Control panel check mode (01):
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[0][1]
[POWER]
LED lit/
LCD blinking
[START]
[START]
(Button check)
Notes:
1. A mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking.
2. Button Check
Buttons with LED
(Press to turn OFF the LED.)
Buttons without LED
Button on touch panel
(Press to display the message on the control panel.)
(Press to display the screen on the control panel at power-ON.)
•
•
•
•
Test mode (03): Refer to “2.2.1. Input check (test mode 03)” and “2.2.2. Output check (test mode
03)”.
Test print mode (04): Refer to “2.2.3. Test print mode (04)”.
Adjustment mode (05): Refer to “2.2.4. Adjustment mode (05)”.
Setting mode (08): Refer to “2.2.5. Setting mode (08)”.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code.
[9][START]
[POWER]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital keys]
Key in the first
code to be printed
[START]
[Digital keys]
Key in the last
code to be printed
[START]
List starts to
be printed
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
101: Adjustment mode (05)
102: Setting mode (08)
(Code)
103: PM support mode
104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
106: Error history (Maximum 1000 items)
107: Error history (Latest 80 items)
•
•
PM support mode (6S):
[6][START]
[POWER]
(Code)
2: PM Support Screen
[START]
(Operation started)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Firmware update mode (89): Refer to “6. FIRMWARE UPDATING”.
[POWER]
ON
Normal
[0][1]
[0][3]
[0][4]
[0][5]
[0][8]
[9][START]
[6][START]
[8][9]
Firmware
update mode
Adjustment
mode
List print
mode
Control panel
check mode
Test print
mode
PM support
mode
Setting
mode
Test mode
Warming up
Ready
[POWER]
OFF
*1
To user
State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes
Fig.2-1
*1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis mode, and leave the equipment to the user.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 24
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2.1
Input check (Test mode 03)
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, [COPY] button and
the digital keys in the test mode (03).
<Operation procedure>
2
[FAX]
or
[COPY]
[0][3]
[POWER]
[START]
[Digital keys]
[CLEAR]
(LCD ON)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Note:
Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
Fig.2-2 Example of display during input check
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are
listed in the following pages.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF/[COPY] LED: OFF)
Contents
Digital
key
Highlighted display
Normal display
Button
Items to check
e.g.
e.g.
A
B
C
D
E
F
Bypass unit connection
Not connected
Not connected
Connected
ADU connection
Connected
-
-
-
LCF connection
Not connected
Connected
[1]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
LCF drawer detection switch
PFP upper drawer detection switch
-
Drawer not installed Drawer present
Drawer not installed
-
Drawer present
-
PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor
PFP upper drawer feed sensor
PFP connection
Paper almost empty Paper present
Paper present
Not connected
Cover opened
No paper
No paper
[2]
Connected
Cover closed
Paper present
PFP side cover open/close switch
PFP upper drawer empty sensor
PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor
G
H
Tray at upper limit
position
Other than upper
limit position
A
B
LCF tray bottom sensor
Tray at bottom posi- Other than upper
tion
limit position
LCF standby side paper misload detection sen- Properly loaded
sor
Paper misload
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
[3]
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
-
Paper stock sensor at LCF feed side
PFP lower drawer detection switch
-
Paper present
No paper
Drawer not installed Drawer present
-
-
PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor
PFP lower drawer feed sensor
Paper almost empty Paper present
Paper present
No paper
PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at
output mode (03))
Abnormal rotation
Normal rotation
[4]
F
G
H
-
-
-
PFP lower drawer empty sensor
PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor
No paper
Paper present
Tray at upper limit
position
Other than upper
limit position
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 26
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Highlighted display
Digital
key
Normal display
e.g.
Button
Items to check
e.g.
A
B
LCF end fence home position sensor
LCF end fence stop position sensor
Fence home posi-
tion
Other than home
position
Fence stop position Other than stop
position
2
C
D
E
Empty sensor at LCF standby side
LCF side cover open/close switch
No paper
Paper present
Cover opened
Normal rotation
Cover closed
Abnormal rotation
[5]
LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at
output mode (03))
F
LCF tray-up sensor
Tray at upper limit
position
Other than upper
limit position
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
LCF feed sensor
No paper
No paper
Paper present
Paper present
Empty sensor at LCF feed side
Lower drawer detection switch
Upper drawer detection switch
Lower drawer paper stock sensor
Upper drawer paper stock sensor
Lower drawer empty sensor
Upper drawer empty sensor
Lower drawer tray-up sensor
Drawer not installed Drawer present
Drawer not installed Drawer present
Paper almost empty Paper present
Paper almost empty Paper present
No paper
No paper
Paper present
Paper present
[6]
G
Tray at upper limit
position
Other than upper
limit position
H
Upper drawer tray-up sensor
Tray at upper limit
position
Other than upper
limit position
A
B
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Side cover open/close switch
Front cover opening/closing switch
-
-
Cover opened
Cover opened
-
-
Cover closed
Cover closed
-
[7]
G
H
A
Exit sensor
Paper present
Bit 1
No paper
Bit 0
Bypass feed paper width sensor 3
(Refer to table1)
B
C
D
Bypass feed paper width sensor 2
(Refer to table1)
Bit 0
Bit 0
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bit 1
Bypass feed paper width sensor 1
(Refer to table1)
[8]
Bypass feed paper width sensor 0
(Refer to table1)
E
F
Bypass sensor
No paper
Paper present
ADU closed
No paper
ADU opening/closing switch
ADU exit sensor
ADU opened
Paper present
Paper present
G
H
ADU entrance sensor
No paper
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Highlighted display
e.g.
Digital
key
Normal display
e.g.
Button
Items to check
A
B
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[9]
-
-
Key copy counter connection
-
Not connected
Connected
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[0]
G
H
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).
Bypass paper width sensor
Paper width size
3
0
1
1
1
0
1
2
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
A3/LD
A4-R/LT-R
A5-R/ST-R
Card size
B4-R/LG
B5-R
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 28
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[FAX] button: ON/[COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: ON/[COPY] LED: OFF)
Contents
Digital
key
Highlighted display
Normal display
Button
Items to check
e.g.
e.g.
A
B
2nd transfer roller position detection sensor
Released
Contacted
Black developer contact timing detection sensor Releasing move-
ment
Contacting move-
ment
2
C
D
E
F
Black developer contact position detection sen- Released position
sor
Contacted position
Normal rotation
Normal rotation
Normal rotation
Normal rotation
Main motor rotation status
Abnormal rotation
Abnormal rotation
Abnormal rotation
Abnormal rotation
(Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03))
[1]
Developer motor rotation status
(Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03))
Transport motor rotation status
(Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03))
G
Polygonal motor rotation status
(Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03))
H
A
B
C
24V Power supply
Power OFF
Not connected
Normally
Power ON
IPC board connection
Connected
Color toner cartridge sensor
Revolver home position sensor
Installation fault
Home position
Other than home
position
D
E
F
-
-
-
[2]
-
-
-
Toner bag full detection sensor
Toner bag full
Not full
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
Black auto-toner sensor connection
Not connected
Connected
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[3]
-
-
-
-
-
-
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
Lower drawer feed sensor
No paper
Paper present
Upper drawer feed sensor
Paper present
No paper
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[4]
Bridge unit connection
Not connected
Connected
Color auto-toner sensor connection
Not connected
Connected
G
H
-
-
-
-
-
-
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Highlighted display
e.g.
Digital
key
Normal display
e.g.
Button
Items to check
A
B
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[5]
-
RADF connection
RADF connected
Not connected
G
H
Platen sensor
Platen cove opened Platen cover closed
Carriage home position sensor
Home position
Other than home
position
A
B
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
APS sensor (APS-R)
APS sensor (APS-C)
APS sensor (APS-3)
APS sensor (APS-2)
APS sensor (APS-1)
RADF tray sensor
RADF empty sensor
RADF jam access cover sensor
RADF open/close sensor
RADF exit sensor
RADF intermediate sensor
RADF read sensor
RADF registration sensor
-
No original
No original
No original
No original
No original
Original present
Original present
Cover opened
RADF opened
Original present
Original present
Original present
Original present
-
Original present
Original present
Original present
Original present
Original present
No original
No original
Cover closed
RADF closed
No original
No original
No original
No original
-
[6]
[7]
[8]
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
RADF original length sensor
RADF original width sensor 1
RADF original width sensor 2
Original present
Original present
Original present
No original
No original
No original
-
G
H
A
-
-
Black toner cartridge switch
Cartridge not
installed
Cartridge installed
B
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
-
-
-
Bypass feed sensor
No paper
Paper present
[9]
Registration sensor
Paper present
No paper
-
-
-
-
G
H
-
-
Transfer belt home position sensor
Home position
Other tha home
position
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 30
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Highlighted display
Digital
key
Normal display
e.g.
Button
Items to check
e.g.
A
B
C
D
E
F
Bridge unit transport sensor 2
Bridge unit cover open/close detection switch
Bridge unit transport sensor 1
Bridge unit paper full detection sensor
-
Paper present
Cover opened
Paper present
Paper not full
-
No paper
Cover closed
No paper
Paper full
-
2
[0]
Charger cleaner front position detection switch
Cleaner home posi- Other than home
tion
position
G
H
Charger cleaner rear position detection switch
-
Cleaner rear posi-
tion
Other than rear posi-
tion
-
-
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: ON ([FAX] LED: OFF/[COPY] LED: ON)
Contents
Digital
key
Highlighted display
Normal display
Button
Items to check
e.g.
e.g.
-
-
-
Temperature/humidity sensor (displays temper-
ature inside of the equipment)
Temperature/humidity sensor (displays humidity
inside of the equipment)
Drum thermistor (displays drum surface temper-
ature)
-
-
-
Temperature [°C]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Humidity [%RH]
Temperature [°C]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
G
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 32
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Highlighted display
Digital
key
Normal display
e.g.
Button
Items to check
e.g.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
A
B
C
D
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[9]
2
-
-
-
Dongles for other equipments / Other USB
devices
Judgement for acceptable USB storage device Acceptable
(*1)
Connectable
Not connectable
[0]
E
Not acceptable
F
G
H
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
*1
•
Be sure to install the USB storage device to the equipment and check if the device can be used with
this code.
•
•
Be sure to turn OFF the write protection (the function to prevent data from erasure by the accidental
recording or deleting) of the USB storage device before performing the check, otherwise this code
cannot be used.
It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB stor-
age device.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 33
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2.2
Output check (test mode 03)
Status of the output signals can be checked by entering the following codes in the test mode 03.
<Operation procedure>
Procedure 1
[0][3]
[POWER]
Stop
code
Operation
OFF
Operation
ON
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[START]
(Code)
(Code)
(Code)
[START]
Procedure 2
[0][3]
[POWER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Operation
One direction
Test mode
standby
[START]
[CLEAR]
Procedure 3
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[0][3]
Test mode
standby
Operation
ON
Operation
OFF
[START]
[START]
[CLEAR]
[POWER]
Procedure 4
[0][3]
[POWER]
[POWER] OFF
[START]
(Code)
Code
Function
Code
Function
Procedure
101
Main motor ON (Operational without
black developer unit)
151
Code No.101 function OFF
1
102
103
108
109
110
112
Toner motor K (normal rotation) ON
Polygonal motor (600dpi) ON
Registration clutch ON
PFP motor ON
152
153
158
159
160
162
Code No.102 function OFF
Code No.103 function OFF
Code No.108 function OFF
Code No.109 function OFF
Code No.110 function OFF
Code No.112 function OFF
1
1
1
1
1
1
ADU motor ON
Developer motor ON (Operational with
black developer unit)
115
116
118
120
121
122
123
124
125
Drum cleaning brush motor ON
Transfer belt cleaner auger motor ON
Laser ON
165
166
168
170
171
172
173
174
175
Code No.115 function OFF
Code No.116 function OFF
Code No.118 function OFF
Code No.120 function OFF
Code No.121 function OFF
Code No.122 function OFF
Code No.123 function OFF
Code No.124 function OFF
Code No.125 function OFF
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Exit motor (normal rotation) ON
Exit motor (reversal rotation) ON
LCF motor ON
Transport motor ON
Toner motor K (reversal rotation) ON
Color auto-toner sensor shutter sole-
noid ON (open)
126
Color auto-toner sensor LED ON
176
Code No.126 function OFF
1
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 34
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Code
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
218
222
225
226
228
232
235
241
242
243
248
249
252
261
Function
Procedure
Upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
Lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
2
Lower transport clutch (high speed) ON/OFF
Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF
Lower transport clutch (low speed) ON/OFF
LCF pickup solenoid ON/OFF
2
LCF end fence reciprocating movement
LCF end fence motor ON/OFF
LCF feed clutch ON/OFF
LCF transport clutch ON/OFF
Key copy counter count up
ADU clutch ON/OFF
PFP transport clutch ON/OFF
PFP upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
PFP lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF
Bridge unit gate solenoid ON/OFF
Discharge LED ON/OFF
IH board cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF
Upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
Lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
Developer bias (Black) [+DC] ON/OFF
Developer bias (Black) [-DC] ON/OFF
Main charger ON/OFF
Scan motor ON (Automatically stops at limit position, speed can be changed by using
ZOOM button)
264
265
267
268
271
278
280
281
282
283
284
285
294
295
297
410
411
SLG board cooling fan / Scanner unit cooling fan ON (high/low speed)
SLG board cooling fan / Scanner unit cooling fan OFF
Scanner exposure lamp ON/OFF
1
1
3
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
3
3
3
Laser unit cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF
LCF tray-up motor UP/DOWN
PFP upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
PFP lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
RADF feed motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)
RADF feed motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation)
RADF read motor ON/OFF
RADF exit/reverse motor ON/OFF (normal rotation)
RADF exit/reverse motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation)
RADF reverse solenoid ON/OFF
Power OFF mode (for 200V series)
RADF fan motor ON/OFF
Power supply cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF
Power supply cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Code
412
413
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
424
425
426
427
428
430
431
432
433
435
437
439
440
442
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
Function
Internal cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed)
Procedure
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
Internal cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed)
IH board cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF
Ozone exhaust fan (low speed) ON/OFF
Ozone exhaust fan (high speed) ON/OFF
Developer bias (Black) [AC] ON/OFF
Developer bias (Color) [+DC] ON/OFF
Developer bias (Color) [-DC1] ON/OFF
Developer bias (Color) [AC] ON/OFF
1st transfer roller bias [+] ON/OFF
1st transfer roller bias [-] ON/OFF
2nd transfer roller bias [+] ON/OFF
2nd transfer roller bias [-] ON/OFF
Drum cleaning blade bias ON/OFF
Image quality sensor shutter solenoid ON/OFF
Color developer drive clutch ON/OFF
Black developer drive clutch ON/OFF
Black developer lifting clutch ON/OFF
2nd transfer roller contact clutch ON/OFF
Transfer belt cleaner clutch ON/OFF
Upper transport clutch (high speed) ON/OFF
Upper transport clutch (low speed) ON/OFF
Color developer toner supply clutch ON/OFF
Revolver motor ON/OFF (printing operation)
Revolver motor operation (at standby position)
Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge Y access position)
Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge M access position)
Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge C access position)
Revolver motor operation (at developer unit Y access position)
Revolver motor operation (at developer unit M access position)
Revolver motor operation (at developer unit C access position)
Revolver motor operation (at home position)
Revolver motor operation (at developing position)
Black developer unit lifting movement ON/OFF (continuous lifting movement)
Charger cleaner motor movement (one reciprocating movement)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 36
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2.3
Test print mode (test mode 04)
The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode (04).
<Procedure 1>
[0][4]
[POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Operation
Continuous
Test Printing
[CLEAR]
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
2
<Procedure 2>
[0][4]
[POWER]
(Code)
[START]
[CLEAR]
Color
selection
[START]
Operation
Continuous
Test Printing
[CLEAR]
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
Notes:
1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not per-
formed.
Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error.
2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when “Wait adding toner” is displayed.
Code
142
204
219
220
231
Types of test pattern
Grid pattern (black)
Remarks
Remarks
Pattern width: 2 dots, Pitch: 10 mm
Pattern width: 1 dot, Pitch: 10 mm
1
2
2
2
2
Grid pattern (color)
6% test pattern
8% test pattern
Secondary scanning direction 33 grada- 3 pixels standard, Width: 10 mm
tion steps
237
262
Halftone
2
2
Pattern for jitter evaluation
(4 lines ON / 4 lines OFF)
1 pixel standard, for color deviation cor-
rection
270
Image quality control test pattern
For checking the image quality control
2
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2.4
Adjustment mode (05)
Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in this adjustment mode
(05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode.
When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER]
button for a few seconds.
Procedure 1
[Digital key]
[FAX]
[ENTER]
or
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
*
[FUNCTION CLEAR]
[START]
(Key in a value)
[START]
(Test copy)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
Value
displayed
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
([FAX] [START])
(Test copy)
(
)
(Value unchangeable)
Procedure 3
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[UP]
or
[DOWN]
(Adjust a value)
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
([FAX] [START])
(Test copy)
(Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
([FAX]
[ENTER]
or
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
[Digital key]
(Sub code)
[START] [Digital key]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
[START])
*[FUNCTION CLEAR]
(Key in a value)
Stores value
in RAM
(Test copy)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 5
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[FAX]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[UP]
or
[DOWN]
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
[0][5]
[POWER]
Automatic
adjustment
[Digital key] [START]
(Code)
[START]
(Test copy)
(Adjust a value) Stores value
in RAM
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 38
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Procedure 6
[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)
[Digital key]
(Code)
[0][5]
[POWER]
Automatic
adjustment
[FAX] [COPY])
(Test copy)
[START]
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
*
*
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is
displayed.
Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
button.
2
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[FAX]
[ENTER]
Stores value
in RAM
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[Digital key]
(Code)
Automatic
adjustment
[0][5]
[POWER]
[START]
[START]
(Test copy)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
*
*
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is
displayed.
Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] button.
Procedure 10
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[0][5]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
(Sub code)
Value
displayed
[START]
[START]
[START]
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)
Procedure 14
[ENTER]
or
[FAX]
[POWER]
[0][5]
[UP] or [DOWN]
(Adjust a value)
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
(Sub code)
[START]
[START]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[POWER]
[INTERRUPT]
[START]
Stores value
in RAM
(Test copy)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[CANCEL]
(Corrects value)
Note:
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal
state.
Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment
mode.
In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after it has
become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05)
Operation:
One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby
Screen.
Code
Types of test pattern
Grid pattern (Black)
Grid pattern (Black/Duplex printing)
Remarks
1
3
4
Refer to 3.4.3 Printer related adjustment
Refer to 3.4.3 Printer related adjustment
For gamma adjustment (Color/Black integrated Refer to 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
pattern)
5
6
For gamma adjustment (Color)
For gamma adjustment (Black)
For gamma adjustment (Color)
For gamma adjustment (Black)
Refer to 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
For checking the gradation reproduction
For checking the gradation reproduction
Refer to 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
For checking the image of printer section
7
10
12
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation
steps (Y)
13
14
15
47
48
49
50
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation
steps (M)
For checking the image of printer section
For checking the image of printer section
For checking the image of printer section
Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation
steps (C)
Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation
steps (K)
Gamma adjustment for printer (PS/ 600 x 600
dpi)
Gamma adjustment for printer (PS/ 1,200 x 600 Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
dpi)
Gamma adjustment for printer (PCL/ 600 x 600 Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
dpi)
Gamma adjustment for printer (PCL/ 1,200 x
600 dpi)
Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment
51
52
Gamma checking for printer (PS/ 600 x 600 dpi) For checking the gradation reproduction
Gamma checking for printer (PS/ 1,200 x 600
dpi)
For checking the gradation reproduction
55
56
57
58
59
60
Grid pattern (Full Color / Thick paper 2)
Grid pattern (Full Color / Thick paper 3)
Grid pattern (Full Color / OHP)
Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration
roller
Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration
roller
Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration
roller
Grid pattern (Black / Thick paper 2)
Grid pattern (Black / Thick paper 3)
Grid pattern (Black / OHP)
Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration
roller
Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration
roller
Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration
roller
62
63
64
68
69
For color deviation correction (Full Color)
For color deviation correction (Full Color)
For color deviation correction (Full Color)
For color deviation correction (Full Color)
For color deviation correction (Full Color)
Only for A3/LD size
Only for A3/LD size
Only for A3/LD size
Only for A4/LT size
Only for A4/LT size
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 40
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code.
2. In “RAM”, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M”
stands for the LGC board and “SYS” stands for the SYS board.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
2
tion
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
able
value>
200
201
202
203
204
206
207
Develop- Initializationof
ment
All
(Y,M,C,K)
-
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
The value starts chang-
ing approx. 3 minutes
after this adjustment
started.
The value is automati-
cally set during this
adjustment (approx. 2
minutes).
(As the value increases,
the sensor output
increases correspond-
ingly.) (Ch.3.2)
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
color auto-
toner sensor
light amount
correction tar-
get value
<0-255>
Y
-
<0-255>
M
-
<0-255>
C
-
<0-255>
K
-
<0-255>
YMC
-
<0-255>
Develop- Initialization of color auto-
ment
ALL
-
Initializes the color
auto-toner sensor light
amount correction tar-
get value.
toner sensor light amount
correction target value
(color)
208
210
Develop- Enforced correction of
ALL
(color)
-
M
M
Performs the color
auto-toner sensor light
amount correction forc-
ibly.
6
3
ment
color auto-toner sensor
light amount
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias out-
put adjustment (When not
transferred)
ALL
225
<0-225>
When the value
decreases, the 1st
transfer roller bias out-
put increases.
The adjustment value
becomes effective
when the Setting Mode
(08- 541, 549 and 551)
is 0 (invalid).
224
225
226
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias out-
put adjustment (When
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
147
<0-187>
M
M
M
When the value
3
3
3
decreases, the 2nd
transfer roller bias out-
put increases.
cleaning the roller [+] )
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias out-
put adjustment (When
229
<188-
255>
When the value
decreases, the 2nd
transfer roller bias out-
put increases.
cleaning the roller [-] )
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias out-
put adjustment (Paper
interval/When not trans-
ferred)
191
<188-
255>
When the value
decreases, the 2nd
transfer roller bias out-
put increases.
227-0
227-1
Transfer 2nd transfer
Single
159
M
M
When the value
14
14
roller bias out- side
(black) <0-187>
ALL 134
(black) <0-187>
decreases, the 2nd
transfer roller bias out-
put increases.
The adjustment value
becomes effective
when the Setting Mode
(08- 544, 549 and 551)
is 0 (invalid).
put adjust-
ment
(Plain paper)
Reverse
side at
duplexing
227-2
227-3
Single
side
Reverse
side at
ALL
(color) <0-187>
ALL 128
(color) <0-187>
147
M
M
14
14
duplexing
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
144
229-0
229-1
Transfer 2nd transfer
Single
ALL
M
M
When the value
14
14
roller bias out- side
(black) <0-187>
ALL 119
(black) <0-187>
decreases, the 2nd
transfer roller bias out-
put increases.
The adjustment value
becomes effective
when the Setting Mode
(08-544, 549 and 551)
is 0 (invalid).
put adjust-
ment
Reverse
side at
(Thick paper
duplexing
1)
229-2
229-3
Single
side
Reverse
side at
ALL
(color) <0-187>
ALL 112
(color) <0-187>
125
M
M
14
14
duplexing
230-0
230-1
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias out-
put (Thick paper 2)
ALL
(black) <0-187>
ALL 150
(color) <0-187>
153
M
M
When the value
14
14
decreases, the 2nd
transfer roller bias out-
put increases.
The adjustment value
becomes effective
when the Setting Mode
(08- 544, 549 and 551)
is 0 (invalid).
231-0
231-1
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias out-
put (Thick paper 3)
ALL
(black) <0-187>
ALL 131
(color) <0-187>
131
M
M
When the value
14
14
decreases, the 2nd
transfer roller bias out-
put increases.
The adjustment value
becomes effective
when the Setting Mode
(08- 544, 549 and 551)
is 0 (invalid).
232-0
232-1
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias out-
put (OHP film)
ALL
(black) <0-187>
ALL 119
(color) <0-187>
119
M
M
When the value
14
14
decreases, the 2nd
transfer roller bias out-
put increases.
The adjustment value
becomes effective
when the Setting Mode
(08- 544, 549 and 551)
is 0 (invalid).
234-0
234-1
Transfer 2nd transfer
Single
ALL
(black)
ALL
(black)
5
M
M
Sets the offset amount
of 2nd transfer roller
bias.
0: -500V 1: -400V
2: -300V 3: -200V
4: -100V 5: 0V
6: +100V 7: +200V
8: +300V 9: +400V
10: +500V
4
4
roller bias off- side
setting adjust-
ment
(Plain paper)
<0-10>
Reverse
side at
duplexing
Single
side
Reverse
side at
5
<0-10>
234-2
234-3
ALL
(color)
ALL
(color)
5
M
M
4
4
<0-10>
5
<0-10>
duplexing
236-0
236-1
Transfer 2nd transfer
Single
ALL
(black)
ALL
(black)
5
M
M
Sets the offset amount
of 2nd transfer roller
bias.
0: -500V 1: -400V
2: -300V 3: -200V
4: -100V 5: 0V
6: +100V 7: +200V
8: +300V 9: +400V
10: +500V
4
4
roller bias off- side
<0-10>
setting adjust-
ment (Thick
paper 1)
Reverse
side at
duplexing
Single
side
Reverse
side at
5
<0-10>
236-2
236-3
ALL
(color)
ALL
(color)
5
M
M
4
4
<0-10>
5
<0-10>
duplexing
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 42
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
237-0
237-1
238-0
238-1
239-0
239-1
241
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias off-
setting adjustment
ALL
(black)
ALL
(color)
ALL
(black)
ALL
(color)
ALL
(black)
ALL
(color)
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
5
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Sets the offsetting
amount of 2nd transfer
roller bias.
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
1
<0-10>
(Thick paper 2)
5
0: -1,000V
2: -600V
4: -200V
1: -800V
3: -400 V
5: 0 V
<0-10>
2
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias off-
setting adjustment
5
<0-10>
6: +200V
8: +600V
10: +1,000V
7: +400V
9: +800 V
(Thick paper 3)
5
<0-10>
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias off-
setting adjustment
5
<0-10>
(OHP film)
5
<0-10>
78
<0-255>
84
<0-255>
87
<0-255>
Main
charger grid bias
Main charger
Y
M
C
K
As the value increases,
the transformer output
increases. The adjust-
ment value becomes
effective only when the
setting mode (08-549,
551, 556, 557) is 0
(invalid).
adjustment
242
243
244
94
<0-255>
245
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias off-
setting
ALL
(black)
5
Sets the offsetting
amount of 1st transfer
roller bias.
<0-10>
0: -500 V
2: -300 V
4: -100 V
6: +100 V
8: +300 V
10: +500 V
1: -400 V
3: -200 V
5: 0 V
7: +200 V
9: +400 V
247
248
250
251
Transfer Temperature/humidity sen-
sor Humidity display
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
50
<0-100>
M
M
M
M
The humidity of the
inside of the equipment
is displayed.
2
2
1
1
[Unit: RH%]
Transfer Drum thermistor Tempera-
ture displa
23
<0-100>
The ambient tempera-
ture of the drum surface
is displayed.
[Unit: °C]
Transfer 1st transfer
roller bias out-
+Low
+High
4000
<3600-
4400>
Transformer output set-
ting of the 1st transfer
roller bias.
When replacing the
high-voltage trans-
former, the values listed
in attached data sheet
are entered.
put voltage
400
<280-
520>
(Unit: V)
252
253
Transfer 2nd transfer
roller bias out-
+Low
+High
ALL
ALL
6000
<5400-
6600>
M
M
Transformer output set-
ting of the 2nd transfer
roller bias (plus output).
When replacing the
high-voltage trans-
former, the values listed
in attached data sheet
are entered.
1
1
put voltage
500
<350-
650>
(Unit: V)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
254
Transfer 2nd transfer
roller bias out-
-Low
-High
ALL
-500
<-9999-
0>
M
Transformer output set-
ting of the 2nd transfer
roller bias (minus out-
put).
When replacing the
high-voltage trans-
former, the values listed
in attached data sheet
are entered.
1
put voltage
255
270
ALL
ALL
-2000
<-9999-
0>
M
M
1
(Unit: V)
Transfer Temperature/humidity sen-
sor Temperature display
23
<0-100>
The temperature of the
inside of the equipment
is displayed.
2
[Unit: °C]
275
276
Transfer 2nd transfer
roller bias
(+)
(-)
ALL
ALL
147
<0-255>
229
<0-255>
M
M
Displays the value of
2nd transfer roller bias
when printing is oper-
ated.
2
2
actual value
(When clean-
ing the roller)
277-0
277-1
Transfer 2nd transfer
roller bias
Single
side
Reverse
side at
ALL
159
M
M
Displays the value of
2nd transfer roller bias
when printing is oper-
ated.
10
10
(black) <0-187>
ALL 134
(black) <0-187>
actual value
display (Plain
paper)
duplexing
277-2
277-3
Single
side
Reverse
side at
ALL
(color) <0-187>
ALL 128
(color) <0-187>
147
M
M
10
10
duplexing
279-0
279-1
Transfer 2nd transfer
roller bias
Single
side
Reverse
side at
ALL
(black) <0-187>
ALL 119
(black) <0-187>
144
M
M
Displays the value of
2nd transfer roller bias
when printing is oper-
ated.
10
10
actual value
display (Thick
paper 1)
duplexing
279-2
279-3
Single
side
Reverse
side at
ALL
(color) <0-187>
ALL 112
(color) <0-187>
125
M
M
10
10
duplexing
281
284
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias
resistance detection con-
trol
Transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit
contact timing adjustment
ALL
ALL
-
M
M
The RMS value of the
main charger grid bias
is displayed..
2
1
<0-255>
141
<88-168>
When the value
increases, the contact
timing of transfer belt
cleaning unit is delayed.
285
Transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit
release timing adjustment
ALL
ALL
121
<88-168>
M
When the value
1
increases, the release
timing of transfer belt
cleaning unit is delayed.
Displays the value of
2nd transfer roller bias
when printing is oper-
ated.
290-0
290-1
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias off-
setting adjustment
153
M
M
10
10
(black) <0-187>
ALL 150
(color) <0-187>
(Thick paper 2)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 44
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
131
291-0
291-1
292-0
292-1
293-0
293-1
293-2
293-3
293-4
294-0
294-1
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias off-
setting adjustment
ALL
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Displays the value of
2nd transfer roller bias
when printing is oper-
ated.
10
10
10
10
14
14
14
14
14
10
10
(black) <0-187>
ALL 131
(color) <0-187>
ALL 119
(black) <0-187>
ALL 119
(color) <0-187>
(Thick paper 3)
2
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias off-
setting adjustment
Displays the value of
2nd transfer roller bias
when printing is oper-
ated.
(OHP film)
Transfer 2nd transfer
Plain
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
85
<0-255>
75
<0-255>
80
<0-255>
80
<0-255>
Corrects the 2nd trans-
fer roller bias output of
leading/trailing edge of
paper (05-227, 229,
230, 231 and 232).
roller bias cor- paper
rection of
leading/trail-
ing edge of
paper
Thick
paper 1
Thick
Correcting factor: %
paper 2
Thick
paper 3
OHP film
80
<0-255>
164
Transfer Actual value
Single
Displays the value of
2nd transfer roller bias
on the leading/trailing
edge of paper when
printing is performed.
(The value corrected in
05-293 is displayed.)
display of 2nd side
(black) <0-255>
ALL 142
(black) <0-255>
transfer roller
bias of lead-
ing/trailing
edge of paper
(Plain paper)
Reverse
side at
duplexing
294-2
294-3
Single
side
Reverse
side at
ALL
(color) <0-255>
ALL 137
(color) <0-255>
153
M
M
10
10
duplexing
296-0
296-1
Transfer Actual value
Single
ALL
(black) <0-255>
ALL 136
(black) <0-255>
155
M
M
10
10
display of 2nd side
transfer roller
bias of lead-
ing/trailing
edge of paper
(Thick paper
1)
Reverse
side at
duplexing
Single
side
Reverse
side at
296-2
296-3
ALL
(color) <0-255>
ALL 131
(color) <0-255>
141
M
M
10
10
duplexing
297-0
297-1
298-0
298-1
299-0
299-1
Transfer Actual value display of 2nd
ALL
160
M
M
M
M
M
M
10
10
10
10
10
10
transfer roller bias of lead- (black) <0-255>
ing/trailing edge of paper
(Thick paper 2)
ALL
(color) <0-255>
ALL 142
158
Transfer Actual value display of 2nd
transfer roller bias of lead- (black) <0-255>
ing/trailing edge of paper
(Thick paper 3)
ALL
(color) <0-255>
ALL 133
143
Transfer Actual value display of 2nd
Displays the value of
2nd transfer roller bias
on the leading/trailing
edge of paper when
printing is performed.
(The value corrected in
05-293 is displayed.)
transfer roller bias of lead- (black) <0-255>
ing/trailing edge of paper
(OHP film)
ALL
133
(color) <0-255>
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
305
Scanner Image location adjustment
of secondary scanning
direction
ALL
124
<92-164>
SYS When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts by approx.
0.137 mm toward the
trailing edge of the
paper.
1
(scanner section)
306
308
Scanner Image location adjustment
of secondary scanning
direction
ALL
ALL
113
<0-255>
SYS When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts by approx.
0.0423 mm toward the
front side of the paper.
1
6
(scanner section)
Scanner Distortion mode
-
-
Moves carriages to the
adjusting position.
330-0
330-1
330-2
330-3
Image
Image quality
Y
M
C
K
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
3
M
M
M
M
Sets the maximum cor-
rection number of time
of the contrast voltage
in the closed-loop con-
trol mode 2.
4
4
4
4
control closed-loop
control con-
trast voltage
correction/
<0-255>
3
<0-255>
3
Mode 2 maxi-
mum number
of time cor-
<0-255>
3
<0-255>
rected
331-0
331-1
331-2
331-3
332-0
332-1
332-2
332-3
Image
Image quality
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
2
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Sets the maximum cor-
rection number of time
of the laser power in the
closed-loop control
mode 2.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
control closed-loop
control laser
power correc-
tion/Mode 2
<0-255>
2
<0-255>
2
maximum
number of
time corrected
<0-255>
2
<0-255>
Image
Image quality
1
Sets the maximum cor-
rection number of time
of the contrast voltage
in the closed-loop con-
trol mode 1.
control closed-loop
control con-
trast voltage
correction/
<0-255>
1
<0-255>
1
Mode 1 maxi-
mum number
of time cor-
<0-255>
1
<0-255>
rected
333-0
333-1
333-2
333-3
334
Image
Image quality
Y
M
C
K
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
1
M
M
M
M
M
Sets the maximum cor-
rection number of time
of the laser power in the
closed-loop control
mode 1.
4
4
4
4
1
control closed-loop
control laser
power correc-
tion/Mode 1
<0-255>
1
<0-255>
1
maximum
number of
time corrected
<0-255>
1
<0-255>
Image
Main charger grid calibra-
300
<210-
390>
1000
<900-
1100>
Transformer output cali-
bration of the main
charger grid bias. When
replacing the high-volt-
age transformer, the
values listed in attached
data sheet are entered.
(Unit: V)
control tion voltage 1 (low)
335
Image
Main charger grid calibra-
ALL
M
1
control tion voltage 2 (high)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 46
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
338
Image
Color developer bias DC
ALL
100
<70-130>
M
Transformer output cali-
bration of the color
developer bias. When
replacing the high-volt-
age transformer, the
values listed in attached
data sheet are entered.
(Unit: V)
1
control (-) calibration voltage 1
(low)
339
340
Image
Color developer bias DC
ALL
ALL
900
<810-
990>
M
1
2
control (-) calibration voltage 2
(high)
Scanner Reproduction ratio adjust-
ment of secondary scan-
ning direction (scanner
section)
127
<0-255>
SYS When the value
increases by “1”, the
reproduction ratio in the
secondary scanning
direction (vertical to
paper feeding direc-
tion) increases by
1
approx. 0.223%.
350
351
354
355
356
Scanner Shading posi- Original
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
128
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
SYS 0.1369 mm/step
1
1
1
1
6
tion adjust-
ment
glass
RADF
SYS
0.1369 mm/step
RADF
Adjustment of for single-
10
<0-20>
SYS When the value
increases by “1”, the
aligning amount
RADF paper
alignment
sided orig-
inal
increases by approx.
0.5 mm.
for double
sided orig-
inal
10
<0-20>
SYS
RADF
RADF
Automatic adjustment of
RADF sensor and
EEPROM initialization
-
SYS Performs the adjust-
ment and initialization
when the RADF board
or RADF sensor is
replaced.
SYS When the value
increases by “1”, the
reproduction ratio of the
secondary scanning
direction on original (fed
from the RADF)
357
358
Fine adjustment of RADF
transport speed
ALL
50
<0-100>
1
1
increases by approx.
0.1%.
RADF
RADF sideways deviation
adjustment
ALL
ALL
128
<0-255>
SYS When the value
increases by “1”, the
image of original fed
from the RADF shifts
toward the rear side of
paper by approx.
0.0423 mm.
SYS When the value
increases by “1”, the
359
360
Scanner Carriage position adjust-
128
1
1
ment during scanning from (black) <0-255>
RADF
carriage position shifts
by approx. 0.1 mm
ALL
128
SYS
(color) <0-255>
toward the exit side
when using the RADF.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
361
Scanner Log table switching for
RADF copying
ALL
(color)
0
SYS 0: Same log table as
the one used at
1
<0-4>
copying with original
glass
1: Background repro-
duction - Light 2
2: Background repro-
duction - Light 1
3: Background repro-
duction - Dark 1
4: Background repro-
duction - Dark 2
362
ALL
(black)
0
SYS 0: Same log table as
the one used at
1
<0-4>
copying with original
glass
1: Background repro-
duction - Light 2
2: Background repro-
duction - Light 1
3: Background repro-
duction - Dark 1
4: Background repro-
duction - Dark 2
363
Scanner Data transfer of character-
istic value of scanner / SYS
board → SLG board
SCN
-
SYS Transfers the character-
istic values of the scan-
ner (shading correction
factor / RGB color cor-
rection / reproduction
ratio color aberration
correction) from the
6
NVRAM of the SYS
board to the NVRAM of
the SLG board.
364
Scanner Data transfer of character-
istic value of scanner / SLG
board → SYS board
SCN
-
SYS Transfers the character-
istic values of the scan-
ner (shading correction
factor / RGB color cor-
rection / reproduction
ratio color aberration
correction) from the
6
NVRAM of the SLG
board to the NVRAM of
the SYS board.
365
366
RADF
RADF lead-
ing edge posi- sided orig-
tion 1
adjustment
for single-
ALL
ALL
50
<0-100>
SYS When the value
increases by “1”, the
copied image of original
1
1
inal
fed from the RADF
shifts toward the trail-
ing edge of paper by
approx. 0.1 mm.
for double
sided orig-
inal
50
<0-100>
SYS
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 48
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
-
367
RADF
RADF
Image
RADF original guide width
adjustment
ALL
-
Stores the current width
of RADF original guide
by keying in this code
with the guide set at the
minimum width. Per-
form this adjustment
when the RADF board
or volume is replaced,
or when the code (05-
356) is performed.
6
(Minimum)
2
368
RADF original guide width
adjustment
(Maximum)
ALL
-
-
Stores the current width
of RADF original guide
by keying in this code
with the guide set at the
maximum width. Per-
form this adjustment
when the RADF board
or volume is replaced,
or when the code (05-
356) is performed.
6
372
373
Black developer bias DC
ALL
ALL
100
<70-130>
M
M
Transformer output cali-
bration of the black
developer bias. When
replacing the high-volt-
age transformer, the
values listed in attached
data sheet are entered.
(Unit: V)
1
1
control (-) calibration voltage 1
(low)
Image
Black developer bias DC
900
<810-
990>
control (-) calibration voltage 2
(high)
380-0
380-1
380-2
380-3
381-0
381-1
381-2
381-3
382-0
382-1
382-2
382-3
Image
Image quality
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
320
<0-999>
330
<0-999>
340
<0-999>
375
<0-999>
320
<0-999>
330
<0-999>
340
<0-999>
375
<0-999>
408
<0-999>
408
<0-999>
408
<0-999>
408
<0-999>
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Displays the contrast
voltage initial value set
by the open-loop con-
trol. (Unit: V)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
control open-loop
control/ con-
trast voltage
initial value
display
Image
control age actual
value display
Contrast volt-
Displays the contrast
voltage when printing is
operated. (Unit: V)
Image
control open-loop
control/ laser
Image quality
Displays the laser
power initial value set
by the open-loop con-
trol. (Unit: µW)
power initial
value display
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
able
value>
92
<0-255>
92
<0-255>
92
<0-255>
92
<0-255>
408
<0-999>
408
<0-999>
408
<0-999>
408
<0-999>
78
<0-255>
84
<0-255>
87
<0-255>
94
<0-255>
135
<0-255>
137
<0-255>
139
<0-255>
383-0
383-1
383-2
383-3
384-0
384-1
384-2
384-3
385-0
385-1
385-2
385-3
386-0
386-1
386-2
386-3
388
Image
control actual value
Laser power
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Displays the laser
power when printing is
operated. (bit value)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
2
display
Image
control actual value
display
Laser power
Displays the laser
power when printing is
operated. (Unit: µW)
Image
control grid bias
actual value
Main charger
Displays the main
charger grid bias when
printing is operated. (bit
value)
display
Image
control bias DC (-)
actual value
Developer
Displays the developer
bias when printing is
operated. (bit value)
display
146
<0-255>
Image
control display of
Output value
When the
light
0
Displays the output
value of image quality
sensor when the sensor
light source is OFF.
<0-1023>
image quality source is
sensor
OFF
389
Transfer
belt sur-
face
ALL
0
M
Displays the output
value of image quality
sensor (when there is
no test pattern) on the
transfer belt.
2
<0-1023>
390-0
390-1
390-2
390-3
Highden-
sity pat-
tern Y
Highden-
sity pat-
tern M
Highden-
sity pat-
tern C
Highden-
sity pat-
tern K
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
M
M
M
M
Displays the output
value of image quality
sensor when a high-
density test pattern is
written.
The larger the value is,
the smaller the toner
amount adhered
becomes.
10
10
10
10
<0-1023>
0
<0-1023>
0
<0-1023>
0
<0-1023>
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 50
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
391-0
Image
control display of
Output value
Lowden-
sity pat-
ALL
0
M
Displays the output
value of image quality
sensor when a low-den-
sity test pattern is writ-
ten.
The larger the value is,
the smaller the toner
amount adhered
becomes.
10
10
10
10
2
<0-1023>
image quality tern Y
sensor
391-1
391-2
391-3
392
Lowden-
sity pat-
tern M
Lowden-
sity pat-
tern C
Lowden-
sity pat-
tern K
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
M
M
M
M
2
<0-1023>
0
<0-1023>
0
<0-1023>
Image
Light amount adjustment
0
The LED light amount
adjustment value of this
sensor is the reference
value to set the
control result of image quality sen-
sor
<0-255>
reflected light from the
belt surface.
393
Image
Relative humidity display
ALL
0
M
Displays the relative
humidity at the latest
performing of the
closed-loop
2
control during latest closed-loop
control
<0-100>
control.
394
395
Image
Enforced performing of
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
Performs the image
quality open-loop con-
trol.
Performs the image
quality closedloop con-
trol.
Performs the image
quality control, initialize
each control value.
Sets the target value of
high image density con-
trol at the time of the
image quality control.
6
6
6
4
4
4
4
control image quality open-loop
control
Image
Enforced performing of
M
M
M
M
M
M
control image quality closed-loop
control
396
Image
control ization
Image quality control initial-
398-0
398-1
398-2
398-3
Image
Target value
Y
M
C
K
265
<220-
360>
300
<220-
360>
320
<220-
360>
370
<300-
420>
control of the high
image den-
sity control
401
405
Laser
Laser
Fine adjustment of polygo-
nal motor rotation speed
(reproduction ratio adjust-
ment)
PRT
PPC
134
<0-255>
135
<0-255>
M
M
When the value
1
1
increases by “1”, the
reproduction ratio of pri-
mary scanning direction
increases by approx.
0.07%. (approx. 0.1
mm/step)
410
411
Adjustment of primary
scanning laser writing start
position
PPC
PRT
128
<0-255>
120
<0-255>
M
M
When the value
1
1
increases by “1”, the
writing start position
shifts to the front side
by approx. 0.0423 mm.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
417-0
Image
Color devia-
tion correc-
tion 1
(A3/LD)
K
C
M
Y
K
C
M
Y
ALL
127
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
130
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
M
When the value
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
increases by “1”, the
image shifts toward the
trailing edge of the
paper by 0.0423 mm.
417-1
417-2
417-3
418-0
418-1
418-2
418-3
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Image
Color devia-
tion correc-
tion 2
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts toward the
trailing edge of the
paper by 0.0423 mm.
(A3/LD)
421
422
Drive
Drive
Adjustment of secondary
scanning direction repro-
duction ratio (fine adjust-
ment of main motor speed)
PPC/
PRT
FAX
127
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
M
M
When the value
1
1
increases by “1”, the
reproduction ratio of
secondary scanning
direction increases by
approx. 0.04%.
When the value
increases by “1”, the
rotation becomes faster
by approx.
424
425
Fine adjustment of exit
motor speed
PPC/
PRT
FAX
107
<0-255>
EUR: 140
UC: 140
JPN: 128
Others:
140
M
M
1
1
0.05%.
<0-255>
426
427
Drive
Adjustment of secondary
scanning direction repro-
duction ratio (fine adjust-
ment of transport motor
speed)
PPC/
PRT
FAX
138
<0-255>
139
<0-255>
M
M
When the value
1
1
increases by “1”, the
reproduction ratio of
secondary scanning
direction increases by
approx. 0.04%.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 52
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
430
Image
Image
Top margin adjustment
(blank area at the leading
edge of the paper))
Left margin adjustment
(blank area at the left of the
paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Right margin adjustment
(blank area at the right of
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Bottom margin adjustment
(blank area at the trailing
edge of the paper)
PPC
26
<0-255>
M
When the value
increases by “1”, the
blank area becomes
wider by approx.
0.0423 mm.
1
431
432
PPC
PPC
PPC
0
M
M
1
2
<0-255>
Image
15
<0-255>
1
433
Image
Image
43
<0-255>
M
M
1
4
434-0
Bottom margin adjustment
(blank area at the trailing
edge of the paper)
PPC/
PRT
EUR: 45
UC: 28
JPN: 28
Others:
45
/Reverse side at duplexing
<0-255>
434-1
Image
Right margin adjustment
(blank area at the right of
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
PPC/
PRT
18
<0-255>
M
4
/Reverse side at duplexing
435
436
Image
Image
Top margin adjustment
(blank area at the leading
edge of the paper)
Left margin adjustment
(blank area at the left of the
paper along the paper
feeding direction)
Right margin adjustment
(blank area at the right of
the paper along the paper
feeding direction)
PRT
PRT
24
<0-255>
M
M
1
1
0
When the value
increases by “1”, the
blank area becomes
wider by approx.
0.0423 mm.
<0-255>
437
Image
PRT
0
M
1
<0-255>
438
439
Image
Image
Bottom margin adjustment
(blank area at the trailing
edge of the paper)
Bottom margin adjustment
(blank area at the trailing
edge of the paper along
the paper feeding direc-
tion) when paper size is not
specified at bypass feed
PRT
ALL
0
M
M
1
1
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
When the value
increases by “1”, the
margin increases by
approx. 0.2 mm.
440
441
442
443
444
445
Laser
Secondary
scanning
laser writing
start position
Upper
drawer
Lower
drawer
Bypass
feeding
LCF
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
21
<0-40>
47
<0-80>
22
<0-40>
20
<0-40>
20
<0-40>
21
<0-40>
M
M
M
M
M
M
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts toward the
trailing edge of the
paper by approx.
0.2 mm.
1
1
1
1
1
1
PFP
Duplex
feeding
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
able
value>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
18
<0-63>
18
<0-63>
18
<0-63>
18
<0-63>
18
<0-63>
18
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
448-0
448-1
448-2
448-3
449-0
449-1
449-2
449-3
450-0
450-1
450-2
450-3
452-0
452-1
452-2
452-3
Paper
feeding amount
Paperaligning Long
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
When the value
increases by “1”, the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size 1:
205 mm to 219 mm
Short size 2:
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
size
adjustment at
Middle
size
the registra-
tion section
(PFP upper
drawer / Plain
paper)
Short
size 1
Short
size 2
Paper
feeding amount
adjustment at
Paperaligning Long
size
Middle
size
the registra-
tion section
(PFP lower
drawer / Plain
paper)
204 mm or shorter
Short
size 1
Short
size 2
Paper
feeding amount
adjustment at
Paperaligning Long
size
Middle
size
the registra-
tion section
(Upperdrawer
/ Plain paper)
Short
size 1
Short
size 2
Paper
feeding amount
adjustment at
Paperaligning Long
When the value
increases by “1”, the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
size
Middle
size
the registra-
tion section
(Lowerdrawer
Short
size 1
Short
size 2
/ Plain paper)
15
<0-63>
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size 1:
205 mm to 219 mm
Short size 2:
204 mm or shorter
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 54
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
ALL
ALL
ALL
able
value>
455-0
455-1
455-2
Paper
feeding amount
Paperaligning Long
8
M
M
M
When the value
increases by “1”, the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
4
4
4
size
<0-63>
adjustment at
Middle
size
8
the registra-
tion section
(Duplex feed-
ing / Plain
paper)
<0-63>
12
<0-63>
2
Short
size
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
457
Paper
Paper aligning amount
ALL
15
<0-63>
M
1
feeding adjustment at the registra-
tion section (LCF / Plain
paper)
Paper
feeding amount
adjustment at
219 mm or shorter
*
Postcard is sup-
ported only for JPN
model.
458-0
458-1
458-2
Paperaligning Long
ALL
ALL
ALL
14
<0-63>
14
<0-63>
14
<0-63>
M
M
M
4
4
4
size
Middle
size
Short
size
the registra-
tion section
(Bypass feed-
ing/Plain
paper)
460-0
460-1
460-2
Paper
feeding amount
adjustment at
Paperaligning Long
ALL
ALL
ALL
16
<0-63>
16
<0-63>
16
<0-63>
M
M
M
4
4
4
size
Middle
size
Short
size
the registra-
tion section
(Bypass feed-
ing/Thick
paper 1)
461-0
461-1
461-2
Paper
feeding amount
adjustment at
Paperaligning Long
ALL
ALL
ALL
17
<0-63>
17
<0-63>
17
<0-63>
M
M
M
4
4
4
size
Middle
size
Short
size
the registra-
tion section
(Bypass feed-
ing/Thick
paper 2)
462-0
462-1
462-2
462-3
463-0
463-1
463-2
Paper
feeding amount
adjustment at
Paperaligning Long
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
17
<0-63>
17
<0-63>
17
<0-63>
16
<0-63>
16
<0-63>
16
<0-63>
16
<0-63>
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
size
Middle
size
Short
size
Post
card
the registra-
tion section
(Bypass feed-
ing/Thick
paper 3)
Paper
feeding amount
adjustment at
Paperaligning Long
size
Middle
size
Short
size
the registra-
tion section
(Bypass feed-
ing/OHP film)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
able
value>
143
<0-255>
170
<0-255>
143
<0-255>
143
<0-255>
143
<0-255>
143
<0-255>
128
466-0
466-1
466-4
466-5
466-6
466-7
467
Paper
Adjustment of Plain
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
When the value
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
feeding paper push-
ing amount /
Bypass feed-
ing
paper
increases by “1”, the
driving speed of bypass
feed roller increases by
approx. 2 ms when the
paper transport is
started from the regis-
tration section.
Post card
Thick
paper 1
Thick
paper 2
*
Post card is sup-
ported only for JPN
model.
Thick
paper 3
OHP film
Paper
Adjustment of paper push-
When the value
feeding ing amount/Duplex feed-
<0-255>
increases by “1”, the
driving speed of ADU
transport roller
ing (short size)
increases by approx.
2 ms when the paper
transport is started from
the registration section.
468-0
468-1
468-2
469-0
469-1
469-2
469-3
Finisher Fine adjust-
A4-R
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
When the value
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ment of bind- /LT-R
<-14-14>
increases by “1”, the
binding/folding position
shifts toward the right
page by 0.25 mm.
ing position/
folding posi-
tion
B4
0
<-14-14>
A3/LD
0
<-14-14>
18
<0-63>
18
<0-63>
18
<0-63>
18
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
Paper
feeding amount
adjustment at
Paperaligning Long
When the value
increases by "1", the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size 1:
205 mm to 219 mm
Short size 2:
size
Middle
size
Short
size 1
Short
size 2
the registra-
tion section
(Upperdrawer
/ Thick paper
1)
470-0 Paper
feeding
Paperaligning Long
amount
size
Middle
size
Short
size 1
Short
size 2
adjustment at
the registra-
tion section
(Lowerdrawer
/ Thick
470-1
470-2
470-3
204 mm or shorter
paper 1)
471-0
471-1
471-2
471-3
Paper
feeding amount
adjustment at
Paperaligning Long
size
Middle
size
Short
size 1
Short
size 2
the registra-
tion section
(PFP upper
drawer / Thick
paper 1)
15
<0-63>
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 56
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
able
value>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
15
<0-63>
472-0
472-1
472-2
472-3
473
Paper
feeding amount
Paperaligning Long
M
M
M
M
M
When the value
increases by "1", the
aligning amount
increases by approx.
0.8 mm.
<Paper length>
Long size:
330 mm or longer
Middle size:
220 mm to 329 mm
Short size:
219 mm or shorter
Short size 1:
4
4
4
4
1
size
adjustment at
Middle
size
the registra-
tion section
(PFP lower
drawer / Thick
paper 1)
2
Short
size 1
Short
size 2
Paper
Paper aligning amount
feeding adjustment at the registra-
tion section (LCF / Thick
paper 1)
474-0
474-1
474-2
Paper
feeding amount
adjustment at
Paperaligning Long
ALL
ALL
ALL
8
M
M
M
205 mm to 219 mm
Short size 2:
204 mm or shorter
4
4
4
size
Middle
size
Short
size
<0-63>
8
the registra-
tion section
(ADU / Thick
paper 1)
*
Post card is sup-
ported only for JPN
model.
<0-63>
12
<0-63>
475-0
475-1
Paper
feeding amount
adjustment at Long size
Paperaligning Thick
ALL
ALL
28
<0-63>
M
M
4
4
paper 2
the registra-
tion section
(Bypass feed-
ing)
Thick
paper 2
Middle
size
28
<0-63>
475-2
475-3
475-4
Thick
paper 2
Short size
Thick
paper 3
Long size
Thick
paper 3
Middle
size
ALL
ALL
ALL
28
<0-63>
M
M
M
4
4
4
28
<0-63>
28
<0-63>
475-5
Thick
paper 3
ALL
28
<0-63>
M
4
Short size
475-6
475-7
OHP film
Long size
OHP film
Middle
size
ALL
ALL
24
<0-63>
24
<0-63>
M
M
4
4
475-8
475-9
OHP film
Short size
ALL
ALL
24
<0-63>
M
M
4
4
28
<0-63>
Post card
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
494
Laser
Secondary
scanning data decelerat-
laser writing
start position
When
ALL
135
<0-255>
M
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts by approx.
0.2 mm toward the
trailing edge of the
paper.
1
1
1
ing to 1/2
When
decelerat-
ing to 1/3
When
495
496
ALL
ALL
135
<0-255>
M
M
128
decelerat-
ing to 1/4
<0-255>
497-0
497-1
497-2
497-3
497-4
497-5
498-0
498-1
Laser
Adjustment of Upper
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
128
<0-255>
131
<0-255>
131
<0-255>
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts toward the
front side by 0.0423
mm.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
drawer side-
ways devia-
tion
drawer
Lower
drawer
PFPupper
drawer
PFP lower
drawer
LCF
Bypass
feeding
Adjustment of Long size
duplex feed-
Laser
When the value
increases by “1”, the
image shifts toward the
front side by 0.0423
mm.
ing sideways
deviation
Short size
(A4/LT or
smaller)
499
Develop- Black developer unit lift up/
ALL
4
M
Change the lift up/down
timing of the black
developer unit when a
CEB0 error occurs.
1
ment
down timing adjustment
<0-255>
501
503
504
505
506
507
Image
Density
Photo
PPC
128
SYS When the value
increases, the image of
1
1
1
1
1
1
adjustment
Fine adjust-
ment of “man-
ual density”
/Center value
(black) <0-255>
Text/Photo PPC 128
(black) <0-255>
PPC 128
(black) <0-255>
Text/Photo PPC 20
(black) <0-255>
PPC 20
(black) <0-255>
PPC 20
(black) <0-255>
the center step density
becomes darker.
SYS
Text
SYS
Image
Image
Density
SYS Sets the changing
amount by 1 step at the
adjustment
Fine adjust-
ment of “man-
ual density”
/Light step
value
density adjustment.
When the value
Photo
Text
SYS
increases, the image of
the “light” steps
SYS
becomes lighter.
SYS Sets the changing
amount by 1 step at the
508
509
510
Density
Text/Photo PPC
20
1
1
1
adjustment
Fine adjust-
ment of “man-
ual density”
/Dark step
value
(black) <0-255>
PPC 20
(black) <0-255>
PPC 20
(black) <0-255>
density adjustment.
When the value
Photo
Text
SYS
increases, the image of
the “dark” steps
SYS
becomes darker.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 58
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/07
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
128
512
514
515
532
533
534
570
Image
Density
Photo
PPC
SYS When the value
increases, the image
SYS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
adjustment
(black) <0-255>
Text/Photo PPC 128
(black) <0-255>
PPC 128
(black) <0-255>
Fine adjust-
ment of “auto-
matic density”
becomes darker.
2
Text
SYS
Image
Range correc- Text/Photo PPC
40
<0-255>
SYS When the value
increases, the back-
tion Back-
(black)
ground peak
adjustment
ground of the image
(low density area)
becomes harder to be
printed out.
Photo
Text
PPC
(black)
16
<0-255>
SYS
PPC
(black)
40
<0-255>
SYS
Image
Range correc- Text/Photo PPC
22
SYS Sets whether the values
of the background peak
and text peak are fixed
or not. One’s place is
tion on origi-
nal manually
set on the
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
(black)
original glass
an adjustment for “auto-
matic density” and ten’s
place is for “manual
density”. Once they are
fixed, the range correc-
tion is performed with
standard values. The
values of the back-
ground peak and text
peak affect the repro-
duction of the back-
ground density and text
density respectively.
571
572
Photo
Text
PPC
(black)
12
SYS
1
1
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
PPC
(black)
22
SYS
<11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
*
Background peak/
Text peak
580
Image
Automatic gamma adjust-
ment
PPC
(black)
-
-
Adjusts the gradation
reproduction automati-
cally.
7
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
128
590-0
590-1
590-2
591-0
591-1
591-2
592-0
592-1
592-2
596-0
596-1
596-2
597-0
597-1
597-2
598-0
598-1
598-2
599-0
599-1
599-2
600
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Adjustment of
L
M
H
L
PPC
SYS When the value
increases, the density
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
gamma bal-
ance (Text/
Photo)
(black) <0-255>
PPC 128
(black) <0-255>
PPC 128
(black) <0-255>
PPC 128
(black) <0-255>
PPC 128
(black) <0-255>
PPC 128
(black) <0-255>
PPC 128
(black) <0-255>
PPC 128
(black) <0-255>
PPC 128
(black) <0-255>
PRT 128
(black) <0-255>
PRT 128
(black) <0-255>
PRT 128
(black) <0-255>
PRT 128
(black) <0-255>
PRT 128
(black) <0-255>
PRT 128
(black) <0-255>
PRT 128
(black) <0-255>
PRT 128
(black) <0-255>
PRT 128
(black) <0-255>
PRT 128
(black) <0-255>
PRT 128
(black) <0-255>
PRT 128
(black) <0-255>
in the target area
becomes higher.
L : Low density area
M : Medium density
area
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Adjustment of
gamma bal-
ance (Text)
H : High density area
M
H
L
Adjustment of
gamma bal-
ance (Photo)
M
H
L
Adjustment of
gamma bal-
ance (PS/
M
H
L
Smooth)
Adjustment of
gamma bal-
ance
SYS When the value
increases, the density
in the target area
becomes higher.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
M
H
L
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
(PS/Detail)
Adjustment of
gamma bal-
ance
H : High density area
M
H
L
(PCL/Smooth)
Adjustment of
gamma bal-
ance
M
H
(PCL/Detail)
Background
adjustment
Text/Photo PPC
(black)
5
SYS When the value
decreases, the back-
<1-9>
ground becomes
darker. When the value
increases, the back-
ground becomes
lighter.
601
Text
PPC
5
SYS
(black)
<1-9>
602
Photo
PPC
5
SYS
(black)
<1-9>
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 60
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
604
Image
Sharpness
adjustment
Text/Photo PPC
(black)
0
SYS When the value
increases, the image
becomes sharper.
When the value
1
<0-31>
2
decreases, the image
becomes softer.
The smaller the value
is, the less the moire
becomes.
605
Text
PPC
(black)
0
SYS
1
<0-31>
606
648
Photo
PPC
(black)
0
SYS
1
1
*
The default value 0
is equivalent to 16
(center value).
<0-31>
Image
Adjustment of Text/Photo PPC
30
SYS Adjustment of the
smudged/faint text.
With increasing the
value, the faint text is
suppressed, and with
decreasing it, the
smudged/faint
text
(black) <0-255>
smudged text is sup-
pressed.
654
655
663
Image
Image
Adjustment of
smudged/faint
text
PS
PRT
(black)
PRT
(black)
5
SYS When the value
decreases, the width of
1
1
1
<0-9>
5
<0-9>
255
text becomes wider.
PCL
SYS
Dot size adjustment in
black printing
PRT
SYS Adjusts the dot size of
primary scanning direc-
tion in black printing.
The smaller the value
is, the dot becomes
smaller.
(black) <0-255>
664
Image
Image
Upper limit in
toner saving
mode
PS
PRT
(black) <0-255>
PRT 176
(black) <0-255>
PPC
176
SYS When the value
decreases, the printing
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
density becomes
lighter.
665
PCL
SYS
667-0
667-1
667-2
667-3
667-4
Setting beam
level conver-
sion
Beam
0
M
Sets the beam level for
4 divided smoothing.
The primary scanning
direction is divided into
4 and the dot width is
set at the 5 levels (incl.
level “0”). The smaller
the value is, the smaller
the primary scanning
direction of the dot
level 0/4 (black) <0-255>
Beam PPC 63
level 1/4 (black) <0-255>
Beam PPC 127
level 2/4 (black) <0-255>
Beam PPC 191
level 3/4 (black) <0-255>
Beam PPC 255
level 4/4 (black) <0-255>
M
M
M
M
becomes.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
22
693
Image
Range correc- Text/Photo PPC
SYS Sets whether the values
of the background peak
and text peak are fixed
or not. One’s place is
1
tion on origi-
nal set on the
RADF
(black) <11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
an adjustment for “auto-
matic density” and ten’s
place is for “manual
density”. Once they are
fixed, the range correc-
tion is performed with
standard values.
The values of the back-
ground peak and text
peak affect the repro-
duction of the back-
ground density and text
density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
694
695
Photo
Text
PPC
(black) <11-14,
21-24,
12
SYS
SYS
1
1
31-34,
41-44>
PPC
(black) <11-14,
21-24,
22
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
31-34,
41-44>
*
Background peak/
Text peak
700
701
Image
Adjustment of
binarized
threshold
(Text)
Center
value
FAX
125
SYS When the value
increases, the image of
1
1
(black) <0-255>
center value density
becomes darker.
SYS Sets the changing
amount by 1 step at the
density adjustment.
When the value
Light step
value
FAX
20
(black) <0-255>
increases, the image of
“light” side becomes
lighter.
702
710
Dark step
value
FAX
20
SYS Sets the changing
amount by 1 step at the
density adjustment.
SYS When the value
increases, the image of
the center step density
1
1
(black) <0-255>
Image
Image
Density
Photo
FAX
128
adjustment
“manual den-
sity” fine
adjustment/
Center value
(black) <0-255>
becomes darker.
714
715
Text/Photo
Photo
FAX
128
SYS
1
1
(black) <0-255>
Density
FAX
20
SYS Sets the changing
amount by 1 step at the
density adjustment.
adjustment
“manual den-
sity” fine
adjustment/
Light step
value
(black) <0-255>
When the value
increases, the image of
the “light” steps
719
Text/Photo
FAX
20
SYS
1
(black) <0-255>
becomes lighter.
720
724
Image
Density
Photo
FAX
(black) <0-255>
FAX 20
(black) <0-255>
20
SYS Sets the changing
amount by 1 step at the
1
1
adjustment
“manual den-
sity” fine
adjustment/
Dark step
value
density adjustment.
When the value
Text/Photo
SYS
increases, the image of
the “dark” steps
becomes darker.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 62
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
128
725
729
Image
Density
Photo
FAX
SYS When the value
increases, the image
SYS
1
1
adjustment
“automatic
density” fine
adjustment
(black) <0-255>
FAX 128
(black) <0-255>
becomes darker.
Text/Photo
2
825
826
827
828
Image
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN
12
SYS Sets whether the values
of the background peak
and text peak are fixed
or not. One’s place is
1
1
1
1
tion on origi-
nal manually
set on the
(black) <11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
original glass
an adjustment for “auto-
matic density” and ten’s
place is for “manual
density”. Once they are
fixed, the range correc-
tion is performed with
standard values. The
values of the back-
ground peak and text
peak affect the repro-
duction of the back-
ground density and text
density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
Text
SCN
(black) <11-14,
21-24,
SYS
SYS
SYS
31-34,
41-44>
12
Photo
SCN
(black) <11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
Gray scale SCN
(black) <11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
*
Background peak/
Text peak
830
831
832
833
Image
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN
12
SYS Sets whether the values
of the background peak
and text peak are fixed
or not. One’s place is
1
1
1
1
tion on origi-
nal set on the
RADF
(black) <11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
an adjustment for “auto-
matic density” and ten’s
place is for “manual
density”. Once they are
fixed, the range correc-
tion is performed with
standard values.
The values of the back-
ground peak and text
peak affect the repro-
duction of the back-
ground density and text
density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
Text
SCN
(black) <11-14,
21-24,
SYS
SYS
SYS
31-34,
41-44>
12
Photo
SCN
(black) <11-14,
21-24,
31-34,
41-44>
12
Gray scale SCN
(black) <11-14,
21-24,
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
31-34,
41-44>
*
Background peak/
Text peak
835
836
837
838
Image
Range correc- Text/Photo SCN
tion Back-
56
(black) <0-255>
SCN 48
(black) <0-255>
SCN 16
(black) <0-255>
Gray scale SCN 32
(black) <0-255>
SYS When the value
increases, the back-
1
1
1
1
ground peak
adjustment
ground of the image
(low density area)
becomes harder to be
printed out.
Text
SYS
SYS
SYS
Photo
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
840
Image
Sharpness
adjustment
Text/Photo SCN
(black)
0
SYS When the value
increases, the image
becomes sharper.
1
1
1
1
<0-31>
When the value
841
842
843
Text
SCN
(black)
0
SYS
SYS
SYS
decreases, the image
<0-31>
becomes softer.
The smaller the value
is, the less the moire
becomes.
Photo
SCN
(black)
0
<0-31>
*
The default value 0
is equivalent to 16
(center value).
Gray scale SCN
(black)
0
<0-31>
845
846
847
848
Image
Density
Text/Photo SCN
128
SYS When the value
increases, the image
1
1
1
1
adjustment
“manual den-
sity” fine
adjustment/
Center value
(black) <0-255>
SCN 128
(black) <0-255>
SCN 128
(black) <0-255>
SCN 128
becomes darker.
Text
SYS
Photo
SYS
Image
Image
Fine adjustment of back-
ground / Center value
SYS When the value
increases, the back-
ground becomes
darker.
SYS When the value
increases, the image of
(black) <0-255>
850
851
852
Density
Text/Photo SCN
20
1
1
1
adjustment
“manual den-
sity” fine
adjustment/
Light step
value
(black) <0-255>
the “light” steps
becomes lighter.
Text
SCN
(black) <0-255>
SCN 20
(black) <0-255>
20
SYS
Photo
SYS
853
Image
Image
Image
Image
Fine adjustment of back-
ground / Light step value
(Image smoothing)
SCN 50
(black) <0-255>
SYS Sets the changing
amount by 1 step at
background adjust-
1
ment. When the value
increases, the back-
ground of the “light”
steps becomes lighter.
855
856
857
Density
Text/Photo SCN
20
SYS When the value
increases, the image of
1
1
1
adjustment
“manual den-
sity” fine
(black) <0-255>
the “dark” steps
becomes darker.
Text
SCN
(black) <0-255>
SCN 20
(black) <0-255>
20
SYS
adjustment/
Dark step
value
Photo
SYS
858
Fine adjustment of back-
ground / Dark step value
(Image smoothing)
SCN 50
(black) <0-255>
SYS Sets the changing
amount by 1 step at
background adjust-
1
ment. When the value
increases, the back-
ground of the “dark”
steps becomes darker.
860
861
862
Density
Text/Photo SCN
128
SYS When the value
increases, the image
1
1
1
adjustment
“automatic
density” fine
adjustment
(black) <0-255>
becomes darker.
Text
SCN
(black) <0-255>
SCN 128
(black) <0-255>
128
SYS
Photo
SYS
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 64
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
128
880-0
880-1
880-2
881-0
881-1
881-2
882-0
882-1
882-2
883-0
883-1
883-2
884
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Adjustment of
L
M
H
L
SCN
SYS When the value
increases, the density
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
gamma bal-
ance (Text/
Photo)
(black) <0-255>
SCN 128
(black) <0-255>
SCN 128
(black) <0-255>
SCN 128
(black) <0-255>
SCN 128
(black) <0-255>
SCN 128
(black) <0-255>
SCN 128
(black) <0-255>
SCN 128
(black) <0-255>
SCN 128
(black) <0-255>
SCN 128
(black) <0-255>
SCN 128
(black) <0-255>
SCN 128
(black) <0-255>
SCN 128
(black) <0-255>
in the target area
becomes higher.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density area
H: High density area
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
2
Adjustment of
gamma bal-
ance (Text)
M
H
L
Adjustment of
gamma bal-
ance (Photo)
M
H
L
Adjustment of
gamma bal-
ance (Gray
scale)
M
H
Reproduction ratio fine
adjustment of primary
scanning direction
SYS When the value
increases by “1”, the
reproduction ratio of pri-
mary scanning direction
increases by approx.
0.1%.
Effective with the reso-
lution other than 600
dpi.
953-0
953-1
953-2
953-3
Image
Color devia-
tion correc-
tion 3
K
C
M
Y
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
128
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
M
M
M
M
When the value
4
4
4
4
increases by "1", the
image shifts toward the
trailing edge of the
paper by 0.0423 mm.
(A4/LT)
128
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
954-0
Image
Image
Image
Color devia-
tion correc-
tion 4
(A4/LT)
128
<118-
138>
M
When the value
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
K
C
M
Y
K
C
M
Y
K
C
M
Y
ALL
increases by "1", the
image shifts toward the
trailing edge of the
paper by 0.0423 mm.
954-1
954-2
954-3
955-0
955-1
955-2
955-3
956-0
956-1
956-2
956-3
976
128
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
Color devia-
tion correc-
tion 5
When the value
increases by "1", the
image shifts toward the
trailing edge of the
paper by 0.0423 mm.
(A4/LT)
Color devia-
tion correc-
tion 6
When the value
increases by "1", the
image shifts toward the
trailing edge of the
paper by 0.0423 mm.
(A4/LT)
128
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
128
<118-
138>
Mainte- Equipment number (serial
nance
-
SYS When this adjustment is
performed with this
code, the setting code
(08-995) is also per-
formed automatically.
(10 digits)
number) display
1000
1001
1002
1003
Image
Automatic
gamma
adjustment
PS/
PRT
-
-
-
-
SYS Adjusts the gradation
reproduction for each
color, Y, M, C and K.
SYS
SYS
SYS
7
7
7
7
600x600 (color)
dpi
PS/
1200x600 (color)
dpi
PCL/
600x600 (color)
dpi
PCL/
1200x600 (color)
dpi
PRT
PRT
PRT
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 66
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
128
1010-0
1010-1
1010-2
1011-0
1011-1
1011-2
1012-0
1012-1
1012-2
1013-0
1013-1
1013-2
1014-0
1014-1
1014-2
1015-0
1015-1
1015-2
1016-0
1016-1
1016-2
1017-0
1017-1
1017-2
1018-0
1018-1
1018-2
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Color bal-
L
M
H
L
PRT
SYS The target color, mode
and density area
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ance adjust-
ment for “Y”
(PS/
600x600dpi/
Smooth)
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
become darker as the
value increases.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
2
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “M”
(PS/
600x600dpi/
Smooth)
H: High density area
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “C”
(PS/
600x600dpi/
Smooth)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “K”
(PS/
600x600dpi/
Smooth)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “Y”
(PS/
600x600dpi/
Detail)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “M”
(PS/
600x600dpi/
Detail)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “C”
(PS/
600x600dpi/
Detail)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “K”
(PS/
600x600dpi/
Detail)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “Y”
(PS/
1200x600dpi/
Smooth)
M
H
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
128
1019-0
1019-1
1019-2
1020-0
1020-1
1020-2
1021-0
1021-1
1021-2
1022-0
1022-1
1022-2
1023-0
1023-1
1023-2
1024-0
1024-1
1024-2
1025-0
1025-1
1025-2
1026-0
1026-1
1026-2
1027-0
1027-1
1027-2
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Color bal-
L
M
H
L
PRT
SYS The target color, mode
and density area
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ance adjust-
ment for “M”
(PS/
1200x600dpi/
Smooth)
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
become darker as the
value increases.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “C”
(PS/
1200x600dpi/
Smooth)
H: High density area
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “K”
(PS/
1200x600dpi/
Smooth)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “Y”
(PS/
1200x600dpi/
Detail)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “M”
(PS/
1200x600dpi/
Detail)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “C”
(PS/
1200x600dpi/
Detail)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “K”
(PS/
1200x600dpi/
Detail)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “Y”
(PCL/
600x600dpi/
Smooth)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “M”
(PCL/
600x600dpi/
Smooth)
M
H
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 68
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
128
1028-0
1028-1
1028-2
1029-0
1029-1
1029-2
1030-0
1030-1
1030-2
1031-0
1031-1
1031-2
1032-0
1032-1
1032-2
1033-0
1033-1
1033-2
1034-0
1034-1
1034-2
1035-0
1035-1
1035-2
1036-0
1036-1
1036-2
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Color bal-
L
M
H
L
PRT
SYS The target color, mode
and density area
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ance adjust-
ment for “C”
(PCL/
600x600dpi/
Smooth)
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
become darker as the
value increases.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
2
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “K”
(PCL/
600x600dpi/
Smooth)
H: High density area
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “Y”
(PCL/
600x600dpi/
Detail)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “M”
(PCL/
600x600dpi/
Detail)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “C”
(PCL/
600x600dpi/
Detail)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “K”
(PCL/
600x600dpi/
Detail)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “Y”
(PCL/
1200x600dpi/
Smooth)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “M”
(PCL/
1200x600dpi/
Smooth)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “C”
(PCL/
1200x600dpi/
Smooth)
M
H
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
128
1037-0
1037-1
1037-2
1038-0
1038-1
1038-2
1039-0
1039-1
1039-2
1040-0
1040-1
1040-2
1041-0
1041-1
1041-2
1046-0
1046-1
1047-0
1047-1
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Color bal-
L
M
PRT
SYS The target color, mode
and density area
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ance adjust-
ment for “K”
(PCL/
1200x600dpi/
Smooth)
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 128
(color) <0-255>
PRT 255
(color) <0-255>
PRT 255
(color) <0-255>
PRT 255
(color) <0-255>
PRT 255
(color) <0-255>
become darker as the
value increases.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
H
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “Y”
(PCL/
1200x600dpi/
Detail)
L
H: High density area
M
H
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “M”
(PCL/
1200x600dpi/
Detail)
L
M
H
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “C”
(PCL/
1200x600dpi/
Detail)
L
M
H
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “K”
(PCL/
1200x600dpi/
Detail)
L
M
H
Image
Image
Adjustment of
maximum
toner amount
PS
PCL
PS
PCL
SYS When the value
decreases, the image
becomes lighter.
Note:
SYS
SYS
SYS
(Plain paper)
When the value
Adjustment of
maximum
toner amount
(Thick paper
1)
increases, the
image offsetting
may occur.
1048-0
1048-1
Image
Image
Image
Adjustment of
maximum
toner amount
(Thick paper
2)
Adjustment of
maximum
toner amount
(Thick paper
3)
PS
PRT
(color) <0-255>
PRT 255
(color) <0-255>
255
SYS
SYS
4
4
PCL
1049-0
1049-1
PS
PRT
(color) <0-255>
PRT 255
(color) <0-255>
255
SYS
SYS
4
4
PCL
1050-0
1050-1
Adjustment of
maximum
toner amount
(OHP film)
PS
PRT
(color) <0-255>
PRT 200
(color) <0-255>
200
SYS
SYS
4
4
PCL
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 70
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
176
1055
1056
1057
1058
1060
Image
Upper limit in toner saving
mode
PRT
SYS When the value
decreases, the printing
1
1
1
1
1
(color) <0-255>
PRT 176
(color) <0-255>
PRT 176
(color) <0-255>
PRT 176
(color) <0-255>
SCN 128
(color) <0-255>
density becomes
lighter.
SYS
SYS
SYS
2
Image
Reproduction ratio fine
adjustment of primary
scanning direction
SYS When the value
increases by “1”, the
reproduction ratio of pri-
mary scanning direction
increases by approx.
0.1%.
Effective with the reso-
lution other than 600
dpi.
1065
1066
Image
Image
Judgment threshold for
ACS
Judgment threshold for
ACS on original set on the (color) <0-255>
RADF
SCN
(color) <0-255>
SCN 70
70
SYS When the value
increases, originals
1
1
tend to be judged as
monochrome, and
when the value
SYS
decreases, they tend to
be judged as color in
autocolor mode.
1070
1071
1072
1075
1076
1077
1080
1081
1082
Image
Image
Image
Fine adjust-
ment of back-
ground
Text
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
0
SYS Adjusts the level of
background. When the
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
<0-50>
value increases, the
background becomes
more brightened.
Printed
image
Photo
0
SYS
<0-50>
0
SYS
<0-50>
Fine adjust-
ment of black
density
Text
0
SYS Adjusts the black den-
sity of the scanned
<0-4>
0
<0-4>
0
<0-4>
0
<0-3>
0
image. When the value
increases, the black
density becomes
darker.
Printed
image
Photo
SYS
SYS
RGB conver- Text
sion method
selection
SYS Sets the color space
format of the output
image.
0: sRGB
Printed
image
Photo
SYS
<0-3>
0
<0-3>
1: AppleRGB
2: ROMMRGB
3: AdobeRGB
SCN
(color)
SYS
1086
1087
1088
Image
Sharpness
adjustment
Text
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
SCN
(color)
0
SYS When the value
increases, the image
1
1
1
<0-31>
becomes sharper.
When the value
Printed
image
Photo
0
SYS
<0-31>
decreases, the image
becomes softer.
0
SYS
<0-31>
The smaller the value
is, the less the moire
becomes.
*
The default value 0
is equivalent to 16
(center value).
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
128
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Density
Text/Photo PPC
SYS When the value
increases, the image
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
adjustment
“manual den-
sity” fine
adjustment/
Center value
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
Text/Photo PPC 20
(color) <0-255>
PPC 20
(color) <0-255>
PPC 20
(color) <0-255>
PPC 20
(color) <0-255>
PPC 20
(color) <0-255>
Text/Photo PPC 20
(color) <0-255>
PPC 20
(color) <0-255>
PPC 20
(color) <0-255>
PPC 20
(color) <0-255>
PPC 20
(color) <0-255>
Text/Photo PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 255
(color) <0-255>
PPC 249
(color) <0-255>
PPC 237
(color) <0-255>
PPC 237
(color) <0-255>
PPC 249
(color) <0-255>
becomes darker.
Text
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Printed
image
Photo
Map
Density
SYS Sets the changing
amount by 1 step at the
adjustment
“manual den-
sity” fine
adjustment/
Dark step
value
density adjustment.
When the value
increases, the image of
the “dark” steps
becomes darker.
Text
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Printed
image
Photo
Map
Density
SYS Sets the changing
amount by 1 step at the
adjustment
“manual den-
sity” fine
adjustment/
Light step
value
density adjustment.
When the value
increases, the image of
the “light” steps
becomes lighter.
Text
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Printed
image
Photo
Map
Density
SYS When the value
increases, the image
adjustment
“automatic
density” fine
adjustment
becomes darker.
Text
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Printed
image
Photo
Map
Adjustment of
maximum
toner amount
Plain
paper
Thick
paper 1
Thick
paper 2
Thick
paper 3
SYS When the value
decreases, the image
becomes lighter.
Note:
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
When the value
increases,
image offsetting
may occur.
OHP film
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 72
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1630
1631
1632
1633
1642
Image
Maximum text
density
adjustment
Y
M
C
K
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
5
SYS When the value
increases by “1”, the
1
1
1
1
7
<0-10>
maximum text density
of each color becomes
darker.
5
SYS
SYS
SYS
<0-10>
2
5
<0-10>
5
<0-10>
Image
Automatic
gamma
adjustment
Color/
Black
PPC
-
SYS Automatic adjustment
of gradation reproduc-
tion in the Full Color
Mode (each color of Y,
M, C and K) and Black
Mode.
1643
Color
PPC
PPC
-
SYS Automatic adjustment
of gradation reproduc-
tion in the Full Color
Mode (each color of Y,
M, C and K).
SYS When the value
increases, originals
tend to be judged as
black, and when the
7
1675
1676
Image
Judgment threshold for
ACS
70
1
1
(color) <0-255>
value decreases, they
tend to be judged as
color in auto-color
mode.
Image
Image
Judgment threshold for
ACS on original set on the (color) <0-255>
PPC
70
SYS
RADF
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
Automatic off- Text/Photo PPC
128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
Automatic off- Text/Photo PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
SYS When the value
increases, the back-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
setting adjust-
ment for
background
processing
(background
density)
ground becomes
darker.
Text
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Printed
image
Photo
Map
Image
SYS When the value
increases, the text
setting adjust-
ment for
background
processing
(text density)
becomes darker.
Text
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Printed
image
Photo
Map
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
128
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1725
Image
Image
Image
Manual offset- Text/Photo PPC
SYS When the value
increases, the back-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ting adjust-
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
Manual offset- Text/Photo PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
ment for
ground becomes
darker.
Text
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
background
processing
(background
density)
Printed
image
Photo
Map
SYS When the value
increases, the text
ting adjust-
ment for
background
processing
(text density)
becomes darker.
Text
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Printed
image
Photo
Map
Text/Photo reproduction
level adjustment
PPC
(color)
0
SYS 0: Default
1: Photo oriented 2
<0-5>
(The printed image
reproduction level
higher than that of
the Photo oriented
1)
2: Photo oriented 1
(The printed image
reproduction level
higher than that of
the Default)
3: Equivalent to the
Default
4: Text oriented 1 (The
text reproduction
level higher than
that of the Default)
5: Text oriented 2 (The
text reproduction
level higher than
that of the Text ori-
ented 1)
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
Image
Sharpness
adjustment /
Full Color
Mode
Text/Photo PPC
(color)
0
SYS When the value
1
1
1
1
1
<0-31>
increases, the image
becomes sharper.
When the value
Text
PPC
(color)
0
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
<0-31>
decreases, the image
becomes softer.
Printed
image
PPC
(color)
0
<0-31>
The smaller the value
is, the less the moire
becomes.
Photo
PPC
(color)
0
<0-31>
Map
PPC
(color)
0
*
The default value 0
is equivalent to 16
(center value).
<0-31>
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 74
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1757
Image
Sharpness adjustment /
Auto Color Mode (Text/
Photo)
PPC
(color)
EUR: 0
UC: 0
JAPN: 22
<0-31>
SYS When the value
increases, the image
becomes sharper.
When the value
1
2
decreases, the image
becomes softer. The
smaller the value is, the
less the moire
becomes.
*
The default value 0
is equivalent to
16(center value).
1761
Image
Image
Black reproduction switch-
ing
PPC
(color)
0
SYS 0: Default
1: Black reproduction
oriented
SYS Sets the reproduction
mode for highlighter for
1
<0-1>
1769
Setting for
highlighter
Vivid
PPC
(color)
0
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
<0-2>
four types of one touch
adjustment.
0: Default
1: Highlighter 1
2: Highlighter 2
1770
Clear
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
(color)
PPC
0
SYS
SYS
SYS
<0-2>
0
<0-2>
0
<0-2>
128
1771
Warm
Cool
L
1772
1779-0
1779-1
1779-2
1780-0
1780-1
1780-2
1781-0
1781-1
1781-2
1782-0
1782-1
1782-2
1783-0
1783-1
1783-2
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Color bal-
SYS The target color, mode
and density area
ance adjust-
ment for “Y”
(Text/Photo)
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
become darker as the
value increases.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
M
H
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “Y”
(Text)
L
H: High density area
M
H
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “Y”
(Printed
L
M
H
image)
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “Y”
(Photo)
L
M
H
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “Y”
(Map)
L
M
H
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
128
1784-0
1784-1
1784-2
1785-0
1785-1
1785-2
1786-0
1786-1
1786-2
1787-0
1787-1
1787-2
1788-0
1788-1
1788-2
1789-0
1789-1
1789-2
1790-0
1790-1
1790-2
1791-0
1791-1
1791-2
1792-0
1792-1
1792-2
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Color bal-
L
M
H
L
PPC
SYS The target color, mode
and density area
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ance adjust-
ment for “M”
(Text/Photo)
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
become darker as the
value increases.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “M”
(Text)
H: High density area
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “M”
(Printed
M
H
L
image)
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “M”
(Photo)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “M”
(Map)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “C”
(Text/Photo)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “C”
(Text)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “C”
(Printed
M
H
L
image)
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “C”
(Photo)
M
H
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 76
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
128
1793-0
1793-1
1793-2
1794-0
1794-1
1794-2
1795-0
1795-1
1795-2
1796-0
1796-1
1796-2
1797-0
1797-1
1797-2
1798-0
1798-1
1798-2
1800-0
1800-1
1800-2
1800-3
1801-0
1801-1
1801-2
1801-3
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Image
Color bal-
L
M
H
L
PPC
SYS The target color, mode
and density area
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ance adjust-
ment for “C”
(Map)
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
PPC 128
(color) <0-255>
become darker as the
value increases.
L: Low density area
M: Medium density
area
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
M
2
Color bal-
H: High density area
ance adjust-
ment for “K”
(Text/Photo)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “K”
(Text)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “K”
(Printed
M
H
L
image)
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “K”
(Photo)
M
H
L
Color bal-
ance adjust-
ment for “K”
(Map)
M
H
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Upper limit
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
650
<0-999>
650
<0-999>
650
<0-999>
600
<0-999>
120
<0-999>
120
<0-999>
120
<0-999>
120
<0-999>
Sets the upper limit
value of the contrast
voltage at the image
quality control. (Unit: V)
control value of con-
trast voltage
M
M
M
Image
control value of con-
Lower limit
M
Sets the lower limit
value of the contrast
voltage at the image
quality control. (Unit: V)
trast voltage
M
M
M
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
able
value>
800
<0-999>
800
<0-999>
800
<0-999>
800
<0-999>
350
<0-999>
350
<0-999>
350
<0-999>
350
<0-999>
125
<0-999>
125
<0-999>
125
<0-999>
125
<0-999>
979
<0-999>
979
<0-999>
979
<0-999>
1802-0
1802-1
1802-2
1802-3
1803-0
1803-1
1803-2
1803-3
1804-0
1804-1
1804-2
1804-3
1805-0
1805-1
1805-2
1805-3
1806-0
Image
control value of laser
Upper limit
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Sets the upper limit
value of the laser power
at the image quality
control. (Unit: µW)
4
4
power
4
4
Image
control value of laser
power
Lower limit
Sets the lower limit
value of the laser power
at the image quality
control. (Unit: µW)
4
4
4
4
Image
control voltage actual
value display
Background
Displays the back-
ground voltage when
printing is operated.
(Unit: V)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Image
control potential char-
acteristic/
Drum surface
Displays the slope fac-
tor of the approximate
expression of the drum
surface potential to the
main charger grid volt-
age at the open-loop
control.
slope factor
display
990
<0-999>
-6
<-999-
Image
Drum surface
Displays the offset fac-
tor of the approximate
expression of the drum
surface potential to the
main charger grid volt-
age at the open-loop
control.
control potential char-
acteristic/off-
set factor
999>
1806-1
1806-2
1806-3
M
C
K
ALL
ALL
ALL
-6
<-999-
999>
-6
<-999-
999>
M
M
M
10
10
10
display
-4
<-999-
999>
1807-0
1807-1
1807-2
1807-3
Image
Drum expo-
Y
M
C
K
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
58
<0-999>
58
<0-999>
58
<0-999>
60
<0-999>
M
M
M
M
Displays the slope fac-
tor of the approximate
expression of the drum
exposure voltage to the
main charger grid volt-
age at the open-loop
control.
10
10
10
10
control sure voltage
characteristic/
slope factor
display (main
charger grid
low voltage
area)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 78
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1808-0
Image
Drum expo-
Y
M
C
K
ALL
35
<-999-
999>
35
<-999-
999>
35
<-999-
999>
42
M
Displays the offset fac-
tor of the approximate
expression of the drum
exposure voltage to the
main charger grid volt-
age at the open-loop
control.
10
10
10
10
control sure voltage
characteristic/
offset factor
display (main
charger grid
low voltage
1808-1
1808-2
1808-3
ALL
ALL
ALL
M
M
M
2
area)
<-999-
999>
1809-0
1809-1
1809-2
1809-3
1810-0
Image
Drum expo-
Y
M
C
K
Y
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
49
<0-999>
49
<0-999>
49
<0-999>
53
<0-999>
41
<-999-
999>
41
<-999-
999>
41
<-999-
999>
47
M
M
M
M
M
Displays the slope fac-
tor of the approximate
expression of the drum
exposure voltage to the
main charger grid volt-
age at the open-loop
control.
10
10
10
10
10
control sure voltage
characteristic/
slope factor
display (main
charger grid
high voltage
area)
Image
Drum expo-
Displays the offset fac-
tor of the approximate
expression of the drum
exposure voltage to the
main charger grid volt-
age at the open-loop
control.
control sure voltage
characteristic/
offset factor
1810-1
1810-2
1810-3
M
C
K
ALL
ALL
ALL
M
M
M
10
10
10
display (main
charger grid
high voltage
area)
<-999-
999>
1811-0
1811-1
1811-2
1811-3
1812-0
1812-1
1812-2
1812-3
Image
control age/upper
limit actual
Contrast volt-
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
500
<0-999>
500
<0-999>
500
<0-999>
600
<0-999>
120
<0-999>
120
<0-999>
120
<0-999>
120
<0-999>
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Displays the upper limit
value of the contrast
voltage when printing is
operated. (Unit: V)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
value display
Image
control age/lowerlimit
actual value
Contrast volt-
Displays the lower limit
value of the contrast
voltage when printing is
operated. (Unit: V)
display
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
PPC
able
value>
170
<0-999>
170
<0-999>
170
<0-999>
170
<0-999>
80
<0-999>
80
<0-999>
80
<0-999>
1813-0
1813-1
1813-2
1813-3
1814-0
1814-1
1814-2
1814-3
1815-0
1815-1
1815-2
1815-3
1816-0
1816-1
1816-2
1816-3
1817
Image
Display of
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
Y
M
C
K
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Displays the upper limit
value of the background
voltage when printing is
operated. (Unit: V)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
2
control background
voltage/upper
limit actual
value
Image
control voltage/lower
limit actual
Background
Displays the lower limit
value of the background
voltage when printing is
operated. (Unit: V)
value display
80
<0-999>
Image
control age/correc-
tion number of
Contrast volt-
0
Displays the actual
number of time the con-
trast voltage has been
corrected at the closed-
loop control.
<0-255>
0
time display
<0-255>
0
<0-255>
0
<0-255>
Image
control correction/
number of
Laser power
0
Displays the actual
number of time the
laser power has been
corrected at the closed-
loop control.
<0-255>
0
time display
<0-255>
0
<0-255>
0
<0-255>
Image
control display
Laser power actual value
92
Displays the laser
power value when
copying in the Black
Mode. (Bit value)
(black) <0-255>
1819
1820
Image
control tor
Laser power correcting fac- PPC
100
<100-
255>
M
M
Perform the correction
of the setting 05-1817.
(Unit: %)
Displays the laser
power value when print-
ing in the Black Mode.
(Bit value)
1
2
(black)
Image
control display
Laser power actual value
PRT
92
(black) <0-255>
1821
Image
control tor
Laser power correcting fac- PRT
100
<100-
255>
M
Perform the correction
of the setting 05-1820.
(Unit: %)
1
(black)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 80
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
able
value>
92
<0-255>
88
<0-255>
90
<0-255>
90
<0-255>
90
<0-255>
1822-0 Transfer 2nd transfer
roller bias cor-
Plain
paper
Thick
paper 1
Thick
paper 2
Thick
paper 3
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Corrects the 2nd trans-
fer roller bias output of
the trailing edge of
paper (05-227, 229,
230, 231 and 232).
Correction factor: %
14
14
14
14
14
10
10
rection of trail-
ing edge of
paper
1822-1
1822-2
1822-3
1822-4
2
OHP film
1823-0 Transfer Display of
intermediate
Single
side
Reverse
side at
162
Displays the value of
2nd transfer roller bias
when the actual printing
is operated.
(The value corrected in
05-1822 is displayed.)
(black) <0-255>
ALL 139
(black) <0-255>
level of 2nd
transfer roller
bias actual
value of trail-
ing edge of
paper
1823-1
duplexing
1823-2
1823-3
Single
side
Reverse
side at
ALL
(color) <0-255>
ALL 133
(color) <0-255>
150
M
M
10
10
(Plain paper)
duplexing
1825-0 Transfer Display of
intermediate
Single
side
Reverse
side at
duplexing
Single
side
Reverse
side at
duplexing
ALL
(black) <0-255>
ALL 127
(black) <0-255>
149
M
M
10
10
level of 2nd
transfe rroller
bias actual
value of trail-
ing edge of
paper
1825-1
1825-2
1825-3
ALL
(color) <0-255>
ALL 121
(color) <0-255>
133
M
M
10
10
(Thick paper
1)
1826-0 Transfer Display of intermediate
level of 2nd transfer roller
ALL
(black) <0-255>
ALL 154
(color) <0-255>
157
M
M
10
10
bias actual value of trailing
edge of paper
1826-1
(Thick paper 2)
1827-0 Transfer Display of intermediate
level of 2nd transfer roller
ALL
(black) <0-255>
ALL 137
(color) <0-255>
137
M
M
10
10
bias actual value of trailing
edge of paper
1827-1
(Thick paper 3)
1828-0 Transfer Display of intermediate
level of 2nd transfer roller
ALL
(black) <0-255>
ALL 126
(color) <0-255>
126
M
M
M
M
M
10
10
14
14
14
bias actual value of trailing
edge of paper (OHP film)
1828-1
1829-0 Transfer 1st transfer
roller bias cor-
Thick
paper 2
ALL
ALL
ALL
80
<0-100>
80
<0-100>
Corrects the 1st trans-
fer roller bias output.
Correction factor: %
rection at
deceleration
1829-1
Thick
paper 3
1829-2
OHP film
80
<0-100>
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
187
1831
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias
actual value display at
deceleration
ALL
M
Displays the value of
1st transfer roller bias
at deceleration when
the actual printing is
operated.
(The value corrected in
05-1829 is displayed.)
2
2
2
2
(black) <0-255>
(Thick paper 2)
1832
1833
1836
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias
actual value display at
deceleration
ALL
187
M
M
M
(black) <0-255>
(Thick paper 3)
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias
actual value display at
deceleration
ALL
187
(black) <0-255>
(OHP film)
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias
ALL
178
Displays the actual
value of the 1st transfer
roller bias when the
transfers of all colors (Y,
M, C and K) have fin-
ished.
actual value display in low- (color) <0-255>
speed color printing
(Plain paper / Thick paper
1)
This adjustment is valid
only when the value of
the code 08-497 is “1”
(6 pages/minute).
1839-0 Transfer 2nd transfer
Intermedi-
ALL
100
<0-100>
M
Corrects the 2nd trans-
fer roller bias output of
leading/trailing edge of
paper (05-1840).
14
roller bias cor- ate level
rection of
leading/trail-
ing edge of
paper
bias of
trailing
edge
Bias of
leading/
trailing
edge
(Correcting factor: %)
1839-1
ALL
ALL
90
<0-100>
M
M
M
14
14
14
(Tab paper)
1840-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias
output adjustment
153
As the value decreases,
the 2nd transfer roller
bias output increases
correspondingly.
The adjustment value
becomes effective
when the Setting Mode
(08-544, 549 and 551)
is 0 (invalid).
(black) <0-187>
(Tab paper)
1840-1
ALL
150
(color) <0-187>
1841-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias
offsetting adjustment
ALL
(black)
5
M
M
Sets the offset amount
of 2nd transfer roller
bias.
4
4
<0-10>
(Tab paper)
0: -500V
2: -300V
4: -100V
6: +100V
8: +300V
10: +500V
1: -400V
3: -200V
5: 0V
7: +200V
9: +400V
1841-1
ALL
(color)
5
<0-10>
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 82
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
153
1842-0 Transfer Actual value
Intermedi-
ALL
M
Displays the value of
2nd transfer roller bias
on the leading/trailing
edge of paper when
printing is performed.
(The value corrected in
05-1839 is displayed.)
10
display of 2nd
transfer roller
bias
ate level (black) <0-225>
bias of
trailing
edge
2
of leading/
trailing
edge of paper
(Tab paper)
1842-1
1842-2
Bias of
leading/
trailing
edge
ALL
157
M
M
10
10
(black) <0-225>
Intermedi-
ate level
bias of
ALL
150
(color) <0-225>
trailing
edge
1842-3
Bias of
leading/
trailing
edge
ALL
154
M
10
(color) <0-225>
1845-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias
actual value display
ALL
(black) <0-187>
ALL 150
(color) <0-187>
153
M
M
M
Displays the value of
2nd transfer roller bias
when printing is oper-
ated.
10
10
1
(Tab paper)
1845-1
1847
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias
actual value display
(Tab paper)
ALL
400
<300-
800>
The drum surface
potential at the 1st
transfer bias resistance
detection control is
adjusted.
[Unit: V]
1848
1849
Transfer 1st transfer bias resis-
tance detection control
ALL
ALL
-
M
M
The result value of the
1st transfer bias resis-
tance detection control
is displayed.
[Unit: V]
When the value
decreases, the 1st
transfer roller bias out-
put increases.
2
1
<0-9999>
Result value display
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias out-
put adjustment
154
(black) <0-225>
This setting is enabled
when "0" (disabled) is
set at the codes 08-
541, -549 and -551.
1850-0 Transfer 1st transfer
roller bias out-
Y
M
C
K
ALL
(color) <0-225>
ALL 143
(color) <0-225>
ALL 154
(color) <0-225>
ALL 154
(color) <0-225>
ALL 154
(black) <0-225>
138
M
M
M
M
M
When the value
4
4
4
4
2
decreases, the 1st
transfer roller bias out-
put increases.
This setting is enabled
when "0" (disabled) is
set at the codes 08-
541, -549 and -551.
put adjust-
ment
1850-1
1850-2
1850-3
1861
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias RMS
value display
The RMS value of the
1st transfer roller bias
at the time of printing is
displayed.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment mode (05)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
138
1862-0 Transfer 1st transfer
roller bias
Y
M
C
K
ALL
M
M
M
M
M
The RMS value of the
1st transfer roller bias
at the time of printing is
displayed.
10
10
10
10
1
(color) <0-225>
ALL 143
(color) <0-225>
ALL 154
(color) <0-225>
ALL 154
(color) <0-225>
RMS value
display
1862-1
1862-2
1862-3
1863
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias
resistance detection Cur-
rent offset adjustment
ALL
5
The current offset
amount of the 1st trans-
fer roller bias resistance
detection is adjusted.
0: -10 1: -8 2: -6
3: -4 4: -2 5: 0
<0-10>
6: +2 7: +4 8: +6
9: +8 10: +10
[Unit: µA]
1864
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias cor-
rection at low-speed color
printing
ALL
(color)
100
<0-100>
M
The 1st transfer roller
bias output after the
completion of transfer
of all colors (Y, M, C
and K) is corrected.
This setting is enabled
when "1" (6 sheets/
minute) is set at the
code 08-497.
1
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 84
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2.5
Setting mode (08)
The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).
When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the
[ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds.
2
Procedure 1
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[Digital key]
[FUNCTION CLEAR]
Sets or
[START]
or
[INTERRUPT]
*
(Stores value in RAM)
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2
[ENTER]
or
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[POWER]OFF/ON
(Exit)
[START]
[INTERRUPT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
Procedure 3
[ENTER]
or
[0][8]
[POWER]
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[Digital key]
(Code)
[START]
(Automatic setting)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[ENTER]
or
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
(Sub-code)
[START]
[START]
[Digital key]
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value
in RAM)
*
[FUNCTION CLEAR]
Sets or
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Procedure 5
[CANCEL]
[START]
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
*[HELP]
Sets or
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
(Stores value in RAM)
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
*
Press [HELP] to enter "-".
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
or
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
[START]
(Setting)
(HDD formatting)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 9
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
or
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[Select button]
[START]
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 10
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
or
[INTERRUPT]
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
(1st setting)
[Digital key]
(2nd setting)
[START]
[START]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 86
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
or
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[POWER] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[ENTER]
*2(Stores value in RAM)
[START]
[Software keyboard]
*1 [MONITOR/PAUSE]
Sets or
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
2
*1 Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter "-", when entering telephone number.
*2 The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM
in procedure 12.
Procedure 14
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8]
[POWER]
[Digital key]
(Code)
[Digital key]
(Sub-code)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)
[START]
[START]
or
[INTERRUPT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code.
2. In “RAM”, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M”
stands for the LGC board, “SYS”, “NIC” and “UTY” stands for the SYS board.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
200
General Date and time setting
ALL
-
-
Year/month/date/day/
hour/minute/second
Example:
5
<13 dig-
its>
03 07 0 13 13 27 48
“Day” - “0” is for “Sun-
day”. Proceeds Monday
through Saturday from
“1” to “6”.
201
202
General Destination selection
ALL
ALL
EUR: 0
UC: 1
JPN: 2
<0-3>
M
M
0: EUR
1: UC
2: JPN
3: Other
0: No external counter
1: Coin controller
1
1
User
Counter installed externally
0
interface
<0-4>
2: Copy key card
3: Key copy counter
4: Key card for OEM1
203
204
General Line adjustment mode
ALL
ALL
0
M
0: For factory ship-
ment
1: For line
1
1
<0-1>
*
Field: “0” must be
selected
User
Auto-clear timer setting
3
SYS Timer to return the
equipment to the
default settings when
the [START] button is
not pressed after the
function and the mode
are set
interface
<0-10>
0: Not cleared
1 to 10:
Set number x 15
sec.
205
User
interface
Auto power save mode
timer setting
ALL
11
SYS Timer to automatically
switch to the energy
saving mode when the
equipment has not
been used
1
<0, 6-15>
0: Invalid 6: 3min.
7: 4min. 8: 5min.
9: 7min.
10: 10min.
11: 15min.
12: 20min.
13: 30min.
14: 45min.
15: 60min.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 88
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
206
User
Auto Shut Off Mode timer
ALL
Refer to
content
<0-20>
SYS Timer to enter the Sleep
Mode automatically
when the equipment
has not been used
0: 3min. 1: 5min.
2: 10min. 3: 15min.
4: 20min. 5: 25min.
6: 30min. 7: 40min.
8: 50min. 9: 60min.
10: 70min.
1
interface setting (Sleep Mode)
2
11: 80min.
12: 90min.
13: 100min.
14: 110min.
15: 120min.
16: 150min.
17:180min.
18: 210min.
19:240min.
20: Not used
<Default value>
e-STUDIO281c: 9
e-STUDIO351c: 9
e-STUDIO451c: 12
207
209
User
interface LCD
Highlighting display on
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: Black letter on white
background
1: White letter on black
background
SYS 0: TIFF (Multi)
1: PDF (Multi)
1
1
<0-1>
User
Default setting of filing for-
1
interface mat when E-mailing (com- (color)
mon in all color modes)
<0-4>
2: Not used
3: TIFF (Single)
4: PDF (Single)
210
218
219
220
Paper
Paper size (A6-R)
PRT
148/105
<148-
432/105-
-
10
1
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
297>
User
Default setting of filing for-
SCN
(color)
1
SYS 0: TIFF (Multi)
1: PDF (Multi) 2: JPG
3: TIFF (Single)
interface mat when storing files
<0-4>
(at color/ACS modes)
4: PDF (Single)
User
Default setting of filing for-
ALL
(black)
0
SYS 0: TIFF (Multi)
1: PDF (Multi) 2: JPG
3: TIFF (Single)
1
interface mat when storing files
<0-4>
(at black mode)
4: PDF (Single)
User
Language displayed at
ALL
EUR: 0
UC: 0
JPN: 5
<0-6>
SYS 0: Language 1
1: Language 2
2: Language 3
3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7
1
interface power-ON
221
User
Language selection in UI
ALL
EUR: 0
UC: 0
JPN: 5
<0-6>
SYS 0: Language 1
1: Language 2
2: Language 3
3: Language 4
4: Language 5
5: Language 6
6: Language 7
1
interface data at Web power ON
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 89
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
223
Mainte- Switching of output pages/
ALL
0
M
Selects the reference to
notify the PM timing.
(The message is dis-
played on the LCD
screen.)
1
nance
driving counts at PM
<0-1>
0: PM counter (The
number of output
pages is set at 08-
251.)
1: PM time counter
(The timing is set at
08-375.)
224
225
Paper
feeding
Paper
feeding drawer
Paper size for bypass feed
Paper size for upper
PPC
ALL
UNDEF
SYS Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
9
9
EUR: A4
UC: LT
JPN: A4
EUR: A3
UC: LD
JPN: A3
EUR:
A4-R
UC:
M
M
M
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
226
227
Paper
feeding drawer
Paper size for lower
ALL
ALL
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
9
9
Paper
feeding drawer
Paper size for PFP upper
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
LT-R
JPN:
A4-R
228
229
Paper
feeding drawer
Paper size for PFP lower
ALL
ALL
EUR: A4
UC: LG
JPN: B4
420/297
<182-
M
M
Press the button on the
LCD to select the size.
9
Paper
Paper size (A3)
10
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
432/140-
297>
230
231
232
233
234
235
Paper
Paper size (A4-R)
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
297/210
<182-
432/140-
297>
210/148
<182-
432/140-
297>
364/257
<182-
432/140-
297>
257/182
<182-
432/140-
297>
M
M
M
M
M
M
10
10
10
10
10
10
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
Paper
Paper size (A5-R)
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
Paper
Paper size (B4)
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
Paper
Paper size (B5-R)
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
Paper
Paper size (LT-R)
279/216
<182-
432/140-
297>
432/279
<182-
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
Paper
Paper size (LD)
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
432/140-
297>
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 90
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
236
Paper
Paper size (LG)
ALL
356/216
<182-
432/140-
297>
216/140
<182-
432/140-
297>
356/257
<182-
432/140-
297>
330/210
<182-
432/140-
297>
330/216
<182-
432/140-
297>
216/216
<182-
432/140-
297>
432/279
<148-
432/105-
297>
148/100
<148-
432/100-
297>
390/270
<182-
432/140-
297>
270/195
<182-
432/140-
297>
457/305
<182-
457/140-
305>
148/100
<148-
432/100-
297>
148/100
<148-
M
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
2
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
Paper
Paper size (ST-R)
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
M
M
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
Paper
Paper size (COMPUTER)
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
Paper
Paper size (FOLIO)
M
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
Paper
Paper size (13”LG)
M
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
Paper
Paper size (8.5”X8.5”)
M
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
Paper
Paper size (Non-standard)
SYS
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
Paper
Memory 1
SYS Registers the paper
size of bypass feed
(non-standard type) into
[MEMORY 1].
M
M
M
feeding Paper size (bypass feed-
ing/non-standard type)
feeding/widthwise direction
Paper size (8K)
Paper
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
Paper
Paper size (16K-R)
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
Paper
Paper size (A3-wide)
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
Paper
Memory 2
SYS Registers the paper
size of bypass feed
(non-standard type) into
[MEMORY 2].
SYS Registers the paper
size of bypass feed
(non-standard type) into
[MEMORY 3].
SYS Registers the paper
size of bypass feed
(non-standard type) into
[MEMORY 4].
feeding Paper size (bypass feed-
ing/non-standard type)
feeding/widthwise direction
Memory 3
Paper
feeding Paper size (bypass feed-
ing/non-standard type)
432/100-
297>
148/100
<148-
432/100-
feeding/widthwise direction
Memory 4
Paper
feeding Paper size (bypass feed-
ing/non-standard type)
feeding/widthwise direction
297>
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
250
Mainte- Service technician tele-
nance phone number
ALL
0
SYS A telephone number
can be entered up to 32
digits. Use the [MONI-
TOR/PAUSE] button to
enter a hyphen(-).
11
<32 dig-
its>
251
Mainte- Setting value of PM
nance counter
ALL
Refer to
content
<8 digits>
M
<Default>
e-STUDIO281c
UC, EUR:
1
100,000 JPN: 0
e-STUDIO351c
UC, EUR:
120,000 JPN: 0
e-STUDIO451c
UC, EUR:
150,000 JPN: 0
252
Mainte- Current value of PM
nance counter Display/0 clearing
ALL
0
M
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON.
1
<8 digits>
253
254
Mainte- Error history display
nance
ALL
-
SYS Displays the latest 20
errors data
2
1
Paper
LT↔A4/LD↔A3
PRT
0
SYS Sets whether the data is
printed on the different
but similar size paper or
not when the paper of
corresponding size is
not available.
feeding
<0-1>
0: Valid (The data is
printed on A4/A3
when LT/LD is
selected or vice
versa.)
1: Invalid (The mes-
sage to use the
selected paper size
is displayed.)
255
Paper
feeding
PFP/LCF installation
ALL
0
M
0: Automatic
1: PFP single-drawer
type installed
1
<0-4>
2: PFP dual-drawer
type installed
3: LCF installed
4: Not installed
256
257
Paper
feeding
Paper size setting /LCF
ALL
ALL
EUR: A4
UC: LT
JPN: A4
M
-
Press the icon on the
LCD to select the size.
9
-
Counter Counter copy
-
1: Electrical counter ->
Backup counter
<1-2>
2: Backup counter ->
Electrical counter
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 92
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
258
Mainte- FSMS acceptance
nance
ALL
1
SYS Sets whether the FSMS
connection is accepted
or not.
1
<0-2>
0: Prohibited
2
1: Accepted (serial
connection only)
2: Accepted (both
serial and USB con-
nections)
259
260
Network Storage period at trail and
private
PRT
ALL
14
<0-35>
SYS 0: No limits
1 to 30: 1 to 30 days
31: 1 hour
1
1
32: 2 hours
33: 4 hours
34: 8 hours
35: 12 hours
Network Web data retention period
10
<3 digits>
SYS When a certain period
of time has passed
without operation after
accessing TopAccess,
the data being regis-
tered is automatically
reset. This period is set
at this code.
(Unit: Minute)
263
User
Administrator's password
ALL
123456
<10 dig-
its>
-
The password can be
entered in alphabets
and figures (A-Z, a-z
and 0-9) within 10 dig-
its.
11
interface (Maximum 10 digits)
264
265
266
267
Network File retention period
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
30
<0-999>
30
<2-30>
30
<2-30>
SYS 0: No limits
1 to 999: 1 to 999 days
SYS 2 to 30 M bytes
1
1
1
1
Network Maximum data capacity at
E-mailing
Network Maximum data capacity at
Internet FAX
SYS 2 to 30 M bytes
Elec-
tronic
filing
Full guarantee of docu-
ments in Electronic Filing
when HDD is full
0
SYS Sets the file retention
level when editing the
files in the Electronic
Filing (at CutDoc/Save-
Doc command execu-
tion).
<0-1>
0: Not full retained
1: Fully retained
•
Retains the source
file until CutDoc/
SaveDoc command
is completed.
*
The file is not
deleted even if the
HDD has become
full during the exe-
cution of command
when “1” is set.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 93
05/07
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
268
User
Binarizing level selection
ALL
3
SYS 0: Step -2
1: Step -1
1
interface (When judging as black in
<1-5>
the ACS Mode)
2: Step 0 (center)
3: Step 1
4: Step 2
*
The binarizing level
of each step is set
at 08-609.
270
271
Elec-
tronic
filing
Default setting of user box
retention period
ALL
ALL
0
SYS Sets the data retention
period when creating a
user box.
1
1
<0-999>
0: Not deleted
1 to 999:
Retention period
(Unit: Day)
SYS Sets the percentage of
HDD partition filled
when warning notifica-
tion is sent.
General Warning notification of the
File Share and e-Filling
90
<0-100>
partitions are filled
0 to 100: 0 to 100%
*
Related code
08-288
272
273
Scanning Notification setting of E-
mail saving time limit
ALL
ALL
3
SYS Sets the days left the
notification of E-mail
saving time limit
appears
0 to 99: 0 to 99 days
SYS Sets the default value
for the partial size of E-
mail to be transmitted
when creating a tem-
plate.
1
1
<0-99>
Scanning Default setting of partial
size when transmitting E-
mail
0
<0-6>
0: Not divided
1: 64
3: 256
5: 1024
2: 128
4: 512
6: 2048 (Unit: KB)
274
FAX
Default setting of page by
page when transmitting
Internet FAX
ALL
0
SYS Sets the default value
for the page by page of
Internet FAX to be
transmitted when creat-
ing a template.
1
<0-4>
0: Not divided
1: 256
2: 512
3: 1024
4: 2048 (Unit: KB)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 94
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
276
User
Default setting of density
SCN
(black)
0
SYS 0: Automatic density
1: Step -5
1
interface adjustment (Black)
<0-11>
2: Step -4
3: Step -3
4: Step -2
2
5: Step -1
6: Step 0 (center)
7: Step +1
8: Step +2
9: Step +3
10: Step +4
11: Step +5
(1 to 11: Manual den-
sity)
277
278
User
Default setting of back-
SCN
(color)
3
SYS 1: Step -2
2: Step -1
1
1
interface ground adjustment
(Full Color)
<1-5>
3: Step 0 (center)
4: Step +1
5: Step +2
User
interface mode
Default setting of color
SCN
0
SYS 0: Black
1: Gray Scale
2: Unused
<0-4>
3: Full Color
4: Auto Color
279
280
User
Default setting of resolution
SCN
(color)
2
SYS 0: 100 dpi
1: 150 dpi
2: 200 dpi
3: 300dpi
SYS 0: 100 dpi
1: 150 dpi
1
1
interface (Full Color)
<0-3>
User
Default setting of resolution
SCN
(black)
2
interface (Gray Scale)
<0-4>
2: 200 dpi
3: 300dpi
4: 400 dpi
281
User
interface (Black)
Default setting of resolution
SCN
(black)
1
SYS 0: 150 dpi
1: 200 dpi
1
<0-4>
2: 300 dpi
3: 400dpi
4: 600 dpi
282
283
284
285
User
Default setting of original
SCN
(color)
0
SYS 0: Text
1: Photo
1
1
1
1
interface mode (Full Color)
<0-2>
2: Printed Image
User
Default setting of original
SCN
(black)
0
SYS 0: Text
1: Text/Photo
2: Photo
SYS 0: Single
1: Book
2: Tablet
SYS 0: 0 degree
1: 90 degrees
interface mode (Black)
<0-2>
User
interface mode
Default setting of scanning
SCN
SCN
0
<0-2>
User
interface mode
Default setting of rotation
0
<0-3>
2: 180 degrees
3: 270 degrees
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
286
User
Default setting of original
ALL
0
SYS 0: Automatic
1
interface paper size
<0-22>
1: A3
2: A4
3: LD
4: LT
5: A4-R 6: A5-R
7: LT-R
9: B4
8: LG
10: B5
11: ST-R 12: COMP
13: B5-R 14: FOLIO
15: 13"LG 16: 8.5"x 8.5"
18: A6-R
19: Size mixed
20: 8K
21: 16K
22: 16K-R
288
289
General Searching interval of delet-
ing expired files and check-
ing capacity of HDD
ALL
ALL
12
<1-24>
SYS Sets the search inter-
val of deleting expired
files and checking
capacity of HDD parti-
tions.
1
1
partitions
(Unit: Hour)
*
Related code
08-271
User
Default setting of back-
3
SYS 1: Step -2
2: Step -1
interface ground adjustment
<1-5>
(Gray Scale)
3: Step 0 (center)
4: Step +1
5: Step +2
290
291
Network Raw printing job (Duplex)
PRT
PRT
1
SYS 0: Valid
1: Invalid
SYS 0: LD
1
1
<0-1>
EUR: 6
UC: 2
Network Raw printing job
(Paper size)
1: LG
3: COMP
5: A3
2: LT
4: ST
JPN: 6
<0 -13>
6: A4
8: A6
7: A5
9: B4
10: B5
11: FOLIO
12: 13 "LG
13: 8.5" x 8.5"
292
Network Raw printing job
(Paper type)
PRT
0
SYS 0: Plain paper
1: Thick paper 1
2: Thick paper 2
3: Thick paper 3
4: OHP film
1
<0-5>
5: Tab paper
293
294
295
Network Raw printing job
(Paper direction)
Network Raw printing job (Staple)
PRT
PRT
PRT
0
SYS 0: Portrait
1: Landscape
SYS 0: Valid
1: Invalid
SYS 0: Inner tray
1: Finisher tray 1
2: Finisher tray 2
3: Unused
1
1
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
0
Network Raw printing job (Exit tray)
<0-6>
4: Unused
5: Unused
6: Unused
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 96
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
296
Network Raw printing job
(Number of form lines)
PRT
1200
<500-
12800>
SYS Sets the number of
form lines from 5 to
128. (A hundredfold of
the number of form
lines is defined as the
setting value.)
1
2
297
298
Network Raw printing job
(PCL font pitch)
PRT
PRT
1000
<44-
9999>
SYS Sets the font pitch from
0.44 to 99.99. (A hun-
dredfold of the font
pitch is defined as the
setting value.)
SYS Sets the font size from
4 to 999.75.
1
1
Network Raw printing job
(PCL font size)
1200
<400-
99975>
(A hundredfold of the
font size is defined as
the setting value.)
299
300
Network Raw printing job
(PCL font number)
PRT
PPC
PPC
0
SYS Sets the PCL font num-
ber.
SYS 0: 999 1: 99 2: 9
1
1
4
<0-79>
User
Maximum number of copy
0
interface volume (MAX9)
<0-2>
0
301-0
301-1
301-2
301-3
301-4
301-5
301-6
301-7
301-8
301-9
301-10
301-11
301-12
301-13
301-14
301-15
301-16
302
Counter Number of
output pages
at Full Color
Mode in
A3
A4
A5
A6
SYS Counts the output
pages at the Full Color
Mode in the Copier
Function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of largesized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
large-sized paper (08-
353).
(color) <8 digits>
Copier Func-
tion
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
User
Original counter display
PPC
EUR: 2
UC: 0
JPN: 0
SYS Sets whether the origi-
nal counter is dis-
played or not.
1
interface
<0, 2, 4>
0: Not displayed
2: Displayed
4: Displayed (Double-
sized original is
counted as 2.)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
0
303-0
303-1
303-2
303-3
303-4
303-5
303-6
303-7
303-8
303-9
303-10
303-11
303-12
303-13
303-14
303-15
303-16
304-0
304-1
304-2
304-3
304-4
304-5
304-6
304-7
304-8
304-9
304-10
304-11
304-12
304-13
304-14
304-15
304-16
Counter Number of
A3
A4
A5
A6
PRT
SYS Counts the output
pages at the Full Color
Mode in the Printer
Function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of largesized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
large-sized paper (08-
353).
4
output pages
at Full Color
Mode in
(color) <8 digits>
Printer Func-
B4
tion
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
A3
A4
Counter Number of
output pages
at Twin Color
Mode in
PPC
0
SYS Counts the output
pages at the Twin Color
Mode in the Copier
Function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of largesized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
large-sized paper (08-
353).
4
(color) <8 digits>
A5
A6
B4
Copier Func-
tion
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 98
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
0
305-0
305-1
305-2
305-3
305-4
305-5
305-6
305-7
305-8
305-9
305-10
305-11
305-12
305-13
305-14
305-15
305-16
306-0
306-1
306-2
306-3
306-4
306-5
306-6
306-7
306-8
306-9
306-10
306-11
306-12
306-13
306-14
306-15
306-16
Counter Number of
A3
A4
A5
A6
PPC
SYS Counts the output
pages at the Black
Mode in the Copier
Function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of large-sized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
large-sized paper (08-
353).
4
output pages
at Black Mode
in Copier
(black) <8 digits>
2
Function
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
Counter Number of
output pages
at Black Mode
in Printer
PRT
0
SYS Counts the output
pages at the Black
Mode in the Printer
Function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of large-sized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
large-sized paper (08-
353).
4
(black) <8 digits>
Function
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
0
307-0
307-1
307-2
307-3
307-4
307-5
307-6
307-7
307-8
307-9
307-10
307-11
307-12
307-13
307-14
307-15
307-16
308-0
308-1
308-2
308-3
308-4
308-5
308-6
308-7
308-8
308-9
308-10
308-11
308-12
308-13
308-14
308-15
308-16
Counter Number of
A3
A4
A5
A6
PRT
SYS Counts the output
pages at the List Print
Mode for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of large-sized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
largesized paper (08-
353).
4
output pages
at List Print
Mode
(black) <8 digits>
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
Counter Number of
output pages
in FAX Func-
tion
FAX
0
SYS Counts the output
pages in the FAX Func-
tion for each paper size
according to the setting
for the count setting of
large-sized paper (08-
352) and the definition
setting of large-sized
paper (08-353).
4
<8 digits>
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 100
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
0
309-0
309-1
309-2
309-3
309-4
309-5
309-6
309-7
309-8
309-9
309-10
309-11
309-12
309-13
309-14
309-15
309-16
310-0
310-1
310-2
310-3
310-4
310-5
310-6
310-7
310-8
310-9
310-10
310-11
310-12
310-13
310-14
310-15
310-16
Counter Number of
scanning
A3
PPC
SYS Counts the scanning
pages at the Full Color
Mode in the Copier
Function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of large-sized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
large-sized paper (08-
353).
4
(color) <8 digits>
A4
A5
A6
B4
pages at Full
Color Mode in
Copier Func-
tion
2
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
A3
Counter Number of
scanning
SCN
0
SYS Counts the scanning
pages at the Full Color
Mode in the Scanning
Function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of large-sized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
large-sized paper (08-
353).
4
(color) <8 digits>
A4
A5
A6
B4
pages at Full
Color Mode in
Scanning
Function
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
0
311-0
311-1
311-2
311-3
311-4
311-5
311-6
311-7
311-8
Counter Number of
scanning
A3
PPC
SYS Counts the scanning
pages at the Twin Color
Mode in the Copier
Function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of large-sized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
large-sized paper (08-
353).
4
(color) <8 digits>
A4
A5
A6
B4
pages at Twin
Color Mode in
Copier Func-
tion
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
311-9
311-10
311-11
311-12
311-13
311-14
311-15
311-16
312-0
312-1
312-2
312-3
312-4
312-5
312-6
312-7
312-8
312-9
312-10
312-11
312-12
312-13
312-14
312-15
312-16
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Counter Number of
scanning
PPC
0
SYS Counts the scanning
pages at the Black
Mode in the Copier
Function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of largesized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
large-sized paper (08-
353).
4
(black) <8 digits>
pages at
Black Mode in
Copier Func-
tion
Others
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 102
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
0
313-0
313-1
313-2
313-3
313-4
313-5
313-6
313-7
313-8
313-9
313-10
313-11
313-12
313-13
313-14
313-15
313-16
314-0
314-1
314-2
314-3
314-4
314-5
314-6
314-7
314-8
314-9
314-10
314-11
314-12
314-13
314-14
314-15
314-16
Counter Number of
scanning
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
SCN
SYS Counts the scanning
pages at the Black
Mode in the Scanning
Function for each paper
size according to the
setting for the count
setting of largesized
paper (08-352) and the
definition setting of
large-sized paper (08-
353).
4
(black) <8 digits>
pages in
Scanning
Function
2
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
A3
Counter Number of
scanning
FAX
0
SYS Counts the scanning
pages in the FAX Func-
tion for each paper size
according to the setting
for the count setting of
large-sized paper (08-
352) and the definition
setting of largesized
4
<8 digits>
A4
A5
pages in FAX
Function
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
paper (08-353).
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
315-0
315-1
315-2
315-3
315-4
315-5
315-6
315-7
315-8
315-9
315-10
315-11
315-12
315-13
315-14
315-15
315-16
316-0
316-1
316-2
316-3
316-4
316-5
316-6
316-7
316-8
316-9
316-10
316-11
316-12
316-13
316-14
316-15
316-16
Counter Number of
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
FAX
0
SYS Counts the transmitted
pages in the FAX Func-
tion for each paper size
according to the setting
for the count setting of
large-sized paper (08-
352) and the definition
setting of largesized
4
transmitted
pages in FAX
Function
<8 digits>
paper (08-353).
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Others
A3
A4
A5
A6
B4
B5
FOLIO
LD
LG
LT
ST
COMP
13”LG
8.5” x 8.5”
16K
8K
Counter Number of
received
FAX
0
SYS Counts the received
pages in the FAX Func-
tion for each paper size
according to the setting
for the count setting of
large-sized paper (08-
352) and the definition
setting of largesized
4
<8 digits>
pages in FAX
Function
paper (08-353).
Others
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 104
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
0
317-0
317-1
317-2
Counter Display of
number of
Counter
Large
Small
Total
PPC
SYS Counts the number of
output pages at the Full
SYS
14
14
14
(color) <8 digits>
PPC
(color) <8 digits>
PPC
(color) <8 digits>
output pages
at Full Color
Mode in
Copier Func-
tion
Color Mode in the
Copier Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
0
2
Counter
0
SYS
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08-
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
318-0
318-1
318-2
Counter Display of
number of
Large
Small
Total
PRT
(color) <8 digits>
PRT
(color) <8 digits>
PRT
(color) <8 digits>
0
SYS Counts the number of
output pages at the Full
14
14
14
output pages
at Full Color
Mode in
Color Mode in the
Printer Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Counter
0
SYS
Counter
0
SYS
Printer Func-
tion
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08-
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
319-0
319-1
319-2
Counter Display of
number of
Large
Small
Total
PPC
(color) <8 digits>
PPC
(color) <8 digits>
PPC
(color) <8 digits>
0
SYS Counts the number of
output pages at the
14
14
14
output pages
at Twin Color
Mode in
Twin Color Mode in the
Copier Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Counter
0
SYS
Counter
0
SYS
Copier Func-
tion
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08-
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
0
320-0
320-1
320-2
Counter Display of
number of
Counter
Large
Small
Total
PPC
SYS Counts the number of
output pages at the
SYS
14
14
14
(black) <8 digits>
PPC
(black) <8 digits>
PPC
(black) <8 digits>
output pages
at Black Mode
in Copier
Black Mode in the
Copier Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
0
Counter
0
SYS
Function
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08-
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
321-0
321-1
321-2
Counter Display of
number of
Large
Small
Total
PRT
(black) <8 digits>
PRT
(black) <8 digits>
PRT
(black) <8 digits>
0
SYS Counts the number of
output pages at the
14
14
14
output pages
at Black Mode
in Printer
Black Mode in the
Printer Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Counter
0
SYS
Counter
0
SYS
Function
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08-
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
322-0
322-1
322-2
Counter Display of
number of
Large
Small
Total
PRT
(black) <8 digits>
PRT
(black) <8 digits>
PRT
(black) <8 digits>
0
SYS Counts the number of
output pages at the List
14
14
14
output pages
at List Print
Mode
Print Mode Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Counter
0
SYS
Counter
0
SYS
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08-
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 106
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
FAX
FAX
FAX
able
value>
323-0
323-1
323-2
Counter Display of
number of
Counter
Large
Small
Total
0
SYS Counts the number of
output pages in the FAX
SYS
14
14
14
<8 digits>
output pages
in FAX Func-
tion
Function according to
its size (large/small).
Large:
0
<8 digits>
2
Counter
0
SYS
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08-
353
<8 digits>
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
324-0
324-1
324-2
Counter Display of
number of
Large
Small
Total
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
scanning pages at the
14
14
14
(color) <8 digits>
PPC
(color) <8 digits>
PPC
(color) <8 digits>
scanning
Full Color Mode in the
Copier Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Counter
0
SYS
pages at Full
Color Mode in
Copier Func-
tion
Counter
0
SYS
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08-
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
325-0
325-1
325-2
Counter Display of
number of
Large
Small
Total
SCN
(color) <8 digits>
SCN
(color) <8 digits>
SCN
(color) <8 digits>
0
SYS Counts the number of
scanning pages at the
14
14
14
scanning
Full Color Mode in the
Scanning Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Counter
0
SYS
pages at Full
Color Mode in
Scanning
Counter
0
SYS
Function
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08-
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
0
326-0
326-1
326-2
Counter Display of
number of
Counter
Large
Small
Total
PPC
SYS Counts the number of
scanning pages at the
SYS
14
14
14
(color) <8 digits>
PPC
(color) <8 digits>
PPC
(color) <8 digits>
scanning
Twin Color Mode in the
Copier Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
0
pages at Twin
Color Mode in
Copier Func-
tion
Counter
0
SYS
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08-
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
327-0
327-1
327-2
Counter Display of
number of
Large
Small
Total
PPC
(black) <8 digits>
PPC
(black) <8 digits>
PPC
(black) <8 digits>
0
SYS Counts the number of
scanning pages at the
14
14
14
scanning
pages at
Black Mode in the
Copier Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
Counter
0
SYS
Black Mode in
Copier Func-
tion
Counter
0
SYS
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08-
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
328-0
328-1
328-2
Counter Display of
number of
Large
Small
Total
FAX
FAX
FAX
0
SYS Counts the number of
scanning pages in the
14
14
14
<8 digits>
scanning
pages in FAX
FAX Function according
to its size (large/small).
Large:
Counter
0
SYS
<8 digits>
Function
Counter
0
SYS
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08-
353
<8 digits>
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 108
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
0
329-0
329-1
329-2
Counter Display of
number of
Counter
Large
Small
Total
SCN
SYS Counts the number of
scanning pages in the
SYS
14
14
14
(black) <8 digits>
SCN
(black) <8 digits>
SCN
(black) <8 digits>
scanning
pages in
Scanning
Function
Scanning Function
according to its size
(large/small).
Large:
0
2
Counter
0
SYS
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08-
353
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
330-0
330-1
330-2
Counter Display of
number of
Large
Small
Total
FAX
FAX
FAX
0
SYS Counts the number of
transmitted pages in the
14
14
14
<8 digits>
transmitted
pages in FAX
Function
FAX Function according
to its size (large/small).
Large:
Counter
0
SYS
<8 digits>
Counter
0
SYS
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08-
353
<8 digits>
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
331
User
interface
Default setting of screen
ALL
0
SYS Sets the screen to be
displayed after the
auto-clear time has
passed or it has recov-
ered from the energy
saving mode or sleep
mode.
1
<0-3>
0: Copier 1: Fax
2: Scan 3: Box
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
FAX
FAX
FAX
able
value>
332-0
332-1
332-2
Counter Display of
number of
Counter
Large
Small
Total
0
SYS Counts the number of
received pages in the
SYS
14
14
14
<8 digits>
received
FAX Function according
to its size (large/small).
Large:
0
pages in FAX
Function
<8 digits>
Counter
0
SYS
Number of output
pages of large-sized
paper defined at 08-
353
<8 digits>
Small:
Number of output
pages other than
set as large-sized
paper
Total:
Total number out-
put pages of all
paper sizes.
333-0
333-1
333-2
334-0
334-1
334-2
335-0
335-1
335-2
342
Counter Display of
total number
Large
Small
Total
ALL
0
SYS Displays the total num-
ber of pages at Full
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
1
(color) <8 digits>
ALL
(color) <8 digits>
ALL
(color) <8 digits>
ALL
(color) <8 digits>
ALL
(color) <8 digits>
ALL
(color) <8 digits>
ALL
(black) <8 digits>
ALL
(black) <8 digits>
ALL
(black) <8 digits>
of pages at
Full Color
Mode
Color Mode in the
Copier/Printer/Scan-
ning Functions.
Counter
0
SYS
Counter
0
SYS
Counter Display of
total number
Large
Small
Total
0
SYS Displays the total num-
ber of pages at Twin
of pages at
Twin Color
Mode
Color Mode in the
Copier Function.
Counter
0
SYS
Counter
0
SYS
Counter Display of
total number
Large
Small
Total
0
SYS Displays the total num-
ber of pages at Black
of pages at
Black Mode
Mode in the Copier/
Printer/Scanning/FAX
Functions.
Counter
Counter
User
0
SYS
0
SYS
Displaying number of
PPC
0
SYS This setting is whether
the number of pages of
originals placed on the
original glass is dis-
played or not.
interface original pages placed on
original glass
<0-1>
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
343
User
interface
Black-free function
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
<0-1>
When "1" (enabled) is
set at this code, "1"
(black) is automatically
set at the code 08-588.
344
346
347
Counter Count setting of tab paper
(PM)
Counter Count setting of large-
sized paper (PM)
Counter Definition setting of large-
sized paper (PM)
ALL
ALL
ALL
1
M
M
M
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
0: A3/LD
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
FOLIO/COMP
1
1
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 110
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
ALL
ALL
ALL
able
value>
348
349
352
Counter Count setting of thick paper
(PM)
Counter Count setting of OHP film
(PM)
Counter Count setting of large-
sized paper (Fee charging
system counter)
1
M
M
M
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
0: Counted as 1
1: Counted as 2
2: Counted as 1
(Mechanicalcounter
is double counter)
1
1
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
JPN: 0
OTHER:
1
2
<0-2>
353
356
357
358
Counter Definition setting of large-
sized paper (Fee charging
system counter)
Counter Counter for upper drawer
feeding
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
M
M
M
M
0: A3/LD
1: A3/LD/B4/LG/
1
2
2
2
<0-1>
FOLIO/COMP/8k
0
Counts the number of
sheets fed from upper
drawer
Counts the number of
sheets fed from lower
drawer
Counts the number of
sheets fed from bypass
feed
Counts the number of
sheets fed from LCF
<8 digits>
Counter Counter for lower drawer
feeding
0
<8 digits>
Counter Counter for bypass feeding
Counter Counter for LCF feeding
0
<8 digits>
359
360
ALL
ALL
0
M
M
2
2
<8 digits>
Counter Counter for PFP upper
drawer feeding
0
Counts the number of
sheets fed from PFP
upper drawer
<8 digits>
370
372
Counter Counter for PFP lower
drawer feeding
ALL
ALL
0
M
M
Counts the number of
sheets fed from PFP
lower drawer
Counts the number of
output pages of duplex
printing.
2
2
<8 digits>
Counter Counter for ADU
0
<8 digits>
374
375
Counter Counter for RADF
ALL
ALL
0
SYS Counts the number of
originals fed from RADF
2
1
<8 digits>
Refer to
content
Mainte- Setting value of PM time
M
<Default>
e-STUDIO281c
nance
counter display/0 clearing
<8 digits>
JPN:0
UC, EUR: 315,000
e-STUDIO351c
JPN:0
UC, EUR: 315,000
e-STUDIO451c
JPN: 0
UC, EUR: 315,000
376
381
Mainte- Current value of PM time
nance counter
Counter Setting for counter installed
externally
ALL
ALL
0
M
M
Counts the drum driving
time (main motor ON).
Selects the job to count
up for the external
counter.
1
1
<8 digits>
1
<0-7>
0: Not selected
1: Copier
2: FAX
3: Copier/FAX
4: Printer
5: Copier/Printer
6: Printer/FAX
7: Copier/Printer/FAX
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
PPC
FAX
SCN
PRT
ALL
able
value>
390
391
392
393
398
Counter Number of errors in HDD
(Copying)
Counter Number of errors in HDD
(FAX)
Counter Number of errors in HDD
(Scanning)
Counter Number of errors in HDD
(Printer)
0
SYS The number of error is
reset at HDD format-
2
2
2
2
2
<8 digits>
ting.
0
SYS
SYS
SYS
M
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
0
<8 digits>
Laser
Number of polygonal motor
rotational speed switching
0
Counts the number of
time the polygonal
motor has switched its
rotational speed
<8 digits>
between normal rota-
tion and standby rota-
tion
399
400
Laser
Fuser
Accumulated time of polyg-
onal motor at normal rota-
tion
ALL
ALL
0
M
M
Accumulates the time
the polygonal motor has
rotated at normal rota-
tion.
0: No error
1: C411 2: C412
2
1
<8 digits>
Fuser unit error status
counter
0
<0-29>
3: C433 4: -
5: C445 6: C446
7: C447 8: -
9: C449 10: C475
11: C471 12: C472
13: -
14: -
15: C480 16: -
17: C490 18: -
19: C449 20: -
21: C449 22: C449
23: C449 24: C447
25: C449 26: -
27: C449 28: -
29: C449
409
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature at
a energy saver mode
(Center thermistor)
ALL
13
<0-16>
M
0: OFF 1: 40°C
2: 45°C 3: 50°C
4: 55°C 5: 60°C
6: 65°C 7: 70°C
8: 75°C 9: 80°C
10: 85°C 11: 90°C
12: 95°C 13: 100°C
14: 105°C 15: 110°C
16:115°C
1
410-0
410-1
Fuser
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature
during printing (Center
thermistor/Plain paper)
ALL
(black)
12
<0-16>
M
M
0: 120°C 1: 125°C
2: 130°C 3: 135°C
4: 140°C 5: 145°C
6: 150°C 7: 155°C
8: 160°C 9: 165°C
10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: 180°C 13: 185°C
14: 190°C 15: 195°C
16: 200°C
4
4
ALL
(color)
11
<0-16>
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 112
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
411
Fuser
Fuser
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature on
standby (Center ther-
mistor)
ALL
12
<0-16>
M
0: 120°C 1: 125°C
2: 130°C 3: 135°C
4: 140°C 5: 145°C
6: 150°C 7: 155°C
8: 160°C 9: 165°C
10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: 180°C 13: 185°C
14: 190°C 15: 195°C
16: 200°C
0: 120°C 1: 125°C
2: 130°C 3: 135°C
4: 140°C 5: 145°C
6: 150°C 7: 155°C
8: 160°C 9: 165°C
10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: 180°C 13: 185°C
14: 190°C 15: 195°C
16: 200°C
0: 120°C 1: 125°C
2: 130°C 3: 135°C
4: 140°C 5: 145°C
6: 150°C 7: 155°C
8: 160°C 9: 165°C
10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: 180°C 13: 185°C
14: 190°C 15: 195°C
16: 200°C
1
2
412-0
412-1
Fuser roller temperature
during printing
(Center thermistor/Thick
ALL
(black)
12
<0-16>
M
M
4
4
paper 3)
ALL
(color)
12
<0-16>
413-0
413-1
Fuser roller temperature
during printing
(Center thermistor/Thick
paper 1)
ALL
(black)
12
<0-16>
M
M
4
4
ALL
(color)
12
<0-16>
415-0
Fuser
Fuser
Period of time retaining
print-start temperature
(Thick paper 3)
ALL
(black)
3
M
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec.
2: 2 sec 3: 3 sec
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec.
10: 10 sec.
0: 120°C 1: 125°C
2: 130°C 3: 135°C
4: 140°C 5: 145°C
6: 150°C 7: 155°C
8: 160°C 9: 165°C
10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: Invalid
4
<0-10>
415-1
416
ALL
(color)
2
M
M
4
1
<0-10>
Temperature setting to
start solving abnormality
(Center/Side thermistor/
Thick paper 3)
ALL
9
<0-12>
417-0
417-1
Fuser
Pre-running time for first
printing (Thick paper 3)
ALL
(black)
16
<0-16>
M
M
0: Invalid
2: 2 sec.
4: 4 sec.
6: 6 sec.
8: 8 sec.
10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec.
12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec.
14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec.
16: 30 sec.
1: 0 sec.
3: 3 sec.
5: 5 sec.
7: 7 sec.
9: 10 sec.
4
4
ALL
(color)
0
<0-16>
422
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature
setting at the end of pre-
running during warming-up
ALL
4
M
0: 120°C 1: 125°C
2: 130°C 3: 135°C
4: 140°C 5: 145°C
6: 150°C 7: 155°C
8: 160°C 9: 165°C
10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: 180°C 13: 185°C
14: 190°C 15: 195°C
16: 200°C
1
<0-16>
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
428-0
Fuser
Period of time retaining
print-start temperature
(Thick paper 2)
3
M
0: Invalid
1: 1 sec.
3: 3 sec.
5: 5 sec.
7: 7 sec.
9: 9 sec.
4
ALL
(black)
<0-10>
2: 2 sec.
4: 4 sec.
6: 6 sec.
8: 8 sec.
10: 10 sec.
428-1
2
M
4
ALL
(color)
<0-10>
430
431
Fuser
Transport motor speed
deceleration (OHP film)
Transport motor speed
deceleration
ALL
(color)
1
M
M
Sets deceleration ratio
of paper transport
speed.
1
1
<0-3>
1
<0-3>
ALL
(color)
0: 1/1
2: 1/3
1: 1/2
3: 1/4
(Thick paper 2)
432
436
Transport motor speed
deceleration
(Thick paper 3)
Temperature setting to
start solving abnormal-
ity(Center/Side thermistor/
Thick paper2)
2
M
M
1
1
ALL
(color)
<0-3>
Fuser
Fuser
ALL
9
0: 120°C 1: 125°C
2: 130°C 3: 135°C
4: 140°C 5: 145°C
6: 150°C 7: 155°C
8: 160°C 9: 165°C
10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: Invalid
0: 120°C 1: 125°C
2: 130°C 3: 135°C
4: 140°C 5: 145°C
6: 150°C 7: 155°C
8: 160°C 9: 165°C
10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: 180°C 13: 185°C
14: 190°C 15: 195°C
16: 200°C
<0-12>
437-0
437-1
Fuser roller temperature
during printing
(Center thermistor /Thick
paper 2)
ALL
(black)
12
<0-16>
M
M
4
4
ALL
(color)
12
<0-16>
438-0
438-1
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature
during printing (Center
thermistor/OHP film)
ALL
(black)
12
<0-16>
M
M
0: 120°C 1: 125°C
2: 130°C 3: 135°C
4: 140°C 5: 145°C
6: 150°C 7: 155°C
8: 160°C 9: 165°C
10: 170°C 11: 175°C
12: 180°C 13: 185°C
14: 190°C 15: 195°C
16: 200°C
4
4
ALL
(color)
10
<0-16>
439-0
439-1
Fuser
Pre-running time for first
printing (Thick paper 2)
ALL
(black)
14
<0-16>
M
M
0: Invalid 1: 0 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec.
10: 12 sec.
11: 14 sec.
12: 16 sec.
13: 18 sec.
4
4
ALL
(color)
0
<0-16>
14: 20 sec.
15: 25 sec.
16: 30 sec.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 114
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
440-0
Fuser
Fuser
Paper
Pre-running time for first
printing
(Plain paper/Low tempera-
ture environment)
ALL
(black)
12
<0-16>
M
0: Invalid 1: 0 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec.
10: 12 sec.
11: 14 sec.
12: 16 sec.
13: 18 sec.
14: 20 sec.
4
2
440-1
441-0
ALL
(color)
0
M
M
4
4
<0-16>
15: 25 sec.
16: 30 sec.
Pre-running time for first
printing (Thick paper 1)
ALL
(black)
9
0: Invalid 1: 0 sec.
2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec.
4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec.
6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec.
8: 8 sec. 9: 10 sec.
10: 12 sec.
11: 14 sec.
12: 16 sec.
13: 18 sec.
14: 20 sec.
15: 25 sec.
16: 30 sec.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
0: 0°C 1: 5°C
2: 9°C 3: 10°C
4: 12°C 5: 14°C
6: 15°C 7: 16°C
8: 17°C 9: 18°C
10: 19°C 11: 20°C
<0-16>
441-1
ALL
(color)
5
M
4
<0-16>
449
458
Switching for incorrect
ALL
ALL
0
M
M
1
1
feeding paper size jam detection
Fuser
<0-1>
6
<0-11>
Threshold for warming-up
temperature(Low-tempera-
ture environment)
459
Fuser
Warming-up time(Low-tem-
perature environment)
ALL
7
M
0: No warming-up
1: 30 sec. 2: 40 sec.
3: 50 sec. 4: 60 sec.
5: 70 sec. 6: 80 sec.
7: 90 sec.
1
<0-11>
8: 100 sec.
9: 120 sec.
10: 180 sec.
11: 300 sec.
460
461
Fuser
Fuser
Threshold of temperature
for pre-running time for first
printing(Low-temperature
environment)
ALL
ALL
9
M
M
0: 0°C 1: 5°C
2: 9°C 3: 10°C
4: 12°C 5: 14°C
6: 15°C 7: 16°C
8: 17°C 9: 18°C
10: 19°C 11: 20°C
0: Invalid (always)
1: 0 min. 2: 0.5 min.
3: 1 min. 4: 2 min.
5: 3 min. 6: 5 min.
7: 7 min. 8: 10 min.
9: 15 min. 10: 30 min.
11: 60 min.
1
1
<0-11>
Pre-running time for first
printing(Plain paper/Low-
temperature environment)
8
<0-11>
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
462
RADF
Setting for switchback
operation in mixed-size
copying using RADF
ALL
0
M
This setting is whether
the original length is
detected or not by
transporting without
scanning in reverse
when A4-R/FOLIO
paper or LT-R/LG paper
is detected in a mixed-
size copying.
1
<0-2>
0: Disabled -
AMS:
A series - Judges as
A4-R without trans-
porting in reverse
with no scanning.
LT series - Judges
whether it is LT-R or
LG by its length
without transporting
in reverse with no
scanning.
APS:
A series - Judges
whether it is A4-R or
FOLIO without
transporting in
reverse with no
scanning.
LT series - Judges
whether it is LT-R or
LG without trans-
porting in reverse
with no scanning.
1: Enable 1
AMS:
A series - Judges
whether it is A4-R or
FOLIO by transport-
ing without scanning
in reverse to detect
its length.
LT series - Judges
whether it is LT-R or
LG by transporting
without scanning in
reverse to detect its
length.
APS:
The same as that of
APS in 0: Disabled.
2: Enable 2
AMS/APS:
The same as that of
AMS in 1: Enable 1.
463-0
463-1
Paper
feeding number set-
ting (upper
Feeding retry Plain
ALL
ALL
5
M
M
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the upper
drawer.
4
4
paper
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
Others
drawer)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 116
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
able
value>
464-0
464-1
465-0
465-1
466-0
466-1
467-0
467-1
468-0
468-1
470
Paper
feeding number set-
Feeding retry Plain
5
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the lower
drawer.
4
4
paper
Others
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
5
ting (lower
drawer)
2
Paper
feeding number set-
ting (PFP
Feeding retry Plain
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
upper drawer.
4
paper
Others
4
upper drawer)
Paper
feeding number set-
ting (PFP
Feeding retry Plain
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
lower drawer.
4
paper
Others
4
lower drawer)
Paper
Feeding retry Plain
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the bypass
tray.
4
feeding number set-
ting (bypass
feed)
paper
Others
4
Paper
feeding number set-
ting (LCF)
Feeding retry Plain
Sets the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the LCF.
4
paper
Others
<0-5>
5
<0-5>
457/305
<148-
4
Paper
Paper size (305x457 mm)
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
10
457/105-
305>
471
478
Paper
Paper size (Post card)
ALL
ALL
148/100
<148-
432/100-
297>
M
M
*
Post card is sup-
ported only for JPN
model.
10
1
feeding feeding/widthwise direction
Laser
Laser
Judged number of polygo-
nal motor rotation error
(Normal rotation)
0
Displays the error
[CA10] when the set
number of rotation error
has been detected.
0: 2 times
<0-1>
1: 12 times
479
480
Judged number of polygo-
nal motor rotation error (At
acceleration/deceleration)
ALL
0
M
0: Waiting time for
polygonal motor
rotation overshoot-
ing 0.6 sec.
1: Waiting time for
polygonal motor
rotation overshoot-
ing 2.2 sec.
1
1
<0-1>
Paper
feeding source
Default setting of paper
PPC
0
SYS 0: A4/LT
1: LCF
<0-5>
2: Upper drawer
3: Lower drawer
4: PFP upper drawer
5: PFP lower drawer
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
481
Paper
feeding source
Automatic change of paper
PPC
1
SYS Sets whether or not
changing the drawer
automatically to the
other drawer with the
paper of the same size
when paper in the
selected drawer has run
out.
1
<0-2>
0: OFF
1: ON (Changes to the
drawer with the
same paper direc-
tion and size: ex. A4
to A4)
2: ON (Changes to the
drawer with the
same paper size.
Paper with the dif-
ferent direction is
acceptable as long
as the size is the
same: ex., A4 to A4-
R, LT-R to LT. “1” is
applied when the
staple/holepunch is
specified.)
482
483
Paper
feeding
Laser
Feeding retry setting
ALL
ALL
0
M
0: ON
1: OFF
1
1
<0-1>
0
<0-2>
Pre-running rotation of
polygonal motor
SYS Sets whether or not
switching the polygonal
motor from the standby
rotation to the normal
rotation when the origi-
nal is set on the RADF
or the platen cover is
opened.
0: Valid (when using
RADF and the origi-
nal is set manually)
1: Invalid
2: Valid (when using
RADF only)
484
485
Laser
Laser
Polygonal motor rotational
status switching at the Auto
Clear Mode
ALL
ALL
0
SYS Sets whether or not
switching the polygonal
motor from the normal
rotation to the standby
rotation at the Auto
Clear Mode.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
SYS Sets the rotational sta-
tus of polygonal motor
on standby.
1
1
<0-1>
Rotational status of polygo-
nal motor on standby
0
<0-1>
0: Rotated (The rota-
tional speed is set at
08-490.)
1: Stopped
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 118
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
486
Laser
Timing of auto-clearing of
polygonal motor pre-run-
ning rotation
ALL
0
SYS Switches the polygonal
motor to the standby
rotation when a certain
period of time has
passed from the pre-
running. At this code,
the period to switch the
status to the standby
rotation is set.
1
<0-2>
2
0: 15 sec.
1: 30 sec.
2: 45 sec.
*
This setting is effec-
tive when “0” or “2”
is set at 08-483.
487
Transfer Selection of performing the
2nd transfer roller cleaning
(Bypass feed)
ALL
0
M
0: Performs only at no
paper size is desig-
nated
1
<0-1>
1: Performsregardless
of designation of
paper size
488
489
Laser
Laser
Setting of polygonal motor
type
ALL
ALL
3
M
M
Set the type of polygo-
nal motor.
2: 2 clock type
3: 3 clock type
0: 38090.55rpm
1: 35000rpm
2: 30000rpm
3: 25000rpm
4: 20000rpm
5: 10000rpm
1
1
<2-3>
Polygonal motor rotation
number on standby
5
<0-5>
490
497
Laser
Polygonal motor rotation in
the energy saving mode
ALL
0
M
M
0: Stopped
1: 10000rpm.
Sets the speed for color
printing.
1
1
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
General Speed switching for color
printing
ALL
(color)
0: 11 pages/minute
1: 6 pages/minute
502
Image
Error diffusion and dither
setting at photo mode
PPC
(black)
0
SYS Sets the image repro-
duction method at
photo mode.
1
<0-1>
0: Error diffusion
1: Dither
503
511
User
Default setting of density
PPC
(black)
ALL
0
SYS 0: Automatic
1: Manual (Center)
1
1
4
4
interface adjustment
Main
charger cleaning setting
Fuser
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
16
Main charger wire auto-
M
M
M
0: Invalid
1: Valid
526-0
526-1
Pre-running time for first
printing
(OHP film)
ALL
(black)
ALL
(color)
0: Invalid
2: 2 sec.
4: 4 sec.
6: 6 sec.
8: 8 sec.
10: 12 sec.
11: 14 sec.
12: 16 sec.
13: 18 sec.
14: 20 sec.
15: 25 sec.
16: 30 sec.
1: 0 sec.
3: 3 sec.
5: 5 sec.
7: 7 sec.
9: 10 sec.
<0-16>
0
<0-16>
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
544
Image
Environment correction
ALL
1
M
Sets whether or not cor-
recting the 2nd transfer
roller bias depending on
the environment.
0: Invalid
1
1
1
control control of 2nd transfer
<0-1>
roller bias
1: Valid
545
546
Image
Transfer belt life correction
ALL
ALL
1
M
M
Sets whether or not cor-
recting the 2nd transfer
roller bias depending on
the transfer belt life.
0: Invalid
control of 2nd transfer roller bias
<0-1>
1: Valid
Image
2nd transfer roller life cor-
1
Sets whether or not cor-
recting the 2nd transfer
roller bias depending on
the 2nd transfer roller
life.
control rection of 2nd transfer
roller bias
<0-1>
0: Invalid
1: Valid
548
549
Transfer Setting of 2nd transfer
roller bias table (for each
destination/paper thick-
ness)
ALL
ALL
EUR:0
UC:1
JPN:2
<0-2>
M
M
0:80 g/m2 (21.3 lb.)/
EUR
1: 75 g/m2 (20 lb.)/UC
2: 64 g/m2 (17.1 lb.)/
JPN
Sets whether or not
performing the open-
loop control 1.The
open-loop control 1 is
performed in advance
of the closed-loop con-
trol.
1
1
Image
Image quality control/open-
1
control loop control 1
<0-1>
0: Invalid
1: Valid
550
551
Image
Image
Default setting of Original
mode
PPC
(black)
0
SYS 0: Text/Photo
1: Photo
1
1
<0-3>
2: Text
3: Gray Scale
Image quality control/open-
ALL
1
M
Sets whether or not
performing the open-
loop control 2.The
open-loop control 2 is
performed before or
during printing.
control loop control 2
<0-1>
0: Invalid
1: Valid
552
Image
control
Drum life correction control
ALL
1
M
Sets whether or not cor-
recting the drum volt-
age depending on the
drum life in open-loop
control.
1
<0-1>
0: Invalid
1: Valid
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 120
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
553
Image
control tion control
Drum temperature correc-
ALL
1
M
Sets whether or not cor-
recting the drum volt-
age depending on the
drum surface tempera-
ture in open-loop con-
trol.
1
<0-1>
2
0: Invalid
1: Valid
554
555
Image
Image quality open-loop
ALL
ALL
1
M
M
Sets whether or not
deciding the initial value
of contrast voltage in
open-loop control.
0: Invalid
1
1
control control/Contrast voltage
initial value
<0-1>
1: Valid
Image
Drum life correction of
1
Sets whether or not cor-
recting the laser power
depending on the drum
life when the laser
power initial value is set
in open-loop control.
0: Invalid
control laser power initial value
<0-1>
1: Valid
556
Image
Image quality closed-loop
ALL
1
M
Sets whether or not cor-
recting the contrast volt-
age in closed-loop
control.
1
control control/Contrast voltage
<0-1>
0: Invalid
1: Valid
557
558
Image
Image quality closed-loop
ALL
ALL
1
M
M
Sets whether or not cor-
recting the laser power
in closed-loop control.
0: Invalid
1
1
control control/Laser power
<0-1>
1: Valid
Image
Contrast voltage/Correc-
1
Sets whether or not
switching the correc-
tion amount once at
contrast voltage correc-
tion depending on the
environment.
control tion gain environment set-
<0-1>
ting
0: Invalid
1: Valid
559
Image
Image quality closed-loop
ALL
(color)
1
M
Sets whether perform-
ing closed-loop control
automatically at power-
ON when the fuser
roller temperature
becomes below the
specified level.
1
control control automatic start-up/
At power-ON
<0-2>
0: Invalid
1: Valid (at mode 1)
2: Valid (at mode 2)
560
Imagel Process switching for
image smoothing (Text/
Photo)
PPC
(black)
1
M
Sets whether or not
performing a smooth-
ing process (primary
scanning direction,
2,400 dpi or equiva-
lent).
1
<0-1>
0: Invalid
1: Valid
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
561
Image
Image
Process switching for
image smoothing (Photo)
PPC
(black)
0
M
Sets whether or not
performing a smooth-
ing process (primary
scanning direction,
2,400 dpi or equiva-
lent).
1
<0-1>
562
565
Process switching for
image smoothing (Text)
PPC
(black)
1
M
M
1
<0-1>
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Image
Image quality closed-loop
ALL
(color)
1
Sets whether or not
performing closed-loop
control automatically
when the relative
humidity becomes
below the specified
level from the previous
control.
1
control control automatic start-up/
Relative humidity variation
<0-2>
0: Invalid
1: Valid (at mode 1)
2: Valid (at mode 2)
566
Image
Image quality closed-loop
ALL
(color)
1
M
Sets whether or not
performing closed-loop
control automatically
when the equipment
has not been used for a
specified period of time.
0: Invalid
1
control control automatic start-up/
Period of time unattended
<0-2>
1: Valid (at mode 1)
2: Valid (at mode 2)
567
Image
Image quality closed-loop
ALL
(color)
2
M
Sets whether or not
performing closed-loop
control automatically
when the specified
number of sheets has
been printed out from
the previous control.
0: Invalid
1
control control automatic start-up/
<0-2>
Accumulated print volume
1: Valid (at mode 1)
2: Valid (at mode 2)
568
Image
Image quality closed-loop
ALL
(color)
2
M
Sets whether or not
performing closed-loop
control automatically
when recovered from
“Toner empty”.
1
control control automatic start-up/
<0-2>
When recovered from
“Toner empty”
0: Invalid
1: Valid (at mode 1)
2: Valid (at mode 2)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 122
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
569
Image
Image quality closed-loop
ALL
(color)
8
M
Sets the fuser roller
temperature to perform
closed-loop control
when “1” or “2” (valid) is
set in 08-559.
1
control control automatic start-up/
<0-20>
Temperature setting of
fuser roller at power-ON
2
0: 20°C 1: 25°C
2: 30°C 3: 35°C
4: 40°C 5: 45°C
6: 50°C 7: 55°C
8: 60°C 9: 65°C
10: 70°C 11: 75°C
12: 80°C 13: 85°C
14: 90°C 15: 95°C
16: 100°C 17: 105°C
18: 110°C 19: 115°C
20: 120°C
570
Image
Image quality closed-loop
ALL
(color)
4
M
Sets the relative humid-
ity difference to per-
form the closed-loop
control when “1” or “2”
(valid) is set in 08-565.
1
control control automatic start-up/
Relative humidity differ-
ence setting
<0-6>
0: 0%
1: 5%
3: 15%
5: 25%
2: 10%
4: 20%
6: 30%
571
572
Image
Image quality closed-loop
ALL
(color)
4
M
M
Sets the period of time
unattended to perform
closed-loop control
when “1” or “2” (valid) is
set in 08-566.
1
1
control control automatic start-up/
Setting of period of time
unattended
<0-24>
Setting value x 1 (hour)
Image
Image quality closed-loop
ALL
(color)
10
<0-30>
Sets the number of
accumulated print vol-
ume to perform closed-
loop control when “1” or
“2” (valid) is set in 08-
567.
control control automatic start-up/
Setting of accumulated
print volume
Setting value x 100
(pages)
573
574
575
576
Image
control count (Y)
Display/0 clearing
Abnormality detection
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
M
M
M
M
Counts the abnormality
detection of image qual-
ity control. Accumulat-
ing total of [CE10],
1
1
1
1
<0-16>
[CE20] and [CE40]
Image
control count (M)
Display/0 clearing
Abnormality detection
0
Counts the abnormality
detection of image qual-
ity control. Accumulat-
ing total of [CE10],
<0-16>
[CE20] and [CE40]
Image
control count (C)
Display/0 clearing
Abnormality detection
0
Counts the abnormality
detection of image qual-
ity control. Accumulat-
ing total of [CE10],
<0-16>
[CE20] and [CE40]
Image
control count (K)
Display/0 clearing
Abnormality detection
0
Counts the abnormality
detection of image qual-
ity control. Accumulat-
ing total of [CE10],
<0-16>
[CE20] and [CE40]
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
583-0
Fuser
Pre-running
time at power- motor
ON and ready speed 1/1
status
Transport
ALL
1
M
0: 3 sec.
2: 9 sec.
4: 15 sec. 5: 18 sec.
6: 21 sec. 7: 24 sec.
8: 27 sec. 9: 30 sec.
10: 33 sec.
1: 6 sec.
3: 12 sec.
4
4
4
1
1
<0-10>
583-1
583-2
584
Transport
motor
speed 1/2
Transport
motor
speed 1/3
ALL
ALL
ALL
4
M
M
M
<0-10>
7
<0-10>
Fuser
User
Transport motor speed of
pre-running at ready status
0
0: Decelerating to 1/1
1: Decelerating to 1/2
2: Decelerating to 1/3
<0-2>
585
Default setting of Original
PPC
(color)
0
SYS 0: Text/Photo
1: Text
interface mode
<0-4>
2: Printed image
3: Photo
4: Map
586
Image
Image quality switching
when selecting the Image
Smoothing Mode
PPC
(black)
0
SYS Selects the method of
image processing when
the Image Smoothing is
selected in the original
modes.
1
<0-1>
0: Processing for
Image Smoothing
1: Processing when
judging as black in
the ACS Mode
587
588
User
interface mode
User
interface mode
Default setting of Density
PPC
(color)
PPC
1
SYS 0: Automatic
1: Manual (Center)
SYS 0: Auto color
1: Black
1
1
<0-1>
1
<0-2>
Default setting of Color
2: Full color
589
Image
Image quality switching
when judging as black in
the ACS Mode
PPC
(black)
1
SYS Selects the method of
image processing when
the original is judged as
black in the ACS Mode.
0: Processing for
1
<0-1>
Image Smoothing
1: Processing when
judging as black in
the ACS Mode
595
Image
Scanning operation switch- PPC
ing at automatic calibration (color)
0
SYS 0: Scanning color/
black integrated pat-
tern
1
<0-1>
1: Scanning color pat-
tern only
597
602
Image
User
Gamma correction table all
clearing
PRT
(color)
-
SYS Initializes the status of
automatic gamma
adjustment in color
printing.
SYS 0: OFF
1: ON
3
1
Screen setting for auto-
ALL
EUR:0
UC:1
JPN:1
interface matic energy saver/auto-
matic power OFF
<0-1>
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 124
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
603
User
Setting for automatic
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Single-sided to
1
interface duplexing mode
<0-3>
duplex copying
2: Two-sided to duplex
copying
2
3: User selection
604
User
interface AMS
Default setting for APS/
ALL
0
SYS 0: APS (Automatic
Paper Selection)
1: AMS (Automatic
Magnification Selec-
tion)
1
<0-2>
2: Not selected
605
607
User
Centering printing of pri-
PPC
PPC
1
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
1
interface mary/secondary direction
at AMS
User
<0-1>
Default setting of RADF
0
SYS 0: Continuous feeding
(by pressing the
interface mode
<0-1>
[START] button)
1: Single feeding
(by setting original
on the tray)
609-0
609-1
609-2
609-3
609-4
610
Image
Binarizing
Step -2
Step -1
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
PPC
88
<0-255>
108
<0-255>
148
<0-255>
178
<0-255>
SYS Sets the binarizing level
of each step.
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
level setting
(When judg-
ing as black in
the ACS
When the value
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
increases, the image
becomes darker. When
the value decreases,
the image becomes
lighter.
Step 0
(center)
Step +1
Mode)
*
Refer to 08-268.
Step +2
208
<0-255>
User
interface
User
Key touch sound of control
panel
1
SYS 0: OFF
1: ON
<0-1>
611
Book type original priority
0
SYS 0: Left page to right
<0-1>
page
interface
1: Right page to left
page
612
613
General Summer time mode
User Paper size selection for
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not summer time
1: Summer time
SYS Press the icon on the
LCD to select the size.
1
9
<0-1>
PPC EUR:
FOLIO
UC:
COMP
JPN:
A5-R
interface [OTHER] button
614
Network Local I/F time-out period
ALL
6
SYS Sets the period of time
when the job is judged
as completed in local I/
F printing (USB or par-
allel).
1
<1-50>
1: 1.0 sec.
2: 1.5 sec.
50: 25.5 sec.
(in increments of 0.5
sec.)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
-
615
General Size information of main
memory and page memory
ALL
SYS Displays the sizes of
the main memory and
page memory. Enables
to check if each mem-
ory is properly recog-
nized.
SYS Sets the counting
method in Twin Color
Mode with the Limita-
tion Function.
2
1
1
616
Counter Counting method in Twin
Color Mode
ALL
JPN: 1
UC: 0
EUR: 0
(Limitation Function)
<0-1>
0: Count as color
1: Count as black
617
User
Print setting without
ALL
1
SYS 0: Printed forcibly
1: Not printed
interface department code
<0-2>
2: Deleted forcibly
618
619
User
Default setting of RADF
PPC
ALL
0
SYS 0: Same size originals
1: Mixed size originals
1
1
interface original size
Paper
feeding of bypass feeding
<0-1>
4
<0-10>
Time lag before auto-start
SYS Sets the time taken to
add paper feeding
when paper in the
bypass tray has run out
during the bypass feed
copying.
0: Paper is not drawn
in unless the
[START] button is
pressed.
1-10: Setting value x
0.5sec.
620
621
622
623
624
625
User
interface
Department management
setting (Copier)
Department management
setting (FAX)
PPC
FAX
PRT
SCN
PRT
PPC
1
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
1
1
1
1
1
<0-1>
User
interface
1
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
<0-1>
User
interface
User
interface
Department management
setting (Printer)
1
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
<0-1>
Department management
setting (Scanner)
1
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
<0-1>
User
Department management
1
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
interface setting (List print)
User
interface mode during RADF jam-
ming
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
Blank copying prevention
SYS 0: OFF
1: ON (Start printing
when the scanning
of each page is fin-
ished)
627
628
629
632
User
Rotation printing at the
ALL
PPC
ALL
PPC
0
SYS 0: Not rotating
1: Rotating
SYS 0: Automatic
1: Portrait
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS Sets the disclosing level
of automatic calibration.
0: Service technician
1: Administrator
1
1
1
1
interface nonsorting
User
interface image
User
interface setting
User
interface closure level
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
1
<0-2>
Direction priority of original
Department management
Automatic calibration dis-
2: User
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 126
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
633
Data
overwrite call
Releasing F200 service
0
0: Not used
1: Board installed
ALL
SYS
1
<0-2>
kit
2: Service call
634
636
User
Inner receiving tray priority
ALL
0
SYS 0: Normal
1: Inner receiving tray
SYS 0: ON
1: OFF
1
1
2
interface at Non-sort Mode
User
interface shift copying (linkage of
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
Width setting for image
PPC
front side and back side)
638
General Time differences
ALL
EUR: 24 SYS 0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h
1
UC: 40
JPN: 6
<0-47>
2: +11.0h 3: +10.5h
4: +10.0h 5: 9.5h
6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h
8: +8.0h 9: +7.5h
10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h
12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h
14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h
16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h
18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h
20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h
22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h
24: 0.0h 25:-0.5h
26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h
28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h
30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h
32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h
34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h
36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h
38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h
40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h
42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h
44: -10.0h 45: -10.5h
46: -11.0h 47: -11.5h
640
641
User
interface
Date display format
ALL
EUR:1
UC:2
JPN:0
<0-2>
SYS 0: YYYY.MM.DD.
1: DD.MM.YYYY
1
1
2: MM.DD.YYYY
User
Automatic Sorting Mode
PPC
2
SYS 0: Invalid
1: STAPLE
interface setting (RADF)
<0-4>
2: SORT
3: GROUP
4: ROTATE SORT
642
User
interface Mode
Default setting of Sorter
PPC
0
SYS 0: NON-SORT
1: STAPLE
1
<0-4>
2: SORT
3: GROUP
4: ROTATE SORT
643
644
User
Color 1 at twin color selec-
PPC
(color)
0
SYS 0: K 1: Y 2: M
3: C 4: R 5: G
6: B
SYS 0: K 1: Y 2: M
3: C 4: R 5: G
6: B
1
1
interface tion (Select what color
black in original is copied)
User
interface tion (Select what color
other than black in original
is copied)
<0-6>
Color 2 at twin color selec-
PPC
(color)
4
<0-6>
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 127
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
645
User
Correction of reproduction
PPC
10
<0-10>
SYS Sets the reproduction
ratio for the “X in 1”
printing (including mag-
azine sort) to the
1
interface ratio in editing copy
“Reproduction ratio x
Correction ratio”.
0: 90% 1: 91%
2: 92% 3: 93%
4: 94% 5: 95%
6: 96% 7: 97%
8: 98% 9: 99%
10: 100%
646
648
649
User
interface
Image position in editing
Returning finisher tray
PPC
ALL
0
SYS Sets the page pasted
position for “X in 1” to
the upper left corner/
center.
0: Cornering
1: Centering
SYS Sets whether or not
returning the finisher
tray to the bin 1 when
printing is finished.
0: Not returned
1
1
1
<0-1>
User
0
interface when printing is finished
<0-1>
1: Returned
SYS 0: Left page to right
User
interface
Magazine sort setting
PPC
0
<0-1>
page
1: Right page to left
page
650
651
User
2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating
PPC
PPC
0
SYS 0: Horizontal
1: Vertical
SYS Hyphen
(with page number)
/Dropout
1
1
interface order setting
User
interface Time Stamp and Page
<0-1>
2
<0-3>
Printing format setting for
Number
(with date, time and
page number)
0: OFF/OFF
1: ON/OFF
2: OFF/ON
3: ON/ON
Note:
Hyphen printing
format
ON: -1- OFF: 1
652
653
657
User
interface
User
interface
Cascade operation setting
Cascade operation setting
Default setting of printing
PPC
PRT
PPC
0
SYS 0: OFF
1
1
1
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
1: ON
SYS 0: OFF
1: ON
SYS 0: Short edge
1: Long edge
User
interface direction for Time Stamp
and Page Number
<0-1>
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 128
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/07
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
658
User
Auto-start setting for
PRT
0
SYS Sets whether or not
feeding a paper auto-
matically into the copier
when it is placed on the
bypass tray.
1
interface bypass feed printing
<0-1>
2
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatical
feeding)
659
User
Auto-start setting for
PPC
1
SYS Sets whether or not
feeding a paper auto-
matically into the copier
when it is placed on the
bypass tray.
1
interface bypass feed printing
<0-1>
0: OFF (Press the
[START] button to
start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatical
feeding)
660
661
662
Network Auto-forwarding setting of
received FAX
Network Auto-forwarding setting of
received E-mail
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS Clears SMS partition.
(Performs when the
service call [F106] has
occurred.)
1
1
3
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
General Clearing of SMS partition
-
663
Counter Counting method in Twin
Color Mode
PPC
0
SYS Sets the counting
method of fee charging
or department count in
Twin Color Mode.
0: Count as Twin Color
Mode
1
<0-2>
1: Count as Black
Mode
2: Count as Full Color
Mode
M/SYS all clearing
ALL
M/
SYS
Initializes all the adjust-
ment modes and setting
modes.
3
665
General
-
666
667
669
670
General BOX partition clearing
General /SHA partition clearing
General System all clearing
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
SYS Initializes the Elec-
tronic Filing.
SYS Initializes the shared
folder.
SYS Initializes system
NVRAM area.
SYS Display the HDD infor-
3
3
3
2
General HDD diagnostic menu dis-
play
mation
671
User
interface
Size indicator
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
<0-1>
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 129
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
-
672
General Initialization of department
management information
-
SYS Initializing of the depart-
ment management
information
3
*
Enter the code with
the digital keys and
press the [INITIAL-
IZE] button to per-
form the
initialization.
If the area storing
the department
management infor-
mation is destroyed
for some reason,
“Enter Department
Code” is displayed
on the control panel
even if the depart-
ment management
function is not set
on. In this case, ini-
tialize the area with
this code. This area
is normally initial-
ized at the factory.
675-0
675-1
Paper
feeding Mode setting
for paper
Coated Paper Upper
ALL
ALL
0
SYS Sets whether or not
applying the Coated
Paper Mode to each
paper source.
4
4
drawer
<0-1>
source
0: Normal mode
1: Coated Paper Mode
Lower
drawer
0
SYS
*
Coated Paper Mode
- This mode is
<0-1>
selected when the
paper which often
causes the misfeed-
ing (ex. coated
paper) is used. The
occurrence of mis-
feeding is reduced
by lengthening the
jam detection time.
However, the print-
ing speed is low-
ered since the
675-2
675-3
675-4
PFPupper
drawer
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
SYS
SYS
SYS
4
4
4
<0-1>
PFP lower
drawer
0
<0-1>
LCF
0
<0-1>
printing cycle is also
lengthened with the
lengthened jam
detection time.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 130
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
676
Paper
Bypass copy printing
PPC
0
SYS Sets whether or not dis-
playing the [COATED]
button on the LCD
screen at bypass feed-
ing.
1
feeding [COATED] button display
<0-1>
2
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed (The
Coated Paper Mode
is applied by press-
ing the [COATED]
button at bypass
feeding.)
*
Coated Paper Mode
- This mode is
selected when the
paper which often
causes the misfeed-
ing (ex. coated
paper) is used. The
occurrence of mis-
feeding is reduced
by lengthening the
jam detection time.
However, the print-
ing speed is low-
ered since the
printing cycle is also
lengthened with the
lengthened jam
detection time.
677-0
677-1
677-2
677-3
677-4
677-5
Paper
feeding Mode setting
at bypass
Coated Paper Plain
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
PRT
0
SYS Sets whether or not
applying the Coated
4
4
4
4
4
4
paper
<0-1>
Paper Mode on each
paper type at bypass
feeding
printing.
0: Normal mode
1: Coated Paper Mode
Thick
paper 1
0
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
<0-1>
*
Coated Paper Mode
- This mode is
Thick
paper 2
0
selected when the
paper which often
causes the misfeed-
ing (ex. coated
paper) is used. The
occurrence of mis-
feeding is reduced
by lengthening the
jam detection time.
However, the print-
ing speed is low-
ered since the
<0-1>
Thick
paper 3
0
<0-1>
OHP film
Envelop
0
<0-1>
0
printing cycle is also
lengthened with the
lengthened jam
<0-1>
detection time.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
678
General Setting of banner advertis-
ing display
ALL
0
SYS Sets whether or not dis-
playing the banner
1
<0-1>
advertising. The setting
contents of 08-679 and
08-680 are displayed at
the time display section
on the right top of the
screen. When both are
set, each content is dis-
played alternately.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
679
680
681
General Banner advertising display
1
General Banner advertising display
2
General Display of [BANNER MES-
SAGE] button
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
SYS Maximum 27 letters
(one-byte character)
SYS Maximum 27 letters
(one-byte character)
SYS 0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
11
11
1
0
<0-1>
*
This button enables
the entry of “Banner
advertising display 1
(08-679)” and “Ban-
ner advertising dis-
play 2 (08-680)” on
the control panel.
682
683
Use
interface
General Duplex printing setting
when coin controller is
used
Offsetting between jobs
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
SYS When the duplex print-
ing is short paid with a
coin controller, reverse
side of the original is
not printed and is con-
sidered as a defect
(printing job may be
cleared). To solve this
problem, the selection
of printing method is
enabled with this set-
ting.
0: Invalid (Both sides
printed)
1: Valid (Only one side
printed)
684
685
General Rebuilding all databases
General Rebuilding all databases
related to Address Book
ALL
ALL
-
-
SYS Rebuilds all databases.
3
3
SYS Rebuilds all databases
related to the Address
Book.
686
689
General Rebuilding all databases
related to log
ALL
FAX
-
SYS Rebuilds all databases
related to the logs.
SYS 0: Not subjected for
APS judgment
3
1
FAX
Adaptation of paper source
priority selection
0
<0-1>
1: Subjected for APS
judgment
690
691
General HDD formatting
General HDD type display
ALL
ALL
-
SYS 2: Normal formatting
7
7
<2>
-
<0-2>
SYS 0: Not formatted
1: Not used
2: Normal format
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 132
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/07
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
-
692
Mainte- Performing panel calibra-
nance tion
ALL
SYS Performs the calibration
of the pressing position
on the touch panel
1
(LCD screen). The cali-
bration is performed by
pressing 2 reference
positions after this code
is started up.
2
693
General Initialization of NIC infor-
mation
ALL
-
-
SYS Returns the value to the
factory shipping default
value.
3
694
696
General Performing HDD testing
Scram- Installation of scrambler
ALL
ALL
SYS Checks the bad sector.
3
2
0
-
0: Not installed
1: Installed
bler
board (Option)
<0-1>
board
697
698
Paper
feeding
Paper type priority
PPC
ALL
1
SYS Sets the paper type pri-
ority during copying.
1: Normal paper
1
5
<1-2>
2: Thick paper 1
Scram- Entering the key code for
bler
board
-
-
-
Start up this code and
have the user enter the
key code.
scrambler board
Once the key code has
been set, this code can-
not be set again on
security grounds.
699
701
Scram- Erasing all data in HDD
bler
board
FAX
ALL
FAX
-
This setting is effective
only when the scram-
bler board is installed.
3
1
Destination setting for FAX
EUR: 5
UC: 4
SYS 0: Japan
1: Asia
JPN: 0
Other: 1
<0-25>
2: Australia
3: Hong Kong
4: U.S.A./Canada
5: Germany
6: U.K.
7: Italy
8: Belgium
9: Netherlands
10: Finland
11: Spain
12: Austria
13: Switzerland
14: Sweden
15: Denmark
16: Norway
17: Portugal
18: France
19: Greece
20: Poland
21: Hungary
22: Czech
23: Turkey
24: South Africa
25: Taiwan
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
702
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance function
ALL
2
SYS 0: Valid (Remote-con-
trolled server)
1
<0-2>
1: Valid (L2)
2: Invalid
703
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
ALL
-
SYS Maximum 256 Bytes
11
11
nance
HTTP server
URL setting
704-0
Interruption of Copying
stapling oper-
ation (no sta-
ple)
1
SYS 0: Continues printing
by switching sort
<0-1>
setting
1: Interrupts printing
704-1
707
Printing /
BOX print-
ing
ALL
ALL
1
SYS 0: Continues printing
by switching sort
setting
1: Interrupts printing
SYS Maximum 256 Bytes
4
<0-1>
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
https://
device.mf
p-sup-
11
nance
HTTP initially-registered
server
URL setting
port.com:
443/
device/fir-
streg-
ist.ashx
710
Mainte- Short time interval setting
nance of recovery from Emer-
(Remote) gency Mode
ALL
24
<1-48>
SYS Sets the time interval to
recover from the Emer-
gency Mode to the Nor-
mal Mode.
1
(Unit: Hour)
711
715
Mainte- Short time interval setting
ALL
ALL
60
<30-360>
1230
SYS Unit: Minute
1
1
nance
of Emergency Mode
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
SYS 0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59)
nance
periodical polling timing
(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
716
717
718
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: Prohibited
1: Accepted
1
1
1
nance
Writing data of self-diag-
nostic code
<0-1>
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
3
SYS Unit: Minute
nance
response waiting time
(Timeout)
<1-30>
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance initial registration
0
SYS 0: OFF
1: Start
<0-2>
2: Only certification is
scanned
719
720
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance tentative password
Mainte- Status of remote-con-
ALL
ALL
-
SYS Maximum 10 letters
11
2
0
SYS 0: Not registered
1: Registered
nance
trolled service initial regis-
tration (Display only)
<0-1>
721
Mainte- Service center call function
nance
ALL
2
SYS 0: OFF
1: Notifies all service
calls
1
<0-2>
2: Notifies all but
paper jams
723
726
Mainte- Service center call HTTP
ALL
ALL
-
SYS Maximum 256 letters
11
1
nance
server URL setting
Mainte- HTTP proxy setting
nance
1
SYS 0: Valid
1: Invalid
<0-1>
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 134
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
-
727
Mainte- HTTP proxy IP address
nance setting
ALL
SYS 000.000.000.000 -
255.255.255.255
(Default value
11
000.000.000.000)
2
728
Mainte- HTTP proxy port number
nance setting
ALL
0
<0-
SYS
1
65535>
729
730
731
732
Mainte- HTTP proxy ID setting
nance
Mainte- HTTP proxy password set-
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
SYS Maximum 30 letters
SYS Maximum 30 letters
11
11
1
nance
ting
Mainte- HTTP proxy panel display
nance
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-
1
SYS 0: Valid
1: Invalid
SYS 0: Ordered by FAX
1: Ordered by E-mail
2: Ordered by HTTP
3: OFF
<0-1>
3
<0-3>
1
nance
tion of supplies
(Remote)
733
734
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-
nance tion of supplies
(Remote) FAX number
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
SYS Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[Monitor/Pause] button
SYS Maximum 192 letters
List: 256 digits
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-
nance
tion of supplies
(Remote) E-mail address
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-
SYS Maximum 50 letters
nance
tion of supplies
(Remote) User's name
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-
SYS Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[Monitor/Pause] button
SYS Maximum 192 letters
List: 256 digits
nance
tion of supplies
(Remote) User's telephone number
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-
nance
tion of supplies
(Remote) User's E-mail address
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-
SYS Maximum 100 letters
SYS Maximum 5 digits
SYS Maximum 50 letters
nance
tion of supplies
(Remote) User's address
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-
nance
tion of supplies
(Remote) Service number
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-
nance
tion of supplies
(Remote) Service technician's name
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-
SYS Maximum 32 digits
Enter hyphen with the
[Monitor/Pause] button
nance
tion of supplies
(Remote) Service technician's tele-
phone number
745
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-
ALL
SYS Maximum 192 letters
List: 256 digits
11
nance
tion of supplies
(Remote) Service technician's E-mail
address
746
747
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-
ALL
ALL
SYS Maximum 50 letters
SYS Maximum 100 letters
11
11
nance
tion of supplies
(Remote) Supplier's name
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-
nance
tion of supplies
(Remote) Supplier's address
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
748
Mainte- Automatic ordering func-
nance tion of supplies
(Remote) Notes
ALL
SYS Maximum 128 letters
11
11
1
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
Mainte- Information about supplies
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
SYS Maximum 20 digits
nance
Part number of toner car-
(Remote) tridge C
Mainte- Information about supplies
1
SYS
nance
Order quantity of toner car-
<1-99>
(Remote) tridge C
Mainte- Information about supplies
1
SYS
1
nance
Condition number of toner
<1-99>
(Remote) cartridge C
Mainte- Information about supplies
SYS Maximum 20 digits
11
1
nance
Part number of toner car-
(Remote) tridge M
Mainte- Information about supplies
1
SYS
nance
Order quantity of toner car-
<1-99>
(Remote) tridge M
Mainte- Information about supplies
1
SYS
1
nance
Condition number of toner
<1-99>
(Remote) cartridge M
Mainte- Information about supplies
-
SYS Maximum 20 digits
11
1
nance
Part number of toner car-
(Remote) tridge Y
Mainte- Information about supplies
1
SYS
nance
Order quantity of toner car-
<1-99>
(Remote) tridge Y
Mainte- Information about supplies
1
SYS
1
nance
Condition number of toner
<1-99>
(Remote) cartridge Y
Mainte- Information about supplies
-
SYS Maximum 20 digits
11
1
nance
Part number of toner car-
(Remote) tridge K
Mainte- Information about supplies
1
SYS
nance
Order quantity of toner car-
<1-99>
(Remote) tridge K
Mainte- Information about supplies
1
SYS
1
nance
Condition number of toner
<1-99>
(Remote) cartridge K
Mainte- Information about supplies
-
SYS Maximum 20 digits
11
1
nance
Part number of toner bag
(Remote)
Mainte- Information about supplies
1
SYS
SYS
nance
Order quantity of toner bag
<1-99>
(Remote)
Mainte- Information about supplies
nance Condition number of toner
(Remote) bag
Mainte- Automatic ordering sup-
1
1
<1-99>
1
SYS 0: OFF
1: Always
1
nance
plies
<0-2>
(Remote) Result table printout
Mainte- Automatic ordering sup-
2: ON Error
2
SYS 0: Valid
(FAX/Internet FAX)
1: Valid
1
nance
plies
<0-2>
(Remote) Display
(FAX/Internet FAX/
HTTP)
2: Invalid
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 136
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
767
Mainte- Service Notification setting
nance
ALL
0
SYS Enables to set up to 3
E-mail
1
<0-2>
(Remote)
addresses to be sent.
(08-768, 777, 778)
0: Invalid
2
1: Valid (E-mail)
2: Valid (FAX)
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
Mainte- Destination E-mail address
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
SYS Maximum 192 letters
11
1
nance
1
(Remote)
Mainte- Total counter information
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
nance
transmission setting
<0-1>
(Remote)
Mainte- Total counter transmission
1
SYS 1 to 31
1
nance
date setting
<1-31>
(Remote)
Mainte- PM counter notification set-
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
nance
ting
<0-1>
(Remote)
Mainte- Dealer's name
nance
-
-
SYS Maximum 100 letters
Needed at initial regis-
tration
SYS Maximum 20 letters
Needed at initial regis-
tration
11
11
1
Mainte- Login name
nance
Mainte- Display setting of [Service
0
SYS 0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
nance
Notification] button
<0-1>
(Remote)
Mainte- Sending error contents of
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
nance
equipment
<0-1>
(Remote)
Mainte- Setting total counter trans-
nance mission interval
(Remote) (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
Mainte- Destination E-mail address
-
-
-
SYS
1
SYS Maximum 192 letters
SYS Maximum 192 letters
11
11
1
nance
2
(Remote)
Mainte- Destination E-mail address
nance
3
(Remote)
Mainte- Notification format selec-
0
SYS 0: Text
nance
tion
<0-1>
1: Text + XML data
(Remote)
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance polling day selection Day-1
0
SYS 0: OFF
1 to 31:
1
<0-31>
1st to 31st of a
month
781
782
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance polling day selection Day-2
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
1 to 31:
1st to 31st of a
month
SYS 0: OFF
1 to 31:
1
1
<0-31>
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance polling day selection Day-3
0
<0-31>
1st to 31st of a
month
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
783
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance polling day selection Day-4
ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
1 to 31:
1
<0-31>
1st to 31st of a
month
784
785
786
787
788
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
1
1
1
1
nance
polling day selection Sun-
day
<0-1>
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
nance
polling day selection Mon-
day
<0-1>
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
nance
polling day selection Tues-
day
<0-1>
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
nance
polling day selection
Wednesday
<0-1>
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
nance
polling day selection
Thursday
<0-1>
789
790
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
nance polling day selection Friday
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
1
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
nance
polling day selection Satur-
day
791
792
793
794
795
796
Mainte- Information of supplies set-
nance ting of toner cartridge C
Mainte- Information of supplies set-
nance ting of toner cartridge M
Mainte- Information of supplies set-
nance ting of toner cartridge Y
Mainte- Information of supplies set-
nance ting of toner cartridge K
Mainte- Information of supplies set-
nance ting of toner bag
Mainte- Remote-controlled service
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
1
1
1
1
1
1
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
nance
lengthened interval polling
(End of month)
797
815-0
815-1
815-2
816
Mainte- Firmware download
nance
ALL
0
SYS 0: Accepted
1: Prohibited
1
4
4
4
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
Image
Detection of
Y
M
C
ALL
(color)
ALL
(color)
ALL
(color)
ALL
ALL
ALL
M
M
M
M
0: ON
1: OFF
process- the status
ing
color toner is
nearly empty
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias
resistance detection con-
trol
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias
temperature detection con-
trol
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
<0-1>
817
818
1
M
M
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
1
<0-1>
Transfer Temperature correction
factor table setting
JPN: 1
UC: 0
EUR: 0
Others: 1
<0-1>
0: No Damp Heater
1: Damp Heater
installed
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 138
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
256
819-0
819-1
819-2
Develop- Color auto-
ment
Y
M
C
ALL
M
M
M
Sets the target output
value of color auto-
toner sensor to the
sleeve in the auto-toner
control. (This is set
when performing the
automatic adjustment of
auto-toner sensor.)
4
4
4
toner sensor
output setting
for initial
(color) <0-1023>
ALL 256
(color) <0-1023>
ALL 256
(color) <0-1023>
2
developer
material
820-0
820-1
820-2
821
Develop- Color auto-
Y
M
C
ALL
(color) <0-1023>
ALL
(color) <0-1023>
ALL
(color) <0-1023>
-
M
M
M
M
Displays the output
value of the color auto-
toner sensor to the
4
4
4
1
ment
toner sensor
output
-
display for
developer
material
sleeve in color printing.
-
Develop- ON/OFF of the mode for
ALL
0
Sets whether or not
performing an aging to
stabilize the status of
developer material
when the toner density
is uneven or the toner
charging amount is low-
ered.
ment
developer material stabili-
zation
(color)
<0-1>
0: ON
1: OFF
822-0
822-1
822-2
Develop- Number of
Y
M
C
ALL
0
M
M
M
Displays the number of
times the developer
material stabilization is
performed.
4
4
4
ment
times the
mode for
(color) <0-255>
ALL
(color) <0-255>
ALL
(color) <0-255>
0
developer
material stabi-
lization is per-
formed
0
823-0
823-1
823-2
Develop- Color auto-
Y
M
C
ALL
(color)
0
M
M
M
Displays “1” when the
abnormal output volt-
age is detected for the
color auto-toner sensor
light amount correction.
([CF40] error)
4
4
4
ment
toner sensor/
light amount
correction
<0-1>
ALL
(color)
0
voltage abnor-
mal detection
<0-1>
0: Normal
1: Abnormality
ALL
(color)
0
<0-1>
detected
824-0
824-1
824-2
Develop- Color auto-
Y
M
C
ALL
(color)
ALL
(color)
ALL
(color)
0
M
M
M
Displays “1” when the
abnormal toner density
detection voltage is
detected. ([CF20] error)
0: Normal
4
4
4
ment
toner sensor/
toner density
detection volt-
age abnormal
detection
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
1: Abnormality
<0-1>
detected
849
Fuser
Fusing control switching for
TWD and SAD models
ALL
Other
than
M
1
TWD and
SAD: 0
TWD and
SAD: 1
<0-1>
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
858-0
858-1
858-2
859-0
859-1
859-2
860-0
860-1
Develop- Color toner
Y
ALL
(color)
ALL
(color)
ALL
(color)
ALL
(color)
ALL
(color)
ALL
(color)
0
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
Becomes “1” when the
toner density decreases
and it is judged forced
toner supply is needed.
0: Normal level
14
14
14
14
14
14
4
ment
forced supply
level display
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
20
M
C
1: Forced supply level
Develop- Toner empty
ment
Y
M
Becomes “1” when
detecting the toner
empty.
0: Normal
1: Empty detected
detection
C
Develop- Color auto-
Upper limit
Lower limit
ALL
Sets the range for judg-
ing whether the sensor
output value when the
sensor light source is
OFF is correct
ment
toner sensor/
proper range
setting of OFF
level voltage
(color) <0-1023>
ALL
(color) <0-1023>
0
4
or not.
861-0
861-1
Develop- Color auto-
Upper limit
Lower limit
ALL
205
M
M
Sets the range for judg-
ing whether the adjust-
ment result of sensor
light amount is correct
or not.
4
4
ment
toner sensor/
proper range
setting of
(color) <0-255>
ALL
40
standard light
amount volt-
age
(color) <0-255>
862-0
Develop- Color auto-
Upper limit
ALL
950
M
Sets the range for judg-
ing whether the sensor
output value for the ref-
erence plate is correct
or not.
4
ment
toner sensor/
proper range
setting of ref-
erence plate
output
(color) <0-1023>
862-1
863-0
Lower limit
Upper limit
ALL
205
M
M
4
4
(color) <0-1023>
Develop- Color auto-
ALL
450
Sets the range for judg-
ing whether the sensor
output value for the
ment
toner sensor/
proper range
setting of
(color) <0-1023>
sleeve is correct or not.
863-1
864
Lower limit
ALL
155
M
M
4
2
developer out-
put
Develop- Color auto-toner sensor/
(color) <0-1023>
ALL
-
Displays the sensor
output value when the
sensor light source is
OFF at power ON.
ment
sensor OFF output value
display at power ON
(color) <0-1023>
865
Develop- Color auto-toner sensor/
ALL
-
M
Displays the sensor
output value with the
standard light amount
for the reference plate
at power ON.
2
ment
reference plate output
value display at power ON
(color) <0-1023>
866-0
866-1
Develop- Color auto-
Upper limit
Lower limit
ALL
820
M
M
Sets the range for judg-
ing whether the differ-
ence between the
sensor output when the
sensor light source is
OFF and the sensor
output for the reference
plate is correct or not.
4
4
ment
toner sensor/
abnormal
(color) <0-1023>
detection
potential dif-
ference set-
ting of
Develop-
ment
ALL
205
(color) <0-1023>
reference
plate output
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 140
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
867
Develop- Color auto-toner control
ALL
(color)
0
M
Sets whether the sen-
sor light amount is cor-
rected or not depending
on the environment and
life.
1
ment
environment and life light
amount correction setting
<0-1>
2
0: Correction
1: No correction
868
Develop- Color auto-toner adjust-
ALL
4
M
Sets the difference from
the target value for
judging whether the
color auto-toner adjust-
ment finishes correctly
or not.
1
ment
ment finishing range set-
ting
(color) <0-255>
869
870
Develop- Color auto-toner control
ALL
5
M
M
Sets the difference from
the target value for
judging whether the
light amount correction
finishes correctly or not.
Sets the number of
times of continuous
error detection before
the light amount correc-
tion abnormality is dis-
played.
1
1
ment
environment and life light
amount correction/correc-
tion finishing range setting
(color) <0-255>
Develop- Color auto-toner sensor/
ALL
3
ment
setting of number of times
of error detection at light
amount correction
(color) <0-255>
871
872
Develop- Color auto-toner control
ALL
0
M
M
Displays the number of
times of the reference
plate detection error for
the environment and life
light amount correction.
Displays the number of
times of the light
amount control voltage
adjustment error for the
environment and life
light amount correction.
2
2
ment
environment and life light
amount correction/display
of number of times of refer-
ence plate detection error
(color) <0-255>
Develop- Color auto-toner control
ALL
0
ment
environment and life light
amount correction/display
of number of times of light
amount control voltage
adjustment error
(color) <0-255>
873-0
873-1
873-2
874
Develop- Color auto-
Y
M
C
ALL
(color) <0-1023>
ALL 256
(color) <0-1023>
ALL 256
(color) <0-1023>
256
M
M
M
M
Sets the initial devel-
oper output target
value.
4
4
4
1
ment
Develop-
ment
Develop-
ment
toner control/
developer ini-
tial output set-
ting
Develop- Color developer life correc-
ment tion
ALL
0
Sets whether the toner
density detection volt-
age correction is per-
formed or not
(color)
<0-1>
depending on the
developer life in the
color auto-toner control.
0: Corrected
1: Not corrected
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
875-0
Develop- Color devel-
Y
M
C
Y
ALL
(color)
0
M
Sets the correction
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
ment
oper life cor-
rection value
(segment 0)
<-512-
511>
amount of the toner
density detection volt-
age depending on the
developer life. In this
code, the life count
within 0-2000 is set as
the correction amount.
875-1
875-2
876-0
876-1
876-2
877-0
877-1
877-2
878-0
878-1
878-2
879-0
879-1
879-2
880-0
880-1
880-2
ALL
(color)
0
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
<-512-
511>
ALL
(color)
0
<-512-
511>
-4
<-512-
511>
-2
<-512-
511>
-2
<-512-
511>
-6
<-512-
511>
-3
<-512-
511>
-3
<-512-
511>
-8
<-512-
511>
-4
<-512-
511>
-4
<-512-
511>
-10
<-512-
511>
-5
<-512-
511>
-5
<-512-
511>
-12
<-512-
511>
-6
Develop- Color devel-
ALL
(color)
Sets the correction
amount of the toner
density detection volt-
age depending on the
developer life. In this
code, the life count
within 2001-5000 is set
as the correction
ment
oper life cor-
rection value
(segment 1)
M
C
Y
ALL
(color)
ALL
(color)
amount.
Develop- Color devel-
ALL
(color)
Sets the correction
amount of the toner
density detection volt-
age depending on the
developer life. In this
code, the life count
within 5001-10000 is
set as the correction
amount.
ment
oper life cor-
rection value
(segment 2)
M
C
Y
ALL
(color)
ALL
(color)
Develop- Color devel-
ALL
(color)
Sets the correction
amount of the toner
density detection volt-
age depending on the
developer life. In this
code, the life count
within 10001-20000 is
set as the correction
amount.
ment
oper life cor-
rection value
(segment 3)
M
C
Y
ALL
(color)
ALL
(color)
Develop- Color devel-
ALL
(color)
Sets the correction
amount of the toner
density detection volt-
age depending on the
developer life. In this
code, the life count
within 20001-30000 is
set as the correction
amount.
ment
oper life cor-
rection value
(segment 4)
M
C
Y
ALL
(color)
ALL
(color)
Develop- Color devel-
ALL
(color)
Sets the correction
amount of the toner
density detection volt-
age depending on the
developer life. In this
code, the life count
within 30001-37500 is
set as the correction
amount.
ment
oper life cor-
rection value
(segment 5)
M
C
ALL
(color)
<-512-
511>
-6
<-512-
511>
ALL
(color)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 142
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
881-0
Develop- Color devel-
Y
M
C
ALL
(color)
-12
<-512-
511>
-6
<-512-
511>
-6
<-512-
511>
M
Sets the correction
4
4
4
2
ment
oper life cor-
rection value
(segment 6)
amount of the toner
density detection volt-
age depending on the
developer life. In this
code, the life count
37501 or more is set as
the correction amount.
881-1
881-2
900
ALL
(color)
M
M
-
2
ALL
(color)
Version System firmware ROM ver-
sion
ALL
-
JPN: T410SY0JXXX
UC: T410SY0UXXX
EUR: T410SY0EXXX
Others: T410SY0XXXX
903
905
907
908
915
920
Version Engine ROM version
Version Scanner ROM version
Version RADF ROM version
Version Finisher ROM version
Version FAX board ROM version
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
FAX
ALL
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
410M-XXX
410S-XXX
DF-XXXX
SDL-XX FIN-XX
F562-XXX
VX.XX/X.XX
2
2
2
2
2
2
Version FROM basic section soft-
ware version
921
922
Version FROM internal program
Version UI data fixed section ver-
sion
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
2
2
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
Version UI data common section
version
Version Version of UI data lan-
guage 1 in HDD
Version Version of UI data lan-
guage 2 in HDD
Version Version of UI data lan-
guage 3 in HDD
Version Version of UI data lan-
guage 4 in HDD
Version Version of UI data lan-
guage 5 in HDD
Version Version of UI data lan-
guage 6 in HDD
Version Version of UI data in
FROM displayed at power-
ON
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
931
Version Version of UI data lan-
guage 7 in HDD
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
933
934
Version Web data whole version
Version Web UI data in HDD
Version: Language 1
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
2
2
935
936
937
938
939
Version Web UI data in HDD
Version: Language 2
Version Web UI data in HDD
Version: Language 3
Version Web UI data in HDD
Version: Language 4
Version Web UI data in HDD
Version: Language 5
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
VXXX.XXX X
2
2
2
2
2
Version Web UI data in HDD
Version: Language 6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
-
944
Version HD version
ALL
-
JPN: T410HD0JXXX
UC: T410HD0UXXX
EUR: T410HD0EXXX
Others: T410HD0XXXX
2
945
947
Network Two-way setting of Raw-
Port 9100
General Initialization after software
version upgrade
ALL
ALL
2
UTY 1: Valid
2: Invalid
12
3
<1-2>
-
-
Perform this code when
the software in this
equipment has been
upgraded.
949
950
General Automatic interruption
page setting during black
printing
ALL
ALL
0
SYS Sets the number of
pages to interrupt the
printing automatically.
0-100: 0 to 100 pages
SYS Sets the start-up
method of the Elec-
tronic Filing.
1
1
<0-100>
Elec-
tronic
filing
Start-up method of Elec-
tronic Filing
0
<0-2>
0: Standard
1: Forced start-up
(Not recovered)
2: Forced start-up
(Recovered)
951
User
Image setting for Electronic
ALL
0
SYS 0: General
1: Photograph
2: Presentation
3: Line art
1
interface Filing printing (Only for
color image)
<0-3>
953
954
User
Access code entry for
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: Renewed automati-
cally
1
1
interface Electronic Filing printing
<0-1>
1: Enter every time
User
Clearing timing for files and
1
SYS 0: Immediately after
the completion of
scanning
interface Electronic Filing Agent
<0-1>
1: Cleared by Auto
Clear
969
970
User
interface
User
Error sound
ALL
ALL
1
SYS 0: OFF
1: ON
SYS 0: OFF
1: ON
1
1
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
Sound setting when
interface switching to Energy Saving
Mode
973
Network PCL line feed code setting
PRT
0
SYS Sets the PCL line feed
code.
1
<0-3>
0: Automatic setting
1: CR=CR, LF=LF
2: CR=CR+LF, LF=LF
3: CR=CR, LF=CR+LF
975
General Job handling when print-
ing is short paid with coin
controller
ALL
1
SYS Sets whether pause or
stop the printing job
when it is short paid
using a coin controller.
0: Pause the job
1
<0-1>
1: Stop the job
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 144
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
976
Scanning Equipment name and user
name setting to a folder
ALL
0
SYS Sets whether or not
adding the equipment
name and user name to
the folder when saving
files.
1
<0-2>
when saving files
2
0: Not add
1: Add the equipment
name
2: Add the user name
978
979
Network Raw printing job
(Paper feeding drawer)
PRT
PRT
0
SYS 0: AUTO
1: Upper drawer
2: Lower drawer
3: PFP upper drawer
4: PFP lower drawer
5: LCF
SYS 0: Roman-8
1: ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
2: ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
3: ISO 8859/9 Latin 5
4: PC-8, Code Page
437
1
1
<0-5>
Network Raw printing job
(PCL symbol set)
0
<0-39>
5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/
Norwegian
6: PC-850, Multilingual
7: PC-852, Latin2
8: PC-8 Turkish
9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1
10: Windows 3.1 Latin 2
11: Windows 3.1 Latin 5
12: DeskTop
13: PS Text
14: Ventura Interna-
tional
15: Ventura US
16: Microsoft Publishing
17: Math-8
18: PS Math
19: Ventura Math
20: Pi Font
21: Legal
22: ISO 4: United King-
dom
23: ISO 6: ASCII
24: ISO 11
25: ISO 15: Italian
26: ISO 17
27: ISO 21: German
28: ISO 60: Danish/Nor-
wegian
29: ISO 69: French
30: Windows 3.0 Latin 1
31: MC Text
32: PC Cyrillic
33: ITC Zapf Dingbats
34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
35: PC-775
36: PC-1004
37: Symbol
38: Windows Baltic
39: Wingdings
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
986
General Copy function setting
PPC
0
SYS Sets the copy function
to be invalid.
1
<0-1>
0: Valid
1: Invalid
988
995
Paper
Setting of paper size
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not switched
1: LG→13"LG
1
feeding switching to 13" LG
<0-2>
2: FOLIO→13"LG
Mainte- Equipment number
nance
0
SYS This code can be also
keyed in from the
adjustment mode (05-
976).
11
(serial number) display
<10 dig-
its>
10 digits
999
Mainte- FSMS total counter
nance
Network Selection of NIC board sta-
tus information
ALL
ALL
0
SYS Refer to values of total
counter.
NIC 1: Not printed out
when the copier is
restarted
1
<8 digits>
1002
1
12
<1-2>
2: Printed out when
the copier is
restarted
1003
Communication speed and
settings of Ethernet
1
1: Auto
2: 10MBPS Half
Duplex
Network
ALL
NIC
12
<1-5>
3: 10MBPS Full
Duplex
4: 100MBPS Half
Duplex
5: 100MBPS Full
Duplex
1006
Network Address Mode
ALL
2
NIC 1: Fixed IP address
2: Dynamic IP address
3: Dynamic IP address
without AutoIP
12
<1-3>
1007
1008
Network Domain name
Network IP address
ALL
ALL
-
-
NIC Maximum 96 letters
12
12
NIC 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1009
1010
Network Subnet mask
Network Gateway
ALL
ALL
-
-
NIC 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value
12
12
000.000.000.000)
NIC 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1011
1012
Network Availability of IPX
Network Network frame type
ALL
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
2: Not available
NIC 1: Automatic
2: IEEE802.3
12
12
<1-2>
1
<1-5>
3: Ethernet II
4: IEEE802.3 SNAP
5: IEEE802.2
1014
1015
Network Availability of AppleTalk
Network Zone setting of AppleTalk
ALL
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
2: Not available
NIC Maximum 32 letters
*: Wildcard character
12
12
<1-2>
*
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 146
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
ALL
ALL
ALL
able
value>
1016
1017
1018
Network Availability of LDAP
Network Availability of DNS
1
NIC 1: Available
2: Not available
NIC 1: Available
2: Not available
NIC 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value
12
12
12
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
2
Network IP address to DNS server
(Primary)
-
000.000.000.000)
1019
1020
Network IP address to DNS server
(Secondary)
ALL
ALL
-
NIC 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
NIC 1: Invalid
2: Via DHCP
12
12
Network DDNS Desired level
1
<1-5>
3: Insecure DDNS
4: Secure DDNS
5: Multi-secure DDNS
1022
1023
Network From Name Creation set-
ting in SMTP authentica-
tion
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not edited
1: Account name of
From Address
1
<0-1>
+Device name
Network NetBios name
MFP_
serial
UTY Maximum 15 letters
The network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
"serial"
12
1024
1025
Network Name of WINS server or IP
address (Primary)
ALL
ALL
-
-
UTY 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value
12
12
000.000.000.000)
Network Name of WINS server or IP
address (Secondary)
UTY 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value
000.000.000.000)
1026
1027
Network Availability of Bindery
Network Availability of NDS
ALL
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
2: Not available
NIC 1: Available
2: Not available
12
12
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
1028
1029
1030
Network Directory service context
Network Directory service tree
Network Availability of HTTP server
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
1
NIC Maximum 127 letters
NIC Maximum 47 letters
NIC 1: Available
2: Not available
12
12
12
<1-2>
1031
1032
Network Port number to NIC HTTP
server
ALL
ALL
80
<1-
65535>
8080
<1-
NIC
12
12
Network Port number to system
HTTP server
NIC
65535>
1037
1038
1039
Network Availability of SMTP client
ALL
ALL
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
2: Not available
NIC Maximum 128 Bytes
12
12
12
<1-2>
Network FQDN or IP address to
SMTP server
Network TCP port number of SMTP
client
-
25
<1-
NIC
65535>
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 147
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
ALL
ALL
able
value>
1040
1041
Network Availability of SMTP server
1
UTY 1: Available
2: Not available
UTY
12
12
<1-2>
25
<1-
Network TCP port number of SMTP
server
65535>
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
Network E-mail box name to SMTP
server
Network Availability of Offramp
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
UTY Maximum 192 letters
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
2
UTY 1: Available
2: Not available
UTY 1: Available
2: Not available
UTY 1: Available
2: Not available
NIC 1: Available
2: Not available
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
1
<1-2>
Network Offramp security
Network Printing at Offramp
Network Availability of POP3 clients
Network FQDN or IP address to
POP3 server
Network Types of POP3 server
-
NIC Maximum 128 Bytes
1
NIC 1: Automatic
2: POP3
<1-3>
3: APOP
1049
Network Login name to POP3
server
Network Login password to POP3
Network E-mail reception interval
ALL
-
-
NIC Maximum 96 letters
12
1050
1051
ALL
ALL
NIC Maximum 96 letters
NIC Unit: Minute
12
12
5
<0-4096>
1052
1055
Network TCP port number of POP3
client
ALL
ALL
110
<1-
65535>
21
<1-
NIC
12
12
Network TCP port number of FTP
client
UTY
65535>
1059
1060
Network Availability of FTP server
ALL
ALL
1
NIC 1: Available
2: Not available
UTY
12
12
<1-2>
21
<1-
Network TCP port number of FTP
server
65535>
1063
Network MIB function
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
2: Invalid
12
<1-2>
1065
1066
Network Setting of read Community
Network Setting of read/Write Com-
munity
ALL
ALL
public
private
NIC Maximum 31 letters
NIC Maximum 31 letters
12
12
1069
Network TRAP destination IP
address
ALL
-
UTY 000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value
12
000.000.000.000)
1070
1073
1074
Network Community setting of
TRAP (via IP)
Network Availability of Raw/TCP
ALL
ALL
ALL
public
NIC Maximum 31 letters
12
12
12
1
NIC 1: Valid
2: Invalid
NIC
<1-2>
9100
<1-
Network TCP port number of Raw
65535>
1075
Network Availability of LPD client
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
2: Invalid
12
<1-2>
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 148
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1076
Network TCP port number of LPD
ALL
515
<1-
NIC
12
65535>
1077
1078
Network LPD queue name
Network Availability of IPP
ALL
ALL
-
1
NIC Maximum 31 letters
NIC 1: Valid
2: Invalid
12
12
2
<1-2>
1079
1080
Network Availability of IPP port
number “80”
Network TCP port number of IPP
ALL
ALL
1
NIC 1: Valid
2: Invalid
NIC
12
12
<1-2>
631
<1-
65535>
1081
Network IPP printer name
ALL
MFP_
serial
NIC Maximum 127 letters
The network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
"serial"
12
1082
1083
1084
Network IPP printer location
Network IPP printer information
Network IPP printer information
(more)
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
NIC Maximum 127 letters
NIC Maximum 127 letters
NIC Maximum 127 letters
12
12
12
1085
1086
1087
Network Installer of IPP printer
driver
Network IPP printer “Make and
Model”
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
NIC Maximum 127 letters
NIC Maximum 127 letters
NIC Maximum 127 letters
12
12
12
Network IPP printer information
(more)
MFGR
1088
1089
Network IPP message from opera-
tor
Network Availability of FTP print
ALL
ALL
-
NIC Maximum 127 letters
12
12
1
NIC 1: Available
2: Not available
<1-2>
1090
1091
Network Printer user name of FTP
Network Printer user password of
FTP
ALL
ALL
print
-
NIC Maximum 31 letters
NIC Maximum 31 letters
12
12
1092
1093
Network TCP port number to FTP
print server
ALL
ALL
21
<1-
65535>
MFP_
serial
NIC
12
12
Network Login name to Novell print
server
NIC Maximum 47 letters
The network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
"serial"
1094
1095
1096
1097
Network Login password to Novell
print server
Network Name of SearchRoot
server
Network Scan rate setting of print
queue
Network Page number limitation for
printing text of received
Email
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
NIC Maximum 31 letters
NIC Maximum 31 letters
NIC Unit: Second
UTY
12
12
12
12
5
<1-255>
5
<1-99>
1098
Network MDN return mail setting
when receiving E-mail
ALL
2
UTY 1: Valid
2: Invalid
12
<1-2>
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 149
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
-
1099
Network Trap destination of IPX
ALL
UTY 24 letters
(Valid from 0 to 9 and
12
from A to F)
1100
Network Method of SMTP server
authentication
ALL
1
NIC 1: Disable
2: Plain
12
<1-6,10>
3: Login
4; Cram-MD5
5: Digest MD5
6: Kerberos
10: Auto
1101
1102
1103
1104
Network Login name for SMTP
server authentication
Network Login password for SMTP
server authentication
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
NIC Maximum 64 letters
12
12
12
12
NIC Maximum 64 letters
Network Rendezvous setting
1
NIC 1: Valid
2: Invalid
<1-2>
MFP_
serial
Network Link local host name
NIC Maximum 127 letters
The network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
"serial"
1105
Network Service name setting
ALL
Refer to
contents
NIC Maximum 63 letters
The network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
"serial"
12
<Default value>
e-STUDIO281C:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO281C_serial
e-STUDIO351C:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO351C_serial
e-STUDIO451C:
TOSHIBA
e-STUDIO451C_serial
1111
1112
Network POP Before SMTP setting
Network Host name
ALL
ALL
2
NIC 1: Valid
2: Invalid
12
12
<1-2>
MFP_
serial
NIC Maximum 63 letters
The network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
"serial"
1113
1114
1117
Network Windows domain No.1 of
user authentication
Network Sending mail text of Inter-
netFAX
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
UTY Maximum 128 letters
12
1
1
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
SYS Unit: Second
<0-1>
300
<1-9999>
Network SMB time-out period
1
1118
1119
General Clearing of TAT partition
ALL
ALL
3
3
-
-
SYS
Initialization of NIC infor-
mation
Initializes only the infor-
mation of the Network
setting items.
Network
-
1121
Network PDC (Primary Domain
Controller) name No.1 of
authentication
ALL
-
UTY Maximum 128 letters
12
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 150
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
-
1122
Network BDC (Backup Domain
Controller) name No.1 of
authentication
ALL
UTY Maximum 128 letters
12
1123
Network Windows domain of device
authentication
ALL
4
UTY 3: ON
(Domain selected)
4: OFF
12
2
<3-4>
(Work group
selected)
1124
1125
Network Workgroup name
ALL
ALL
work-
group
0
UTY Maximum 15 letters
12
1
Data writing of address
book data import
0: Invalid
1: Valid
General
SYS
SYS
<0-1>
(overwriting method)
1126
Counter Validity of interrupt copy-
ing when external counters
are installed
0
0: Invalid
1: Valid
ALL
1
<0-1>
1128
1129
1130
NetwareUserAuthTree
Name1
NetwareUserAuthContext
Name1
Maximum 47 letters
Maximum 127 letters
Network
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
UTY
UTY
12
12
1
Network
User
interface
Job Build Function
1
SYS Sets the Job Build
Function.
<0-1>
0: Invalid
1: Valid
1131
1132
User
Maximum number of time
ALL
ALL
1000
<5-1000>
SYS Sets the maximum
number of time a job
build has been per-
formed.
1
1
interface job build performed
5-1000: 5 to 1000 times
General Default screen selection of
the User Function menu
1
SYS Selects the default
screen when entering
the User Function menu
by pressing the [USER
FUNCTIONS] button.
0: ADDRESS
<0-1>
1: COUNTER
1134
1135
NetwareUserAuthTree
Name2
Default setting of drawers
Maximum 47 letters
Network
Paper
ALL
ALL
-
UTY
12
1
1
SYS 1: LCF
2: Upper drawer
feeding (Printer/BOX)
<1-5>
3: Lower drawer
4: PFP upper drawer
5: PFP lower drawer
1136
Network Number of lines simulta-
neously connectable when
using SMB
ALL
13
<8-16>
SYS
1
1137
1138
Network Memory partition size
when using Samba
Network LDAP search method set-
ting
ALL
ALL
16
<8-20>
SYS 8-20 M bytes
1
1
0
SYS Sets the search method
when performing a
LDAP search.
<0-3>
0: Partial match
1: Prefix match
2: Suffix match
3: Full match
1139
Network LDAP authentication set-
ting
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not authenticated
1: Authenticated
1
<0-1>
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 151
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1140
User
Restriction of the template
ALL
0
SYS Selects the restriction of
the template function
usage setting.
1
interface function with the adminis-
<0-1>
trator privilege
0: No restriction
1: Only available with
the administrator
privilege.
1141
Network Display of MAC address
ALL
-
SYS (**:**:**:**:**:**)
The address is dis-
2
played as above (6-byte
data is divided by a
colon at every 2 bytes).
1143
1144
1145
NetwareUserAuthContext
Name2
NetwareUserAuthTree
Name3
Maximum 127 letters
12
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
UTY
UTY
Maximum 47 letters
12
11
Mainte- Counter notification
SYS Maximum 32 digits
Enter a hyphen with the
[MONITOR/PAUSE]
button.
nance
(Remote)
Remote FAX setting
1148
1370
NetwareUserAuthContext
Name3
Image quality control time
Maximum 127 letters
Network
Image
ALL
ALL
-
UTY
12
1
0
M
Counts driving count of
the drum (image qual-
ity control time).
process- accumulating counter
<8 digits>
ing
Counts up when drum
motor and image quality
control are ON.
1371
1372
Image
Accumulated counter of
ALL
ALL
0
M
M
Cleared to “0” by the
image quality closed-
loop control. Counts up
with the number of
printing job received
after this control.
Counts up the heater
control time accumu-
lated (when power of
the copier is ON) but
does not count at the
Sleep Mode. When the
counter value of the
fuser belt is cleared,
this counter value is
also cleared in sync at
PM support mode.
2
1
process- output pages since the per-
<4 digits>
ing
forming of image quality
control
Image
Heater and energizing time
0
process- accumulating counter Dis-
<8 digits>
ing
play/0 clearing
1378
Image
Fuser roller ready tempera-
ALL
0
M
Counts up the heater
control time accumu-
lated (on standby).
When the counter value
of the fuser belt is
cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
2
process- ture time accumulating
ing counter
<8 digits>
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 152
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1380
Image
Fuser roller printing tem-
ALL
0
M
Counts up the heater
control time accumu-
lated (during printing).
When the counter value
of the fuser belt is
cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
2
process- perature time accumulating
<8 digits>
ing
counter
2
1382
Image
Fuser roller energy saving
ALL
0
M
Counts up the heater
control time accumu-
lated (at energy saving
mode). When the
2
process- temperature time accumu-
<8 digits>
ing
lating counter Display/0
clearing
counter value of the
fuser belt is cleared,
this counter value is
also cleared in sync at
PM support mode.
1385
1386
1387
1388
Image
Number of output pages
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
M
M
M
M
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser belt is
cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser belt is
cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser belt is
cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser belt is
cleared, this counter
value is also cleared in
sync at PM support
mode.
1
1
1
1
process- (Thick paper 1)
ing
<8 digits>
Image
Number of output pages
0
process- (Thick paper 2)
ing
<8 digits>
Image
Number of output pages
0
process- (Thick paper 3)
ing
<8 digits>
Image
process- (OHP film)
Number of output pages
0
<8 digits>
ing
1389
1390
Main
Main charger wire clean-
ALL
ALL
0
M
M
Does not count up
when cleaning is not
effective.
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the upper
drawer.
1
1
charger ing counter display/0 clear-
ing
Paper
<5 digits>
Feeding retry counter
0
feeding (upper drawer)
<8 digits>
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1391
Paper
Feeding retry counter
ALL
0
M
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the lower
drawer.
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
upper drawer.
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the PFP
lower drawer.
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the bypass
tray.
1
1
1
1
feeding (lower drawer)
<8 digits>
1392
1393
1394
Paper
Feeding retry counter
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
M
M
M
feeding (PFP upper drawer)
<8 digits>
Paper
Feeding retry counter
0
feeding (PFP lower drawer)
<8 digits>
Paper
Feeding retry counter
0
feeding (bypass feed)
<8 digits>
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
Paper
feeding (LCF)
Feeding retry counter
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
M
M
M
M
M
M
Counts the number of
times of the feeding
retry from the LCF.
When the number of
feeding retry (08-1390
to 08-1395) exceeds
the setting value, the
feeding retry will not be
performed subse-
quently. In case “0” is
set as a setting value,
however, the feeding
retry continues regard-
less of the counter set-
ting value.
1
1
1
1
1
1
<8 digits>
Paper
Feeding retry counter
10
<8 digits>
feeding upper limit value
(upper drawer)
Paper
Feeding retry counter
10
<8 digits>
feeding upper limit value
(lower drawer)
Feeding retry counter
Paper
10
<8 digits>
feeding upper limit value
(PFP upper drawer)
Paper
feeding upper limit value
(PFP lower drawer)
Paper
Feeding retry counter
10
<8 digits>
Refer to (Note 1).
Feeding retry counter
10
<8 digits>
feeding upper limit value
(bypass feed)
1401
1410
1412
Paper
Feeding retry counter
ALL
ALL
ALL
10
<8 digits>
M
M
M
1
1
1
feeding upper limit value (LCF)
Counter Black toner cartridge drive
counts/0 clearing
0
<8 digits>
Counter Counter for tab paper
0
Counts up when the
registration sensor is
ON. When the counter
value of the fuser roller
is reset, this counter is
reset in sync at the PM
support mode.
<8 digits>
1414
1415
Image
Toner cartridge wrong
ALL
ALL
0
M
M
0: ON
1: OFF
1
1
process- installation detection ON/
ing
Image
<0-1>
OFF setting
Detection/control that the
0
Sets ON or OFF of the
detection/control that
the toner cartridge is
nearly empty.
process- toner cartridge is nearly
<0-2>
ing empty
0: All colors (Y/M/C/K)
OFF
1: Black (K) ON
2: All colors (Y/M/C/K)
ON
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 154
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1416
Image
Threshold for detecting
ALL
322500
<8 digits>
M
1
process- that black toner cartridge is
ing
nearly empty
1422
Data
over-
write kit
HDD data overwriting type
setting
ALL
0
SYS Select the type of the
overwriting level; LOW,
MEDIUM, or HIGH for
deleting HDD data.
(This setting is enabled
only when the GP-1060
is installed.)
1
2
<0-2>
0: LOW
1: MEDIUM
2: HIGH
1424
Data
over-
write kit
HDD data clearing type
setting (forcible clearing)
ALL
0
SYS Select the type of the
overwriting level; LOW,
MEDIUM, or HIGH for
deleting HDD data.
(This setting is enabled
only when the GP-1060
is installed.)
1
<0-2>
0: LOW
1: MEDIUM
2: HIGH
1426
1427
1428
1429
Data
over-
write kit
Forcible HDD data clearing
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
-
-
HDD data is cleared in
the procedure set in 08-
1424.
3
3
*
This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1060 is
installed.
Data
over-
write kit
Forcible NVRAM data all
clearing
When this code is per-
formed, the equipment
cannot be started up.
*
This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1060 is
installed.
Data
over-
write kit
Forcible SRAM backup
data all clearing
When this code is per-
formed, the equipment
cannot be started up.
3
*
This setting is
enabled only when
the GP-1060 is
installed.
User
Margin width
Front: 7/
Back: 7
SYS This setting is not
reflected in "Right",
10
interface (Top/Bottom, Left/Right)
<2-100/-
100-100>
even if the value less
than 2 is set for "Back".
1430
1431
User
Margin width
ALL
ALL
14
<2-30>
SYS
1
1
interface (Bookbinding margin)
Network ACC
1
SYS 0: ACC prohibited
1: Only in the same
paper direction
(AT_CASETTE_CHANGE)
for Printer/Box printing
<0-2>
2: In both same direc-
tion and different
directions
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 155
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1432
Network Private-print-only mode
Network Disabling e-Filing function
ALL
0
SYS 0: Normal
1: Private-print-only
1
<0-1>
mode
1433
1435
1436
ALL
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: Function off (No
restriction on data
saving and other
operations)
1
<0-1>
1: Function on (Data
saving and other
operations have
some restrictions)
Network "Disable private and proof
print save" function
0
SYS 0: Function OFF (no
restriction on data
saving or other
1
1
<0-1>
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted)
Network "Disable fax save" function
0
SYS 0: Function OFF (no
restriction on data
saving or other
<0-1>
operations)
1: Function ON (Data
saving or other
operations are
restricted
1440
1441
IP Conflict Detect
SNTP Enable
1
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
-
-
12
12
<1-2>
2
<1-2>
1442
1444
1445
1446
SNTP Polling rate
24
<1-168>
Data obtaining interval
(Unit: Hour)
SNTP server IP
Address (Primary)
SNTP server IP
Network
Network
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
12
12
12
12
Primary SNTP Address
Secondary SNTP Address
Port number to SNTP
-
-
Address (Secondary)
123
<1-
65535>
1447
1448
Network IPP administrator name
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
This should be an
account which can con-
trol all IPP jobs.
This should be the
password of an account
which can control all
IPP jobs.
12
12
Network IPP administrator pass-
word
-
1449
1450
Network IPP authentication method
ALL
ALL
1
-
-
1: Disabled
2: Basic
3: Digest
12
12
<1-4>
4: Basic Digest
Network User name for IPP authen-
tication
-
This should be the
account at the time IPP
authentication was per-
formed.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 156
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
-
1451
Network Password for IPP authenti-
cation
ALL
-
This should be the
password of the
12
account at the time IPP
authentication was per-
formed.
2
1464
Network Samba server ON/OFF
setting
ALL
1
NIC 1: Samba enabled
2: Samba disabled
12
<1-4>
3: Print Share disabled
4: File Share disabled
1468
1469
General User data management
limitation setting
General User data management
limitation Setting by num-
ber of printouts
ALL
(color)
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SYS 0-9,999,999:
0-9,999,999 sheets
1
1
<0-1>
0
(color) <7 digits>
1470
1471
Device authentication func-
tion setting
User authentication
method
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: OFF
1: ON
SYS 0: Local
1: NTLM (NT Domain)
2: LDAP
1
1
General
<0-1>
0
<0-5>
General
3: Kerberos (Active
Directory)
4: Netware
1472
User data management
automatic registration func-
tion setting
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
General
<0-1>
1473
1474
User data management
limitation setting
User data management
limitation Setting by num-
ber of printouts
ALL
(black)
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SYS 0-9,999,999:
0-9,999,999 sheets
1
1
General
General
<0-1>
0
(black) <7 digits>
1476
Restriction on Address
book operation by adminis-
trator
ALL
0
SYS Some restrictions can
be given on the admin-
istrator for operating the
Address book.
1
Network
<0-1>
0: No restriction
1: Can be operated
only under the
administrator's
authorization
1477
Restriction on "To" ("cc")
address
ALL
0
SYS 0: No restriction
1: Can be set from
both of the Address
book and LDAP
server
1
Network
<0-3>
2: Can be set only
from the Address
book
3: Can be set only
from the LDAP
server
1478
1479
User
Display of paper size set-
ALL
ALL
JPN: 0
UC: 1
<0-1>
SYS 0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
1
1
interface ting by installation opera-
tion of drawers
User
Default setting of sharp-
ness
5
SYS 1: -4 2: -3
3: -2 4: -1
<1-9>
interface
5: 0 6: +1
7: +2 8: +3 9: +4
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 157
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
-
1481
User data management
clearing
ALL
-
All the user data in the
database and backup
files can be deleted.
3
General
1482
1483
User data department
management
User data recovery
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
3
General
General
<0-1>
-
-
The data in the data-
base is overwritten with
the data in the backup
file.
1484
Network Authentication method of
"Scan to Email"
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
1: SMTP authentica-
1
<0-2>
tion
2: LDAP authentica-
tion
1485
1486
Network Setting whether use of the
Internet FAX is permitted at
the time of authentication
Network LDAP server setting for
user authentication
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not permitted
1: Permitted
1
2
<0-1>
0
<0-
SYS
4294967
295>
1487
1488
Network "From" address assign-
ment method at the time of
authentication
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: User name + @ +
Domain name
1
2
<0-2>
1: LDAP searching
2: Use the address
registered at "From"
field of E-mail set-
ting
Network ID setting of LDAP server
for "From" address assign-
mentPrivate-print-only
mode
0
<0-
4294967
295>
SYS
1489
1491
Network Setting for "From" address
edit at "Scan to Email"
Network E-mail domain name
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: Not permitted
1: Permitted
SYS 96 + 2 (delimiter) char-
acter
1
<0-1>
-
11
*
ASCll sequence
only
1492
1493
Paper
Detection method of 13"
ALL
ALL
0
SYS 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1
1
feeding LG for single-size docu-
<0-1>
ment
Role Base Access Func-
tion
0
0: Function off (No
Network
General
SYS
restriction on data
saving and other
operations)
<0-1>
1: Function on (Data
saving and other
operations have
some restrictions)
1494
Limitation check method
ALL
0
SYS 0: Checked at every
page printed
1
<0-1>
1: Checked at every
job printed
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 158
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1495
Mainte- Service call checking
nance period setting
ALL
6
-
0: No checking period
specified (= Calls
service technician
immediately)
1
<0-12>
2
0: 10 minutes
1: 30 minutes
3: 1 hour
4: 6 hours
5: 12 hours
6: 24 hours
7: 48 hours
8: 7 days
9: 1 month
10: 1 year
11: 5 years
12: Not limited (= Calls
service technician if
such error has
occurred in the past
even once or more)
1496
General Operation setting for User
authentication/registration
ALL
1
SYS 0 : Disables operation
setting for User
1
<0-1>
authentication/regis-
tration
1 : Enables operation
setting for User
authentication/regis-
tration
1497
1498
Elec-
tronic Fil- Client)
ing
e-Filing Access Mode (for
ALL
FAX
0
SYS 0: Mode 1
1: Mode 2
1
1
<0-2>
2: Mode 3
FAX
Inbound FAX function
(Forwarding by TSI)
1
SYS 0: OFF
(Function disabled)
1: ON
<0-1>
(Function enabled)
1530-0 Counter Number of
1-UP /
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
output pages printed
4
4
output pages Duplex
in black mode printing
(black) <8 digits>
only in the black mode.
1530-1
1530-2
2-UP /
Duplex
printing
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
output pages printed in
the black mode using
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
SYS Counts the number of
sheets printed in the
black mode using
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
(black) <8 digits>
2-UP /
Simplex
printing
PPC
0
4
(black) <8 digits>
1530-3
1530-4
4-UP /
Duplex
printing
PPC
0
SYS Counts the number of
output pages printed in
the black mode using
[4IN1].
SYS Counts the number of
sheets printed in the
black mode using
[4IN1].
4
4
(black) <8 digits>
4-UP /
Simplex
printing
PPC
0
(black) <8 digits>
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
0
1531-0
Number of
1-UP /
output pages Duplex
PPC
SYS Counts the number of
output pages printed
only in the full color
mode.
4
Counter
(color) <8 digits>
in full color
mode
printing
1531-1
2-UP /
Duplex
printing
PPC
(color)
0
SYS Counts the number of
output pages printed in
the full color mode
4
<8 digits>
using [2IN1] or [MAGA-
ZINE SORT].
1531-2
1531-3
1531-4
2-UP /
Simplex
printing
PPC
(color)
0
SYS Counts the number of
sheets printed in the full
color mode using [2IN1]
or [MAGAZINE SORT].
SYS Counts the number of
output pages printed in
the full color mode
4
4
4
4
4
<8 digits>
4-UP /
Duplex
printing
PPC
(color)
0
<8 digits>
using [4IN1].
4-UP /
Simplex
printing
PPC
(color)
0
SYS Counts the number of
sheets printed in the full
color mode using
<8 digits>
[4IN1].
1532-0 Counter Number of
1-UP /
output pages Duplex
PPC
(color)
0
SYS Counts the number of
output pages printed
only in the twin color
mode.
SYS Counts the number of
output pages printed in
the twin color mode
using [2IN1] or [MAGA-
ZINE SORT].
SYS Counts the number of
sheets printed in the
twin color mode using
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
<8 digits>
in twin color
mode
printing
1532-1
1532-2
2-UP /
Duplex
printing
PPC
(color)
0
<8 digits>
2-UP /
Simplex
printing
PPC
(color)
0
4
<8 digits>
1532-3
1532-4
4-UP /
Duplex
printing
PPC
(color)
0
SYS Counts the number of
output pages printed in
the twin color mode
using [4IN1].
SYS Counts the number of
sheets printed in the
twin color mode using
[4IN1].
4
4
<8 digits>
4-UP /
Simplex
printing
PPC
(color)
0
<8 digits>
1533-0 Counter Number of
1-UP /
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
output pages printed in
the black mode.
SYS Counts the number of
output pages printed in
the black mode using
[2IN1] or [MAGAZINE
SORT].
4
4
output pages Duplex
of the printer printing
(black) <8 digits>
or BOX
1533-1
2-UP /
Duplex
printing
PRT
(black)
0
<8 digits>
*
When printing is
performed using a
Windows driver, the
1-UP image will be
output.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 160
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
0
1534-0 Counter Number of
1-UP /
PRT
SYS Counts the number of
output pages printed
only in the full color
mode.
4
output pages Duplex
of the printer printing
or BOX
(color) <8 digits>
2
(Full color)
1534-1
2-UP /
Duplex
printing
PRT
0
SYS Counts the number of
output pages printed in
the full color mode
4
(color) <8 digits>
using [2IN1] or [MAGA-
ZINE SORT].
*
When printing is
performed using a
Windows driver, the
1-UP image will be
output.
1535
Counter Number of output pages of
the FAX printing
FAX
0
SYS Counts the number of
output pages in the
4
(black) <8 digits>
(1-UP / Duplex printing)
default settings.
1661
1662
1663
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
Maximum 32 letters
12
12
12
LAN
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
LAN Network type
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
LAN Security
SSID
1
1: Infrared wireless LAN
2: Ad-hoc network
1: 802.1x 2: WPA-PSK
3: WEP 4: NONE
5: WPA 6: WPA2
7: WPA2PSK
<1-2>
4
<1-7>
1664
1665
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
LAN Encryption system
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
ALL
ALL
1
-
-
1: TKIP 2: AES
3: Dynamic WEP
1: 100% 2: 50%
12
12
<1-3>
1
<1-5>
LAN
Transmission output power
3: 25%
5: min
4: 12.5%
1666
1667
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
ALL
ALL
1
-
-
1: Auto
2: Manual
12
12
LAN
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
LAN Transmission rate value
Transmission rate
<1-2>
1
<1-12>
1: 1
3: 5.5
5: 6
2: 2
4: 11
6: 9
7: 12
9: 24
10: 36
11: 48
12: 54
8: 18
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
LAN Operation channel
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
LAN Operation channel value
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
LAN WEP bit number
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
LAN WEP key entry system
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
LAN WEP key value
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
LAN WPA-PSK passphrase
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
LAN Sleep mode setting
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
LAN Slot-time limitation
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1: Auto
2: Manual
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
<1-2>
1
<1-11>
1
1:64
3: 152
1: Hex
2: 128
<1-3>
2
<1-2>
2: ASCII
-
Maximum 32 letters
Maximum 64 letters
-
1
1: Off
3: Normal
1: Long 2: Short
2: Max
<1-3>
1
<1-2>
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 161
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1676
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
ALL
5
-
12
LAN
Number of times of soft-
<0-1000>
ware retry
1677
1678
1679
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
LAN Preamble
Wireless Wireless LAN driver
LAN Operation mode
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN Wireless LAN setting
ALL
ALL
ALL
1
-
-
-
1: Long 2: Longshort
12
12
12
<1-2>
1
<1-3>
1
1: All
2: 11b
3: 11g
This setting is whether
the wireless LAN con-
nection is enabled or
disabled.
<1-3>
1: Unset 2: Enabled
3: Disabled
1680
1681
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
Maximum 255 letters
12
12
LAN
Path name for configura-
tion file
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
This should be the path
name in full where the
client certificate is
located.
LAN
Path name for client certifi-
cate
(Maximum 255 letters)
1682
1684
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
This should be the path
name in full where the
client certificate is
located.
12
12
LAN
Path name for secret key
of client certificate
(Maximum 255 letters)
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
This should be the path
name in full where the
CA self-certificate is
located.
LAN
Path name for CA self-cer-
tificate
(Maximum 255 letters)
1685
1686
1688
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN EAP user name
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
-
-
This should be the user
name when the EAP-
TLS is used.
This should be the user
name when the PEAP
is used.
This should be the path
name to which the log
file is output.
12
12
12
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN EAP user name
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN Log file output
(Maximum 255 letters)
1689
1690
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN Authentication interval
ALL
ALL
30
<30-
65535>
-
This should be the time-
out interval between
EAP responses.
12
12
30: 30 seconds
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN Holding interval
60
<60-
65535>
M
The EAP authentica-
tion will start after hav-
ing been waited in this
period when an EAP
failure was received.
60: 60 seconds
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 162
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1691
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
3
<1-
65535>
M
When an EAPOL-Start
packet has been sent
and the request ID can-
not be received, this
EAPOL-Start packet will
be re-sent for the num-
ber of times set in this
code.
12
LAN
EAPOL-Start
Number of times of packet
retry
2
3: 3 times
1692
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN Session resume
ALL
2
-
This setting is whether
the pre-master key
should be updated or
not upon a TLS re-
negotiation.
12
<1-2>
1: Session is resumed
2: Session is not
resumed
1693
1696
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN MAC Frame size
ALL
ALL
1398
<1-1398>
-
-
This is a MAC frame
size used in the wire-
less LAN connection.
The data is fragmented
into this size.
1398: 1398 bytes
This should be the
device file name which
can obtain a seed to ini-
tialize the WEP PRNG
for xsupplicant.
12
12
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
/dev/
urandom
LAN
Device file setting for
obtaining random number
(Maximum 255 letters)
1697
1699
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN CRL directory designation
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
This should be the path
name of the directory in
full where the CRL file
is located.
12
12
(Maximum 255 letters)
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN EAP authentication type
1
This setting is for the
EAP authentication
type which xsupplicant
can authenticate.
<1-3>
1: EAP-TLS 2: PEAP
3: EAP-TLS and PEAP
1700
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN CN name
ALL
-
-
This should be an
authentication server
12
name (basically a
domain name in full).
(Maximum 255 letters)
1701
1702
1703
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN CN name check
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN Debugging level
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN Ethereal log file output
ALL
ALL
ALL
1
-
-
-
1: NO
2: YES
12
12
12
<1-2>
0
<0-7>
1
0-7: Setting of log file
output level
This setting is whether
the Ethereal log file is
output or not.
<1-2>
1: NO
2: YES
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1704
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
0
-
The update interval of a
secret key across AP
(Access Point) and STA
(Station) can be set.
This interval is for
updating the secret key
from STA.
12
LAN
Update interval of PTK
(Pairwise Transient Key)
<0-720>
0: Not updated
1-720: 1-720 minutes of
interval
1705
1706
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN Strict packet check
ALL
ALL
1
-
-
The Ack bit and request
bit of EAPOL-Key is
checked.
1: Not checked
2: Checked
A higher priority is given
to the xsupplicant task
when a 4-way hand-
shake is started.
12
12
<1-2>
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
1
LAN
Priority change at 4-way
handshake
<1-2>
1: Priority not changed
2: Priority changed
1707
1708
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
ALL
1
-
-
The encryption capabil-
ity output in TLS clien-
tHello message can be
selected.
1: LOW 2: MIDDLE
3: HIGH
These are the security
level which can be
selected from the user
interface. This setting is
not applied in case of
PEAP. ("LOW" and
"MIDDLE" is manda-
tory for PEAP)
12
12
LAN
Security level
<1-3>
Selectable security level
(EAP-TLS)
1
<1-3>
1: LOW + MIDDLE +
HIGH
2: MIDDLE + HIGH
3: HIGH
1710
1711
1712
1713
Blue-
tooth
Blue-
tooth
Blue-
tooth
Blue-
tooth
Bluetooth
ON/OFF setting
Bluetooth
Device name
Bluetooth
Discovery
Bluetooth
Security
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
1
SYS 0: OFF
1: ON
SYS Maximum 32 letters
1
11
1
<0-1>
MFP
1
SYS 0: Not allowed
1: Allowed
SYS 0: Security function
<0-1>
1
<0-1>
1
OFF
1: Security function
ON
1714
Blue-
tooth
Bluetooth
PIN
ALL
0000
SYS Maximum 8 digits
(8-digit sequence)
11
This setting is valid only
when the bluetooth
security function is ON.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 164
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1715
Blue-
tooth
Bluetooth
Data encryption
ALL
1
SYS 0: Not encrypted
1: Encrypted
1
<0-1>>
This setting is valid only
when the bluetooth
security function is ON.
2
1720
1721
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
IP filter minimum area 1
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter maximum area
1
12
12
ter
(Minimum area 1)
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ter
(Maximum area 1)
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
1722
1723
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
IP filter minimum area 2
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter maximum area
2
12
12
ter I
(Minimum area 2)
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ter
(Maximum area 2)
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
1724
1725
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
IP filter minimum area 3
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter maximum area
3
12
12
ter
(Minimum area 3)
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ter
(Maximum area 3)
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
1726
1727
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
IP filter minimum area 4
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter maximum area
4
12
12
ter
(Minimum area 4)
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ter
(Maximum area 4)
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
1728
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ALL
-
-
IP filter minimum area 5
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
12
ter
(Minimum area 5)
000.000.000.000)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 165
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
-
1729
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ALL
-
IP filter maximum area
5
12
ter
(Maximum area 5)
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
1730
1731
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
IP filter minimum area 6
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter maximum area
6
12
12
ter
(Minimum area 6)
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ter
(Maximum area 6)
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
1732
1733
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
IP filter minimum area 7
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter maximum area
7
12
12
ter
(Minimum area 7)
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ter
(Maximum area 7)
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
1734
1735
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
IP filter minimum area 8
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter maximum area
8
12
12
ter
(Minimum area 8)
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ter
(Maximum area 8)
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
1736
1737
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
IP filter minimum area 9
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
IP filter maximum area
9
12
12
ter
(Minimum area 9)
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ter
(Maximum area 9)
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
1738
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ALL
-
-
IP filter minimum area
10
12
ter
(Minimum area 10)
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 166
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
-
1739
Network IP address range for IP fil-
ALL
-
IP filter maximum area
10
12
ter
(Maximum area 10)
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
000.000.000.000)
2
1740
1741
Network SSL setting
SSL ftp server OFF/ON
Network SSL setting
ALL
ALL
2
-
-
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
SSL HTTP server port
number
12
12
<1-2>
10443
<1-
HTTP server port number
65535>
1742
1743
Network SSL setting
ALL
ALL
2
-
-
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
SSL IPP server port
number
12
12
IPP server OFF/ON setting
Network SSL setting
IPP server port number
<1-2>
443
<1-
65535>
1744
SSL setting
SSL ftp server OFF/ON
2
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Network
ALL
-
12
<1-2>
1745
1746
SSL setting
SSL ftp server Port
SSL setting
SSL LDAP Client OFF/ON
990
<1-5535>
Port number to FTP
Server
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
-
-
12
12
2
<1-2>
1747
1748
1749
1750
SSL setting
SSL LDAP Client Port
636
<1-
65535>
Port number to LDAP
Server
Network
Network
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
12
12
12
12
SSL setting
SSL POP3 Client OFF/ON
2
OFF/ON
1: Valid
2: Invalid
Port number to POP3
Server
<1-2>
SSL setting
SSL POP3 Client Port
995
<1-
65535>
SSL setting
SSL SMTP Client OFF/ON
2
2: Invalid
3: SMTP with TLS
<1-2>
(STARTTLS)
4: SMTPS (SMTP
OverSSL)
1751
1755
SSL setting
SSL SMTP Client Port
465
<1-
65535>
Port number to SMTP
Server
Network
ALL
ALL
-
-
12
12
Network Enabling server's IP
address acquired by DHCP
2
Domain Name Server
option (6)
<1-2>
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
*
This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
1756
Network Enabling server's IP
address acquired by DHCP
ALL
2
-
NetBIOS over TCP/IP
Name Server option
(44) = Primary and
Secondary Wins NAME
1: Enabled
12
<1-2>
2: Disabled
*
This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 167
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1
1757
Enabling server's IP
The Host Name Ven-
dor Extension option
(12)
Network
ALL
-
12
address acquired by DHCP
<1-2>
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
This value is used only
when DHCP is enabled.
1762
Network Enabling server's IP
address acquired by DHCP
ALL
2
-
SNTP Server Option
(42) NTP Server
Address
12
<1-2>
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
*
This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Maximum 63 letters
Maximum 255 letters
Maximum 63 letters
Maximum 63 letters
12
12
12
12
12
LAN
Direction of Ethereal log
file output
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN
Control sequence setting
of "Cipher Suite"
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN
Path name for user certifi-
cate
Wireless Wireless LAN supplicant
LAN
Path name entered for CA
self-certificate
Network Enabling server's IP
address acquired by DHCP
2
SYS DNS domain name
Option (15) DNS
domain name of the cli-
ent
<1-2>
1: Enabled
2: Disabled
*
This value is used
only when DHCP is
enabled.
1768
1778
Network Previous IP address
ALL
ALL
-
-
000.000.000.000-
255.255.255.255
(Default value:
12
1
000.000.000.000)
General Hang-up period of control
panel at the 3rd misentry of
administrator's password
1
0: No hang-up
1: 0.5 minutes (= 30
seconds)
SYS
<0-7>
2: 1 minute
3: 3 minutes
4: 5 minutes
5: 10 minutes
6: 15 minutes
7: 30 minutes
1779
Default data saving direc-
tory of "Scan to File"
0
0: Local directory
1: REMOTE 1
2: REMOTE 2
Network
ALL
SYS
1
<0-2>
1781-0 Network Notification of When job
0
Sets the notification
method of scan job
completion.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
ALL
ALL
SYS
SYS
4
4
scan job
completed
<0-1>
0
<0-1>
1781-1
On error
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 168
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1782
File name format of "Save
as file" and Email transmis-
sion
0
Sets the naming
method of the file of
"Save as file" and Email
transmission.
Network
ALL
SYS
1
<0-5>
2
0: [FileName]-[Data]-
[Page]
1: [FileName]-[Page]-
[Data]
2: [Data]-[FileName]-
[Page]
3: [Data]-[Page]-[File-
Name]
4: [Page]-[FileName]-
[Data]
5: [Page]-[Data]-[File-
Name]
1783
Date display format of the
file name of "Save as file"
and Email transmission
0
Sets the data display
format of the file of
"Save as file" and Email
transmission.
Network
ALL
SYS
1
<0-4>
0: [YYYY][MM][DD]
[HH][mm][SS]
1: [YY][MM][DD]
[HH][mm][SS]
2: [YYYY][MM][DD]
3: [YY][MM][DD]
4: [HH][mm][SS]
The order of [YY], [MM]
and [DD] varies
depending on the set-
ting of the code 08-640
(Data display format).
1784
Single page data saving
directory at "Save as file"
0
Sets the directory
where the file of "Save
as file" is saved.
Network
ALL
SYS
1
<0-1>
0: Save it under a sub-
folder
1: Save it without cre-
ating a subfolder
1785
1786
Page number display for-
mat of the file of "Save as
file" and Email transmis-
sion
Extension (suffix) format of
the file of "Save as file"
4
Sets the digit of a page
number attached on the
file.
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
SYS
SYS
1
1
<4-6>
4-6: 4-6 digits
3
Sets the extension dig-
its of the file to be
saved.
<3-6>
3: Auto
4: 4 digits
5: 5 digits
6: 6 digits
1800-0
1800-1
1800-2
Image
process- forced supply
ing time setting
Color toner
Y
M
C
ALL
70
M
M
M
Sets the motor driving
time of the developer
unit at the time of the
color toner forced sup-
ply.
4
4
4
(color) <0-255>
ALL 70
(color) <0-255>
ALL 70
(color) <0-255>
0-255: Setting value x
0.1 seconds
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 169
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1801
Image
process- count setting
Color toner forced supply
ALL
(color)
7
M
Sets the number of
times of the color toner
forced supply.
1
<1-10>
ing
1802-0
1802-1
1802-2
1915
Image
process- ting of the
Start up set-
Level
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
3
M
M
Sets the performing
level of the developer
material stabilizing
operation.
Set the interval time
between performances
of developer material
stabilizing operation.
4
<2-8>
ing
developer
material stabi-
lizing mode.
Pattern
interval
50
<0-100>
4
4
1
Number of
repeating
time
10
<0-20>
M
Set the number of
repeating times of the
developer material sta-
bilizing operation.
0: Eliminates 2 mm
from circumference
(Void: 2 mm)
Filing size for Network
scanning function
0
Network
SYS
<0-1>
1: No space eliminated
(Void: 0 mm)
1920
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
Device domain name of
device authentication
Windows domain No. 2 of
user authentication
Windows domain No. 3 of
user authentication
LDAP authentication
Server type
LDAP authentication
User attribute
Execution of user authenti-
cation when the user ID is
not entered
UTY Maximum 128 letters
Network
Network
Network
Network
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
12
12
12
12
12
1
Maximum 128 letters
Maximum 128 letters
UTY
UTY
1
NIC 1: Windows Server
2: Not Windows Server
<1-2>
Sets a user attribute
name.
-
NIC
2
0: Forcible execution
1: Execution impossi-
ble (pooled in the
SYS
<0-2>
invalid queue)
2: Forcible deletion
1926
FAX
Tab/cover sheet printing at
FAX reception
Printing stop function
0
Sets on or off of the
printing function of spe-
cial sheets such as tab
or cover sheet of FAX,
Email or list print.
ALL
SYS
1
<0-1>
0: Function off
1: Function on
1928
1936
Role Based Access
LDAP search index
0
<0-
4294967
295>
MFP-
serial
5
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
SYS
UTY
AppleTalk device name
Maximum 32 letters
The Network-related
serial number of the
equipment appears at
"serial".
12
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 170
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1937
User name and password
at user authentication or
"Save as file"
0
0: User name and
password of the
device
1
Network
ALL
SYS
<0-2>
1: User name and
password at the
user authentication
(Template registra-
tion information
comes first when a
template is
2
retrieved.)
2: User name and
password at the
user authentication
(User information of
the authentication
comes first when a
template is
retrieved.)
1938
General Reformatting process due
to a version change of SYS
ROM
2
Use this setting to refor-
mat the specific parti-
tion whose file system
has been changed in
Ver.2, at the version up/
downgrade of the SYS
ROM.
7
ALL
-
<0-2>
No reformatting pro-
cess shall be used in
any cases other than
this version change.
0: Waiting (No refor-
matting)
1: dosFs to catFs (Ver-
sion upgrade from
Ver.1 to Ver.2 or
later)
2: catFs to dosFs (Ver-
sion downgrade
from Ver.2 or later to
Ver.1)
1939
STAGE I/F startup setting
STAGE port number
32bit definition
0: Disabled
bit1: Normal Remote I/F
bit2: Remote Scan I/F
Network
1940
1950
Network
Network
SMB signature for SMB
server
1
1: Auto
2: Valid
3: Invalid
1: Auto
2: Valid
3: Invalid
ALL
ALL
UTY
UTY
12
12
<0-3>
1951
SMB signature for SMB cli-
ent
1
Network
<0-3>
1952
1953
Device name for device
authentication
Password for the device
name used for device
authentication
Maximum 128 letters
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
-
-
UTY
UTY
12
12
Maximum 128 letters
1954
PDC2 of user authentica-
tion
Maximum 128 letters
Network
ALL
-
UTY
12
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 171
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
BDC2 of user authentica-
tion
PDC3 of user authentica-
tion
Maximum 128 letters
Maximum 128 letters
Maximum 128 letters
Network
Network
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
-
-
-
-
-
UTY
UTY
UTY
12
12
12
12
12
Network BDC3 of user authentica-
tion
PDC of device authentica-
tion
BDC of device authentica-
tion
UTY Maximum 128 letters
Maximum 128 letters
Network
Network
UTY
Note:
In this equipment, a toner image is formed on the transfer belt prior to a paper feeding.
When the feeding retry occurs and the transport timing is delayed, the toner image on the trans-
fer belt is cleaned off without the 2nd transfer since the paper cannnot be reached for the 2nd
transfer proccess.
After that, the toner image fomation is retried while the paper is waited.
In this case, the toner for this image formation is consumed wastefully since the toner image on
the transfer belt is already cleaned off, even though the printing is normally completed.
Therefore, note that the excessive toner will be consumed consequently when the upper limit
value of feeding retry counter is set larger or set as "0" (no limit).
The toner is also consumed wastefully when the paper misfeeding occurs. Replace the roller at
earlier timing if the paper misfeedings have occurred frequently.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 172
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note:
In the pixel counter function, the twin color copy mode is regarded as the full color mode.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Func- <Accept-
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
2
1500
Pixel
counter
Standard paper size setting
ALL
EUR: 0
UC: 1
JPN: 0
<0-1>
SYS Selects the standard
paper size to convert it
into the pixel count (%).
0: A4
1
1: LT
1501
1502
Pixel
counter
Pixel counter all clearing
Service technician refer-
ALL
ALL
-
-
SYS Clears all information
related to the pixel
counter.
SYS Clears all information
related to the service
technician reference
pixel counter.
3
3
Pixel
counter ence counter clearing
1503
1504
Pixel
Toner cartridge reference
ALL
ALL
-
SYS Clears all information
related to the toner car-
tridge reference pixel
counter.
SYS Selects whether or not
to display the pixel
counter on the LCD
screen.
3
1
counter counter clearing
Pixel
counter ting
Pixel counter display set-
1
<0-1>
0: Displayed
1: Not displayed
1505
Pixel
counter ting
Displayed reference set-
ALL
0
SYS Selects the reference
when displaying the
pixel counter on the
LCD screen.
1
<0-1>
0: Service technician
reference
1: Toner cartridge ref-
erence
1506
1507
Pixel
Toner empty determination
ALL
ALL
0
SYS Selects the counter to
determine toner empty.
0: Output pages
1
1
counter counter setting
<0-1>
1: Pixel counter
Pixel
Threshold setting for toner
500
<0-999>
SYS Sets the number of out-
put pages to determine
toner empty. This set-
ting is valid when “0” is
set at 08-1506.
counter empty determination (Out-
put pages)
1508
Pixel
Threshold setting for toner
ALL
21500
<0-
60000>
SYS Sets the number of out-
put pages to determine
toner empty. This set-
ting is valid when “1” is
set at 08-1506.
1
counter empty determination (Pixel
counter)
1509
1510
1511
Pixel
Pixel counter clear flag/
ALL
ALL
0
SYS Becomes “1” when 08-
1502 is performed.
2
2
2
counter Service technician refer-
ence
Pixel
<0-1>
Service technician refer-
-
-
SYS Displays the date on
which 08-1502 was per-
formed.
SYS Displays the date on
which 08-1503 was per-
formed.
counter ence cleared date
Pixel
Toner cartridge reference
ALL
(color)
counter cleared date (Y)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
-
1512
Pixel
Toner cartridge reference
ALL
SYS Displays the date on
which 08-1503 was per-
formed.
SYS Displays the date on
which 08-1503 was per-
formed.
SYS Displays the date on
which 08-1503 was per-
formed.
SYS Displays the date on
which 08-1503 was per-
formed.
SYS Displays the date on
which 08-1503 was per-
formed.
SYS Displays the date on
which 08-1503 was per-
formed.
SYS Displays the date on
which 08-1503 was per-
formed.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
counter cleared date (M)
(color)
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1547
Pixel
Toner cartridge reference
ALL
(color)
-
-
-
-
-
-
counter cleared date (C)
Pixel
Toner cartridge reference
ALL
counter cleared date (K)
Pixel
Toner cartridge reference
ALL
(color)
counter count started date (Y)
Pixel
Toner cartridge reference
ALL
(color)
counter count started date (M)
Pixel
Toner cartridge reference
ALL
(color)
counter count started date (C)
Pixel
Toner cartridge reference
ALL
counter count started date (K)
Pixel
counter fullcolor
(Service technicianrefer-
Number of output pages/
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
(color)
output pagesconverted
to the standard paper
sizein the copy function,
full color modeand ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
ence)
[Unit. page]
1548
1549
1550
Pixel
Number of output pages/
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
2
2
2
counter black (Service technician
reference)
(black)
output pages con-
verted to the standard
paper sizein the copy
function, black mode
and service technician
reference.
[Unit. page]
Pixel
Number of output pages/
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
counter fullcolor (Service techni-
(color)
output pages con-
verted to the standard
paper size in the printer
function, full color mode
and service technician
reference.
cian reference)
[Unit. page]
Pixel
Number of output pages/
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
counter black (Service technician
reference)
(black)
output pages con-
verted to the standard
paper size in the printer
function, black mode
and service technician
reference.
[Unit. page]
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 174
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1551
Pixel
Number of output pages/
FAX
(black)
<8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
output pages con-
2
counter black (Service technician
reference)
verted to the standard
paper size in the FAX
function, black mode
and service technician
reference.
2
[Unit. page]
1552
Pixel
Number of output pages/
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
2
counter full color (K) (Toner car-
tridge reference)
(color)
output pages con-
verted to the standard
paper size in the copy
function, full color
mode, toner K and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
[Unit. page]
1553
1554
Pixel
Number of output pages/
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
2
2
counter black (Toner cartridge ref-
(black)
output pages con-
verted to the standard
paper size in the copy
function, black mode
and toner cartridge ref-
erence.
erence)
[Unit. page]
Pixel
Number of output pages/
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
counter full color (K) (Toner car-
(color)
output pages con-
verted to the standard
paper size in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner K and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
tridge reference)
[Unit. page]
1555
1556
1557
Pixel
Number of output pages/
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
2
2
2
counter black (Toner cartridge ref-
erence)
(black)
output pages con-
verted to the standard
paper size in the printer
function, black mode
and toner cartridge ref-
erence.
[Unit. page]
Pixel
Number of output pages/
FAX
(black)
<8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
output pages con-
counter black (Toner cartridge ref-
erence)
verted to the standard
paper size in the FAX
function, black mode
and toner cartridge ref-
erence.
[Unit. page]
Pixel
Number of output pages/
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
counter full color (Y) (Toner car-
tridge reference)
(color)
output pages con-
verted to the standard
paper size in the copy
function, full color
mode, toner Y and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
[Unit. page]
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1558
Pixel
Number of output pages/
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
2
2
2
2
2
counter full color (Y) (Toner car-
(color)
output pages con-
verted to the standard
paper size in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner Y and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
tridge reference)
[Unit. page]
1559
1560
1561
1562
Pixel
Number of output pages/
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
counter full color (M) (Toner car-
tridge reference)
(color)
output pages con-
verted to the standard
paper size in the copy
function, full color
mode, toner M and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
[Unit. page]
Pixel
Number of output pages/
PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
counter full color (M) (Toner car-
tridge reference)
(color)
output pages con-
verted to the standard
paper size in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner M and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
[Unit. page]
Pixel
Number of output pages/
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
counter full color (C) (Toner car-
tridge reference)
(color)
output pages con-
verted to the standard
paper size in the copy
function, full color
mode, toner C and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
[Unit. page]
Pixel
Number of output pages/
ALL
(color)
<8 digits> SYS Counts the number of
output pages con-
counter full color (C) (Toner car-
tridge reference)
verted to the standard
paper size in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner C and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
[Unit. page]
1563
1564
1565
1566
Pixel
Toner cartridge Y replace-
ALL
(color)
<3 digits> SYS Counts the number of
time of the toner car-
tridge Y replacement.
<3 digits> SYS Counts the number of
time of the toner car-
tridge M replacement.
<3 digits> SYS Counts the number of
time of the toner car-
tridge C replacement.
<3 digits> SYS Counts the number of
time of the toner car-
2
2
2
2
counter ment counter
Pixel
Toner cartridge M replace-
ALL
(color)
counter ment counter
Pixel
Toner cartridge C replace-
ALL
(color)
counter ment counter
Pixel
Toner cartridge K replace-
ALL
counter ment counter
tridge K replacement.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 176
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1577
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy
function, full color
mode, all toner and ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
counter color (Y+M+C+K) (Service (color)
technician reference)
2
[Unit: 0.01%]
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy
function, full color
mode, toner Y and ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
counter color (Y) (Service techni-
cian reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy
function, full color
mode, toner M and ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
counter color (M) (Service techni-
cian reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy
function, full color
mode, toner C and ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
counter color (C) (Service techni-
cian reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy
function, full color
mode, toner K and ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
counter color (K) (Service techni-
cian reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PRT
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function, full color
mode, all toner and ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
counter color (Y+M+C+K) (Service (color)
technician reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner Y and ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
counter color (Y) (Service techni-
cian reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner M and ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
counter color (M) (Service techni-
cian reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1585
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner C and ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
counter color (C) (Service techni-
cian reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner K and ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
counter color (K) (Service techni-
cian reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC/
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy/
printer function, full
color mode, all toner
and service technician
reference.
counter color (Y+M+C+K) (Service
technician reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC/
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy/
printer function, full
color mode, toner Y and
service technician refer-
ence.
counter color (Y) (Service techni-
cian reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC/
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy/
printer function, full
color mode, toner M
and service technician
reference.
counter color (M) (Service techni-
cian reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC/
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy/
printer function, full
color mode, toner C
and service technician
reference.
counter color (C) (Service techni-
cian reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC/
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy/
printer function, full
color mode, toner K and
service technician refer-
ence.
counter color (K) (Service techni-
cian reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/black
PPC
(black)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy
function, black mode
and service technician
reference.
counter (Service technician refer-
ence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 178
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1593
Pixel
Average pixel count/black
PRT
(black)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function, black mode
and service technician
reference.
2
2
2
counter (Service technician refer-
ence)
2
[Unit: 0.01%]
1594
1595
Pixel
Average pixel count/black
FAX
(black)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the FAX
function, black mode
and service technician
reference.
counter (Service technician refer-
ence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/black
PPC/
PRT/
FAX
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy/
printer/FAX function,
black mode and ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
counter (Service technician refer-
ence)
(black)
[Unit: 0.01%]
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PPC
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the copy func-
tion, full color mode, all
toner and service tech-
nician reference.
2
2
2
2
2
2
counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service tech- (color)
nician reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PPC
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the copy func-
tion, full color mode,
toner Y and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the copy func-
tion, full color mode,
toner M and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the copy func-
tion, full color mode,
toner C and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the copy func-
tion, full color mode,
toner K and service
technician reference.
[Unit: 0.01%]
counter (Y) (Service technician ref-
erence)
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PPC
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
counter (M) (Service technician ref-
erence)
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PPC
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
counter (C) (Service technician ref-
erence)
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PPC
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
counter (K) (Service technician ref-
erence)
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the printer
function, full color
mode, all toner and ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service tech-
nician reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1602
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner Y and ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
2
2
2
2
counter (Y) (Service technician ref-
erence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
1603
1604
1605
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner M and ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
counter (M) (Service technician ref-
erence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner C and ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
counter (C) (Service technician ref-
erence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner K and ser-
vice technician refer-
ence.
counter (K) (Service technician ref-
erence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
1606
1607
1608
1609
Pixel
Latest pixel count/black
PPC
(black)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the copy func-
tion, black mode and
service technician refer-
ence.
2
2
2
2
counter (Service technician refer-
ence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Latest pixel count/black
PRT
(black)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the printer
function, black mode
and service technician
reference.
counter (Service technician refer-
ence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Latest pixel count/black
FAX
(black)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the FAX func-
tion, black mode and
service technician refer-
ence.
counter (Service technician refer-
ence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy
function, full color
mode, toner Y and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge
reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 180
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1610
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy
function, full color
mode, toner M and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
2
2
2
counter color (M) (Toner cartridge
reference)
2
[Unit: 0.01%]
1611
1612
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy
function, full color
mode, toner C and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
counter color (C) (Toner cartridge
reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy
function, full color
mode, toner K and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
counter color (K) (Toner cartridge
reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
1613
1614
Pixel
Average pixel count/black
PPC
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy
function, black mode
and toner cartridge ref-
erence.
2
2
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy
function, full color/black
mode, toner K and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
counter color (K)+black (Toner car-
tridge reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
1615
1616
1617
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner Y and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
2
2
2
counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge
reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner M and
toner cartridge refer
ence.
counter color (M) (Toner cartridge
reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner C and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
counter color (C) (Toner cartridge
reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1618
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner K and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
2
counter color (K) (Toner cartridge
reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
1619
1620
Pixel
Average pixel count/black
PRT
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function, black mode
and toner cartridge ref-
erence.
2
2
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PRT
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the printer
function, full color/black
mode, toner K and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
counter color (K)+black (Toner car-
tridge reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC/
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy/
printer function, full
color mode, toner Y and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
2
2
2
2
2
counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge
reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC/
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy/
printer function, full
color mode, toner M
and toner cartridge ref-
erence.
counter color (M) (Toner cartridge
reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC/
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy/
printer function, full
color mode, toner C
and toner cartridge ref-
erence.
counter color (C) (Toner cartridge
reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/full
PPC/
PRT/
FAX
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the copy/
printer/FAX function,
black mode, toner K
and toner cartridge ref-
erence.
counter color (K)+black (Toner car-
tridge reference)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Average pixel count/black
FAX
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the average
pixel count in the FAX
function, black mode
and toner cartridge ref-
erence.
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black)
[Unit: 0.01%]
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 182
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1626
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PPC
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the copy func-
tion, full color mode,
toner Y and toner car-
tridge reference.
2
2
2
2
2
counter (Y) (Toner cartridge refer-
ence)
2
[Unit:0.01%]
1627
1628
1629
1630
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PPC
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the copy func-
tion, full color mode,
toner M and toner car-
tridge reference.
counter (M) (Toner cartridge refer-
ence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PPC
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the copy func-
tion, full color mode,
toner C and toner car-
tridge reference.
counter (C) (Toner cartridge refer-
ence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PPC
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the copy func-
tion, full color mode,
toner K and toner car-
tridge reference.
counter (K) (Toner cartridge refer-
ence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner Y and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
counter (Y) (Toner cartridge refer-
ence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
1631
1632
1633
1634
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner M and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
2
2
2
2
counter (M) (Toner cartridge refer-
ence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner C and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
counter (C) (Toner cartridge refer-
ence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Latest pixel count/full color
PRT
(color)
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the printer
function, full color
mode, toner K and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
counter (K) (Toner cartridge refer-
ence)
[Unit: 0.01%]
Pixel
Latest pixel count/black
FAX
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the FAX func-
tion, black mode and
toner cartridge refer-
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black)
ence. [Unit: 0.01%]
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1639
Pixel
Latest pixel count/black
PPC
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the copy func-
tion, black mode and
toner cartridge refer-
ence.
2
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black)
[Unit: 0.01%]
1640
Pixel
Latest pixel count/black
PRT
0
<0-
10000>
SYS Displays the latest pixel
count in the printer
function, black mode
and toner cartridge ref-
erence.
2
counter (Toner cartridge reference) (black)
[Unit: 0.01%]
1641-0
1641-1
1641-2
1641-3
1641-4
1641-5
1641-6
1641-7
1641-8
1641-9
1642-0
1642-1
1642-2
1642-3
1642-4
1642-5
1642-6
1642-7
1642-8
1642-9
Pixel
Pixel count
0-5%
PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
counter distribution/
full color (Y)
(color)
are divided into 10
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distribu-
tions in the copy func-
tion, full color mode and
toner Y are displayed.
[Unit: page]
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
80.1-
100%
0-5%
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data
Pixel
Pixel count
counter distribution/
full color (M)
(color)
are divided into 10
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distribu-
tions in the copy func-
tion, full color mode and
toner M are displayed.
[Unit: page]
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
80.1-
100%
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 184
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1643-0
1643-1
1643-2
1643-3
1643-4
1643-5
1643-6
1643-7
1643-8
1643-9
1644-0
1644-1
1644-2
1644-3
1644-4
1644-5
1644-6
1644-7
1644-8
1644-9
Pixel
Pixel count
0-5%
PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
counter distribution/
(color)
are divided into 10
full color (C)
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distribu-
tions in the copy func-
tion, full color mode and
toner C are displayed.
[Unit: page]
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
2
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
80.1-
100%
0-5%
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data
Pixel
Pixel count
counter distribution/
(color)
are divided into 10
full color (K)
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distribu-
tions in the copy func-
tion, full color mode and
toner K are displayed.
[Unit: page]
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
80.1-
100%
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(color)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1645-0
1645-1
1645-2
1645-3
1645-4
1645-5
1645-6
1645-7
1645-8
1645-9
1646-0
1646-1
1646-2
1646-3
1646-4
1646-5
1646-6
1646-7
1646-8
1646-9
Pixel
Pixel count
0-5%
PRT <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
counter distribution/
(color)
are divided into 10
full color (Y)
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distribu-
tions in the printer func-
tion, full color mode and
toner Y are displayed.
[Unit: page]
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
80.1-
100%
0-5%
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data
Pixel
Pixel count
counter distribution/
(color)
are divided into 10
full color (M)
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distribu-
tions in the printer func-
tion, full color mode and
toner M are displayed.
[Unit: page]
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
80.1-
100%
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 186
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1647-0
1647-1
1647-2
1647-3
1647-4
1647-5
1647-6
1647-7
1647-8
1647-9
1648-0
1648-1
1648-2
1648-3
1648-4
1648-5
1648-6
1648-7
1648-8
1648-9
Pixel
Pixel count
0-5%
PRT <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
counter distribution/
(color)
are divided into 10
full color (C)
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distribu-
tions in the printer func-
tion, full color mode and
toner C are displayed.
[Unit: page]
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
2
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
80.1-
100%
0-5%
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data
Pixel
Pixel count
counter distribution/
are divided into 10
(color)
full color (K)
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distribu-
tions in the printer func-
tion, full color mode and
toner K are displayed.
[Unit: page]
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
80.1-
100%
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(color)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1649-0
1649-1
1649-2
1649-3
1649-4
1649-5
1649-6
1649-7
1649-8
1649-9
1650-0
1650-1
1650-2
1650-3
1650-4
1650-5
1650-6
1650-7
1650-8
1650-9
Pixel
Pixel count
0-5%
PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
counter distribution/
(black)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(black)
are divided into 10
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distribu-
tions in the copy func-
tion and black mode
aredisplayed.
black
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(black)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(black)
[Unit: page]
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(black)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(black)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(black)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(black)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(black)
PPC <8 digits> SYS
(black)
80.1-
100%
Pixel
Pixel count
0-5%
PRT <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data
counter distribution/
(black)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(black)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(black)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(black)
are divided into 10
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distribu-
tions in the printer func-
tion and black mode are
displayed.
black
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(black)
[Unit: page]
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(black)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(black)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(black)
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(black)
80.1-
100%
PRT <8 digits> SYS
(black)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 188
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting mode (08)
Default
Func- <Accept-
Pro-
cedur
e
Classifi-
cation
Code
Items
RAM
Contents
tion
able
value>
1651-0
1651-1
1651-2
1651-3
1651-4
1651-5
1651-6
1651-7
1651-8
1651-9
Pixel
Pixel count
0-5%
FAX
(black)
FAX
(black)
FAX
(black)
FAX
(black)
FAX
(black)
FAX
(black)
FAX
(black)
FAX
(black)
<8 digits> SYS The pixel count data
are divided into 10
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
counter distribution/
black
ranges. The number of
output pages in each
range is displayed. In
this code, the distribu-
tions in the FAX func-
tion and black mode are
dis-played.
5.1-10%
10.1-15%
15.1-20%
20.1-25%
25.1-30%
30.1-40%
40.1-60%
60.1-80%
<8 digits> SYS
<8 digits> SYS
<8 digits> SYS
<8 digits> SYS
<8 digits> SYS
<8 digits> SYS
<8 digits> SYS
<8 digits> SYS
<8 digits> SYS
2
[Unit: page]
FAX
(black)
FAX
(black)
80.1-
100%
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<<PM support mode related code>>
•
The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08).
The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table
below.
<Sub-codes>
0: Present number of output pages
- Means the present number of output pages.
1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement
- Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement.
2: Number of output pages at the last replacement
- Means the number of output pages at the last replacement.
3: Present driving counts
- Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds).
4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced
- Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds).
5: Driving counts at the last replacement
- Means the drive counts at the last replacement.
6: Present output pages for control
- Means the present number of output pages for controlling.
7: Present driving counts for control
- Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds).
8: Number of times replaced
- Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen.
Notes:
•
•
•
Sub-code 0 is equivalent to sub-code 6.
Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7.
When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice
versa.
•
When "0" is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated
to "0".
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 190
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PM management set- Date of previous
Items
ting <Procedure 4>
*Indicated in 8 digits
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Remarks
Photoconductive drum
1150-0 to 8
1158-0 to 8
1166-0 to 8
1174-0 to 8
1182-0 to 8
1190-0 to 8
1198-0 to 8
1200-0 to 8
1151
1159
1167
1175
1183
1191
1199
1201
<Default values of code 1150
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/
200,000
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/
315,000
2
Drum cleaning blade
Drum cleaning brush
Main charger grid
Main charger wire
<Default values of code 1158
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/
200,000
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/
315,000
<Default values of code 1166
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/
200,000
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/
315,000
<Default values of code 1174
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/
200,000
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/
315,000
<Default values of code 1182
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/
200,000
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/
315,000
Main charger wire clean-
ing pad
<Default values of code 1190
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/
200,000
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/
315,000
Ozone filter
<Default values of code 1198
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/
200,000
Sub-code 4: 315,000/315,000/
315,000
Developer material
<Default values of code 1200
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/
150,000
Sub-code 4: 116,000/116,000/
116,000
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PM management set- Date of previous
Items
ting <Procedure 4>
*Indicated in 8 digits
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Remarks
Developer material Y
1202-0 to 8
1204-0 to 8
1206-0 to 8
1214-0 to 8
1203
1205
1207
1215
<Default values of code 1202
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 24,000/30,000/37,500
Sub-code 4: 28,000/28,000/28,000
Developer material M
Developer material C
1st transfer roller
<Default values of code 1204
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 24,000/30,000/37,500
Sub-code 4: 28,000/28,000/28,000
<Default values of code 1206
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 24,000/30,000/37,500
Sub-code 4: 28,000/28,000/28,000
<Default values of code 1214
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 390,000/480,000/
600,000
Sub-code 4: 1010,000/1010,000/
1010,000
Transfer belt
1228-0 to 8
1232-0 to 8
1240-0 to 8
1250-0 to 8
1258-0 to 8
1229
1233
1241
1251
1259
<Default values of code 1228
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 390,000/480,000/
600,000
Sub-code 4: 1010,000/1010,000/
1010,000
Transfer belt cleaning
blade
<Default values of code 1232
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 130,000/160,000/
200,000
Sub-code 4: 337,000/337,000/
337,000
2nd transfer roller
Pressure roller
Oil roller
<Default values of code 1240
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 300,000/360,000/
450,000
Sub-code 4: 468,000/468,000/
468,000
<Default values of code 1250
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/
150,000
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/
285,000
<Default values of code 1258
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/
150,000
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/
285,000
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 192
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PM management set- Date of previous
Items
ting <Procedure 4>
*Indicated in 8 digits
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Remarks
Cleaning roller
1260-0 to 8
1270-0 to 8
1272-0 to 8
1276-0 to 8
1261
1271
1273
1277
<Default values of code 1260
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/
150,000
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/
285,000
2
Pressure roller separation
finger
<Default values of code 1270
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/
150,000
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/
285,000
Fuser belt
<Default values of code 1272
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/
150,000
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/
285,000
Fuser belt guide
<Default values of code 1276
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/
150,000
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/
285,000
Pickup roller
(RADF)
1282-0, 1, 2, 8
1284-0,1,2,8
1286-0, 1, 2, 8
1283
1285
1287
<Default values of code 1282
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/
120,000
Feed roller
(RADF)
<Default values of code 1284
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/
120,000
Separation roller
(RADF)
<Default values of code 1286
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/
120,000
Pickup roller
(Upper drawer)
1290-0, 1, 2, 8
1292-0,1,2,8
1294-0,1,2,8
1291
1293
1295
<Default values of code 1290
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Pickup roller
(Lower drawer)
<Default values of code 1292
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Pickup roller
(LCF)
<Default values of code 1294
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/
160,000
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PM management set- Date of previous
Items
Feed roller
ting <Procedure 4>
*Indicated in 8 digits
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Remarks
1298-0,1,2,8
1300-0,1,2,8
1302-0, 1, 2, 8
1299
1301
1303
<Default values of code 1298
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
(Upper drawer)
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Feed roller
(Lower drawer)
<Default values of code 1300
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Feed roller
(LCF)
<Default values of code 1302
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/
160,000
Separation roller
(Upper drawer)
1306-0,1,2,8
1308-0,1,2,8
1310-0,1,2,8
1307
1309
1311
<Default values of code 1306
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Separation roller
(Lower drawer)
<Default values of code 1308
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Separation roller
(LCF)
<Default values of code 1310
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 160,000/160,000/
160,000
Separation roller
(PFP upper drawer)
1312-0,1,2,8
1314-0,1,2,8
1316-0,1,2,8
1320-0,1,2,8
1322-0,1,2,8
1324-0,1,2,8
1328-0,1,2,8
1313
1315
1317
1321
1323
1325
1329
<Default values of code 1312
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Separation roller
(PFP lower drawer)
<Default values of code 1314
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Separation roller
(Bypass unit)
<Default values of code 1316
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Feed roller
(PFP upper drawer)
<Default values of code 1320
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Feed roller
(PFP lower drawer)
<Default values of code 1322
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Feed roller
(Bypass unit)
<Default values of code 1324
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Pickup roller
(PFP upper drawer)
<Default values of code 1328
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 194
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PM management set- Date of previous
Items
Pickup roller
ting <Procedure 4>
*Indicated in 8 digits
replacement
<Procedure 2>
Remarks
1330-0,1,2,8
1332-0, 1, 2, 8
1838-0 to 8
1331
1333
1839
<Default values of code 1330
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
(PFP lower drawer)
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Pickup roller
(Bypass unit)
<Default values of code 1332
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0
2
Sub-code 1: 80,000/80,000/80,000
Pressure roller
discharge brush
<Default values of code 1838
(e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0
Sub-code 1: 100,000/120,000/
150,000
Sub-code 4: 285,000/285,000/
285,000
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<<Procedure to copy the total counter value (08-257)>>
(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(2) Key in the code “257” with the digital keys and press the [START] button (the following is dis-
played).
Note:
Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.
Fig.2-3
(3) Key in the value “1” or “2” and press the [START] button.
The value entered is displayed on the left of the “%”, and the [ENTER] button is displayed.
Note:
The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] but-
ton is not pressed. (The value on the left of the “%” is reset to “0” by pressing the [CLEAR] but-
ton.)
•
Key in “1” to copy the value of the total
counter (LGC board) (A) onto the value of
the backup counter (SYS board) (B).
(A)
(B)
Fig.2-4
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 196
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
Key in “2” to copy the value of the backup
counter (SYS board) (B) onto the value of
the total counter (LGC board) (A).
(A)
(B)
2
Fig.2-5
(4) Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value.
Note:
The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the
[CANCEL] button is pressed.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2.6
Pixel counter
1) Outline
Pixel counter is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by the laser and converts it into the
print ratio (%) per standard paper size. This “Print ratio (%) per standard paper size” is called Pixel
count (%).
This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of
toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge).
2) Factors affecting toner consumption
Standard number of output pages per cartridge shows the average number of output pages under
the condition that the data of print ratio 6% is printed on the standard paper size (A4/LT) at a normal
temperature and humidity.
However, users do not always print under the above condition. As for the type of original, copy/print
mode and environment, each user has different tendency, and as a result, the number of output
pages per cartridge becomes different depending on the user.
The major factors affecting toner consumption are as follows:
-
-
-
-
Original/Data coverage
Original/Data density
Original/Print mode
Density setting
Also there are other factors in addition to the above, such as environment, individual difference of
equipment, difference in lot quality of materials, toner density and drum surface potential.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 198
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The general relations between the above 4 factors and toner consumption per output page in the
copy function are as follows:
2
Original coverage
Original density
TEXT
/PHOTO
PRINTED
IMAGE
Manual Manual Automatic Manual Manual Manual
density density density density density density
TEXT
PHOTO
MAP
-5
-1
Center
+1
+5
Density setting
Original mode
Fig.2-6 Factors affecting toner consumption and the tendency
3) Details of pixel counter
-
Toner cartridge reference and service technician reference
The pixel counter function in this equipment has 2 references, toner cartridge reference and ser-
vice technician reference.
Toner cartridge reference
This is a system that accumulates data between the installation of a new toner cartridge and next
installation.
The installation of new toner cartridge is judged when the total number of pixel count or output
pages after the detection of toner cartridge empty has exceeded the threshold.
The threshold to be used is selectable in the setting mode (08-1506) between the pixel count and
output pages (0: Output pages 1: Pixel counter). The threshold of pixel count is set in the setting
mode (08-1508) and that of output pages is set in the setting mode (08-1507). When the new
toner cartridge is judged as installed, the data related with the previous cartridge is cleared and
replaced with the data after the installation of new cartridge. Clearing of the counter of the toner
cartridge reference is performed in the setting mode (08-1503).
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service technician reference
This is a system that accumulates data between clearing the counter of the service technician
reference by service technician and subsequently clearing the same counter.
Clearing of the counter of the service technician reference is performed in the setting mode (08-
1502).
-
Print count (number of output pages)
The number of output pages shown at the pixel counter is counted after converting all paper
sizes to the standard paper size (A4/LT). Printing on other than the standard size is converted by
paper area ratio. The standard paper size is set in the setting mode (08-1500).
The examples of conversion are as follows:
Ex.)
“1” is added to the print count when printing on A4/LT size.
“2” is added to the print count when printing on A3/LD size. (area ratio to A4/LT: 200%)
“1.49” is added to the print count when printing on B4 size. (area ratio to A4: 149%)
“1.27” is added to the print count when printing on LG size. (area ratio to LT: 127%)
-
Pixel count (%)
Pixel count (%) shows the ratio of laser emitting pixels to all pixels on standard paper.
The examples of pixel count are as follows:
Note:
In the following examples, ‘solid copy’ is considered to be 100%. But since the image has 4
margins, it never becomes 100% actually.
Ex.)
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
→ Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5
Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
→ Pixel count: 0%, Print count: 5
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
→ Pixel count: 50%, Print count: 4
Printing 3 pages on A4/LT size with 6% of laser emission
Printing 1 page on A4/LT size with 2% of laser emission
→ Pixel count: 5%, Print count: 4
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
→ Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 4
Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with 6% of laser emission
→ Pixel count: 6%, Print count: 4
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 200
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-
Average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%)
There are 2 types of the value calculated as the pixel count, average pixel count (%) and latest
pixel count (%).
Average pixel count (%)
The average value of all pixel count data after each reference data is cleared is calculated and
displayed.
2
Latest pixel count (%)
The value is displayed for printing just before the pixel counter is confirmed.
-
Type of calculated data
Since this is multifunctional and color equipment, the data of pixel count is calculated for each
function and color.
The following list is the information that can be confirmed by LCD screen. But actually, more
information can be confirmed by the setting mode (08).
See after-mentioned “5)-Display in the setting mode (08)” for details.
{: With data
: Without data
Toner cartridge reference
Magen
Service technician reference
Full color/Twin color
Magen
Yellow
Cyan
Black
Black
ta
Total
Yellow
Cyan
Black
ta
{
{
-
Copier function
Printer function
FAX function
Total
{
{
-
{
{
{
{
{
{
-
{
{
-
{
{
{
{
{
{
-
{
{
-
{
{
-
{
{
-
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Table 2-201 Type of calculated data
-
Setting related with the pixel counter function
Standard paper size setting
The standard paper size (A4 or LT) to convert it into the pixel count is selected (08-1500).
Pixel counter display setting
Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (08-1504).
Display reference setting
The reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen (toner cartridge reference or
service technician reference) is selected (08-1505).
Determination counter of toner empty
This is the counter to determine the replacement of new toner cartridge after the toner empty is
detected.
After the toner empty is detected by the auto-toner sensor, this counter checks if toner empty is
not detected one more time while the specified number of pixel count or output pages is counted.
Pixel counter clearing
There are 3 types for the pixel count clear as follows:
08-1501: All information related to the pixel count is cleared.
08-1502: All information related to the service technician reference pixel count is cleared.
08-1503: All information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel count is cleared.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4) Relation between pixel count and toner consumption
The user’s printing out the image with large coverage or high density may cause the large value of
pixel count. And the setting that toner consumption becomes high in the original mode or density
setting may cause it as well.
In this case, the replacement cycle of toner cartridge is faster than the standard number of output
pages. Therefore, this trend needs to be grasped for the service.
The relation between pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge is as follows:
Standard number of output pages (K)
Y
Standard number of output pages (Y, M, C)
Y/2
X
X/2
Y/10
X/10
60%
Pixel count (%)
6% 12%
Fig.2-7 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 202
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5) Pixel counter confirmation
-
Display on LCD screen
Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (0: Displayed, 1: Not
displayed) in the setting mode (08-1504), and whether or not to display it at the service techni-
cian reference or toner cartridge reference is selected (0: Service technician reference, 1: Toner
cartridge reference) in the setting mode (08-1505).
The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [USER FUNCTIONS], [COUNTER] and
[PIXEL COUNTER] are pressed in this order after “Displayed” is selected with the code above
and the power is, as usual, turned ON. (The displayed buttons are depending on the setting of
08-1505.)
2
Fig.2-8
Fig.2-9 Reference selection screen
When selecting and pressing the button in the above screen, each pixel counter screen is dis-
played.
[TONER CARTRIDGE] button: Information screen of toner cartridge reference is displayed.
[SERVICE (COLOR)] button: Information screen of service technician reference (full color) is dis-
played.
[SERVICE (BLACK)] button: Information screen of service technician reference (black) is dis-
played.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 203
05/07
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following screen is displayed when pressing the [TONER CARTRIDGE] button.
Fig.2-10 Information screen of toner cartridge reference
The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (COLOR)] button.
Fig.2-11 Information screen of service technician reference (full color)
The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (BLACK)] button.
Fig.2-12 Information screen of service technician reference (black)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 204
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-
Data list printing
The data for pixel counter can be printed in the list print mode (9S).
9S-104: The data of the toner cartridge reference is printed.
9S-105: The data of service technician reference is printed.
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST
2005.6.14 09:55
2
SERVICEMAN
No DATE
Col.
Y
Y
PPC
PRN
FAX
- - -
- - -
- - -
TOTAL
45678
45678
45678
Print Count [LT/A4]
Average Pixel Count [%]
Latest Pixel Count [%]
0
1
2
20050614
20050614
20050614
12345
12345
12345
23456
23456
23456
Y
Print Count [LT/A4]
Average Pixel Count [%]
Latest Pixel Count [%]
9
20050614
K
K
K
12345
12345
12345
23456
23456
23456
12345
12345
12345
45678
45678
45678
10 20050614
11 20050614
Fig.2-13 Data list of toner cartridge reference
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST
2005.6.14 09:55
TONERCARTRIDGE
No DATE
Col.
Y
Y
PPC
PRN
FAX
- - -
- - -
- - -
TOTAL
45678
45678
45678
Print Count [LT/A4]
Average Pixel Count [%]
Latest Pixel Count [%]
0
1
2
20050614
20050614
20050614
12345
12345
12345
23456
23456
23456
Y
Print Count [LT/A4]
Average Pixel Count [%]
Latest Pixel Count [%]
9
20050614
K
K
K
12345
12345
12345
23456
23456
23456
12345
12345
12345
45678
45678
45678
10 20050614
11 20050614
Fig.2-14 Data list of service technician reference
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-
Display in the setting mode (08)
Information of pixel count can be also checked in the setting mode (08).
For details, see
Print count, pixel count
Full color/Twin color
Black
(at color)
+
Black
Yellow Magenta
Cyan
1561
1611
1628
1562
1617
1632
-
Black
1552
1612
1629
1554
1618
1633
-
Black
Copier
function
Print count
(page)
1557
1609
1626
1558
1615
1630
-
1559
1610
1627
1560
1616
1631
-
1553
1613
1639
1555
1619
1640
1556
1625
1634
-
-
Average pixel count
(%)
1614
Latest pixel count
(%)
-
Printer
function
Print count
(page)
-
Average pixel count
(%)
1620
Latest pixel count
(%)
-
FAX function
Print count
(page)
-
Average pixel count
(%)
-
-
-
-
-
-
Latest pixel count
(%)
-
-
-
-
Total
Average pixel count
(%)
1621
1622
1623
-
1624
Table 2-202 Pixel count code table (toner cartridge reference)
Full color/Twin color
Black
Total
Yellow Magenta
Cyan
Black
Copier
function
Print count
(page)
1547
-
1578
1597
-
-
1579
1598
-
-
-
1548
Average pixel count
(%)
1577
1596
1549
1582
1601
-
1580
1581
1592
1606
1550
1593
1607
1551
1594
1608
1595
Latest pixel count
(%)
1599
1600
Printer
function
Print count
(page)
-
-
Average pixel count
(%)
1583
1602
-
1584
1603
-
1585
1586
Latest pixel count
(%)
1604
1605
FAX function
Print count
(page)
-
-
Average pixel count
(%)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Latest pixel count
(%)
-
-
-
Total
Average pixel count
(%)
1587
1588
1598
1590
1591
Table 2-203 Pixel count code table (service technician reference)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 206
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pixel count distribution
Full color/Twin color
Black
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Black
Copier
function
Print count distribution
(page)
1641
1642
1643
1644
1549
Printer
function
Print count distribution
(page)
1645
-
1646
-
1647
-
1648
-
1650
1651
FAX function Print count distribution
(page)
2
Table 2-204 Pixel count code table
Note:
By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed divid-
ing into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows.
0: 0 - 5%
1: 5.1 - 10%
2: 10.1 - 15% 3: 15.1 - 20% 4: 20.1 - 25%
5: 25.1 - 30% 6: 30.1 - 40% 7: 40.1 - 60% 8: 60.1- 80% 9: 80.1 - 100%
Other information
Toner cartridge replacement counter.
The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed.
08-1563: Toner cartridge Y
08-1564: Toner cartridge M
08-1565: Toner cartridge C
08-1566: Toner cartridge K
Toner cartridge reference count started date
The toner cartridge reference count started date is displayed.
08-1515: Toner cartridge Y
05-1516: Toner cartridge M
08-1517: Toner cartridge C
05-1518: Toner cartridge K
Service technician reference cleared date
The service technician reference cleared date (08-1510) is displayed.
The date (08-1502 was performed) is stored.
Toner cartridge reference cleared date
The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed.
The date (08-1503 was performed) is stored.
08-1511: Toner cartridge Y
05-1512: Toner cartridge M
08-1513: Toner cartridge C
05-1514: Toner cartridge K
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2.7
Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08)
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
User interface
[AMS]
605
[X in 1]
650
[Color specification]
643, 644
[Indicator]
671
[Edit copying]
645, 646
[Sound]
610, 969, 970
[Counter]
202
[Cascade]
652, 653
[ACS]
268
[Screen]
207, 602
[Administrator]
263
[Feeding setting]
658, 659
[Language]
220, 221
[Original counter]
302
[Original direction]
628
[Copy volume]
300
[Automatic calibration]
632
[Default setting]
276, 277, 278, 279, 280, 281, 282, 283,
284, 285, 286, 289, 331, 503, 585, 587,
588, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642, 1479
[Offsetting between jobs]
682
[Security level]
1708
[Sorting]
627, 634, 641, 649
[Timer]
204, 205, 206
[Template]
1140
[Image shift]
636, 1429, 1430
[Tray reset]
648
[Date]
640
[Annotation]
651, 657
[Displaying number]
342
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 208
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
User interface
[Job Build]
1130, 1131
[File]
209, 218, 219
[Department management]
617, 620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 629
[Black-free]
343
2
[Book duplexing]
611
[Box printing]
951, 953, 954
[Paper size]
613
[Blank copy prevention]
625
Scanner
[Log table]
[E-mail]
361, 362
[Image position]
305, 306
272, 273
[Carriage position]
359, 360
[Fixed value]
363, 364
[Shading position]
350, 351
[Distortion]
308
[Reproduction ratio]
340
Fax
[Function]
1498, 1926
[Destination]
701
[Default setting]
274
[Priority drawer]
689
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 209
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
[Binarization]
700, 701, 702
[ACS]
1065, 1066, 1675, 1676
[RGB]
1080, 1081, 1082
Setting Mode (08)
Image
[ACS]
609-0 to 4
[Image quality]
586, 589
[Gamma correction]
597
[Color deviation correction]
[Error diffusion / Dither]
417-0 to 3, 418-0 to 3, 953-0 to 3,
954-0 to 3, 955-0 to 3, 956-0 to 3
[Image density]
502
[Automatic calibration]
595
501, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509,
510, 512, 514, 515, 710, 714, 715, 719,
720, 724, 725, 729, 845, 846, 847, 850,
851, 852, 855, 856, 857, 860, 861, 862,
1550, 1551, 1552, 1553, 1554, 1560,
1561, 1562, 1563, 1564, 1570, 1571,
1572, 1573, 1574, 1580, 1581, 1582,
1583, 1584
[Default setting]
550
[Smoothing]
561, 562
[Pixel size]
663
[Color balance]
1010-0 to 2, 1011-0 to 2, 1012-0 to 2,
1013-0 to 2, 1014-0 to 2, 1015-0 to 2,
1016-0 to 2, 1017-0 to 2, 1018-0 to 2,
1019-0 to 2, 1020-0 to 2, 1021-0 to 2,
1022-0 to 2, 1023-0 to 2, 1024-0 to 2,
1025-0 to 2, 1026-0 to 2, 1027-0 to 2,
1028-0 to 2, 1029-0 to 2, 1030-0 to 2,
1031-0 to 2, 1032-0 to 2, 1033-0 to 2,
1034-0 to 2, 1035-0 to 2, 1036-0 to 2,
1037-0 to 2, 1038-0 to 2, 1039-0 to 2,
1040-0 to 2, 1041-0 to 2, 1779-0 to 2,
1780-0 to 2, 1781-0 to 2, 1782-0 to 2,
1783-0 to 2, 1784-0 to 2, 1785-0 to 2,
1786-0 to 2, 1787-0 to 2, 1788-0 to 2,
1789-0 to 2, 1790-0 to 2, 1791-0 to 2,
1792-0 to 2, 1793-0 to 2, 1794-0 to 2,
1795-0 to 2, 1796-0 to 2, 1797-0 to 2,
1798-0 to 2
[Gamma adjustment]
580, 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1642, 1643
[Gamma balance]
590-0 to 2, 591-0 to 2, 592-0 to 2,
596-0 to 2, 597-0 to 2, 598-0 to 2,
599-0 to 2, 880-0 to 2, 881-0 to 2,
882-0 to 2, 883-0 to 2
[Highlight pen]
1769, 1770, 1771, 1772
[Reproduction level adjustment]
1725
[Maximum text density]
1630, 1631, 1632, 1633
[Background/Black density]
1075, 1076, 1077
[Background processing]
600, 601, 602, 848, 853, 858, 1070, 1071,
1072, 1688, 1689, 1690, 1691, 1692,
1693, 1694, 1695, 1696, 1697, 1698,
1699, 1700, 1701, 1702, 1708, 1709,
1710, 1711, 1712
[Sharpness]
604, 605, 606, 667-0 to 4, 840, 841, 842, 843,
1086, 1087, 1088, 1737, 1738, 1739,
1740, 1741, 1757
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 210
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
[Smudged/faint text]
Setting Mode (08)
Image
648, 654, 655
[Black reproduction switching]
1761
[Toner saving]
664, 665, 1055, 1056, 1057, 1058
[Toner amount]
1046-0 to 1, 1047-0 to 1, 1048-0 to 1,
1049-0 to 1, 1050-0 to 1, 1612, 1613,
1614, 1615, 1616
2
[Reproduction ratio]
884, 1060
[Margin]
430, 431, 432, 433, 434-0 to 1, 435, 436,
437, 438, 439
[Range correction]
532, 533, 534, 570, 571, 572, 693, 694,
695, 825, 826, 827, 828, 830, 831, 832,
833, 835, 836, 837, 838
Image control [Temperature/Humidity]
[2nd transfer]
544, 545, 546, 548
393
[Color/Black developer]
338, 339, 372, 373, 386-0 to 3
[Contrast voltage]
330-0 to 3, 332-0 to 3, 380-0 to 3,
381-0 to 3, 1800-0 to 3, 1801-0 to 3,
1811-0 to 3, 1812-0 to 3, 1815-0 to 3
[Performing]
[Abnormality detection]
573, 574, 575, 576
[Contrast voltage]
554, 556, 558
[Automatic starting]
559, 565, 566, 567, 568, 569, 570, 571,
572
394, 395, 396, 398-0 to 3
[Sensor]
388, 389, 391-0 to 3, 390-0 to 3, 392
[Main charger]
[Smoothing]
560
[Setting]
549, 551
334, 335, 385-0 to 3, 1805-0 to 3,
1806-0 to 3, 1807-0 to 3, 1808-0 to 3,
1809-0 to 3, 1810-0 to 3
[Drum]
552, 553
[Laser power]
555, 557
[Background voltage]
1804-0 to 3, 1813-0 to 3, 1814-0 to 3
[Laser power]
331-0 to 3, 333-0 to 3, 382-0 to 3,
383-0 to 3, 384-0 to 3, 1802-0 to 3,
1803-0 to 3, 1816-0 to 3, 1817, 1819,
1820, 1821
Drive system [Exit motor]
424, 425
[Transport motor]
426, 427
[Main motor]
421, 422
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
[Aligning amount]
Setting Mode (08)
[Feeding setting]
254, 255, 619
[Paper source]
480, 481, 1135, 1431
[detection]
449, 1492
[Setting]
Feeding
system
448-0 to 3, 449-0 to 3, 450-0 to 3,
452-0 to 3, 455-0 to 2, 457, 458-0 to 2,
460-0 to 2, 461-0 to 2, 462-0 to 3,
463-0 to 2, 469-0 to 3, 470-0 to 3,
471-0 to 3, 472-0 to 3, 473, 474-0 to 2,
475-0 to 9
[Paper pushing amount]
988
466-0 to 7, 467
[Coated paper Mode]
675-0 to 4, 676, 677-0 to 5
[Paper size]
224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 256
[Paper type]
697
[Paper dimension]
210, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235,
236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243,
244, 245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 470, 471
[Paper retry]
463-0 to 1, 464-0 to 1, 465-0 to 1,
466-0 to 1, 467-0 to 1, 468-0 to 1, 482,
1390, 1391, 1392, 1393, 1394, 1395,
1396, 1397, 1398, 1399, 1400, 1401
Laser
[Write start]
[Polygonal motor]
410, 411, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445,
494, 495, 496, 498-0 to 1
[Polygonal motor]
401, 405
398, 399, 478, 479, 483, 484, 485, 486,
488, 489, 490
[Sideways deviation]
497-0 to 5
Main charger [Grid]
241, 242, 243, 244
[Cleaning]
511, 1389
Developer
[Auto-toner]
200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 206
[Color auto-toner]
207, 208
[Timing adjustment]
499
[Color auto-toner]
819-0 to 2, 820-0 to 2, 823-0 to 2,
824-0 to 2, 858-0 to 2, 859-0 to 2,
860-0 to 1, 861-0 to 1, 862-0 to 1,
863-0 to 1, 864, 865, 866-0 to 1, 867, 868,
869, 870, 871, 872, 873-0 to 2, 874,
875-0 to 2, 876-0 to 2, 877-0 to 2,
878-0 to 2, 879-0 to 2, 880-0 to 2,
881-0 to 2, 1414, 1800-0 to 2, 1801
[Stabilization]
821, 822-0 to 2, 1802-0 to 2
[Toner nearly empty]
1415, 1416
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 212
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
[1st transfer]
Setting Mode (08)
Transfer
[1st transfer]
816
[2nd transfer]
487, 817
210, 245, 250, 251, 281, 1829-0 to 2,
1831, 1832, 1833, 1836, 1847, 1848,
1849, 1850-0 to 3, 1861, 1862-0 to 3,
1863, 1864
[Temperature correction]
818
[2nd transfer]
224, 225, 226, 227-0 to 3, 229-0 to 3,
230-0 to 1, 231-0 to 1, 232-0 to 1,
234-0 to 3, 236-0 to 3, 237-0 to 1,
238-0 to 1, 239-0 to 1, 252, 253, 254, 255,
275, 276, 277-0 to 3, 279-0 to 3,
290-0 to 1, 291-0 to 1, 292-0 to 1,
293-0 to 4, 294-0 to 3, 296-0 to 3,
297-0 to 1, 298-0 to 1, 299-0 to 1,
1822-0 to 4, 1823-0 to 3, 1825-0 to 3,
1826-0 to 1, 1827-0 to 1, 1828-0 to 1,
1839-0 to 1, 1840-0 to 1, 1841-0 to 1,
1842-0 to 3, 1845-0 to 1
2
[Cleaning]
284, 285
[Temperature/humidity]
247, 248, 270
Fuser
[Temperature]
409, 411, 410-0 to 1, 412-0 to 1,
413-0 to 1, 416, 422, 436, 437-0 to 1,
438-0 to 1, 458, 460
[Time]
415-0 to 1, 428-0 to 1, 459
[Status counter]
400
[TWD and SAD models]
849
[Transport speed]
430, 431, 432
[Pre-running]
417-0 to 1, 439-0 to 1, 440-0 to 1,
441-0 to 1, 461, 526-0 to 1, 583-0 to 2, 584
Image
processing
[Counter]
1370, 1371, 1372, 1378, 1380, 1382,
1385, 1386, 1387, 1388
[Setting]
815-0 to 2
RADF
[Aligning amount]
354, 355
[Switchback]
462
[Sensor/EEPROM]
356
[Transporting]
357, 358, 365, 366
[Volume]
367, 368
Finisher
[Binding/Folding position]
468-0 to 2
[Stapling]
704-0 to 1
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
Network
[AppleTalk]
1014, 1015, 1936
[Bindery]
1026
[Community]
1065, 1066
[DDNS]
1020, 1112
[DHCP]
1755, 1756, 1757, 1762
[Directory]
1028, 1029
[DNS]
1017, 1018, 1019
[E-mail]
265, 1097, 1098, 1477, 1478, 1489, 1491
[File]
1779, 1782, 1783, 1784, 1785, 1786
[FTP]
1055, 1059, 1060, 1089, 1090, 1091, 1092
[HTTP]
1030, 1031, 1032
[IP Conflict]
1440
[IP Filter]
1720, 1721, 1722, 1723, 1724, 1725,
1726, 1727, 1728, 1729, 1730, 1731,
1732, 1733, 1734, 1735, 1736, 1737,
1738, 1739
[IPP]
1078, 1079, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083,
1084, 1085, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1447,1448,
1449, 1450, 1451
[IPX]
1011, 1099
[IP address]
1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010, 1767, 1768
[LDAP]
1016, 1138, 1488, 1923, 1924
[LPD]
1075, 1076, 1077
[MAC address]
1141
[MIB]
1063
[NDS]
1027
[Netware]
1128, 1129, 1134, 1143, 1144, 1148
[NIC]
1002
[Novell]
1093, 1094
[PCL setting]
973
[POP3]
1046, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051, 1052
[RawPort]
945
[Raw/TCP]
1073, 1074
[Raw printing]
290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297,
298, 299, 978, 979
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 214
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
[Rendezvous]
1103, 1104, 1105
Network
[Role Base Access]
1493, 1928
[Samba]
1137, 1464
[SearchRoot]
1095
[SMB]
2
1023, 1024, 1025, 1117, 1124, 1136, 1950,
1951
[SMTP]
1022, 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1041,
1042, 1100, 1101, 1102, 1111
[SNTP]
1441, 1442, 1444, 1445, 1446
[SSL]
1740, 1741, 1742, 1743, 1744, 1745,
1746, 1747, 1748, 1749, 1750, 1751
[STAGE]
1939, 1940
[TRAP]
1069, 1070
[InternetFAX]
266, 1114, 1485
[Offramp]
1043, 1044, 1045
[Function]
1432, 1433, 1435, 1436
[Automatic transferring]
660, 661
[Initialization]
1119
[Scan job]
1781-0 to 1, 1915
[Speed and settings]
1003
[Data retention period]
259, 260, 264
[Domain]
1113, 1121, 1122, 1123
[Authentication]
1139, 1484, 1486, 1487, 1920, 1921, 1922,
1925, 1937, 1952, 1953, 1954, 1955,
1956, 1957, 1958, 1959
[Print queue]
1096
[Frame type]
1012
[Local I/F]
614
Wireless LAN
[Supplicant]
1679, 1680, 1681, 1682, 1684, 1685,
1686, 1688, 1689, 1690, 1691, 1692,
1693, 1696, 1697, 1699, 1700, 1701,
1702, 1703, 1704, 1705, 1706, 1707,
1763, 1764, 1765, 1766
[Driver]
1661, 1662, 1663, 1664, 1665, 1666,
1667, 1668, 1669, 1670, 1671, 1672,
1673, 1674, 1675, 1676, 1677, 1678
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 215
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
[Data encryption]
Bluetooth
1715
[Setting]
1710, 1711, 1712, 1713, 1714
[HDD]
390, 391, 392, 393
Counter
[External counter]
381, 1126
[Counter copy]
257
[Count method]
616, 663
[Paper source]
356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 370, 372, 374
[Black toner cartridge drive]
1410
[Paper size]
301-0 to 16, 303-0 to 16, 304-0 to 16,
305-0 to 16, 306-0 to 16, 307-0 to 16,
308-0 to 16, 309-0 to 16, 310-0 to 16,
311-0 to 16, 312-0 to 16, 313-0 to 16,
314-0 to 16, 315-0 to 16, 316-0 to 16
[Tab paper]
1412
[Double count]
344, 346, 347, 348, 349, 352, 353
[Large/Small size]
317-0 to 2, 318-0 to 2, 319-0 to 2,
320-0 to 2, 321-0 to 2, 322-0 to 2,
323-0 to 2, 324-0 to 2, 325-0 to 2,
326-0 to 2, 327-0 to 2, 328-0 to 2,
329-0 to 2, 330-0 to 2, 332-0 to 2,
333-0 to 2, 334-0 to 2, 335-0 to 2
[n-UP printing]
1530-0 to 4, 1531-0 to 4, 1532-0 to 4,
1533-0 to 1,1534-0 to 1, 1535
Version
[FAX]
915
[HDD]
944
[Engine]
903, 905, 907, 908
[System]
900, 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, 926,
927, 928, 929, 930, 931, 933, 934, 935,
936, 937, 938, 939
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 216
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
Maintenance [Equipment number]
976
[FSMS]
258, 999
[HTTP]
726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731
[PM counter]
223, 251, 252, 375, 376
[Error history]
253
2
[Equipment number]
995
[Emergency Mode]
710, 711
[Service notification]
702, 703, 707, 715, 716, 717, 718, 719,
720, 721, 723, 767, 768, 769, 770, 771,
772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777, 778, 779,
780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785, 786, 787,
788, 789, 790, 791, 792, 793, 794, 795,
796, 1145, 1495
[Supply order]
732, 733, 734, 738, 739, 740, 741, 742,
743, 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750,
751, 752, 753, 754, 755, 756, 757, 758,
759, 760, 761, 762, 763, 764, 765
[Downloading]
797
[Telephone]
250
[Panel calibration]
692
Scrambler
board
[HDD]
699
[Key code]
698
[Installation]
696
Electronic
Filing
[Setting]
267, 270, 950, 976, 1497
Data overwrite
kit
[HDD]
1422, 1424, 1426
[NVRAM]
1427
[SRAM]
1428
[Releasing F200]
633
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 217
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
General
[HDD]
271, 670, 690, 691, 693, 694
[SYS ROM]
1938
[TAT partition]
1118
[Address book]
1125
[Administrator’s password]
1778
[Clearing]
665, 669
[Summer time]
612
[Destination]
201
[Initialization]
947
[Setting]
949, 975, 986, 1132, 1470, 1471, 1494
[Speed switching]
497
[Databases]
684, 685, 686
[Partition]
662, 666, 667
[Banner]
678, 679, 680
[Date/Time]
200, 638
[File]
288
[Department management]
672
[BANNER MESSAGE button]
681
[Memory]
615
[User data management]
1468, 1469, 1472, 1473, 1474, 1481,
1482, 1483, 1496
[Line]
203
[Duplex printing]
683
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 218
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. ADJUSTMENT
3.1 Adjustment Order (Image Related Adjustment)
This chapter mainly explains the procedures for image related adjustment. When replacing compo-
nents which have other specified instructions for adjustment, those specified instructions are to be
obeyed in priority.
In the following diagram, the solid lines with arrow lead to essential adjustments, while the dotted lines
lead to adjustments to be performed if necessary.
Parts to be replaced
Developer material
Laser optical unit
Drum cleaning blade
Drum cleaner brush
Drum
Transfer belt
1st transfer roller
2nd transfer roller
Image quality sensor
Main charger wire
Main charger grid
3
Item to be adjusted
Code in mode 05
3.2 Adjustment of the auto-toner sensor
200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 206
Item to be adjusted
Code in mode 05
396
3.3 Adjustment of image quality control /
Automatic initialization of image quality control
3.4 Image dimensional adjustment
Items
Order
1
Code in mode 05
3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller
448, 449, 450, 452,
455, 457, 458, 459,
460, 461, 462, 463
2
3
4
5
6
3.4.3
Printer
related
adjustment
(a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction
(b) Primary scanning data laser writing start position
(c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction
(d) Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing adjustment
(e) Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing adjustment
401
411
421
284
285
441, 440, 444
443, 442, 445
7
8
(f) Secondary scanning data laser writing start position
(g) Primary scanning data laser writing start position at
duplexing
498
9
(a) Image distortion
–
3.4.4
Scanner
related
adjustment
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
(b) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction
(c) Image location of primary scanning direction
(d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction
(e) Image location of secondary scanning direction
(f) Top margin
405
306
340
305
430
432
433
(g)Right margin
(h) Bottom margin
Item to be adjusted
3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment PPC
Code in mode 05
(
)
(
1642, 1643, 580
)
(
3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment PRT
)
1000, 1001, 1002, 1003
Item to be adjusted
3.5.2 Color deviation adjustment PPC
Code in mode 05
(A3/LD)
(
)
417, 418
953, 954, 955, 956 (A4/LT)
(
3.6.1 Color deviation adjustment PRT
)
(
)
Chapter 3.5, 3.6, 3.7
Adjust the image quality if necessary.
END
Fig.3-1
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor
When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor in the following procedure.
(1) Install the cleaner and developer unit.
Note:
Do not install the toner cartridge.
(2) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. The following message will be dis-
played.
100%
A
A3
[ ] [ ]
0 5
[
]
POWER
TEST MODE
(3) Key in a code and press the [START] button.
Code 200: All developer materials 201: Developer material Y 202: Developer material M
203: Developer material C 204: Developer material K 206: Developer material Y, M, C
100%
200
A3
(
)
[
]
Code
START
TEST MODE
(4) Adjustment for “K” (Magnetometric sensor control)
The following message will be displayed approx. 2 minutes later.
•
( )
B
K: xxxV
K: zzzV
( )
C
( )
A
( ) ( )
B : Current sensor voltage V
( )
C : No display
( ) ( )
A : Target values V for adjustment reference
voltage
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note:
The current sensor voltage (V) shown in (B) automatically changes, gradually approaching the
target value for adjustment reference voltage shown in (A).
•
In 30 to 60 seconds, the current sensor voltage (V) in (B) is converged. Then the sensor out-
put control value (bit value) corresponding to the initial developer material is displayed in (C).
( )
B
K: xxxV
K: yyy
( )
C
( )
A
K: zzzV
( ) ( )
B : Current sensor voltage V
3
( ) ( )
C : Sensor output control value bit value
( ) ( )
A : Target value V for adjustment reference voltage
Note:
Be careful that the values in (A), (B) and (C) vary with humidity.
•
In case of single-color adjustment, press the [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results
in memory when the control value is displayed. In case of multiple-color adjustment, it is auto-
matically proceeded to the adjustment of next color.
(5) Adjustments for “Y”, “M” and “C” (light sensor control)
•
In 15 to 45 seconds, the following message will be displayed (The time varies with the num-
ber of colors to be adjusted).
( )
B
Y:
Y:
( )
C
( )
A
( ) ( )
B : Current sensor voltage V
( )
C : No display
( ) ( )
A : Target value V for adjustment reference voltage
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note:
The current sensor voltage (V) shown in (B) automatically changes, gradually approaching the
target value for adjustment reference voltage shown in (A).
•
After approx. 5 seconds have passed, the current sensor voltage (V) in (B) is converged.
Then the sensor output control value (bit value) corresponding to the initial developer material
is displayed in (C).
( )
B
Y: xxxV
Y: yyy
( )
C
( )
A
Y: zzzV
( ) ( )
B : Current sensor voltage V
( ) ( )
C : Sensor output control value bit value
( ) ( )
A : Target value V for adjustment reference voltage
•
In case of single-color adjustment, press the [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results
in memory when the control value is displayed. In case of multiple-color adjustment, it is auto-
matically proceeded to the adjustment of next color. When the adjustments of all colors have
finished and [ENTER] is lit, press [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results in memory.
(6) Standard of adjustment value range
(A): Adjustment reference voltages (V)
Humidity(%)
K
Y
M
C
29.9 or below
2.47
2.49
2.50
2.69
2.86
1.25
1.25
1.25
30.0-44.9
45.0-59.9
60.0-74.9
75.0 or above
Note:
Since the adjustments for “Y”, “M” and “C” are controlled by the light sensor, the humidity correc-
tion is not performed.
(B): Current sensor voltages (V)
Humidity(%)
K
Y
M
C
29.9 or below
2.37-2.57
2.39-2.59
2.40-2.60
2.59-2.79
2.76-2.96
1.15-1.35
1.15-1.35
1.15-1.35
30.0-44.9
45.0-59.9
60.0-74.9
75.0 or above
Note:
Since the adjustments for “Y”, “M” and “C” are controlled by the light sensor, the humidity correc-
tion is not performed.
(7) Turn the power OFF.
(8) Install the toner cartridges.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 Performing Image Quality Control
(1) When unpacking
Prior to image dimensional adjustment, perform the “Automatic initialization of image quality con-
trol (05-396)” procedure.
(2) When any of the following parts is replaced, be sure to perform the “Automatic initialization of
image quality control (05-396)” procedure.
• Photoconductive drum
• Image quality sensor
• 2nd transfer roller
• Developer material
• Transfer belt
• Main charger
• Laser optical unit
• 1st transfer roller
• Main charger grid
• Drum cleaning blade
• Drum cleaner brush
Note:
3
When performing "Automatic gamma adjustment" in addition, “Automatic initialization of image
quality control (05-396)” should be done first.
(3) When performing "Automatic gamma adjustment" in cases no parts written above are replaced,
do the “Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395)” procedure before "Auto-
matic gamma adjustment".
Code
Item to be adjusted
Contents
395
Forced performing of
<Procedure>
image quality closed-loop 1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
control
→ Adjustment Mode
2) Key in [395] and press the [START] button.
3) "WAIT" is displayed.
4) When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment returns to the
initial state of Adjustment Mode. If an error has occurred, take appro-
priate action by referring to “5. TROUBLESHOOTING”.
396
Automatic initialization of <Procedure>
image quality control 1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
→ Adjustment Mode
2) Key in [396] and press the [START] button.
3) "WAIT" is displayed.
4) When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment will return to
initial state of the Adjustment Mode. If an error has occurred, take
appropriate action by referring to “5. TROUBLESHOOTING”.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment
3.4.1
General description
There are several adjustment items in the image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. Prior to this
image dimensional adjustment, perform the "Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396)".
When adjusting these items, the following adjustment order should strictly be observed.
Item to be adjusted
Code in mode 05
1) Paper alignment at the registration roller
448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457,
458, 459, 460, 461, 462, 463
Printer
related
Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction
(Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed)
401
adjustment
Primary scanning data laser writing start position
411
421
Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction
(Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed)
Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing adjustment
Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing adjustment
Secondary scanning data laser writing start position
Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing
Image distortion
284
285
441, 440, 444, 443, 442, 445
498
-
Scanner
related
adjustment
Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction
Image location of primary scanning direction
Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction
Image location of secondary scanning direction
Top margin
405
306
340
305
430
432
433
Right margin
Bottom margin
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Procedure to key in adjustment values]
In accordance with the procedure described below, make adjustment of each adjustment item so that
the measured values obtained from test copies satisfy the specification. By pressing the [FAX] button,
immediately after starting the Adjustment Mode (05), single-sided test copying can be performed (nor-
mal copy mode).
<Operation keys>
<Display>
100%
A
A3
0
5
TEST MODE
POWER
1
Code No.
Digital keys : Key in codes.
100%
XXX
A3
3
START
TEST MODE
Digital keys : Key in adjustment
values.
YYY
ZZZ
Adjustment value newly keyed in.
(If no entering, YYY is displayed.)
Current adjustment value
( CLEAR Use to make corrections)
100%
A
A
A3
A3
Value ZZZ is stored
replacing values YYY.
ENTER
or
TEST MODE
INTERRUPT
FAX
100%
Test copy
START
Wait Warming Up
If the test copy does not
satisfy the specified values,
return to step 1 and
repeat the adjustment
procedure.
100%
A
A3
COPYING
Power OFF/ON : Exit the Adjustment Mode.
Fig.3-2
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.4.2
Paper alignment at the registration roller
The aligning amount is adjusted by using the following codes in Adjustment Mode (05).
PFP
upper
drawer
PFP
lower
drawer
Bypass feed
Black Color
458 (*1)
Upper
drawer
Lower
drawer
Paper type
Weight
LCF
ADU
2
Plain paper
450 (*4) 452 (*4) 448 (*4) 449 (*4)
457
455 (*1)
64-80 g/m
17-20 lb.
2
Thick
paper 1
469 (*4) 470 (*4) 471 (*4) 472 (*4)
473
474 (*1)
460 (*1)
81-105 g/m
21-28 lb.
2
2
Thick
paper 2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
461
(*1)
475
(*3)
106-163 g/m
29-43 lb.
Thick
paper 3
462
(*2)
475
(*3)
164-209 g/m
44-55 lb.
OHP film
-
463
(*1)
475
(*3)
Sub-code
(*1) 0: Long size
(*2) 0: Long size
1: Middle size
1: Middle size
2: Short size
2: Short size
3: Post card
(*3) 0: Long size of thick paper 2
2: Short size of thick paper 2
4: Middle size of thick paper 3
6: Long size of OHP film
1: Middle size of thick paper 2
3: Long size of thick paper 3
5: Short size of thick paper 3
7: Middle size of OHP film
9: Post card
8: Short size of OHP film
(*4) 0: Long size
1: Middle size
2: Short size 1
3: Short size 2
Notes:
1. Long size: 330 mm or longer (13.0 inches or longer)
Middle size: 220-329 mm (8.7-12.9 inches)
Short size: 219 mm or shorter (8.6 inches or shorter)
Short size 1: 205-219 mm (8.1-8.6 inches or shorter)
Short size 2: 204 mm or shorter (8.0 inches or shorter)
2. The adjustment of “Post card” is for Japan only.
<Procedure>
(
)
Not necessary for LCF
Enter new
value
[ ][ ]
0 5
Power
Current value
displayed
(
)
[
]
(
)
[
]
Code
START
Sub-code
START
[
]
[
]
SET or
[
]
POWER
OFF/ON
[
Drawer
selection
(
)
*5 + FAX
[
]
[
]
INTERRUPT
Stores in memory
]
(
)
Test print
(
)
Exit
(*5) 1: Single-sided grid pattern in Black Mode
3: Double-sided grid pattern in Black Mode
55: Grid pattern of thick paper 2 in Full Color Mode
56: Grid pattern of thick paper 3 in Full Color Mode
57: Grid pattern of OHP film in Full Color Mode
58: Single-sided grid pattern of thick paper 2 in Black Mode
59: Single-sided grid pattern of thick paper 3 in Black Mode
60: Single-sided grid pattern of OHP film in Black Mode
Note:
If the aligning amount is too large, abnormal noise (paper-folding noise) or actual paper folding
may occur during paper feeding. If the aligning amount is too small, on the other hand, a skew,
an image dislocation in feeding direction or a paper exit jam (E010) may occur. Pay attention to
the above and select the appropriate value.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.4.3
Printer related adjustment
The printer related adjustment is performed by using the printed out grid pattern.
1
21
A
6
B, E
3
Fig.3-3
Adjustment
Tolerance
Detail of adjustment
A
200 ± 0.5mm
Refer to “[A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of
polygonal motor rotation speed (Printer))”
B
C
52 ± 0.5mm
200 ± 0.5mm
Refer to “[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer)”
Refer to “[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment
of main motor rotation speed (Printer))”
D
E
52 ± 0.5mm
52 ± 0.5mm
Refer to “[F] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position”
Refer to “[G] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing”
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 9
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation
speed (Printer))
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.→ (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [1] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer.)
(3) Measure the distance A from the 1st line to the 21st line of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance A is within 200±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [401]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
→ "100% A" is displayed.
→ Press [1] → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.)
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.1 mm/step).
[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer)
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [1] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer.)
(3) Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance B is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [411]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
→ "100% A" is displayed
→ Press [1] → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.))
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed
(Printer))
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [1] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer.)
(3) Measure the distance C from the 2nd line at the leading edge of the paper to the 22nd line of the
grid pattern.
*
Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
(4) Check if the distance C is within 200±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [426]) → [START]
*
Confirm that the input value is [153]. If not, key in [153].
→ (Key in [153])
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
→ (Key in the code [421]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (recommended values: 110 to 140 / acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*
When the value is not within the recommended values, the trailing edge area of the image
may be out of position for the paper length or the density at the trailing edge area of the image
may become lower. Perform the adjustment confirming the image.
→ “100% A” is displayed
→ Press [1] → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.)
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.5 mm/6
steps).
[D] Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing adjustment
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) According to the input value for “Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio
(421)”, key in the value shown in the following table.
3
*
Be sure to key in the correct value because incorrect value may reduce the cleaning effi-
ciency of the transfer belt.
Adjustment (code)
Input value
Adjustment of secondary scanning direction
reproduction ratio (421)
110
147
111-120 121-130 131-140
Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing
adjustment (284)
143
141
137
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [284]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value)
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
[E] Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing adjustment
This adjustment has to be performed after “Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction
ratio (421)” Acceptable values are 88 to 168. The larger the value is, the later the transfer belt cleaning
unit release timing becomes.
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) According to the input value for “Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio
(421)”, key in the value shown in the following table.
*
Be sure to key in the correct value because incorrect value may reduce the cleaning effi-
ciency of the transfer belt.
Adjustment (code)
Input value
Adjustment of secondary scanning direction
reproduction ratio (421)
110
147
111-120 121-130 131-140
Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing
adjustment (285)
143
141
137
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [285]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value)
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[F] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position
This adjustment has to be performed for each paper source.
The following table shows the order of the paper source to be adjusted, code, paper size and accept-
able values.
Order for
adjustment
Paper
source
Acceptable
value
Code
Paper size
Remarks
1
Lower
drawer
441
A3/LD
0 to 80
0 to 40
2
Upper
drawer
440
A4/LT
3
4
5
PFP or LCF
Bypass feed
Duplexing
444/443
442
A4/LT
A4/LT
A3/LD
0 to 40
0 to 40
0 to 40
445
Paper fed from the lower drawer
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.)
(3) Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
*
*
Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance D is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code shown above) → [START]
→ (Key in an acceptable value shown above)
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
→ "100% A" is displayed
→ Press [1] ([3] for duplexing)
→ [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.)
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.2 mm/step).
[G] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing
Note:
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.
[G-1] Adjustment for long-sized paper
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [3] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer.)
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance E is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [498]) → [START] → [0] → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
→ "100% A" is displayed.
→ Press [3] → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.)
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[G-2] Adjustment for short-sized paper
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [3] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A4/LT from the upper
drawer.)
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance E is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [498]) → [START] → [1] → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
→ "100% A" is displayed
→ Press [3] → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.)
3
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
<Adjustment procedure summarization for A to E>
[0] [5] [Power ON] → [1] ([3](05-445, 498) for duplexing) → [FAX]
A: 05-401 (Lower drawer, A3/LD)
B: 05-411 (Lower drawer, A3/LD)
200±0.5 mm (0.1 mm/step)
52±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
Key in the same value for 05-410.
200±0.5 mm (0.5 mm/6 steps)
52±0.5 mm (0.2 mm/step)
→
→
→
→
→
C: 05-421 (Lower drawer, A3/LD)
D: 05-440 (Upper drawer, A4/LT)
441 (Lower drawer, A3/LD),
442 (Bypass feed, A4/LT),
443 (LCF, A4/LT), 444 (PFP, A4/LT),
445 (Duplexing, A3/LD)
E: 05-498-0 (Lower drawer, A3/LD),
52±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
→
498-1 (Upper drawer, A4/LT)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.4.4
Scanner related adjustment
[A] Image distortion
A
B
Feeding direction
Step 1
Feeding direction
C
D
Step 2
Fig.3-4
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Press [FAX] to make a copy of any image on a sheet of A3/LD paper.
(3) Key in [308] and press the [START] button to move the carriage to the adjustment position.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) Make an adjustment in the order of step 1
and 2.
Step 1
(
Adjustment screw for the mirror-3 Rear
)
In case of A:
Tighten the mirror-3 adjustment screw (CW).
In case of B:
Loosen the mirror-3 adjustment screw
(CCW).
Carriage-2
3
Fig.3-5
Step 2
In case of C:
Tighten the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CW).
In case of D:
Adjustment screw
(
for the mirror-1 Rear
)
Loosen the mirror-1 adjustment screw
(CCW).
Carriage-1
Fig.3-6
(5) Apply the screw locking agents to the adjustment screws. (2 areas)
•
Recommended screw lock agent
Manufacturer: Three Bond
Product name: 1401E
The following adjustments (b) to (e) should be performed with Test Chart No. TCC-1. (Refer to
page 3-19.)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[B] Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary scanning direction
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).
(3) Press [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black and Text/Photo.
(4) Measure the distance A between M1 and M2 on the copy with a ruler.
(5) Check if the distance A is within 200±0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [405]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255) with digital keys)
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.1 mm/step).
[C] Image location of primary scanning direction
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).
(3) Press [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo.
(4) Measure the distance B from the left paper edge to the 10 mm line of left grid pattern on the copy
with a ruler.
(5) Check if the distance B is within 10±0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in code [306]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
[D] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).
(3) Press [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo.
(4) Measure the distance C between M3 and M4 on the copy with a ruler.
(5) (Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [340]) → [START]
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [340]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.22 %/step).
[E] Image location of secondary scanning direction
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side).
(3) Press [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo.
(4) Measure the distance D from the top paper edge to the 10 mm line of top grid pattern on the copy
with a ruler.
(5) Check if the distance D is within 10±0.5 mm.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [305]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 92 to 164))
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.14 mm/
step).
[F] Top margin
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Open the platen cover or RADF.
(3) Press [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black, Text/Photo and
lower drawer.
3
(4) Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area E is within the range of 3±0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [430]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
→ (“100% A” is displayed.)
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
Feeding direction
E
Fig.3-7
[G] Right margin
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Open the platen cover or RADF.
(3) Press [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black, Text/Photo and
lower drawer.
(4) Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area F is within the range of 2+1 mm, 2-0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [432]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).
→ (“100% A” is displayed.)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
F
Fig.3-8
[H] Bottom margin
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Open platen cover or RADF.
(3) Press the [FAX] → [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black, Text/Photo and
lower drawer.
(4) Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area G is within the range of 2±0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 2. to 4. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [433]) → [START]
→ (Key in value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (stored in memory)
→ (“100% A” is displayed.)
*
The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
G
Fig.3-9
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
Adjustments and Checks using Test Chart No. TCC-1
Following items can be checked with the Test Chart No. TCC-1.
1) Points to be measured in the chart
3
B
A
Fig.3-10
<Adjustment order>
[0] [5] [Power ON] → (Chart TCC-1) → [FAX] → [START] (A3/LD, 100%, Black and Text/
Photo)
A: 05-405 → 200±0.5 mm (0.1 mm/step)
B: 05-306 → 5±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
C: 05-340 → 150±0.5 mm (0.3 mm/step)
D: 05-305 → 10±0.5 mm (0.14 mm/step)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2) Checking areas of the chart and their descriptions
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]
10
9
1
8
[ ]
5
[ ]
2
[ ]
2
[ ]
3
[ ]
3
TOSHIBA COLOR CHART
No.TCC-1
[7]
[ ]
2
[ ]
1
[ ]
1
[ ]
6
[ ]
6
[4]
[ ]
3
[
]
11
[
14
]
[ ]
7
[ ]
7
[
]
12
[ ]
7
[ ]
2
[
]
13
[ ]
8
[ ]
1
Fig.3-11
[1] Grid patterns
[2] YMCK patches
: For adjusting margin (void) and scanner section
: For checking uniformity
[3] Resolution patterns
[4] Gradation pattern
: For checking resolution
: Gradation pattern of seven colors (Y, M, C, R, G, B and K)
Coverage: 10-100%
For adjusting the halftone reproduction and gray balance
[5] Color registration pattern : For checking color registration
[6] Pictures
: For checking color reproduction and moire
[7] Magnification lines
: For checking the magnification error of primary and secondary
scanning directions
[8] Center lines
[9] Arrow
: Center lines for A4/LT sizes
: A mark for placing the chart properly onto the original glass
(place it to the left rear corner of the original glass.)
: For checking uniformity
[10] Halftone band
[11] White text on the black
solid
: For checking the reproduction of white text on black solid
[12] Text
: For checking reproduction of text
[13] Thin lines
[14] Note area
: For checking reproduction of the thin lines (line width: 100µm)
: For recording the date, conditions, etc.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)
3.5.1
Automatic gamma adjustment
When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C
and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. In case the gradation repro-
duction of the image checked is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below at parts
replacement.
(1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been or replaced, be sure to make this adjust-
ment:
• Laser optical unit
• Main charger wire
• 1st transfer roller
• Image Quality sensor
• Photoconductive drum
• Main charger grid
• Drum cleaning blade
• Developer material
• Transfer belt
• Drum cleaner brush
3
(2) When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a copy and check the image to
determine if adjustment is necessary:
•
2nd transfer roller
Notes:
1. Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in "3.3 Adjust-
ment of Image Quality Control" and "3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment".
2. Normally, only the adjustment of color/black integrated pattern is needed. When the adjust-
ment of "3.5.12 Beam level conversion setting" is made, color pattern and black pattern need
to be adjusted individually.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
1642
(1643)
(580)
Item to be adjusted
Contents
Automatic gamma
adjustment
<Procedure>
1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → Adjustment
Mode
2) Select the A4/LT drawer. Key in the pattern number and press the [FAX] but-
ton to output a “Patch chart for gamma adjustment”.
Pattern No.
4
10*
5*
Pattern
Color/black integrated
Black
Color
Remarks
When performing code 1642
When performing code 580
When performing code 1643
*
This adjustment is performed only when "3.5.12 Beam level conversion
setting" is performed. Usually, only the adjustment with the color/black
integrated pattern (05-1642) is performed.
3) Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (2) face down on the
original glass. In the cases of patterns 4 and 5, place the chart aligning its
side with 2 black squares against the original scale.
In the case of pattern 10, place the chart aligning its black side of the grada-
tion pattern against the original scale.
4) Key in a code and press the [START] button.
→ The scanner reads the chart automatically and performs automatic
gamma adjustment calculation (approx. 30 sec.).
5) When the adjustment has finished normally, “ENTER” is shown. Press the
[ENTER] button to have the adjustment results reflected.
(To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.)
In the case of an abnormal ending, “ADJUSTMENT ERROR” is shown.
Press the [CANCEL] button to clear the error display. When it is cleared, the
control panel display will return to the ready state. Then, check if the patch
chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or if it is placed
inclined on the original glass, and then repeat step (3) and afterward.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5.2
Color Deviation Adjustment
The color deviation amount of the secondary scanning direction can be adjusted as follows.
There are 2 methods to adjust color deviation; using "Test pattern 63 (for A3/LD size paper)" or "Test
pattern 68 (for A4/LT size paper)" (adjustment method 1), and using "Test pattern 64 (for A3/LD size
paper)" (adjustment method 2). Adjust using either one of these methods.
*
Only adjustment method 1 can be used for A4/LT paper.
Adjustment
method
Paper size,
Number of pages
Type
Printing Image
Procedures
1
Test pattern 63 (A3/LD) Ladder
Test pattern 68 (A4/LT) Ladder
Test pattern 64 (A3/LD) Block
A3/LD, 2 pages
A4/LT, 4 pages
A3/LD, 2 pages
05-63-[FAX]
05-68-[FAX]
05-64-[FAX]
2
Note:
Follow the procedure in the order below for the color deviation adjustment.
If you start in the middle of the procedure, continue the subsequent steps.
E.g.: If you start with step 2 (A3/LD, 2nd sheet), perform steps 3 to 6.
Order
Test pattern
A3/LD, 1st page
1
2
3
4
5
6
A3/LD, 2nd page
A4/LT, 1st page
A4/LT, 2nd page
A4/LT, 3rd page
A4/LT, 4th page
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment method 1
<Adjustment procedures (for A3/LD size paper)>
Test pattern (Ladder)
A
3
B
[
]
Test pattern
Details of A
Details of B
Use the image position of M as a
reference and align the image positions of
Y, C and K with this reference.
[
]
Details of adjustment area
Fig.3-12
This adjustment should be applied for each printout of the test pattern. (Skip this if the test pattern is
printed correctly.)
The order of the adjustment, test patterns and codes to be used are listed below.
Order
Test pattern
1st page
2nd page
Code
1
2
417
418
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(1) While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. -> (Adjustment
Mode)
(2) Print out the test pattern and adjust its deviation amount (above). Use the image position of
magenta (M) as a reference for adjustment. The image positions of yellow (Y), cyan (C) and
black (K) must be adjusted with this reference.
•
Select A3/LD size. Key in “63” and then press the [FAX] button. -> 2 pages of the test pattern
are printed out.
•
•
•
Check the image of the test pattern (above) and specify the color to be adjusted.
Key in the code (listed above) and press the [START] button.
Key in the sub code of the color to be adjusted and press the [START] button.
Sub code
0: Black (K) 1: Cyan (C) 3: Yellow (Y)
•
Key in the adjustment value and press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button.
Notes:
1. When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by
0.0423 mm.
2. Adjust the image positions of black (B), cyan (C) and yellow (Y) to align the leading/trailing
edge of each image. If both leading and trailing edges are not aligned, adjust the deviation
amount of each edge so that it is uniformed.
(3) Repeat Step (2) until all the test patterns are printed correctly.
Notes:
1. Since the adjusted value is reflected to that of the subsequent steps, be sure to perform the
rest of adjustment.
2. Print out the test pattern for each adjustment.
(4) Turn the power OFF.
<Adjustment procedures (for A4/LT size paper)>
Use “Test pattern 68” for the adjustment method to adjust a color deviation.
*
Perform this adjustment after <Adjustment procedures (for A3/LD size paper)> is performed.
This adjustment should be applied for each printout of the test pattern. (Skip this if the test pattern is
printed correctly.)
The order of the adjustment, test patterns and codes to be used are listed below.
Order
Test pattern
1st page
Code
1
2
3
4
953
954
955
956
2nd page
3rd page
4th page
(1) While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. -> (Adjustment
Mode)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2) Print out the test pattern and adjust its deviation amount (above). Use the image position of
magenta (M) as a reference for adjustment. The image positions of yellow (Y), cyan (C) and
black (K) must be adjusted with this reference.
•
Select A4/LT size. Key in “68” and then press the [FAX] button. -> 4 pages of the test pattern
are printed out.
•
•
•
Check the image of the test pattern (above) and specify the color to be adjusted.
Key in the code (listed above) and press the [START] button.
Key in the sub code of the color to be adjusted and press the [START] button.
Sub code
0: Black (K) 1: Cyan (C) 3: Yellow (Y)
•
Key in the adjustment value and press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button.
Notes:
1. When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by
0.0423 mm.
3
2. Adjust the image positions of black (B), cyan (C) and yellow (Y) to align the leading/trailing
edge of each image. If both leading and trailing edges are not aligned, adjust the deviation
amount of each edge so that it is made uniform.
(3) Repeat Step (2) until all the test patterns are printed correctly.
Notes:
1. Since the adjusted value is reflected in that of the subsequent steps, be sure to perform the
rest of the adjustment.
2. Print out the test pattern for each adjustment.
(4) Turn the power OFF.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment method 2
Test pattern (Block)
Pattern on the leading edge side
Pattern on the trailing edge side
[
]
Test pattern
K
K
M
Y
C
C
The colors overlap
(
K
Rejection
Y
C
)
Adjustment is needed .
M
K
K
M
Y
C
C
The colors are allowed to con-
tact each other.
Acceptation
K
K
Y
Y
C
C
M
K
K
C
C
M
Y
Optimal condition
Equal gap between the image
positions of each color is the
optimal condition.
M
Gap: approx. 0.169 mm
Adjust the image positions of K, C and Y so that the colors do not overlap.
[
]
Details of adjustment area
Fig.3-13
This adjustment should be applied for each printout of the test pattern. (Skip this if the test pattern is
printed correctly.)
The order of the adjustment, test patterns and codes to be used are listed below.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order
Test pattern
1st page
2nd page
Code
1
2
417
418
(1) While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. -> (Adjustment
Mode)
(2) Print out the test pattern and adjust its deviation amount (above). Use the image position of
magenta (M) as a reference for adjustment. The image positions of yellow (Y), cyan (C) and
black (K) must be adjusted with this reference.
•
Select A3/LD size. Key in “64” and then press the [FAX] button. -> 2 pages of the test pattern
are printed out.
3
•
•
•
Check the image of the test pattern (above) and specify the color to be adjusted.
Key in the code (listed above) and press the [START] button.
Key in the sub code of the color to be adjusted and press the [START] button.
Sub code
0: Black (K) 1: Cyan (C) 3: Yellow (Y)
•
Key in the adjustment value and press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button.
Notes:
1. When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by
0.0423 mm.
2. Adjust the image positions of black (K), cyan (C) and yellow (Y) so that these colors do not
overlap one another.
3. If patterns on both leading and trailing edges are not aligned, adjust the deviation amount of
each edge so that it is made uniform. (i.e. Adjust it so as to make the upper-side gap of the
pattern on the leading edge and lower-side gap of the pattern on the trailing edge equal, and
to make the lower-side gap of the pattern on the leading edge and upper-side gap of the pat-
tern on the trailing edge equal.)
(3) Repeat Step (2) until all the test patterns are printed correctly.
Notes:
1. Since the adjusted value is reflected in that of the subsequent steps, be sure to perform the
rest of the adjustment.
2. Print out the test pattern for each adjustment.
(4) Turn the power OFF.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5.3
Density adjustment
The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as
follows.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode
Color
mode
Item to be
adjusted
Remarks
Text/
Photo
1550
Printed
Image
1552
Text
Photo
Map
Full
1551
1553
1554 Manual density
The larger the value is, the darker
Color
mode center value the image becomes.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)
1560
1570
1580
1561
1571
1581
1562
1572
1582
1563
1573
1583
1564 Manual density
mode dark step
value
The larger the value is, the darker
the dark side becomes.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 20)
1574 Manual density
mode light step
value
The larger the value is, the lighter
the light side becomes.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 20)
1584 Automatic density The larger the value is, the darker
mode
the image becomes.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode
Color
mode
Item to be
adjusted
Remarks
Text/Photo
Text
Photo
Black
503
504
501
Manual density
mode center value the image becomes.
The larger the value is, the darker
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)
508
505
514
510
507
515
509
506
512
Manual density
mode dark step
value
The larger the value is, the darker
the dark side becomes.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 20)
The larger the value is, the lighter
the light side becomes.
Acceptable values:
Manual density
mode light step
value
0 to 255 (Default: 20)
Automatic density The larger the value is, the darker
mode
the image becomes.
Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-
ment using the following procedure.
Note:
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing "3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment".
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in an adjustment value (acceptable values: 0 to 255).
(To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. → The equipment goes back to
the ready state.
(5) Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy.
(6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5.4
Color balance adjustment
The color balance is adjusted by adjusting the density of each color at the Full Color Mode. The adjust-
ment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high
density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode
Item to be
Color
Remarks
Text/
Photo
Printed
Image
adjusted
Text
Photo
Map
Yellow
1779-0
1779-1
1779-2
1784-0
1784-1
1784-2
1789-0
1789-1
1789-2
1794-0
1794-1
1794-2
1780-0
1780-1
1780-2
1785-0
1785-1
1785-2
1790-0
1790-1
1790-2
1795-0
1795-1
1795-2
1781-0
1781-1
1781-2
1786-0
1786-1
1786-2
1791-0
1791-1
1791-2
1796-0
1796-1
1796-2
1782-0
1782-1
1782-2
1787-0
1787-1
1787-2
1792-0
1792-1
1792-2
1798-0
1798-1
1798-2
1783-0 Low density
1783-1 Medium density
1783-2 High density
1788-0 Low density
1788-1 Medium density
1788-2 High density
1793-0 Low density
1793-1 Medium density
1793-2 High density
1798-0 Low density
1798-1 Medium density
1798-2 High density
The larger the value is,
the darker the color to
be adjusted becomes.
Acceptable values:
3
0 to 255. (Default: 128)
Magenta
Cyan
Black
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-
ment using the following procedure.
Note:
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing “3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment”.
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in the code of the mode to be adjusted (color and original mode) and press the [START] but-
ton.
(3) Select the density area to be adjusted with digital keys (0, 1 or 2), and press the [START] button.
0: Low density (L)
1: Medium density (M)
2: High density (H)
(4) Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory.
→ The equipment goes back to the ready state.
(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
(7) Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy.
(8) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5.5
Gamma balance adjustment
The density adjustment at the Black Mode is performed by selecting its density area from the following:
low density, medium density and high density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode
Text
Color
mode
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
Text/Photo
590-0
Photo
592-0
592-1
592-2
Black
591-0
Low density
The larger the value is, the
density of the item to be
adjusted becomes darker.
Acceptable values:
590-1
591-1
Medium density
High density
590-2
591-2
0 to 255. (Default: 128)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-
ment using the following procedure.
Note:
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing “3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment”.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of “3.5.4 Color balance adjustment”.
3.5.6
Offsetting adjustment for background processing
The density of background and text can be adjusted as follows.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Remarks
Original mode
Color
Item to be adjusted
Text/
Printed
Image
mode
Text
Photo
Map
Photo
Full
Color
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
Automatic density
adjustment for back- darker the background
The larger the value is, the
ground
becomes. (Automatic)
Acceptable values:
0 to 255.
(Default: 128)
1693
1698
1708
1694
1699
1709
1695
1700
1710
1696
1701
1711
1697
1702
1712
Automatic density
adjustment for text
The larger the value is, the
darker the text becomes.
(Automatic)
Acceptable values:
0 to 255. (Default: 128)
Manual density
adjustment for back- darker the background
ground
The larger the value is, the
becomes. (Manual)
Acceptable values:
0 to 255. (Default: 128)
Manual density
adjustment for text
The larger the value is, the
darker the text becomes.
(Manual)
Acceptable values:
0 to 255. (Default: 128)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-
ment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment".
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5.7
Judgment threshold for ACS
The judgment level is adjusted for the automatic identification of whether the original set on the glass is
black or color. Namely, this is to adjust the judgment level used when “Auto Color” is selected at a color
mode. The adjustment is available for each of the manually-set original and the original used with the
RADF.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
1675
Item to be adjusted
Contents
Item to be adjusted
The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be judged as black even at
Judgment threshold the Auto Color Mode. The smaller value is, the more it tends to be judged as
for ACS when origi- color.
nal is set manually
Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 70)
1676
Judgment threshold
for ACS when origi-
nal is set on RADF
3
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary and make
adjustment.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of "3.5.3 Density adjustment".
3.5.8
Sharpness adjustment
If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. The adjust-
ment can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
1737
Color mode
Full Color
Original mode
Text/Photo
Text
Contents
•
The larger the value is, the sharper the image
becomes; while the smaller the value is, the softer the
image becomes.
The smaller the value is, the less moire tends to
appear.
The acceptable values are 0 to 31.
The center value is 16.
However, 0 is equivalent to the center value.
1738
1739
1740
1741
604
Printed Image
Photo
•
•
Map
Black
Text/Photo
Text
605
606
Photo
1757
Auto Color
Text/Photo
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-
ment.
Note:
You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of "3.5.3 Density adjustment".
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5.9
Setting range correction
The values of the background peak/text peak in the range correction at the Black Mode can be
switched to "varied" or "fixed" in the following codes.
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.
The values of the background peak affects the reproduction of the background density, and the values
of the text peak affects that of the text density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
570
571
572
Range correction for The following are the default values set
original manually set for each original mode.
on the original glass
Text/Photo: 22, Photo: 12, Text: 22
Each digit stands for:
One's place: Automatic density mode
Ten's place: Manual density mode
The setting conditions possible are as
follows:
693
694
695
Range correction for
original set on the
RADF
Background peak
fixed
Text peak
fixed
fixed
1:
2:
3:
4:
varied
fixed
varied
varied
varied
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-
ment.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of "3.5.3 Density adjustment".
3.5.10 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)
The levels of the background peak for the range correction at a Black Mode can be set at the following
codes.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
532
533
534
Background peak for When the value increases, the back-
range correction
ground (low density area) of the image
is not output.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255.
(Default: Text/Photo: 40, Photo: 16,
Text: 40)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-
ment.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of "3.5.3 Density adjustment".
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 32
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5.11 Adjustment of smudged/faint text
The smudge/faint text at a Black Mode can be set at the following codes.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Text/Photo
Remarks
648
Adjustment of
smudged/ faint text
When the value increases, the faint
text is improved. When the value
decreases, the smudged text is
improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255.
(Default: 30)
3
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-
ment.
Note:
Remember the image specifications and life span of the replacing parts may not meet the stan-
dard when the setting value is changed from the default value.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of "3.5.3 Density adjustment".
3.5.12 Adaptation to highlighter
Four modes of one touch adjustment are performed and each mode can be switched into two modes;
highlighter 1 or 2. This adjustment is performed when the reproduction mode for highlighter is needed.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
1769
1770
1771
1772
One touch adjustment
Remarks
Vivid
Clear
Warm
Cool
0: Default (Vivid / Clear / Warm / Cool)
1: Highlighter 1
2: Highlighter 2
Note:
The color may not always be reproduced precisely due to the characteristics of fluorescent ink.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5.13 Beam level conversion setting
The beam level for 4 divided smoothing is set at the Black Mode. This adjustment enables to adjust the
dot size.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
667-0
667-1
667-2
667-3
667-4
One touch adjustment
Beam level 0/4
Beam level 1/4
Beam level 2/4
Beam level 3/4
Beam level 4/4
Remarks
The smaller the value is, the smaller the beam width
becomes. Therefore, the smaller dot is reproduced accord-
ingly. Acceptable values: 0 to 255.
(Default: Level 0/4: 0, Level 1/4: 63, Level 2/4: 127, Level 3/
4: 191, Level 4/4: 255)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-
ment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of “3.5.4 Color balance adjustment”.
Notes:
1. When this adjustment is performed, “3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Black Mode)” (05-
580) needs to be performed since the reproduction of density at Black Mode varies. The
result of this adjustment is not reflected to color/black integrated pattern. Namely, each auto-
matic gamma adjustment of Black Mode (05-580) or of Color Mode (05-1643) needs to be
performed individually after this adjustment.
2. After this adjustment, set “1” in 08-595 so that the correction result of the Black Mode is not
reflected on “Automatic Calibration”.
3. The setting value must increase as the beam level number (0 to 4) becomes higher. Do not
increase this order when setting the values.
4. Usually, beam level 4 is most effective on all black modes.
3.5.14 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type
The maximum toner amount adhering to the paper can be controlled.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
Paper type
Plain paper
Thick paper 1
Thick paper 2
Thick paper 3
OHP film
Remarks
The smaller the value is, the toner amount adhered
decreases of the high density area (ex. prevention of fusing
offsetting, etc).
Acceptable values : 0 to 255.
(Default: Plain paper: 255, Thick paper 1: 249,
Thick paper 2: 237, Thick paper 3: 237, OHP film: 249)
Note:
The larger the value is, the more frequently fusing offsetting occurs.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5.15 Maximum text density adjustment
The maximum text density of each color at Full Color Mode can be adjusted as follows.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Remarks
Color
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Code
1630
1631
1632
1633
Item to be adjusted
Maximum text density The larger the value is, the darker the maximum text density
of each color to be adjusted becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 10 (Default: 5)
Black
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjust-
ment using the following procedure.
3
Note:
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing “3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment”.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of “3.5.3 Density adjustment”.
3.5.16 Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment
Text/Photo reproduction level at the Full color mode, Auto color mode and Gray scale mode can be
adjusted.
Text/Photo reproduction level adjustment can be switched to "Photo oriented 1", "Photo oriented 2",
"Text oriented 1" or "Text oriented 2" in the following codes.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Mode
Item to be adjusted
Contents
Text/Photo
1725
Text/Photo reproduc-
tion level adjustment
0: Default
1: Photo oriented 2 (The printed image reproduction level
higher than that of the Photo oriented 1)
2: Photo oriented 1 (The printed image reproduction level
higher than that of the Default)
3: Equivalent to the Default
4: Text oriented 1 (The text reproduction level higher than
that of the Default)
5: Text oriented 2 (The text reproduction level higher than
that of the Text oriented 1)
Notes:
•
The text reproduction level is lower when the mode is switched from the default value to the
Photo oriented 1 or Photo oriented 2. (The text reproduction level in Photo oriented 2 is lower
than that in Photo oriented 1.)
•
Changing the setting value from default value to the Text oriented 1 or Text oriented 2 causes
image noise in the printed photo image with few lines per inch. (Photo oriented 2 causes more
image noise than Photo oriented 1.)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5.17 Black reproduction switching at the Twin color copy mode
Black reproduction can be switched at the Twin color (Black/Red) copy mode.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Contents
Mode
Item to be adjusted
Twin color copy mode
(Black/Red)
1761
Black reproduction
switching
0: Default
1: Black reproduction oriented
Note:
The boundary between Red and Black may not be smooth when the setting value is "1".
3.5.18 Background adjustment(Black Mode)
Background of the gamma data can be adjusted with the following codes.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode
Item to be
adjusted
Remarks
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
600
602
601
Background
adjustment
1 to 9: The larger the value is, the
background becomes lighter.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of “3.5.3 Density adjustment”.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.6 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)
3.6.1
Automatic gamma adjustment
When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C
and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. In case the gradation repro-
duction of the image checked is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below at parts
replacement.
1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been unpacked or replaced, be sure to make this
adjustment:
• Laser optical unit
• Main charger wire
• 1st transfer roller
• Image Quality sensor
• Photoconductive drum
• Main charger grid
• Drum cleaning blade
• Developer material
• Transfer belt
• Drum cleaner brush
3
2) When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a print and check the image to
determine if adjustment is necessary:
•
2nd transfer roller
Note:
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in "3.3 Adjustment
of Image Quality Control" and "3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment".
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Color
Code
Remarks
1000
1001
1002
1003
Automatic
gamma
adjustment
<Procedure>
1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. ? Adjustment
Mode
2) Select the A4/LT drawer. Key in the pattern number and press the [FAX] button
to output a “Patch chart for gamma adjustment”.
Pattern No.
47
48*
49
50*
Language/Resolution
PS/600x600dpi
PS/1200x600dpi
PCL/600x600dpi
PCL/1200x600dpi
Remarks
When performing code 1000
When performing code 1001
When performing code 1002
When performing code 1003
*
Perform the adjustment only when the expansion memory has been
installed.
3) Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (2) face down on the origi-
nal glass, with its side, on which two black squares are present, aligned
against the original scale.
4) Key in a code and press the [START] button. ? The scanner reads the chart
automatically and performs automatic gamma adjustment calculation (approx.
30 sec.).
5) When the adjustment has finished normally, “ENTER” is shown.
Press the [ENTER] button to have the adjustment results reflected.
(To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.)
In the case of an abnormal ending, “ADJUSTMENT ERROR” is shown. Press
the [CANCEL] button to clear the error display.
When it is cleared, the control panel display will return to the ready state. Then,
check if the patch chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or
if it is placed inclined on the original glass, and then repeat step (3) and after-
ward.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.6.2
Color deviation adjustment
The color deviation amount of the secondary scanning direction can be adjusted.
For the adjustment procedures, see Chapter 3.5.2 “Color Deviation Adjustment”.
Note:
Since color deviation adjustment in the copying function is in common with that in the printer
function, it does not need to be done if already performed in the copying function.
3.6.3
Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode)
The gamma balance is adjusted by adjusting the density at the Black Mode. The adjustment is per-
formed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Language and screen
Color
mode
Smoot
h
(PS)
Smoot
h
(PCL)
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
Detail
(PS)
Detail
(PCL)
Black
596-0
596-1
596-2
597-0
597-1
597-2
598-0
598-1
598-2
599-0 Low density
599-1 Medium density
599-2 High density
The larger the value is, the
density of the item to be
adjusted becomes darker.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255.
(Default: 128)
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in the codes to be adjusted (language and screen) and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the
[START] button.
0: Low density (L) 1: Medium density (M) 2: High density (H)
(4) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.)
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. ? The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
(7) Let the equipment restart and perform printing job.
(8) If the image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7).
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.6.4
Color balance adjustment (Color Mode)
The color balance is adjusted by adjusting the density of each color. The adjustment is performed by
selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
PS
PCL
Color
600x600dpi
1200x600dpi
600x600dpi
1200x600dpi
Density Remarks
Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail
Yellow
1010-0 1014-0 1018-0 1022-0 1026-0 1030-0 1034-0 1038-0 Low
1010-1 1014-1 1018-1 1022-1 1026-1 1030-1 1034-1 1038-1 Medium
1010-2 1014-2 1018-2 1022-2 1026-2 1030-2 1034-2 1038-2 High
The larger
the value
is, the
darker the
color to be
adjusted
Magenta 1011-0 1015-0 1019-0 1023-0 1027-0 1031-0 1035-0 1039-0 Low
3
1011-1 1015-1 1019-1 1023-1 1027-1 1031-1 1035-1 1039-1 Medium becomes.
Acceptable
1011-2 1015-2 1019-2 1023-2 1027-2 1031-2 1035-2 1039-2 High
values:
Cyan
Black
1012-0 1016-0 1020-0 1024-0 1028-0 1032-0 1036-0 1040-0 Low
1012-1 1016-1 1020-1 1024-1 1028-1 1032-1 1036-1 1040-1 Medium
1012-2 1016-2 1020-2 1024-2 1028-2 1032-2 1036-2 1040-2 High
1013-0 1017-0 1021-0 1025-0 1029-0 1033-0 1037-0 1041-0 Low
1013-1 1017-1 1021-1 1025-1 1029-1 1033-1 1037-1 1041-1 Medium
1013-2 1017-2 1021-2 1025-2 1029-2 1033-2 1037-2 1041-2 High
0 to 255.
(Default:
128)
Note:
Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing “3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment”.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of "3.6.3 Gamma balance adjustment".
3.6.5
Adjustment of smudged/faint text
The smudged/faint text at the Black Mode is adjusted.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Language
Remarks
PS
PCL
654
655
When the value increases, the smudged text is improved.
When the value decreases, the faint text is improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 9 (Default: 5)
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in the codes to be adjusted and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. ? The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(5) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (4).
(6) Let the equipment restart and perform printing job.
(7) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (6).
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.6.6
Upper limit value at Toner Saving Mode
The upper limit value is adjusted at the Toner Saving Mode.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Black mode
Language
PCL
600x600dpi 1200x600dpi 600x600dpi 1200x600dpi
1055 1056 1057 1058
PS
PS
PCL
Remarks
PS
PCL
664
665
The smaller the value is, the lighter
the density of image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255.
(Default: 176)
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of “3.6.5 Adjustment of smudged/faint text”.
3.6.7
Dot size adjustment in black printing
The dot size is adjusted in primary scanning direction in black printing.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
Remarks
663
The smaller the value is, the dot size becomes smaller.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 255)
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of “3.6.5 Adjustment of smudged/faint text”.
3.6.8
Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type
The maximum toner amount adhering to the paper can be controlled.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Remarks
Code
Paper type
PS
PCL
1046-0
1047-0
1048-0
1049-0
1050-0
1046-1
1047-1
1048-1
1049-1
1050-1
Plain paper
Thick paper 1
Thick paper 2
Thick paper 3
OHP film
The smaller the value is, the toner amount adhered
decreases of the high density area (ex. prevention of fusing
offsetting, etc).
Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: Plain paper: 255, Thick
paper 1:
255, Thick paper 2: 255, Thick paper 3: 255, OHP film: 200)
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of “3.6.3 Gamma balance adjustment”.
Note:
The larger the value is, the more frequently fusing offsetting occurs.
3.6.9
Image processing: Gamma correction table all clearing
The state of calibration in color printing mode is initialized at the Setting Mode (08-597). This setting is
to be performed when a defect occurs in “Automatic gamma adjustment (05-1000 to 1003)”. The cause
of defect is presumed as an image failure (jittering or uneven image density) at the patch chart for
gamma adjustment.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.7 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function)
3.7.1
Gamma balance adjustment
The gamma balance at the Black Mode is adjusted by adjusting the density. The adjustment is per-
formed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode
Item to be
adjusted
Gray Scale
mode
Remarks
Black
Text/Photo
Black
Text
Black
Photo
Low density
880-0
880-1
880-2
881-0
881-1
881-2
882-0
882-1
882-2
883-0
883-1
883-2
The larger the value is, the
density of the item to be
adjusted becomes darker.
Acceptable values:
Medium density
High density
3
0 to 255. (Default: 128)
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in the code corresponding to the desired original mode and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the
[START] button.
0: Low density (L), 1: Medium density (M), 2: High density (H)
(4) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.)
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. Æ The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
(7) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job.
(8) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7).
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.7.2
Density adjustment (Black Mode)
Adjusts the center density and the variation of density adjustment buttons.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Original mode
Color
mode
Item to be
adjusted
Remarks
Text/Photo
Text
Photo
Black
845
846
847
Manual density
center value
The larger the value is, the darker the
image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)
855
850
860
856
851
861
857
852
862
Manual density
dark step value
The larger the value is, the darker the
dark side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 20)
Manual density
light step value
The larger the value is, the lighter the
light side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 20)
Automatic density The larger the value is, the darker the
image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in an adjustment value (acceptable values: 0 to 255).
(To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. Æ The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job.
(6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.7.3
Background adjustment (Gray Scale Mode)
The adjustment level of background center value and the control of background adjustment button are
adjusted.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
848
Center value
The larger the value is, the background becomes darker. The smaller the value
is, the background becomes lighter.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
858
853
Dark step value
Light step value
The larger the value is, the image of the “dark” steps becomes darker.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 50)
The larger the value is, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 50)
3
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 255. (To correct the value once keyed in,
press [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. Æ The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job.
(6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
3.7.4
Background adjustment (Color Mode)
The adjustment level of background center value is adjusted. The control value of background adjust-
ment button is automatically adjusted to the same level as the adjusted center value.
For example, when the control value of background adjustment key ranges from 0 to 6, the background
center value (-2 to +2) is used to be the range from 6 to 14 accordingly.
Before adjustment
+2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
+2 +1 -1 -2
+1
0
-1
-2
0
After adjustment
Code
1070
1071
1072
Original mode
Remarks
Text
The larger the value is, the background becomes lighter.
Acceptable values: 0 to 50 (Default: 0)
Printed Image
Photo
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 50. (To correct the value once keyed in,
press [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. Æ The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job.
(6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.7.5
Judgment threshold for ACS
The judgment level is adjusted for the automatic identification of whether the original set on the glass is
black or color. Namely, this is to adjust the judgment level used when “Auto Color” is selected at color
modes. The adjustment is available for both the manually-set original and the original used with the
RADF.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
Item to be adjusted
Contents
1065
Judgment threshold The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be judged as black even
for ACS when origi- at the Auto Color Mode. The smaller the value is, the more it tends to be
nal is set manually
judged as color.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 70)
1066
Judgment threshold
for ACS when origi-
nal is set on RADF
<Procedure>:
Procedure is same as that of "3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode)".
3.7.6
Sharpness adjustment
If you want to make scan images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. The adjust-
ment can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
1086
1087
1088
840
Color mode
Original mode
Contents
Full Color
Text
•
The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes;
while the smaller the value is, the softer the image becomes.
The smaller the value is, the less moire tends to appear.
The acceptable values are 0 to 31.
Printed Image
Photo
•
•
The center value is 16.
Black
Text/Photo
Text
However, 0 is equivalent to the center value.
841
842
Photo
843
Gray Scale
-
Note:
You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of "3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode)".
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.7.7
Setting range correction
The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction at the Black Mode can be
switched to "varied" or "fixed" in the following codes.
If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values.
The values of the background peak affects the reproduction of the background density and the values
of the text peak affects that of the text density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Black
Original mode
Gray
Scale
Item to be
adjusted
Remarks
Text/
Photo
Text
Photo
3
825
826
827
828
833
Range correc-
tion for original
The following are the default values set for each origi-
nal mode.
manually set on Photo/Text: 12, Text: 12, Photo: 12, Gray Scale: 12
the original glass Each digit stands for:
Ones place: Automatic density mode
Tens place: Manual density mode
The setting conditions possible are as follows:
830
831
832
Range correc-
tion for original
set on the RADF
Background peak
fixed
varied
fixed
varied
Text peak
fixed
fixed
varied
varied
1:
2:
3:
4:
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of "3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode)".
3.7.8
Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)
The levels of the background peak for the range correction at the Black Mode can be set at the follow-
ing codes.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Black
Original mode
Gray
Scale
Item to be
adjusted
Remarks
Text/
Photo
Text
Photo
835
836
837
838
Background
peak for range
correction
When the value increases, the background (low density
section) of the image is not output.
Acceptable vales: 0 to 255
(Default: Text/Photo: 56, Text: 48, Photo: 16, Gray
Scale: 32)
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of "3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode)".
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.7.9
Fine adjustment of black density
The density of black side on scanned image is adjusted at color-scanning.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
1075
1076
1077
Original mode
Text
Remarks
The larger the value is, the black side of the image becomes darker.
Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (Default: 0)
Printed Image
Photo
Note:
Be careful for the value not to be too large since the gradation is reproduced worse in darker
side.
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 4. (To correct the value once keyed in,
press [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. ? The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job.
(6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
3.7.10 RGB conversion method selection
The color space conversion method of image is decided at color-scanning.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
1080
1081
1082
Original mode
Remarks
Text
Remarks
0: sRGB, 1: AppleRGB, 2: ROMMRGB, 3: AdobeRGB
(Default: 0)
Printed Image
Photo
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 3. (To correct the value once keyed in,
press [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. ? The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job.
(6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.7.11 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (black)
The reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction with the resolution other than 600 dpi is adjusted in
Scanning Function for black image.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
Remarks
884
When the value increases, the image is zoomed in.
When the value decreases, the image is zoomed out.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
* 0.1%/step
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of “3.7.2 Density adjustment”.
3
3.7.12 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (color)
The reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction with the resolution other than 600 dpi is adjusted in
Scanning Function for color image.
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code
Remarks
1060
When the value increases, the image is zoomed in.
When the value decreases, the image is zoomed out.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
* 0.1%/step
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of “3.7.2 Density adjustment”.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.8 High-Voltage Transformer Setting
3.8.1
General description
The high-voltage transformers (PS-HVT-350) supply high-voltage to the parts related to charging,
development, transfer and drum cleaning.
The high-voltage transformer has the following high-voltage outputs.
CH1: Main charger wire
CH2: Main charger grid bias
CH3: Color developer bias
CH4: Black developer bias
CH5: 1st transfer roller bias
CH6: 2nd transfer roller bias
CH7: Cleaning blade bias
Note:
Make sure not to lose the data sheets which are attached to the high-voltage transformers. Use
these sheets for the following setting.
Never move the fixed volumes of resistors since output adjustment is performed when the
devices are shipped.
3.8.2
Setting at the replacement of high-voltage transformer
After replacing a high-voltage transformer, be sure to enter the data shown on the data sheets (main
charger grid bias, color/black developer bias and 1st/2nd transfer roller bias) noted above according to
the following procedure.
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in the adjusting codes in the table below and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the adjusting value corresponding to each code on the attached sheets, and then press
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT].
<Adjustment Mode (05)>
Adjusting code
Item to be adjusted
Adjusting value
334
335
338
339
372
373
250
251
252
253
Main charger grid bias lower limit value
Main charger grid bias upper limit value
Color developer bias lower limit value
Color developer bias upper limit value
Black developer bias lower limit value
Black developer bias upper limit value
1st transfer roller bias lower limit value
1st transfer roller bias upper limit value
2nd transfer roller bias lower limit value (+)
2nd transfer roller bias upper limit value (+)
Refer to the data sheets
(4) Key in all the codes in the above table by repeating (2) and (3).
(5) Turn the power OFF.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.9 Adjustment of the Scanner Section
3.9.1
Carriages
(1) Installing carriage wires
When replacing the carriage wires, refer illustrations below:
[Front side]
Carriage-2
Carriage wire
3
Bracket for carriage-1
Idler pulley
Wire pulley
Hook
Tension spring
Fig.3-14
[Rear side]
Carriage-2
Carriage wire
Bracket for carriage-1
Hook
Idler pulley
Wire pulley
Tension spring
Fig.3-15
Adjustment of the carriage wire tension is not necessary since a certain tension is applied to the
carriage wires by the tension springs.
Note:
Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2) Adjusting carriages-1 and -2 positions
•
•
Move the carriage-2 toward the exit side.
Loosen the screws fixing the front side pulley bracket, make the sections A and B of the car-
riage-2 touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw them up.
Carriage-2
Pulley bracket
[
]
[
]
Rear
Front
Exit side frame
Enlarged view of carriage
B
A
Fig.3-16
•
Put the carriage-1 on the rail, make the sections C and D of it touch with the inside of the exit
frame and screw up the front/rear side of the bracket to fix it.
Note:
Make sure that the sections A and B of the carriage-2 touch with the exit side frame.
Carriage-1
[
]
[
]
Rear
Front
Exit side frame
Bracket
Bracket
Enlarged view of carriage
D
C
Fig.3-17
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) Assembling carriage wires
Winding the wire around the wire pulley:
•
•
Pull the Ø3 ball terminal located at the center of the wire into a hole on the wire pulley.
One end of the wire with a hook attached comes to the outside.
Wind the wires around the wire pulleys of the front and rear sides. The number of turns to be
wound are as follows:
-
-
2 turns toward the opposite side of the boss
4 turns toward the boss side
Notes:
Pay attention to the followings when the wires are wound around the pulleys:
•
•
•
Do not twist the wire.
Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys.
Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that there is no space
between them.
3
2 turns
4 turns
4 turns
2 turns
Ball terminal
Ball terminal
No space between turns
Hook
Hook
Color: Silver
Color: Black
[
]
[
]
Front
Rear
Fig.3-18
•
After winding the wires around the pulleys, attach the wire holder jigs not to loosen the wires.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
1. When the wire holder jig is attached, make sure that the wire is not shifted or loosened.
2. The wire should come out of the slot of the wire holder jig and be passed under the arm of it.
Arm
Wire holder jig
Wire holder jig
Fig.3-19
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.9.2
Lens unit
(1) Replacing the lens unit
•
The lens unit must not be readjusted and some part of its components must not be replaced in
the field since the unit is precisely adjusted. If any of the components is defective, replace the
whole unit.
•
When replacing the unit, do not loosen or remove the 6 screws indicated with the arrows.
3
Fig.3-20
•
Handle the unit with care. Do not hold the lens and adjusted part (hold the unit as shown
below).
Fig.3-21
(2) Installation of lens unit
Follow the procedure below when installing and replacing the lens unit.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<Procedure>
1) Attach the lens unit and fix it temporarily with 2 screws.
2) Match the center scale of the plate in which the unit is to be installed and the rightmost scale of
the adjusting hole on the lens unit plate.
[
]
Rear
Screw
[
]
Front
Fig.3-22
3) Tighten 5 screws securely to fix the lens unit while pushing it to the rear side and fix 2 ground
wires with the screws.
[
]
Rear
Screw
Screw
Screw
[
]
Front
Fig.3-23
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.10 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System
3.10.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding
<Procedure>
•
The center of the printed image shifts to the front side. → Move the guide to the front side (Arrow (A)
direction in the lower figure).
[
]
Rear
Feeding direction
3
Center
[
]
Front
Fig.3-24
•
The center of the printed image shifts to the rear side. → Move the guide to the rear side (Arrow (B)
direction in the lower figure).
[
]
Rear
Feeding direction
Center
[
]
Front
Fig.3-25
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
Bypass feeding
1) Loosen the screen.
2) Move the entire guide to the front or rear side.
3) Tighten the screw.
( )
A
( )
B
Fig.3-26
•
Drawer feeding
1) Loosen 2 screws.
2) Move the entire guide to the front or rear side.
3) Tighten the screws.
( )
B
( )
A
Fig.3-27
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.11 Adjustment of the Developer Unit
3.11.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (black developer unit)
Adjustment tool to use: Doctor-sleeve jig
Adjusting procedure:
(1) Take off the black developer unit from the equipment.
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the developer
material cover. Then discharge the devel-
oper material.
Developer
material cover
3
Screw
Fig.3-28
(3) Remove 2 screws, release the hook and take
off the doctor blade cover.
Screw
Doctor blade
cover
Screw
Fig.3-29
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) Loosen 2 doctor blade fixing screws. Insert
the gauge “0.55” of the doctor sleeve jig
between the developer sleeve and doctor
blade to adjust the gap, and tighten the
screws.
Screw
Developer sleeve
Doctor-sleeve
jig
Doctor blade
Fig.3-30
(5) Insert the gauge “0.50” of the doctor-sleeve
jig into the gap between the developer
Developer sleeve
sleeve and doctor blade and make sure that
the gauge can move smoothly in the front/
rear direction. In addition, confirm that the
gauge “0.60” cannot be inserted into the gap.
Doctor blade
Doctor-sleeve
jig
Fig.3-31
Notes:
1. When confirming and adjusting the gap between the developer sleeve and the doctor blade,
insert the gauges into the gap after rotating the developer sleeve so that its marking faces the
doctor blade.
2. While reattaching the black developer unit cover, set the latches securely.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.11.2 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (color developer unit)
Adjustment tool to use : Doctor-sleeve jig
Adjusting procedure:
(1) Take off the color developer unit from the equipment.
(2) Remove 2 screws, release 5 hooks and take
off the developer material cover. Then dis-
charge the developer material.
Developer material cover
Screw
Screw
3
Fig.3-32
(3) Remove 4 screws and the toner-scattering
prevention seal holder.
Screw
Toner-scattering prevention
seal holder
Fig.3-33
(4) Loosen 2 doctor blade fixing screws. Insert
the gauge “0.55” of the doctor-sleeve jig
between the developer sleeve and doctor
blade to adjust the gap, and tighten the
screws.
Screw
Developer sleeve
Doctor blade
Doctor-sleeve jig
Fig.3-34
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
1. Insert the gauge “0.50” of the doctor-
Developer sleeve
Doctor blade
sleeve jig into the gap between the devel-
oper sleeve and doctor blade and make
sure that the gauge can move smoothly in
the front/rear direction. In addition, con-
firm that the gauge “0.60” cannot be
inserted into the gap.
Doctor-sleeve jig
Fig.3-35
Notes:
1. When confirming and adjusting the gap between the developer sleeve and the doctor blade,
insert the gauges into the gap after rotating the developer sleeve so that its marking faces the
doctor blade.
2. While reattaching the color developer unit cover, set the latches securely.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.11.3 Black developer unit lift up/down timing adjustment
Perform this adjustment only when the stop position of the black developer unit lift up/down lever devi-
ates from the reference and a CEB0 error occurs.
The reference position means that the rib of the developer unit cover and the cutout of the black devel-
oper unit lift up/down lever are not overlapped as shown in Figure "A". (The cutout is in the 9 o'clock
position.)
B
A
Cutout
Rib
3
C
Black developer unit
lifting lever
Adjustment procedure
(1) Perform 03-460 Black developer unit lifting movement ON/OFF (continuous lifting movement)
and check the stop position of the black developer unit lifting lever. At this time, check the devia-
tion amount between the rib and the cutout of the lever.
(2) The stop position is "B" (the cutout is lower than the reference position):
Make the value of the adjustment code (05-499) smaller so that the stop position is closer to the
reference. Making the value smaller by 1 turns the lever circumference by approx. 3 mm.
Note:
If the adjustment cannot be performed though 0 is input, the clutch may have failed. Examine the
clutch.
(3) The stop position is "C" (the cutout is upper than the reference position):
Make the value of the adjustment code (05-499) larger so that the stop position is closer to the
reference. Making the value larger by 1 turns the lever circumference by approx. 3 mm.
Note:
If the adjustment cannot be performed though 8 is input, the clutch may have failed. Examine the
clutch.
Note:
If an error occurs even though this adjustment is performed, other causes may be considered.
Examine and check the defect according to the methods in troubleshooting.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 61
05/07
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Code to be used for the adjustment
Adjustment mode (05)
Code Classifi-
cation
Items
Function
Default
<Accept-
able
RAM
M
Contents
Proce-
dure
value>
499
Develop Black developer unit
-ment
ALL
4
Changes the lift up/down
timing of the black devel-
oper unit when a CEB0
error occurs.
1
lift up/down timing
adjustment
<0-255>
Note:
Do not input more than 8 for acceptable value. (If a number from 9 to 255 is input, it is processed
as 8.)
Relation between adjustment value and changing amount
Adjustment
value
Changing amount for default value
(Turning degree of black developer unit lift up/down lever)
Turning 32 degrees CW (approx. 12 mm in the lever circumference)
Turning 24 degrees CW (approx. 9 mm in the lever circumference)
Turning 16 degrees CW (approx. 6 mm in the lever circumference)
Turning 8 degrees CW (approx. 3 mm in the lever circumference)
Default value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Turning 8 degrees CCW (approx. 3 mm in the lever circumference)
Turning 16 degrees CCW (approx. 6 mm in the lever circumference)
Turning 24 degrees CCW (approx. 9 mm in the lever circumference)
Turning 32 degrees CCW (approx. 12 mm in the lever circumference)
*
CW: Clockwise
CCW: Counter Clockwise
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 62
05/07
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.12 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3018)
3.12.1 Adjustment of RADF Position
Perform this adjustment when the RADF is not installed in the correct position.
Note:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF.
[A] Checking
(1) Open the RADF and install 2 positioning pins
(the positioning pins are installed to the back
side of the hinge which is on the left side of
the RADF).
3
Fig.3-36
(2) Remove the platen sheet.
Fig.3-37
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) Close the RADF and check if the positioning
pins fit the holes on the RADF.
Fig.3-38
[B] Adjustment
If the pins cannot be fitted into the holes, perform the adjustment according to the following procedure.
(1) Remove the right-hand hinge screw at the
rear side.
Fig.3-39
(2) Loosen the left-hand hinge screw at the rear
side.
Fig.3-40
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) Loosen the hinge screws at the front side.
3
Fig.3-41
(4) Position the pins with the holes on the RADF
by moving it so that the pins fit into the holes
when the RADF is closed.
Fig.3-42
(5) Tighten the left-hand hinge screw at the rear
side.
Fig.3-43
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(6) Loosen the hole position adjustment screws
on the right hand side.
Fig.3-44
Fig.3-45
Fig.3-46
(7) Match the screw hole positions.
(8) Install the right-hand hinge screw at the rear
side.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(9) Loosen the hinge screws at the front side.
3
Fig.3-47
(10) Place the platen sheet on the original glass
and align it to the top left corner.
Close the RADF gently and open it to check
if the platen sheet is attached properly.
Fig.3-48
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.12.2 Adjustment of RADF Height
Note:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF.
[A] Checking
(1) Close the RADF.
(2) Light the exposure lamp.
•
•
Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [3] simultaneously.
Key in [267] and then press the [START] button. The exposure lamp is turned ON for a given
length of time.
(3) Visually check the gap between platen guide holder "A" and upper surface of the original glass
"B" from the left hand side of the equipment. If the value is not within the tolerance, perform the
adjustment according to the following procedure.
[Tolerance of the gap]
Rear side: 0 - 0.5 mm
Front side: 0 mm
A
B
A
B
Fig.3-49
[B] Adjustment
(1) Close the RADF.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2) Adjust it by turning the adjustment screws on the hinges.
•
Adjust the height on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the
RADF.
Turn it clockwise ................. Heightened
Turn it counterclockwise ...... Lowered
3
Fig.3-50
•
Adjust the gap on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the
RADF.
Turn it clockwis .................... Lowered
Turn it counterclockwise ...... Heightened
Fig.3-51
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.12.3 Adjustment of Skew
Note:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly.
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
Fig.3-52 Chart (Original)
Simplex copying:
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [1
Sided -> 1 Sided] and press the [START] button.
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.
Duplex copying:
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [2
Sided -> 2 Sided] and press the [START] button.
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[B] Adjustment
Simplex copying:
(1) Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.
3
Fig.3-53
(2) If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of
"+", and if "D", shift it to "-".
C
D
Fig.3-54
Fig.3-55
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+".
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-".
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Duplex copying:
(1) Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.
Fig.3-56
(2) If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-
", and if "D", shift it to "+".
C
D
Fig.3-57
Fig.3-58
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-".
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+".
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.12.4 Adjustment of the Leading Edge Position
Note:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly.
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
Simplex copying:
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [1
Sided -> 1 Sided] and press the [START] button.
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy.
3
Duplex copying:
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [2
Sided -> 2 Sided] and press the [START] button.
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy.
F
E
Fig.3-59 Chart (Original)
Fig.3-60 Copy
[B] Adjustment
Simplex copying:
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, key in [365] and then press the
[START] button.
(2) Enter the value.
•
If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is larger than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value smaller than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.
•
If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is smaller than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value larger than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.
(3) Press the [ENTER] button.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Duplex copying:
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, key in [366] and then press the
[START] button.
(2) Enter the value.
•
If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is larger than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value smaller than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.
•
If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is smaller than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value larger than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.
(3) Press the [ENTER] button.
3.12.5 Adjustment of Horizontal Position
Note:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly.
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with a center line in the following procedure.
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF.
(2) Press the [START] button.
(3) Fold the copy in half and check if the center line is misaligned.
[B] Adjustment
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.
(2) Key in [358] and then press the [START] button.
•
If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the front side of the equipment, enter a value
larger than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.042 mm.
G
Fig.3-61
•
If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the rear side of the equipment, enter a value
smaller than the current one.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.042 mm.
H
3
Fig.3-62
(3) Press the [ENTER] button.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.12.6 Adjustment of Copy Ratio
Note:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF. Also, the RADF position and height shall be adjusted properly.
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF.
(2) Press the [START] button.
(3) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the image dimension “I”.
[B] Adjustment
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.
(2) Key in [357] and then press the [START] button.
•
If the copy image dimension “I” is larger than the chart dimension, enter a value smaller than
the current one.
•
If the copy image dimension “I” is smaller than the chart dimension, enter a value larger than
the current one.
I
Fig.3-63
(3) Press the [ENTER] button.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.12.7 Adjustment of RADF Opening/Closing Sensor
Adjust the bracket position so that the sensor is turned ON when the height “A” becomes 100 mm or
less (within the empty weight falling limit).
3
Fig.3-64
Fig.3-65
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.13 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022)
3.13.1 Adjusting the jogging plate width
(1) Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover.
(2) Adjust the front jogging plate to the home
ON
position.
•
Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC
board as shown in Fig. 3-1301.
Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller
PC board.
•
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-
The front jogging plate moves to the
home position.
Fig.3-66
(3) Adjust the rear jogging plate to the home
position.
ON
1
•
Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC
board as shown in Fig. 3-1302.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fig.3-67
•
Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller
PC board.
Rear jogging plate home position
-
The rear jogging plate moves to the
home position.
Fig.3-68
(4) Measure the jogging width (standard at 317 mm).
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5) Remove the processing tray.
(6) Loosen the screw on the home position sen-
sor plate at the front.
Home position
sensor plate
Screw
3
Fig.3-69
(7) Adjust the position of the front jogging plate
home position sensor (S6) with reference to
the index.
Sensor
EX. 1
If the width is 319 mm in step (2), the differ-
ence from the standard is +2 mm, it requires
relocation of the sensor [3] in the direction of
arrow A by 2 mm.
A B
EX. 2
If the width is 316 mm in step (2), the differ-
ence from the standard is -1 mm; it requires
relocation of the sensor [3] in the direction of
arrow B by 1 mm.
Fig.3-70
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.13.2 Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate
(1) Without removing the processing tray unit,
Screw
Rear jogging plate
loosen the 2 mounting screws of the rear jog-
ging plate.
Fig.3-71
(2) Place several sheets of A4/LT paper on the
processing tray, and adjust the rear jogging
plate. (At this time, adjust the gap between
the paper and the front end of the rear jog-
0 mm to 0.5 mm
ging plate so that it is 0 mm to 0.5 mm.)
Paper
Butted
Screw
Rear jogging
plate
Fig.3-72
(3) With reference to the rear jogging plate adjusted in step (2), adjust the front jogging plate in the
same manner.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.13.3 Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag
If the overlap between the sensor and the flag is wrong for some reason, perform the following adjust-
ment.
(1) Remove the processing tray unit.
(2) Loosen the mounting screw of the front/rear
Jogging plate
adjusting plate
jogging plate adjusting plate; then, move the
adjusting plate to the left and the right.
Screw
3
Adjusting plate
Screw
Jogging plate
adjusting plate
Adjusting plate
Fig.3-73
(3) Tighten the screw so that the overlap
between the flag of the front/rear jogging
rack plate and the sensor is 1.5 mm to 2.0
mm.
Sensor
Sensor flag
1.5 mm to 2.0 mm
Fig.3-74
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.13.4 Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt
(1) Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover.
(2) Remove the 2 mounting screws, and detach
the grip unit.
Grip unit
Screw
Screw
Fig.3-75
(3) Loosen the screw on the tension arm plate.
(The tension arm plate will be pulled under
tension by the tension spring.)
Screw Tension arm plate
Fig.3-76
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) Move the returning roller shaft to its lower
limit (the slack of a belt is lightly taken); then,
tighten the screw on the tension arm plate.
Screw
Tension arm
plate
Returning
roller shaft
3
Fig.3-77
(5) Check to make sure that the returning roller
shaft moves smoothly.
Returning
roller shaft
Fig.3-78
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.13.5 Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate
(1) Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover.
(2) Remove the finisher control PC board, PC board bracket and sensor PC board.
(3) Remove the stack tray.
(4) Remove the stack tray drive unit.
(5) Place the stack tray guide lever fixing plate
so that it is in view through the hole in the
side plate (front, rear). Then remove the fix-
ing screw. (Perform the same for the front
and the rear.)
Screw
Stack tray guide lever
fixing plate
Fig.3-79
Note:
When removing the mounting screw, be sure to hold the stack tray guide lever up from below.
Stack tray
guide lever
Fig.3-80
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.13.6 Adjustment of the upper tray angle
(1) Remove the front cover.
3
Fig.3-81
(2) Loosen the screw denoted with the arrow.
Fig.3-82
(3) The tension becomes loose.
While pushing the bracket down, hold the
tray and move it up or down, to adjust the
angle so that the tray becomes parallel by a
visual check.
Fig.3-83
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) After the height adjustment, tighten the fixing
screw of the bracket.
Fig.3-84
Note:
If the fixing screw of the bracket is not fixed, the belt is loosened which may cause a skipped
tooth.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.13.7 DIP switch functions
You can simulate various functions by setting the DIP switch (SW1) on the finisher controller PC board
appropriately.
Initiating Operations
1) Remove any obstacles from the area of operation.
2) Set the DIP switch (SW1) as shown, and turn ON the power (so that LED1 will start to blink).
3) Press the pushing switch (SW2) twice to initiate the operation in question. (LED2 will remain on dur-
ing operation).
Setting
Item
Operation
To stop
Delivery motor
The delivery roller rotates in a specific
speed.
•
•
Press SW2 again.
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
ON
1
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
Stackprocessing The stack delivery lever moves to its
•
•
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
ON
1
motor (stack
home position and stops.
delivery lever)
Stackprocessing The returning roller moves to the home
motor (returning position and stops.
roller)
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
ON
1
Front jogging
plate motor
When not at the The front jogging plate
•
•
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
ON
1
home position
moves to its home
position and stops.
When at the
home position
The front jogging plate
moves over a specific
position and stops at
the home position.
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
Rear jogging
plate motor
When not at the The rear jogging plate
•
•
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
ON
1
home position
moves to the home
position and stops.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
When at the
home position
The rear jogging plate
moves over a specific
distance and stops.
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
Upper stack tray The upper stack tray moves up and stops
•
•
Press SW2 again.
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
ON
1
motor (up)
when the upper stack tray upper limit
sensor turns ON.
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
Upper stack tray The upper stack tray moves down and
•
•
Press SW2 again.
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
ON
1
motor (down)
stops when the lower stack tray lower
limit sensor turns ON.
Lower stack tray The lower stack tray moves up and stops
•
•
Press SW2 again.
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
ON
1
motor (up)
when the lower stack tray upper limit
sensor is turned ON.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting
Item
Operation
To stop
Lower stack tray The lower stack tray moves down and
•
•
Press SW2 again.
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
ON
1
motor (down)
Stapler motor
stops when the lower stack tray lower
limit sensor is turned ON.
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
The stapler motor stops after the stapling
operation.
•
Press the stapler
safety switch
(S14).
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
ON
1
•
•
Shipping posi-
tion operation
The upper and lower stack trays move to
the shipping position and stop.
Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
ON
1
Note:
Perform the shipping position operation when the finisher is packed again.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.14 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/1024)
3.14.1 Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit)
Perform this adjustment after replacing the finisher controller PC board or when the alignment position
must be changed for some reason.
(1) Remove the rear cover of the finisher unit.
(2) Check that the power is OFF and set SW104 on the finisher controller PC board as follows
according to the paper used for adjustment.
ON
ON
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A4 paper
LTpaper
Fig.3-85
(3) Turn ON the power.
(4) Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board.
•
When SW103 is pressed, the swing guide opens and the alignment plate moves to prescribed
position.
(5) Place ten sheets of A4/LT paper between the alignment plates and push them against the stop-
per.
(6) Press SW101 or SW102 on the finisher controller PC board and push the alignment plate against
the paper.
•
•
When SW101 is pressed, alignment plate moves 0.42 mm forward.
When SW102 is pressed, alignment plate moves 0.42 mm backward.
(7) When adjustment is complete, remove paper and press SW103 on the finisher controller PC
board once to store the adjustment in memory.
(8) Turn OFF all bits of finisher controller PC board SW104.
(9) Turn OFF the power and install the rear cover of the finisher unit.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.14.2 Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit)
Perform this adjustment after replacing the finisher controller PC board or when the staple position
must be changed for some reason. This adjustment adjusts the front/rear stitches with A4/A4-R when
the paper used for adjustment is AB type and with LT/LT-R when the paper is INCH type.
(1) Remove the rear cover of the finisher unit.
(2) Check that the power is OFF and set SW104 on the finisher controller PC board as follows
according to paper/stitch position used for adjustment.
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
1
2
2
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
A4/front stitch
A4/rear stitch
ON
1
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
A4-R/front stitch
A4-R/rear stitch
ON
1
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
LT/front stitch
LT/rear stitch
ON
1
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
LT-R/front stitch
LT-R/rear stitch
Fig.3-86
(3) Turn ON the power.
(4) Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board.
•
When SW103 is pressed, the swing guide opens and the alignment plate moves to prescribed
position.
(5) Place a sheet of paper between the alignment plates. Push it against the stopper and push the
rear edge of the paper against the rear alignment plate. If the gap between the front alignment
plate and front edge of the paper is 1 mm or greater, stop the staple position adjustment and
repeat the staple position adjustment after completing alignment plate adjustment.
(6) Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board once to staple. However, remove the stapled
paper manually because the paper is not ejected. Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC
board once again.
(7) Verify the staple position. If any adjustment is needed, proceed to the step 8). If no adjustment is
needed, proceed to the step 9).
(8) Press SW101 or SW102 on the finisher controller PC board to adjust the staple position.
•
•
When SW101 is pressed, the staple position shifts 0.49 mm to the front side.
When SW102 is pressed, the staple position shifts 0.49 mm to the rear side.
Repeat the steps 5) to 7).
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(9) After confirming that the staple position is adjusted correctly, place a sheet of paper between the
alignment plates and push it against the stopper and push the rear edge of the paper against the
rear alignment plate. Then press SW103 once. (Stapling is performed and the adjustment value
is stored in memory.)
•
The staple position adjustment is completed.
(10) Turn OFF all bits of SW104 on the finisher controller PC board.
(11) Turn OFF the power and install the rear cover of the finisher unit.
3.14.3 Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)
The folding position is adjusted by changing setting of bits 6 through 8 of SW504 on the saddle stitcher
controller PC board to match the stitching position (adjusting the distance over which the paper posi-
tioning plate is moved to the folding position from the stitching position).
If you have replaced the saddle stitcher controller PC board, be sure to set the new SW504 so that the
settings will be the same as those on the old SW504. Perform this adjustment if, for any reason, you
must change the folding position.
3
(1) Check that the power is OFF and separate the finisher from the host machine. If the optional
puncher unit is installed, remove it from the finisher.
(2) Remove the PC board cover and set bits 1 through 4 of SW504 on the saddle stitcher controller
PC board as follows:
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Do not change bits 5 through 8.
Fig.3-87
(3) Remove the rear cover, open the inlet cover of the saddle stitcher unit and tape the actuator of
inlet cover sensor (PI9) and inlet door switch (SW1).
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) Before inserting the paper, mark the top of the paper. You will be using two sheets of A3 or LD
paper.
Mark
A3/LD paper
Insert direction
Fig.3-88
(5) Turn ON the power.
(6) Press SW1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board so that the feed motor (M1) starts to rotate.
(Press SW1 three seconds or more if LD paper is used.)
(7) Open the inlet cover and insert two sheets of paper. Push them in by hand until the front edge of
the sheets push against the paper positioning plate.
(8) Close the inlet cover.
(9) Press SW1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
•
The saddle stitcher unit will “stitch” the sheets, and fold and deliver the stack automatically.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(10) Measure the distance (L) between the stitching position and the folding position. Then perform
“positive width adjustment” or “negative width adjustment” to suit the relationship between the
stitching position and the folding position.
•
•
If the stitching position is below the folding position, perform “positive width adjustment.”
If the stitching position is above the folding position, perform “negative width adjustment.”
Positive Width Adjustment
Negative Width Adjustment
Mark
Mark
Stitching position
Folding position
Folding position
Stitching position
3
Unit: mm
Example: If L is 1 mm, provide "+1 mm".
Unit: mm
Example: If L is 0.5 mm, provide "-0.5 mm".
Fig.3-89
(11) Change the settings of bits 6 through 8 on SW504 referring to the following table.
•
If the width adjustment is 0
The stitching position and the folding position match, requiring no change.
If for “positive width adjustment”
•
Set SW504 so that the difference resulting from subtraction of the interval from the appropri-
ate setting in the table below is provided.
Example: If SW504 is currently set to +2 and the interval is +1 mm, set SW504 to reflect - 2.
If for “negative width adjustment”
•
Set SW504 so that the sum resulting from addition of the interval from the appropriate setting
in the table below is provided.
Example: If SW504 is currently set to -1 and the interval is -0.5mm, set SW504 to reflect +1.
DIPSW1 bit settings
Setting
(in units of 0.5 mm)
Bit 6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Bit 7
ON
Bit 8
ON
+3
+2
+1
0
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
-1
-2
-3
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Do not use the following setting
Bit 6
ON
Bit 7
Bit 8
OFF
OFF
(12) Set SW504 bits 1 to 4 to OFF.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.14.4 Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit)
The binding position/folding position can be adjusted in the following (05) codes.
Code
468-0
468-1
468-2
Paper size
A4-R / LT-R
B4
Remarks
When the value increases, the binding/folding position shifts toward the right
page. (0.25mm/step)
Acceptable values: -14 to 14 (Default: 0)
A3 / LD
Increase the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "A".
Decrease the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "B".
A: When the upper side of the folding
is longer than the lower side
B: When the upper side of the folding is
shorter than the lower side
Paper feeding direction
Paper feeding direction
Fig.3-90
3.14.5 Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit)
Perform this adjustment when replacing the punch controller PC board, transmittance sensor (photo-
sensor PC board/LED PC board), or deflection sensor (scrap full detector PC board unit).
(1) Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher.
(2) Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.
ON
1
2
3
4
Fig.3-91
(3) Turn ON the power.
(4) Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board. Sensor output is adjusted automatically when
the switch is pressed.
•
Adjustment is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks alter-
nately.
(5) Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set
all bits of SW601 to OFF.
(6) Turn OFF the power.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.14.6 Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit)
This operation registers which puncher unit is attached to the IC on the punch driver PC board so that
the puncher unit can be identified by the finisher. For this reason, this operation must be performed
when the punch driver PC board has been replaced.
(1) Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher.
(2) Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.
ON
1
2
3
4
3
Fig.3-92
(3) Turn ON the power.
(4) Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board to select the number of punch holes.
•
The items in the following table are displayed repeatedly from top to bottom each time SW602
is pressed.
Number of punch holes
LED601/LED602
2 hole (E)
Blinks 1 times per cycle
2/3 hole (N)
Blinks 2 times per cycle
Blinks 3 times per cycle
Blinks 4 times per cycle
4 hole (F)
4 hole (S)
(5) Press SW603 on the punch controller PC board. The number of punch holes is registered to the
punch controller PC board each time the switch is pressed.
•
Registration is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks
alternately.
(6) Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set
all bits of SW601 to OFF.
(7) Turn OFF the power.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
3 - 95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c ADJUSTMENT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
3 - 96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4.1 PM Support Mode
4.1.1
General description
The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages / develop counts
after they were replaced before. However, the life span of them changes depending on the general use
of users and the environment in which the equipment is placed. Therefore, it is necessary to consider
not only the number of output pages but also the drive counts when deciding the timing for the parts
replacement in order to utilize the parts and materials effectively.
In addition, the drum rotates 4 times at color modes to transfer the images of 4 colors on the transfer
belt, overlaying one after another. Therefore, the number of output pages is counted as “4” for 1 page
for printing at color mode.
This equipment has the PM support mode, which makes it possible to see the general use of each part
(the number of output pages, develop counts and drive counts) and replacement record and to do a
counter clearing operation more efficiently when replacing.
The replacement record can be printed out in the list printing mode (9S-103).
4
4.1.2
Operational flow and operational screen
[ 1 ] Operational flow
PM support mode activated
[6]+[START]+[POWER]ON
[RETURN] pressed
[2] [START]
Main unit chosen
[SUB UNIT] pressed
Main screen
Main unit list displayed
[RETURN]
pressed
Main unit chosen
[RESET]
[CANCEL] pressed
Sub screen
Sub unit list displayed
Clear screen
Clear finished
[CANCEL]
pressed
Counter clear
confirmation displayed
Sub unit chosen
[RESET] pressed
[INITIALIZE]
pressed
Clear finished
Counter clear performed
Fig.4-1
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*
The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is performed or the [CANCEL]
button is pressed after moving from the main screen, while it goes back to the sub screen after
moving from the sub screen.
[ 2 ] Operational screen
1) Main screen
10
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fig.4-2
1
2
3
Displaying of the main unit name
Back to the PM support mode activation screen
Moving to the clear screen to clear the selected unit counters
9
7
and , including all sub unit
(parts) counters belonging to that unit When the unit is not selected, all counters are cleared.
4
5
6
Moving to the sub screen of the selected unit
Moving to the next/previous page
Displaying of the standard number of output pages / develop counts (x1,000) to replace the
unit parts
Displaying of the present drive counts (x1,000)
7
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its
PM standard number.
8
9
Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x1,000) to replace the unit parts
Displaying of the present number of output pages/develop counts (x1,000)
When there are differences among the sub units (parts), “_” is displayed and “CHECK SUB-
UNIT” is displayed at the top
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of output pages or develop
counts has exceeded its PM standard number.
Displaying of the number of output pages / develop counts (Page/D. cnt), drive counts (Cnt.)
and previous replacement date (Chg.) for a chosen unit
10
When the replacement date for the sub unit is different, press the [SUB UNIT] button to move
to the sub screen and see each information, otherwise information is not displayed
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
1. “—” is always displayed at the drive counts section for the reversing automatic document
feeder (RADF) and feed unit.
2. “—” is displayed at the numeric section for the paper source which is not installed since the
paper source is different depending on the structure of options.
4
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2) Sub screen
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fig.4-3
1
Displaying of the sub unit (parts) name
Back to the main screen
2
3
4
5
Moving to the clear screen to clear the selected unit (parts) counters
Moving to the next/previous page
Displaying of the present number of output pages / develop counts (x1,000)
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of output pages or develop
counts has exceeded its PM standard number.
Displaying of the standard number of output pages / develop counts (x1,000) to replace the
sub unit (parts)
6
7
Displaying of the present drive counts (x1,000)
“*” is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its
PM standard number.
8
9
Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x1,000) to replace the sub unit (parts)
Displaying of the number of output pages, develop counts and drive counts and previous
replacement date for a chosen sub unit
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3) Clear screen
1
2
Fig.4-4
4
When the [CANCEL] button is pressed, the counter is not cleared and the display returns to
the main or sub screen..
1
2
When the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, “Present number of output pages/develop counts”
and Present driving counts” are cleared and “Previous replacement date” is updated.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[ 3 ] Access tree
Note:
The name inside [ ] is displayed on the LCD screen.
Main screen
Drum/cleaner unit
Sub-screen
Drum [DRUM]
[CLEANER/DRUM]
Drum cleaning blade [DRUM BLADE]
Drum cleaner brush [DRUM BRUSH]
Main charger unit
[MAIN CHARGER]
Main charger grid [GRID]
Main charger wire [MAIN CHARGER WIRE]
Main charger wire pad [WIRE CLEANING PAD]
Ozone filter
[FILTER]
Ozone filter [OZONE FILTER]
Black developer unit
Developer material K [BLACK DEVELOPER]
[BLACK DEVELOPER]
Color developer unit
[COLOR DEVELOPER]
Developer material Y [YELLOW DEVELOPER]
Developer material M [MAGENTA DEVELOPER]
Developer material C [CYAN DEVELOPER]
Transfer belt cleaning unit
Transfer belt cleaning blade [BELT CLEANING BLADE]
[TRANSFER BELT CLEANER]
2nd transfer roller unit
[2nd TRANSFER]
2nd transfer roller [2nd TRANSFER ROLLER]
Fuser unit
[FUSER]
Fuser belt [FUSER BELT]
Pressure roller [PRESS ROLLER]
Oil roller [OIL ROLLER]
Cleaning roller [CLEANING ROLLER]
Separation finger [PRESS ROLLER FINGER]
Fuser belt guide [BELT GUIDE]
Pressure roller discharge brush [PRESS ROLLER ERASER BRUSH]
Upper drawer
[1st CST.]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(1st CST.)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(1st CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(1st CST.)]
Lower drawer
[2nd CST.]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(2nd CST.)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(2nd CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(2nd CST.)]
Bypass unit
[SFB]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(SFB)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(SFB)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(SFB)]
RADF
[RADF]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(RADF)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(RADF)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(RADF)]
LCF
[LCF]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(LCF)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(LCF)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(LCF)]
PFP upper drawer
[3rd CST.]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(3rd CST.)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(3rd CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(3rd CST.)]
PFP lower drawer
[4th CST.]
Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(4th CST.)]
Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(4th CST.)]
Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(4th CST.)]
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note:
When the counter value of any of the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller in each unit is
reset, the value of the feeding retry counter is also reset simultaneously. When the [RESET] but-
ton is pressed after selecting the feed unit in the Main Screen, the value of the feeding retry
counter is also reset simultaneously.
The feeding retry counter:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Upper drawer
Lower drawer
Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1390)
Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1391)
PFP upper drawer Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1392)
PFP lower drawer Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1393)
Bypass unit
LCF
Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1394)
Reset the feeding retry counter (08-1395)
4
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1.3
Work flow of parts replacement
The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages / develop counts
after they were replaced before. However, its drive counts is also to be considered when replacing the
parts. Even if the number of output pages has reached the level of replacement, for instance, the part
may still be usable with its drive counts not reaching the specified drive counts. On the other hand, the
part may need replacement even if the number of output pages has not reached the level of replace-
ment with its driving time exceeding the specified drive counts. The life span of some parts such as feed
roller is heavily dependent on the number of output pages rather than the drive counts.
The following work flow diagram shows how to judge the timing of replacement with the number of out-
put pages and the drive counts.
The number of output pages is counted as “4” for 1 page for printing at color modes. This “4” is “develop
counts”.
Example 1:
When the number of output pages has reached the specified level
• The parts in RADF
• The parts in feeding system
• The parts in the drum/cleaner unit
• The parts in the transfer belt unit
• The parts in the 2nd transfer unit
• Developer material
• The parts in the fuser unit
Check the drive counts at PM
support mode.
Replace the part.
Yes
Replace the part.
Does it exceed the specified
drive counts?
No
The part is still usable.
Replace the part after the drive
counts has reached the specified
count.
Fig.4-5
Example 2:
When the image failure occurred before the number of output pages has reached the specified
level
Check the drive counts of all parts at PM support mode.
Yes
Replace the part.
Does it exceed the specified drive count?
No
Check the part and equipment according to the “TROUBLESHOOTING”.
Fig.4-6
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 General Descriptions for PM Procedure
(1) Preparation
•
•
•
Ask the user about the current conditions of the equipment and note them down.
Before starting maintenance, make some sample copies and store them.
See the replacement record and check the parts to be replaced in the PM support mode (6S-
2) or list printing mode (9S-103).
6S-2
: [6] + [START] + [POWER] ON Æ [2] Æ [START]
9S-103 : [9] + [START] + [POWER] ON Æ [103] Æ [START]
PM SUPPORT CODE LIST
XX-XX-'XX 11:28
UNIT
OUTPUT PAGES/
PM OUTPUT PAGE/
DRIVE COUNTS
PM DRIVE COUNTS
DEVELOP COUNTS DEVELOP COUNTS
DRUM
22220
22220
22220
22220
22220
22220
200000
200000
200000
200000
200000
200000
30948
30948
30948
30948
30948
30948
320000
320000
320000
320000
320000
320000
DRUM BLADE
DRUM BRUSH
GRID
MAIN CHARGER WIRE
WIRE CLEANING PAD
4
Fig.4-7
•
Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment.
(2) Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations. Refer to the
Service Manual if necessary.
(3) Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and
make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 Operational Items in Overhauling
Overhaul each equipment with the following timing.
e-STUDIO281c:
e-STUDIO351c:
e-STUDIO451c:
When the number of output pages has reached 300,000 or 2.5 years have
passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier.)
When the number of output pages has reached 360,000 or 2.5 years have
passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier.)
When the number of output pages has reached 450,000 or 2.5 years have
passed from the start of use (Whichever is earlier.)
(1) Replace all the supplies.
(2) Check the components in the drive section (gears, pulleys, timing belts, etc.). Replace them with
new ones if they are damaged.
(3) Check all the adhesives such as tape and Mylar if they are damaged or have become unstuck.
Replace them with new ones if necessary.
(4) Check the performance of all the switches and sensors. Replace them with new ones if neces-
sary.
(5) Clean inside the equipment thoroughly.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 Preventive Maintenance Checklist
Symbols/value used in the checklist
Cleaning
Lubrication/Coating
Replacement
Value:
Operation check
A: Clean with alcohol
B: Clean with soft pad, SI:
L:
Launa 40
Silicon oil
O: After cleaning or
replacement,
Replacement
cloth or vacuum
cleaner
W1: White grease
(Molykote X5-6020)
W2: White grease
cycle
(output pages or
develop counts)
confirm there is
no problem.
(Molykote HP-300) R: Replace if
AV:
FL:
Alvania No.2
deformed or
damaged
Floil (GE-334C)
[Preventive Maintenance Checklist]
Notes:
1. Perform cleaning and lubricating in the following timing. Exceptionally, the lubrication for the
drum unit, main charger, color developer unit and 1st transfer unit must follow the PM cycle of
each unit.
e-STUDIO251c:every 100,000 sheets
e-STUDIO351c:every 120,000 sheets
4
e-STUDIO451c:every 150,000 sheets
2. Value under "Replacement" indicates the replacement cycle, and when the cycle is different
for each product, values are indicated in the order of e-STUDIO251c, e-STUDIO351c and e-
STUDIO451c.(KS= x 1,000 sheets, KD= x 1,000 developments)
3. The replacement cycle of the parts for the charge, development and 1st transfer in copying
process is not indicated by the number of output pages (sheet), but the develop counts
(development). The number of output pages is counted as “4 developments” for 1 page for
printing at color mode, and “1 development” at black-and-white mode.
4. The replacement cycle of the parts in the feeding section equals to the number of sheets fed
from each paper source.
5. Be careful not to put oil on the rollers, belts and belt pulleys when lubricating.
6. Page-Item (P-I) is described in the column of the Parts list.
A. Scanner
Items to check
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
(KS)
Operation Parts list
Cleaning
Remarks
check
<P-I>
25-1
25-2
A1 Original glass
A2 ADF original glass
A3 Mirror-1
B or A
*a1
*a1
B
B
B
B
B
B
A4 Mirror-2
A5 Mirror-3
A6 Reflector
A7 Lens
11-10
26-6
A8 Exposure lamp
R
R
O
O
A9 Automatic original
detection sensor
B
11-12
A10 Slide sheet
(front and rear)
B or A
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 11
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B. Laser unit
Items to check
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
(KS)
Operation Parts list
check <P-I>
Cleaning
Remarks
Remarks
B1 LSU slit glass
B
C. Feed unit
Items to check
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
(KS)
Operation Parts list
Cleaning
check
<P-I>
18-20
18-24
18-5
C1 Pickup roller
C2 Feed roller
80
80
80
R
C3 Separation roller
C4 Transport roller
C5 Paper guide
AV, W2
W1
*c1
*c2
A
B
C6 Drive gear
(tooth face and shaft)
C7 GCB bushing bearing
L
C8 One side of the plastic
bushing to which the
shaft is inserted
W1
C9 Registration roller
A
B
R
R
23-15,34
23-2,30
C10 Paper dust removal
brush
*c10
D. Automatic duplexing unit
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
(KS)
Operation Parts list
Items to check
Cleaning
Remarks
check
<P-I>
D1 Transport roller (upper,
middle and lower)
A
R
43-7,
36,56
D2 One side of the GCB
bushing to which the
shaft is inserted
L
D3 One side of the plastic
bushing to which the
shaft is inserted
W1
D4 Paper guide
B
43-46
E. Bypass feed unit
Items to check
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
(KS)
Operation Parts list
Cleaning
Remarks
check
<P-I>
22-26
22-37
21-1
E1 Pickup roller
80
80
80
E2 Feed roller
E3 Separation roller
E4 Bypass tray
AV, W2
*e1
B
A
E5 Drive gear (shaft)
E6 GCB bushing bearing
E7 Transport roller
W1
L
R
22-4,40
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 12
05/07
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F. Main charger
Items to check
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
(KD)
Operation Parts list
Cleaning
Remarks
check
<P-I>
F1 Main charger case
F2 Main charger wire
B
*f1
*f1
130/160/200
O
28-15
F3 Contact point of termi-
nals
B
28-4,9
F4 Charger wire cleaning
pad
28-12
28-21
130/160/200
130/160/200
F5 Main charger grid
G. Drum/Cleaner related section
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
(KD)
Operation Parts list
Items to check
Cleaning
Remarks
check
<P-I>
G1 Photoconductive drum
103-1
Refer to
Chapter
4.8.2
130/160/200
4
G2 Drum stay
B
B
*g1
G3 Whole cleaner unit
G4 Drum cleaning blade
G5 Drum cleaner brush
G6 Recovery blade
32-10
32-5
*g2
*g2
*g3
130/160/200
130/160/200
R
B
B
32-26
G7 Used toner auger drive
section
W1
G8 Discharge LED
G9 Ozone filter
28-32
14-31
130/160/200
Note:
Check the color deviation after replacing G1 and G4.
H. Toner bag
Items to check
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
(KD)
Operation Parts list
Cleaning
Remarks
check
<P-I>
H1 Toner bag
50
103-6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I. Black developer unit
Items to check
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
(KS)
Operation Parts list
Cleaning
Remarks
check
<P-I>
I1 Whole black developer
unit
B
I2 Black developer unit
drive section
W1
I3 Developer material (K)
I4 Front shield
100/120/150
103-2
34-39
*i1
*i2
B
R
R
I5 Oil seal (4 pcs.)
I6 Guide roller
AV
34-3,15
34-17
B or A
I7 Toner cartridge drive
gear
W1
I8 Side shield
B
R
R
34-37,38
34-8
I9 Front bearings of mix-
ers
AV
*i3
J. Color developer unit / Revolver unit
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
(KS)
Operation Parts list
Items to check
Cleaning
Remarks
check
<P-I>
J1 Whole color developer
unit (Y, M and C)
B
J2 Color developer unit
drive section
W1
(Y, M and C)
J3 Developer material
(Y, M, and C)
24/30/37.5
103-3
33-24
*j1
*j2
J4 Front shield
(Y, M and C)
B
R
R
J5 Oil seal
AV
33-4,14
(4 pcs. for each color)
J6 Toner cartridge drive
gear (Y, M and C)
W1
J7 Revolver drive gear
W1
AV
J8 Color auto-toner sen-
sor
B
B
36-18
*j3
J9 Side shield
R
R
33-39,40
33-9
J10 Polarity adjustment
plate
FL
AV
*j4
*j5
*j6
J11 Color toner cartridge
sensor
B
36-104
33-12
J12 Front bearings of mix-
ers
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
K. Transfer belt unit / Transfer belt cleaning unit
Lubrication/
Replacement
(KD)
Operation Parts list
Items to check
Cleaning
Remarks
Coating
check
<P-I>
29-31
29-14
30-7
K1 Transfer belt
K2 1st transfer roller
K3 Drive roller
B
R
R
R
R
A
A
*k1
*k1
K4 2nd transfer facing
roller
30-15
K5 Transfer belt home
position sensor
(2 pcs.)
B
29-9
*k2
K6 Transfer belt cleaning
blade
130/160/200
R
31-8
K7 Transfer belt recovery
blade
B
31-16
*k3
K8 Blade seal (front side)
K9 Blade seal (rear side)
130/160/200
130/160/200
130/160/200
31-10
31-12
31-9
4
K10 Blade mylar (front
side)
K11 Blade mylar (rear side)
31-11
130/160/200
Note:
Check the color deviation after replacing K1, K2 and K6.
L. 2nd transfer roller unit
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
Operation Parts list
Items to check
Cleaning
Remarks
(KS)
check
<P-I>
L1 2nd transfer roller
200/240/300
13-19
L2 Paper guide
B
B
L3 Image quality sensor
23-24
*l1
Note:
Check the color deviation after replacing L1.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M. Fuser unit
Items to check
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
(KS)
Operation Parts list
Cleaning
Remarks
check
<P-I>
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
Fuser belt
100/120/150
100/120/150
100/120/150
100/120/150
100/120/150
R
39-1
Pressure roller
Separation finger
Oil roller
42-5
42-25
42-22
42-11
*m1
*m2
Cleaning roller
Thermistor (3 pcs.)
Fuser unit drive gear
Exit roller
A
A
W1
W2
Fuser belt guide
100/120/150
100/120/150
42-18
41-2
39-1
M10 Separation roller
*m3
M11 Pressure roller dis-
charge brush
N. RADF (MR-3018)
Items to check
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
(KS)
Operation Parts list
Cleaning
Remarks
check
<P-I>
1
2
3
4
5
Pickup roller
A
A
A
A
A
120
120
120
5-1
Separation roller
Feed roller
4-10
5-1
Registration roller
Intermediatetransfer
roller
6
7
8
9
Front read roller
Platen roller
A
A
A
A
Rear read roller
Reverse registration
roller
10
11
Exit/reverse roller
Platen sheet
A
B or A
O. PFP (KD-1011)
Items to check
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
(KS)
Operation Parts list
Cleaning
Remarks
check
<P-I>
O1
O2
O3
O4
Pickup roller
(upper/lower)
A
80
80
80
5-29
Feed roller
(upper/lower)
A
A
5-26
Separation roller
(upper/lower)
AV, W2
W1
5-112
*o1
Drive gear
(tooth face)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P. LCF (KD-1012)
Items to check
Lubrication/
Coating
Replacement
(KS)
Operation Parts list
Cleaning
Remarks
check
<P-I>
4-30
4-28
5-12
P1
P2
P3
P4
Pickup roller
Feed roller
A
A
A
160
160
160
Separation roller
Drive gear
(tooth face)
W1
4
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A2 A4 A5
A8 A6
A3
A1
A7
A10
K6
K7
K8
K9
K10
K11
D1
A9
K3 K5 K2
M8
M1 M3 M11 M2
G5
D4
G9
J8
G1
G6 G3
M5
G7
G4
M4
M6
J11
K5
J1
J3
J4
J5
D1
K4
J9
L2
J10
J12
L1
C9, C10
D1
E7
E4
E1
I1
I3
I4
I5
I6
I8
I9
E2
E3
C4
C2
C3
C4
C2
C3
F5 F2 F1 G8
F4 F3
K1
C1
C5
B1
Fig.4-8 Front side
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N5
N9
N4
N3
N2 N1
N6
N7 N8
N10
N11
Fig.4-9
O1 O2
4
O3
O2
O3
O1
Fig.4-10 Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P1
P2
P3
Fig.4-11 Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remarks “*” in the Preventive Maintenance Check List
*
a1.
Original glass, ADF original glass
Clean both sides of the original glass and ADF original. Make sure that there is no dust on
the mirrors-1, -2, -3 and lens after cleaning. Then install the original glass and ADF original
glass.
Note:
Make sure that there is no fingerprints or oil staining on part of the original glass on where the
original scale is mounted since the shading correction plate is located below the scale to be
scanned.
*
c1, o1. Separation roller (Feed unit, PFP)
Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring.
When replacing the separation roller, apply adequate amount of white grease (Molykote
HP-300) on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places).
Note:
Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if
adhered.
4
Apply white grease
Apply grease on the
inner surface
Fig.4-13
Fig.4-12
*
c2.
Drive gears in the paper feeding section (teeth of gears and shafts)
Apply some white grease (Molykote X5-6020) to the teeth of gears and shafts of the drive
gears.
Note:
Make sure that oil is not running over or scattered around as the gear is rotated coming into the
clutch after applying molykote to the gear which is located near the clutch. The quantity of moly-
cote should be smaller than that to be applied to the other parts.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*
c10.
When installing the intermediate guide after cleaning the paper dust removal brush
attached to it, check whether 2 hooks are fitted in and boss "A" in the figure is inserted into
its groove correctly.
A
A
A
Fig.4-14
*
e1.
Separation roller (SFB)
Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring.
When replacing the separation roller, apply adequate amount of white grease (Molykote
HP-300) on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places).
Note:
Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if
adhered.
Apply grease on the
inner surface
Apply white grease
Fig.4-15
Fig.4-16
*
f1.
Main charger case / Main charger wire
Clean the main charger case and wire with a cloth soaked in water and squeezed tightly,
and then wipe them with a dry cloth.
Note:
Be careful of the following when attaching a new wire (length: 373 mm).
-
-
-
Insert the wire securely into the V-grooves of the front and rear sides.
Do not twist the wire.
Do not touch the wire with your bare hand.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 22
05/07
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*
g1.
Drum stay
If toner accumulates on the drum stay, take off the drum stay from the process unit and
clean it with an electric vacuum cleaner. Also, remove any toner stains around the drum
stay with a cloth.
Drum stay
4
Fig.4-17
*
g2.
Drum cleaning blade / Drum cleaner brush
Since the edge of the blade is vulnerable and can be easily damaged by factors such as
the adherence of paper dust. Replace the cleaning blade and brush with new ones if poor
images are copied due to the damaged blade regardless of the number of output pages
which have been made.
*
*
*
g3.
Recovery blade
Replace the recovery blade regardless the number of output pages if the edge of the blade
get damaged.
i1, j1.
Developer material
After replacing the developer material, be sure to perform the auto-toner adjustment and
then image quality control initialization (Ch.3.2).
i2, j2.
Oil seal
Mixer unit (Rear side of mixers-1 & -2) 2 pcs.
Developer sleeve
2 pc.
Notes:
1. Lubricate the oil seal only when the oil seal is replaced
2. When exchanging the oil seal of the mixer unit, replace "i3, j6. Front bearings of mixer" at the
same time.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
During replacement, coat the oil seal with grease (Alvania No.2).
(1) Push in a new oil seal parallel to the mount-
ing hole section of the developer frame or
outside of the nozzle mixer.
Developer frame
(Nozzle mixer)
*
Pay attention to the direction in which the
oil seal is attached. (See figure on right.)
Outside
(2) Apply an even coat of grease to the inside of
the oil seal.
•
Amount: About two small drops
(3) Wipe off any grease exuded from the inside.
Grease
Inside
Oil seal
Fig.4-18
*
*
i3, j6.
j3.
Front bearings of mixers
When exchanging the oil seals (rear side of mixer-1 and -2) replace the front bearings of
mixer-1 and -2 at the same time. Since the oil seal is attached to the front bearings of
mixer-1 and -2, apply grease when replacing them referring to *i2, j2.
Color auto-toner sensor
Clean the color auto-toner sensor as follows:
1) Pull the sensor case of the color auto-toner sensor unit toward you, then remove 1
screw to take off the sensor shutter. Clean the surface of the sensor with a cotton swab
or soft cloth with sufficient alcohol filled in.
Sensor shutter
Sensor case
Color auto-toner sensor
Fig.4-19
2) Clean the reference plate of the sensor shutter by blowing off the toner dust with the
blower brush or the air spray cleaner etc.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note:
When you clean the reference plate, never touch it directly with the cleaning brush etc. as the
surface of the reference plate is fragile.
Reference plate
Fig.4-20
*
j4.
Polarity adjustment plate
Apply two-rice-grain-amount of FLOIL (GE-334C) to the polarity adjustment plate (feeding
terminal).
4
Fig.4-21
*
*
j5.
Color toner cartridge sensor
Perform the cleaning of the surface of the color toner cartridge sensor when you replace
the color developer unit (e-STUDIO281c: 24,000 sheets / e-STUDIO351c: 30,000 sheets /
e-STUDIO451c: 37,500 sheets).
k1.
Transfer belt drive roller -1, -2
Fully clean up the toner and such adhered to the roller with alcohol since an image failure
may occur if there are any bolts remaining on the roller.
Blot
Fig.4-22
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 25
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*
k2.
Transfer belt home position sensor
Clean each surface of transfer belt home position sensors (2 pcs.) with a dry cloth when
replacing the transfer belt.
Transfer belt
home position sensor-1
Fig.4-23
Transfer belt
home position sensor-2
Fig.4-24
*
k3.
Transfer belt recovery blade
Clean the surface of transfer belt recovery blade with a cloth soaked in water and tightly
squeezed, and the wipe it with a dry cloth when replacing the transfer belt cleaning blade.
If the edge of recovery blade is damaged, replace the blade regardless of the number of
output pages.
*
*
l1.
Area around image quality sensor
Clean the shutter of the image quality sensor and around it. Do not touch the sensor head
inside the shutter.
m1.
Separation finger
The paper jam may be caused if the tip of the finger is damaged or deformed. If there is
any problem with it, replace the finger with a new one regardless of the number of output
pages which have been made. Do not damage the tip of the finger during the cleaning.
The finger may be damaged if the toner adhering to the tip of it is scraped off forcibly.
Replace the finger if the toner is sticking to it heavily.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*
*
m2.
m3.
Thermistor
Clean the thermistor with alcohol if the toner or dirt is sticking to it when the fuser roller is
replaced. Do not deform or damage the thermistor during the cleaning. Replace the ther-
mistor with a new one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degree.
Separation roller
When replacing the transfer belt, apply some White Molykote (HP-300) on both ends of
the separation roller shaft.
4
Fig.4-25
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.5 PM KIT
KIT name
Component
Drum cleaning blade
Part name
BL-3511D
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
EPU-KIT-281C
Main charger wire
Main charger grid
Drum cleaner brush
Ozone filter
WIRE-CHARGR-373
GRID-220
B-281C
FILTER-OZ-SPB-600
ASYS-PAD-CHARGR-350
BL-281CTR
Charger wire cleaning pad
Belt cleaning blade*
Developer material (Y)
Developer material (M)
Developer material (C)
Cleaning jig
DEV-KIT-281CCLR
D-281C-Y
D-281C-M
D-281C-C
JIG-CLEAN-DOC
D-3511-K
DEV-KIT-281C
FR-KIT-281C
Developer material (K)
Cleaning jig
JIG-CLEAN-DOC
CR-281CTR2
2nd transfer roller
Fuser belt
BT-3511-FU
Pressure roller
HR-3511-L
Separation finger
Oil roller
SCRAPR-FUS-350
SR-3511U
Cleaning roller
B-281CU
Fuser belt guide
Pressure roller discharge brush
Pick up roller
COLOR-HR-IN-N
BRUSH-FUS-PR
ROLLER-PICK-AT
K-ROLL-FEED
K-ROLL-SPT
ROL-KIT-16CST
ROL-KIT-1010
DF-KIT-3018
Feed roller
Separation roller
Pick up roller
ROL-PICK-UP
ROL-PAPER-FED-F
ROL-PAPER-FED-S
ASYS-ROL-FEED
ASYS-ROL-FEED
ASYS-ROL-RET
Feed roller
Separation roller
Pick up roller
Feed roller
Separation roller
* The following seals and Mylar sheets are attached to the Belt cleaning blade.
Name
Blade seal (front side)
Blade seal (rear side)
Blade mylar (front side)
Blade mylar (rear side)
Part name
Qty.
SEAL-SIDE-CLN-TBU-F-1
1
1
1
1
SEAL-SIDE-CLN-TBU-R-1
ASYS-SEAL-SIDE-CLT-F-1
ASYS-SEAL-SIDE-CLT-R-1
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 28
05/07
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6 Jig List
Parts list
Item
Page
101
101
101
101
101
101
102
101
102
102
102
102
101
101
101
Item
1
Door switch jig
Test chart (A4)
3
Test chat (LT)
3
Test chart No. TCC-1 (A4)
Test chart No. TCC-1 (LT)
Doctor blade cleaning jig
Downloading jig (DLM board)
Wire holder jig
2
2
4
1
5
Download JIG-2 (6 Flash ROMs)
Download JIG-1 (2 Flash ROMs)
ROM writer adapter (For 1881)
ROM writer adapter (For 1931)
Doctor sleeve jig
2
3
4
4
5
7
Developer material nozzle
Belt tenstion jig (spring)
8
20
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7 Grease List
Parts list
Grease name
Part name
Volume
Container
Page
Item
8
SI Silicon oil
ASM-SILICONE-1M
OIL-LAUNA40-100
MOLYKOTE-100
ASM-PG-HP300-S
GREASE-HP-S
100 cc
100 cc
100 g
100 g
10 g
Bottle
Oiler
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
L Launa 40
9
W1 White grease (Molykote X5-6020)
W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300)
W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300)
AV Alvania No.2
Tube
Bottle
Bottle
Tube
Bottle
12
10A
10B
11
ASM-PG-ALV2
100 g
20 g
FL Floil (GE-334C)
ASM-PG-GE334C-S
13
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.8 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies
4.8.1
Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies
1) Toner/Developer
Toner and developer should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature is between 10°C to
35°C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation.
2) Photoconductive drum
Like the toner and developer, photoconductive drum should be stored in a dark place where the
ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where
drums may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
3) Drum cleaning blade / Transfer belt cleaning blade
This item should be stored in a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C,
and should also be protected against high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
4) Transfer belt / Transfer roller / Fuser belt / Pressure roller
Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
4
5) Oil roller / Cleaning roller
Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
They should also be stored “horizontally” on a flat surface.
6) Paper
Avoid storing copy paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity.
After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.
4.8.2
Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum
1) Use of gloves
If fingerprints or oil adhere to the drum surface, the property of the photosensitive drum may
degrade, affecting the quality of the copy image. So, do not touch the drum surface with bare hands.
2) Handling precautions
As the photoconductive drum surface is very sensitive, be sure to handle the drum carefully when
installing and removing it so as not damage its surface.
Be sure to apply “patting powder” (lubricant) to the entire surface of the drum (including both ends of
the drum where OPC is not coated) when replacing the drum. When the drum has been replaced
with a new one, the drum counter (setting mode (08-1150-0, 3, 6 and 7) must be cleared to 0 (zero).
This clearing can be performed in PM support mode.
Notes:
1. Application of the patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum and cleaning
blade. If the application of patting powder is neglected, the drum and cleaning blade may be
damaged.
2. When paper fibers or dint adhere to the cleaning blade edge, they may reduce the cleaning
efficiency and, in addition, may damage the blade and the drum. Be sure to remove any fibers
found adhering to the blade.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3) Installation of equipment and storage of drum
Avoid installing the equipment where it may be subjected to high temperature, high humidity, chemi-
cals and/or their fumes.
Do not place the drum in a location where it is exposed to direct sunlight or high intensity light such
as near a window. Otherwise the drum will fatigue, and will not produce sufficient image density
immediately after being installed in the equipment.
4) Cleaning the drum
At periodic maintenance calls, wipe the entire surface of the drum clean using the designated clean-
ing cotton. Use sufficiently thick cleaning cotton (dry soft pad) so as not to scratch the drum surface
inadvertently with your fingertips or nails. Also, remove your rings and wristwatch before starting
cleaning work to prevent accidental damage to the drum.
Do not use alcohol, selenium refresher and other organic solvents or silicon oil as they will have an
adverse effect on the drum.
5) Scratches on photoconductive drum surface
If the surface is scratched in such a way that the aluminum substrate is exposed, no copy image will
be produced on this area. In addition, the cleaning blade will be damaged so replacement with a
new drum will be necessary.
6) Collecting used photoconductive drums
Regarding the recovery and disposal of used photoconductive drums, we recommend following the
relevant local regulations or rules.
4.8.3
Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade and transfer belt
cleaning blade
1) Handling precautions
Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition of its
edge:
-
-
-
-
-
-
Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge.
Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft pad.
Do not leave oil (or fingerprints, etc.) on the edge.
Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade.
Do not allow paper fibers or dirt to contact the blade edge.
Do not place the blade near a heat source.
2) Cleaning procedure
Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.
4.8.4
Handling of drum cleaner brush
Do not touch the brush surface with bare hands.
4.8.5
Handling of transfer belt
1) Do not touch the transfer belt surface with bare hands.
2) Prevent oil or other foreign matter from adhering to the transfer belt surface.
3) Do not touch the transfer belt with alcohol or any other organic solvent.
4) Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the transfer belt.
5) When replacing the belt and transfer belt cleaning unit, apply patting powder sufficiently and evenly.
Otherwise, it may reduce the cleaning efficiency.
6) When replacing the transfer belt, clean the drive roller-1 drive roller-2, and tension roller with a sol-
vent such as alcohol, and then attach the transfer belt.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.8.6
Checking and cleaning of fuser belt and pressure roller
1) Handling precautions
Fuser belt
-
-
-
-
Do not touch the fuser belt surface with bare hands.
Prevent oil or other foreign matter from staining the fuser belt surface.
Do not allow alcohol or any other organic solvent to contact with the fuser belt.
Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the fuser belt.
Pressure roller
-
-
Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the pressure roller.
Be careful not to allow any hard object to hit or rub against the pressure roller, or it may be dam-
aged, possibly resulting in poor cleaning.
2) Checking
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Check for stain and damage on the fuser belt and pressure roller, and clean if necessary.
Check the separation guide and fingers and check for chipped tips.
Check the cleaning effect of the cleaning roller.
Check the thermistors for proper contact with the pressure roller.
Check the fused and fixed condition of the toner.
Check the gap between the inlet guide and pressure roller.
Check the fuser belt for proper transportation.
4
Check the pressure roller for proper rotation.
3) Cleaning procedure
When the fuser belt and pressure roller become dirty, they will cause jamming. If this happens, wipe
the surface clean with a suitable cloth. For easier cleaning, clean the belt and roller while they are
still warm.
Note:
Be careful not to rub the fuser belt and pressure roller surface with your nails or hard objects
because it can be easily damaged. Do not use silicone oil on the fuser belt and pressure roller.
4) Checking after the assembly of the fuser belt unit
After the assembly, rotate the fuser belt for a round to confirm that the belt is neither folded nor
scratched.
A folded or scratched belt may be broken when it is in use.
Note:
Never rotate the fuser belt in the reverse direction as it will cause deformation of the thermistor
and discharge brush.
4.8.7
Checking and replacing the oil roller and cleaning roller
1) Handling precautions
Never allow solvents such as paint thinner to touch to the oil/cleaning rollers.
2) Poor cleaning and corrective treatment
Judgment should be made depending on how much toner has been deposited on the fuser belt sur-
face. When its surface is stained with toner, check the oil roller and cleaning roller. If toner is heavily
adhered on the oil/cleaning rollers, it means the cleaning performance is declined and the oil/clean-
ing rollers should be replaced with new ones.
The oil/cleaning rollers are gradually degraded due to subjection to the heat from the fuser belt over
a long period of time. Replace them after the specified number of output pages have been made.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
4 - 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.8.8
Checking and cleaning of discharge brush
1) Handling precautions
Be careful not to bend the end bristle of the brush as it may cause the bad contact with the pressure
roller.
2) Checking
Replace the discharge brush with a new one if toner is stick to it regardless of the number of output
pages, as the performance of the brush may have been deteriorated.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. TROUBLESHOOTING
When any of the PC boards or the HDD requires replacement, refer to “5.3 Replacement of PC Boards
and HDD”.
5.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code
5.1.1
Paper transport jam (paper exit section)
[E010] Jam not reaching the exit sensor
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper on the transport path?
|
È
YES Æ 1) Remove the paper.
NO
Is the paper clinging to the transfer belt entering under the receiving tray?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
È
NO Æ Install the intermediate guide correctly.
YES
Is there any paper jammed in the fuser unit?
|
È
YES Æ 1) Remove the paper.
2) Check if there is any abnormality on the paper transport path.
5
NO
Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN334 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the exit sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Is the registration clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-108/158)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration clutch is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN339 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the registration clutch.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Check the registration roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 1
05/07
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E020] Stop jam at the exit sensor
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper on the transport path?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN334 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the exit sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Check the exit roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 2
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/07
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.2
Paper misfeeding
[E110] ADU misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the registration sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Is the ADU clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-222)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the ADU clutch.
5
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E120] Bypass misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the registration sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Are the bypass feed clutch and bypass feed sensor working?
(Perform the output check: 03-204 and the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the bypass feed clutch is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the bypass feed clutch.
6) Replace the bypass feed sensor.
7) Replace the LGC board.
|
È
YES
Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 4
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E130] Upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the upper drawer feed sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Is the upper drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-201)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed clutch is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the upper drawer feed clutch.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
5
YES
Check the upper drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they
are worn out.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E140] Lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor)
Open the side cover. Is there any paper in front of the lower drawer feed sensor?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the lower drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the lower drawer feed sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Is the lower drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-202)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed clutch is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the lower drawer feed clutch.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Check the lower drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are
worn out.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E150] PFP upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor)
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the PFP upper drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor is discon-
nected.
2) Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is dis-
connected.
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
6) Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
7) Replace the PFP board.
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
YES
Is the PFP upper drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-226)
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed clutch is discon-
nected.
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP
board is disconnected.
5
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
6) Replace the PFP upper drawer feed clutch.
7) Replace the PFP board.
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
YES
Check the PFP upper drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if
they are worn out.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E160] PFP lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor)
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP lower drawer feed sensor?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the PFP lower drawer feed sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed sensor is discon-
nected.
2) Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is dis-
connected.
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
6) Replace the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.
7) Replace the PFP board.
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
YES
Is the PFP lower drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-228)
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed clutch is discon-
nected.
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP
board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
6) Replace the PFP lower drawer feed clutch.
7) Replace the PFP board.
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
YES
Check the PFP lower drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if
they are worn out.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E190] LCF misfeeding (paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor)
Open the LCF side cover. Is there any paper in front of the LCF feed sensor?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the LCF feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the LCF feed sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN104 on the LCF board is dis-
connected.
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
|
|
|
6) Replace the LCF feed sensor.
7) Replace the LCF board.
|
È
8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the LCF feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-209)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the LCF feed clutch is disconnected.
2) Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF
board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
5
|
|
|
6) Replace the LCF feed clutch.
7) Replace the LCF board.
|
È
8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the LCF feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are worn
out.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.3
Paper transport jam
[E200] Upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E210] Lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E300] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E330] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
[E3C0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the registration sensor?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the registration sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Are the upper transport clutches (high/low speed) working?
(Perform the output check: 03-439, 440)
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the upper transport clutches (high/low speed)
are disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN339 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the upper transport clutches (high/low speed).
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and replace them if they are worn out.
2) Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E220] Lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)
[E310] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)
[E340] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)
[E3D0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the upper drawer feed sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Are the lower transport clutches (high/low speed) working?
(Perform the output check: 03-203, 205)
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the lower transport clutches (high/low speed) are
disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the lower transport clutches (high/low speed).
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and replace them if they are worn out.
2) Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E320] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor)
[E350] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor)
[E3E0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor)
Open the side cover. Is there paper in front of the lower drawer feed sensor?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the lower drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the lower drawer feed sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Are the lower transport clutches working? (Perform the output check: 03-203, 205)
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the lower transport clutches (high/low speed) are
disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the lower transport clutches (high/low speed).
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
When the paper fed from the PFP:
Is the PFP transport clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-225)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected.
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP
board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
|
|
|
6) Replace the PFP transport clutch.
7) Replace the PFP board.
È
8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and replace them if they are worn out.
2) Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E360] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor)
Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the PFP upper feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor is discon-
nected.
2) Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is dis-
connected.
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
6) Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
7) Replace the PFP board.
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
YES
Is the PFP transport clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-225)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected.
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP
board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
5
|
|
|
6) Replace the PFP transport clutch.
7) Replace the PFP board.
|
È
8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and replace them if they are worn out.
2) Check the PFP transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E510] ADU transport stop jam
Open the ADU. Is there any paper in front of the ADU entrance sensor?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the ADU entrance sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU entrance sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN214 on the ADU board is dis-
connected.
3) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
|
|
|
6) Replace the ADU entrance sensor.
7) Replace the ADU board.
|
È
8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the exit motor (rotating in reverse) working? (Perform the output check: 03-121/171)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the exit motor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connectors CN437 and CN434 on the DRV board is discon-
nected.
3) Check if the connector CN331 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the DRV board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
|
|
|
6) Replace the exit motor.
7) Replace the DRV board.
|
È
8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the ADU motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-110/160)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU motor is disconnected.
2) Check if any of the connectors CN211, CN212 and CN215 on the ADU
board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
|
|
|
6) Replace the ADU motor.
7) Replace the ADU board.
È
8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the rollers in the ADU and the exit roller of the equipment. Replace them if they are
worn out.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E520] Stop jam in the ADU
Open the ADU. Is there any paper in front of the ADU exit sensor?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the ADU exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU exit sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN213 on the ADU board is dis-
connected.
3) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
|
|
|
6) Replace the ADU exit sensor.
7) Replace the ADU board.
|
È
8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the ADU clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-222)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the ADU clutch.
5
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[EB50] Paper remaining on the transport path due to multiple feeding
When the paper is fed from any of the upper drawer, bypass feed unit or ADU:
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
When the paper is fed from the upper drawer:
Is the upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the upper drawer feed sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
When the paper is fed from the bypass feed unit:
Is the bypass feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the bypass feed sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the bypass feed sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
When the paper is fed from the ADU:
Is the ADU exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU exit sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN213 on the ADU board is dis-
connected.
3) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
|
|
|
6) Replace the ADU exit sensor.
7) Replace the ADU board.
È
8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the registration sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 16
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the paper is fed from any of the lower drawer, PFP or LCF:
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Are the upper/lower drawer feed sensors working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H], /[3]/[G])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the upper/lower drawer feed sensors are discon-
nected.
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the upper/lower drawer feed sensors.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.
[EB60] Paper remaining on the transport path due to multiple feeding
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
5
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the registration sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.4
Other paper jam
[E030] Power-ON jam
Open the cover of the unit/area whose picture is flashing on the control panel.
Is there any paper on the transport path? (Refer to the following table)
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the sensor in the jamming area working?
(Perform the input check: Refer to the following table.)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
NO
Replace the LGC board.
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers.
(If a jam is occurring in the ADU, LCF or PFP, check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area
Registration area
Cover
Jam access cover Registration sensor
Upper drawer feed sensor
Exit sensor
Sensor
Test Mode/Input check
03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H]
03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H]
03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G]
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G]
Exit area
ADU
Fuser cover
ADU
ADU entrance sensor
ADU exit sensor
Feeding area
(equipment)
Side cover
Lower drawer feed sensor
Bypass unit
LCF
PFP
Bypass unit
LCF side cover
PFP side cover
Bypass feed sensor
LCF feed sensor
PFP upper drawer feed sensor
PFP lower drawer feed sensor
Bridge unit transport sensor-1
Bridge unit transport sensor-2
03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G]
03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D]
03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C]
03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[A]
Bridge unit
Bridge unit
[E061] Incorrect paper size setting for upper drawer
[E062] Incorrect paper size setting for lower drawer
[E063] Incorrect paper size setting for PFP upper drawer
[E064] Incorrect paper size setting for PFP lower drawer
[E065] Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray
If any paper remains in the equipment or drawer, remove it. Match the paper size of the
drawer setting and the one in the drawer.
*
Paper size detection is performed at the first sheet of paper when the drawer is opened
or closed, or when the power of the equipment is turned ON.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E090] Image data delay jam
1) Remove the paper remained in front of the registration sensor.
2) Check if the error is cleared by turning the power OFF and then back ON.
3) Check if the connectors connecting the SYS board, SLG board and PLG board are dis-
connected.
4) Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected.
5) Check if the harnesses connecting the SYS board, SLG board and PLG board are open-
circuited.
6) Replace the HDD, SYS board, SLG board and PLG board.
[E550] Paper remaining on the transport path
Open the cover of the unit/area whose picture is flashing on the control panel.
Is there any paper on the transport path?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the sensor in the jamming area working?
(Perform the input check: Refer to the following table)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the sensor.
5
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Replace the LGC board.
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers
(If a jam is occurring in the ADU, LCF or PFP, check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area
Registration area
Cover
Jam access cover Registration sensor
Upper drawer feed sensor
Exit sensor
Sensor
Test Mode/Input check
03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]
03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H]
03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H]
03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G]
03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D]
03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G]
Exit area
ADU
Fuser cover
ADU
ADU entrance sensor
ADU exit sensor
Bypass unit
Feeding area
(equipment)
Bypass unit
Side cover
Bypass feed sensor
Lower drawer feed sensor
LCF
PFP
LCF side cover
PFP side cover
LCF feed sensor
03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G]
03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]
03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D]
03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C]
03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[A]
-
PFP upper drawer feed sensor
PFP lower drawer feed sensor
Bridge unit transport sensor-1
Bridge unit transport sensor-2
Sensors in the finisher
Bridge unit
Finisher
Bridge unit
Finisher door
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.5
Cover open jam
[E400] Jam access cover open
Is the jam access cover open?
È
YES Æ Remove paper if there is any, then shut the cover.
NO
Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON/[1]/[H])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector for 24V power supply is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN335 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Replace the LGC board.
[E410] Front cover open jam
Is the front cover open?
È
YES Æ Shut the cover.
NO
Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON/[1]/[H])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector for 24V power supply is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN335 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the front cover opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[F])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the front cover opening/closing switch is discon-
nected.
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the front cover opening/closing switch.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E420] PFP side cover open jam
Is the PFP side cover open?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the cover.
NO
Is the PFP side cover opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[F])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the PFP side cover opening/closing switch is dis-
connected.
2) Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is dis-
connected.
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
6) Replace the PFP side cover opening/closing switch.
7) Replace the PFP board.
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
YES
1) Replace the PFP board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
5
[E430] ADU open jam
Is the ADU open?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the ADU.
NO
Is the ADU opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[F])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the ADU opening/closing switch is disconnected.
2) Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN217 on the ADU board is dis-
connected.
3) Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
|
|
|
6) Replace the ADU opening/closing switch.
7) Replace the ADU board.
|
È
8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Replace the ADU board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E440] Side cover open jam
Is the side cover open?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the cover.
NO
Is the side door switch working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the side door switch is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the side door switch.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Replace the LGC board.
[E450] LCF side cover open jam
Is the LCF side cover open?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the cover.
NO
Is the LCF side cover opening/closing switch working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[D])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the LCF side cover opening/closing switch is dis-
connected.
2) Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN106 on the LCF board is dis-
connected.
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
6) Replace the LCF side cover opening/closing switch.
7) Replace the LCF board.
8) Replace the LGC board.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
YES
1) Replace the LCF board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E480] Bridge unit open jam
Is the Bridge unit open?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper if there is any, then close the unit.
NO
Is the bridge unit cover opening/closing detection switch working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[B])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the bridge unit cover opening/closing detection
switch is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN353 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the bridge unit cover opening/closing detection switch.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Replace the LGC board.
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.6
RADF jam
[E712] Jam not reaching the original registration sensor
Are the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller stained or worn out?
È
YES Æ Clean the rollers or replace them.
NO
Is the original excessively curled or folded?
È
YES Æ Flatten and set it again.
NO
Is the original registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[H])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the original registration sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN74 on the RADF board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the original registration sensor.
6) Replace the RADF board.
È
YES
Replace the RADF board.
[E713] Cover open jam in the read ready status
Are the RADF jam access cover or front cover opened in read ready status?
È
YES Æ Close the cover
NO
Is the original excessively curled or folded?
È
YES Æ Flatten and set it again.
NO
Is the RADF jam access cover sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[C])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the RADF jam access cover sensor is discon-
nected.
2) Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
|
|
|
|
È
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the RADF jam access cover sensor.
6) Replace the RADF board.
YES
Replace the RADF board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E714] Feed signal reception jam
Is the empty sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[B])
È
YES Æ Clean the rollers or replace them.
NO
Is the original excessively curled or folded?
È
YES Æ Flatten and set it again.
NO
Are the original length sensor and registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[8]/[E], [7]/[H])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the lever of empty sensor is working normally.
2) Check if the connector of the empty sensor is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
circuited.
6) Replace the empty sensor.
7) Replace the RADF board.
È
YES
Replace the RADF board.
[E721] Jam not reaching the read sensor
5
Are the registration roller and read roller stained?
È
YES Æ Clean the rollers.
NO
Is the read sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[G])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the read sensor are disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the read sensor.
6) Replace the RADF board.
È
YES
Replace the RADF board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E722] Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during scanning)
[E723] Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during scanning)
Is the read roller stained?
È
YES Æ Clean the roller.
NO
Are the exit sensor and reverse sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E], [7]/[F])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the exit sensor and reverse sensor are discon-
nected.
2) Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the exit sensor and reverse sensor.
6) Replace the RADF board.
È
YES
Replace the RADF board.
[E724] Stop jam at the registration sensor
Is the registration roller stained?
È
YES Æ Clean the roller.
NO
Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[H])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN74 on the RADF board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the registration sensor.
6) Replace the RADF board.
È
YES
Replace the RADF board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E725] Stop jam at the read sensor
Is the read roller stained?
È
YES Æ Clean the roller.
NO
Is the read sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[G])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the read sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the read sensor.
6) Replace the RADF board.
È
YES
Replace the RADF board.
[E731] Stop jam at the exit sensor
Is the exit roller stained?
È
YES Æ Clean the roller.
NO
Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the exit sensor.
6) Replace the RADF board.
È
YES
Replace the RADF board.
[E860] RADF jam access cover open
Is the RADF jam access cover opened?
È
YES Æ Remove the original, if any, and close the jam access cover.
NO
Is the RADF jam access cover switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[C])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the RADF jam access cover switch is discon-
nected.
2) Check if the connector CN72 on the RADF board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
|
|
|
|
È
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the RADF jam access cover switch.
6) Replace the RADF board.
YES
Replace the RADF board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[E870] RADF open jam
Is the RADF opened?
È
YES Æ Remove the original, if any, and close the RADF.
NO
Is the RADF opening/closing sensor adjusted within the specified range?
È
NO Æ Adjust the RADF opening/closing sensor.
YES
Is the RADF opening/closing sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[D])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the RADF opening/closing sensor is discon-
nected.
2) Check if the connector CN75 on the RADF board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the RADF opening/closing sensor.
6) Replace the RADF board.
È
YES
Replace the RADF board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.7
Finisher jam
[ 1 ] Jam in bridge unit
[E910] Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-1
[E920] Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-1
[E930] Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-2
[E940] Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-2
Is there any paper remaining inside the bridge unit?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Are the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2 working?
(Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C], /[0]/[A])
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2 are
disconnected.
2) Check if the connector J510 of the bridge unit is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector CN353 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
|
|
È
6) Replace the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2.
7) Replace the LGC board.
YES
5
Is the bridge unit gate solenoid working? (Perform the output check: 03-232)
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector J510 of the bridge unit is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN353 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Replace the bridge unit gate solenoid.
|
|
È
5) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Does the transport roller of the bridge unit work when the main motor is rotated?
(Perform the output check: 03-101/151)
È
NO Æ Check the drive system of the equipment and bridge unit.
YES
Check if the rollers in the bridge unit are worn out.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[ 2 ] Paper jam in finisher section
[EA10] Paper transport delay jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open cir-
cuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working normally? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
3) Replace the inlet sensor.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open cir-
cuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
3) Replace the inlet sensor.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[EA20] Paper transport stop jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open cir-
cuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
3) Replace the inlet sensor.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is any of the connectors (J707, J708 and J722B) on the finisher controller PC board discon-
nected?
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor (the inlet sensor
[PI33], the transport path sensor [PI34], the processing tray sensor [PI38]) open circuited?
5
È
YES Æ Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.
NO
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and the processing tray sen-
sor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.
2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
3) Replace the sensors.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[EA30] Power-ON jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open cir-
cuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
3) Replace the inlet sensor.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is any of the connectors J707, J708 and J722B on the finisher controller PC board discon-
nected?
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor (the inlet sensor
[PI33], the transport path sensor [PI34], the processing tray sensor [PI38], open circuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.
NO
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and the processing tray sen-
sor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.
2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
3) Replace the sensors.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[EA40] Door open jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the finisher connected with the equipment?
È
NO Æ Connect the finisher with the equipment.
YES
Is the connector J11 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and joint sensor (S4) open cir-
cuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the joint sensor working properly?
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the joint sensor securely.
2) Replace the joint sensor.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
5
NO
Is either of the covers upper or front of the finisher closed?
È
NO Æ Close the door.
YES
Is any connectors J707 and J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and upper/front cover opening sen-
sors (PI31 and PI32) open circuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the upper/front cover opening sensor working properly?
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the upper/front cover opening sensor securely.
2) Replace the upper/front cover opening sensor.
YES
Is the connector J719 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and front cover switch (MS31) open
circuited?
|
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the front cover switch working properly?
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the front cover switch securely.
2) Replace the front cover switch.
YES
Is the connector J5 on the punch controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and upper door switch (MSW61)
open circuited?
Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and front door switch (MSW62) open
circuited?
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
È
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Are the upper and front door switches working properly?
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the upper and front door switches securely.
2) Replace the upper/front door switches.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[EA50] Stapling jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment or on the sta-
pling tray?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple
sheet slid from the staple case?
È
YES Æ End.
NO
Is the connector J8 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stapling home position sensor
(S17) open circuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the stapling home position sensor working properly?
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the stapling home position sensor securely.
2) Replace the stapling home position sensor.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
5
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment or on the sta-
pling tray?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple
sheet slid from the staple case?
È
YES Æ End.
NO
Is the connector J721B on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and staple home position sensor
(PI40) open circuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the staple home position sensor working properly?
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the staple home position sensor securely.
2) Replace the staple home position sensor.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[EA60] Early arrival jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open cir-
cuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
3) Replace the inlet sensor.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open cir-
cuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
3) Replace the inlet sensor.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[EA70] Stack delivery jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J9 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stack delivery lever home posi-
tion sensor (S8) open circuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the stack delivery lever home position sensor working properly?
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the stack delivery lever home position sensor
securely.
2) Replace the stack delivery lever home position sensor.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[EAF0] Stack return jam
MJ-1022
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and returning roller home position
sensor (S3) open circuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the returning roller home position sensor working properly?
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the returning roller home position sensor
securely.
2) Replace the returning roller home position sensor.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[ 3 ] Paper jam in saddle stitcher section
[EA80] Stapling jam
MJ-1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path or the stapling tray in the finisher, saddle
stitcher section or equipment?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staples
stuck in the stapling unit?
È
YES Æ End.
NO
Is the connector J8 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and stitcher home position
switch (rear: SW5, front: SW7 open circuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Are the stitcher home position switches working properly?
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the stitcher home position switches securely.
2) Replace the stitcher home position switches.
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[EA90] Door open jam
MJ-1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or
equipment?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the saddle stitcher door closed?
È
NO Æ Close the door.
YES
Is either of the connectors J10 or J11 on saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Are the harnesses between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and cover opening sensors
(delivery cover sensor [PI3], inlet cover sensor [PI9]) open circuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is each of the sensors (delivery cover sensor, inlet cover sensor) working properly?
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the each sensor securely.
2) Replace the sensors.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[EAA0] Power-ON jam
MJ-1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or saddle stitcher section?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is any of the connectors J9, J10 and J13 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board discon-
nected?
Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and each sensor (No.1 paper
sensor [PI18], No.2 paper sensor [PI19], No.3 paper sensor [PI20], the vertical path paper sen-
sor [PI17] and the delivery sensor[PI11]) open circuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.
NO
Is each of the sensors (No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, the vertical
path paper sensor, and the delivery sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the
actuator.)
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.
2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
3) Replace the sensors.
È
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[EAB0] Paper transport stop jam
MJ-1024
5
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or
equipment?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J708 on finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor [PI33] open circuited?
Is either of the connectors J9 or J10 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and each sensor (No.1 paper
sensor [PI18], No.2 paper sensor [PI19], No.3 paper sensor [PI20] and the delivery sensor
[PI11]) open circuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.
NO
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper
sensor and the delivery sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.
2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
3) Replace the sensors.
È
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[EAC0] Transport delay jam
MJ-1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or
equipment?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open cir-
cuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the sensor securely.
2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
3) Replace the sensor.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[ 4 ] Paper jam in puncher unit
[E9F0] Punching jam
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
È
YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J605A on the punch controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and punch home position sensor
(PI63) open circuited?
È
YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the punch home position sensor working properly?
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the punch home position sensor securely.
2) Replace the punch home position sensor.
YES
Replace the punch controller PC board.
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[ 5 ] Other paper jam
[EAD0] Print end command time-out jam
Is the main motor rotating normally?
È
NO
1) Replace the SYS board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
[EAE0] Receiving time-out jam
Is the finisher working?
È
YES Æ Replace the finisher controller PC board.
NO
1) Check if the voltage (24V) is being supplied to the finisher.
2) Check the connection of the LGC board and IPC board.
3) Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and finisher I/F connector of the equipment
side is open circuited.
4) Check if the harness connecting the I/F connector of the finisher side and finisher controller
PC board is open circuited.
5) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[EB30] Ready time-out jam
Is there paper in the equipment?
È
NO Æ Replace the LGC board.
YES
Are the IPC board and LGC board properly connected to each other?
È
NO Æ Connect them properly.
YES
Is the harness securely connected to the IPC board?
È
NO Æ Connect the harness properly.
YES
Is any of the connector pins of the harness connecting the equipment and finisher discon-
nected or any of those harnesses open circuited?
È
NO Æ Connect the pin or replace the harness.
YES
1) Replace the IPC board.
2) Replace the LGC board.
3) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.8
Drive system related service call
[C010] Main motor abnormality
Is the main motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-101/151)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector J581 of the main motor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN336 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the main motor board and LGC board
are short circuited or open circuited.
5) Replace the main motor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
1) Check if the PLL lock signal CN336-8 pin output from the LGC board is always level “L”.
2) Check if the voltage supplied to the ASIC input terminal IC40-152 pin is always “L”.
3) Replace the LGC board.
[C020] Developer motor abnormality
Is the developer unit motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-112/162)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector J578 of the developer motor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the developer motor board and LGC
board are short circuited or open circuited.
5) Replace the developer motor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
1) Check if the PLL lock signal CN337-B6 pin output from the LGC board is always level “L”.
2) Check if the voltage supplied to the ASIC input terminal IC40-150 pin is always “L”.
3) Replace the LGC board.
[C030] Transport motor abnormality
Is the transport motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-123/173)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector J582 of the transport motor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor patterns on the transport motor board and LGC
board are short circuited or open circuited.
5) Replace the transport motor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
1) Check if the PLL lock signal CN337-A7 pin output from the LGC board is always level “L”.
2) Check if the voltage supplied to the ASIC input terminal IC40-149 pin is always “L”.
3) Replace the LGC board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.9
Paper feeding system related service call
[C040] PFP motor abnormality
Is the PFP motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-109/159)
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the signal line connector CN503 of the PFP motor is disconnected.
2) Check if the power line connector CN502 of the PFP motor is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector CN246 on the PFP board is disconnected.
4) Check if the signal line connector CN241 on the PFP board is discon-
nected.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5) Check if the power line connector CN242 on the PFP board is discon-
nected.
6) Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected.
7) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
È
8) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board, PFP board and
LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.
9) Replace the PFP motor.
10)Replace the PFP board.
11)Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the LED on the PFP motor board lit without flashing?
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
2) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board, PFP board and
LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the PFP motor.
|
|
|
È
4) Replace the PFP board.
5) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check if the PLL lock signal CN246-8 pin output from the PFP board is always “L” level.
2) Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC5-17 pin is always “L”
level.
3) Replace the PFP board.
4) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[C130] Upper drawer tray abnormality
[C140] Lower drawer tray abnormality
Does the tray go up? (Perform the output check: 03-242, 243)
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
|
È
5) Replace the tray-up motor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the tray-up sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[H], /[6]/[G])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN341 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the slit reaches the sensor.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
6) Replace the tray-up sensor.
7) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board.
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[C150] PFP upper drawer tray abnormality
[C160] PFP lower drawer tray abnormality
Does the tray go up? (Perform the output check: 03-278, 280)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is disconnected.
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP
board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
|
|
|
6) Replace the tray-up motor.
7) Replace the PFP board.
È
8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the tray-up sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[H], /[4]/[H])
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN247 and CN248 on the PFP
board is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
|
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the slit reaches the sensor.
|
5) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
6) Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
7) Replace the tray-up sensor.
8) Replace the PFP board.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
9) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[C180] LCF tray-up motor abnormality
Does the tray move? (Perform the output check: 03-271)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the LCF tray-up motor is disconnected.
2) Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF
board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
|
|
|
6) Replace the LCF tray-up motor.
7) Replace the LCF board.
È
8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Are the LCF tray-up sensor and LCF tray bottom sensor working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[F], /[3]/[A])
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected.
2) Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN104 and CN105 on the LCF
board is disconnected.
|
|
|
|
|
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the slit reaches the sensors.
|
5) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
6) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
7) Replace the sensor.
8) Replace the LCF board.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5
È
9) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[C1A0] LCF end fence motor abnormality
Is the LCF end fence motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-207)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the LCF end fence motor is disconnected.
2) Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF
board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
|
|
|
6) Replace the LCF end fence motor.
7) Replace the LCF board.
È
8) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Are the LCF end fence home/stop position sensors working?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[A], /[5]/[B])
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected.
2) Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN107 on the LCF board is dis-
connected.
|
|
|
|
|
3) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the slit reaches the sensors.
|
5) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
6) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
7) Replace the sensors.
8) Replace the LCF board.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
9) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[C1B0] LCF transport motor abnormality
Is the LCF transport motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-122/172)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector CN112 of the LCF transport motor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN102 on the LCF board is disconnected.
3) Check if the signal line connector CN100 on the LCF board is discon-
nected.
4) Check if the power line connector CN101 on the LCF board is discon-
nected.
5) Check if the connector CN344 on the LGC board is disconnected.
6) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
|
|
7) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board, LCF
board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited.
8) Replace the LCF transport motor.
9) Replace the LCF board.
10)Replace the LGC board.
|
|
|
|
|
È
YES
1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited.
2) Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board, LCF board and LGC
board are short circuited or open circuited.
3) Check if the PLL lock signal CN102-3 pin output from the LCF board is always “L” level.
4) Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC103-17 pin is always
“L” level.
5) Replace the LCF transport motor.
6) Replace the LCF board.
5
7) Replace the LGC board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.10 Scanning system related service call
[C260] Peak detection error
Does the exposure lamp light? (Perform the output check: 03-267)
|
|
|
|
|
YES Æ 1) Check if the connectors on the CCD and SLG boards are disconnected.
2) Check if the shading correction plate is dirty.
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the CCD board is short circuited or open
circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open
|
|
|
|
È
circuited.
5) Replace the lens unit.
6) Replace the SLG board.
NO
1) Check if the connectors of the exposure lamp and inverter are disconnected.
2) Check the SLG board if the connector pin CN21 is disconnected or the harness is short cir-
cuited or open circuited.
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
4) Replace the SLG board.
5) Replace the inverter.
6) Replace the exposure lamp.
[C270] Carriage home position sensor not going OFF within a specified time
Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the power and
check the following items.
Are the carriages slightly moved to the feeding direction?/Are the carriages staying at a posi-
tion other than home position?
È
YES Æ Check if the circuits of the SLG board are abnormal.
NO
1) Check if the connector pin is disconnected or the harness is short circuited or open cir-
cuited.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the SLG board.
[C280] Carriage home position sensor not going ON within a specified time
Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the power and
check the following items.
Do the carriages make a big noise after they arrive at the home position?
|
|
|
YES Æ The carriage home position sensor is not turned ON.
1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
2) Check if the circuits of the SLG board are abnormal.
È
NO
The carriages are stopped at the home position and do not move.
1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are short circuited or open
circuited.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the SLG board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.11 Fuser unit related service call
Note:
Be sure to turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable beforehand when checking the IH control cir-
cuit and IH coil.
The fuser unit itself or the part of the unit remains heated and the capacitors are still charged after a while
the power cable is unplugged. So make sure the unit is cooled down enough before checking.
[C411/C412] Thermistor/heater abnormality at power-ON
1.Check the power voltage
(1) Check if the power voltage is normal.(Is the voltage during the operation ±10% of the rated volt-
age?)
2.Check the thermistors
(1) Check if the connectors are disconnected.
(2) Check if the center and side thermistors (front, rear) are in contact with the surface of the fuser
roller properly?
(3) Check if the harnesses of the center and side thermistors (front, rear) are open circuited.
3. Check the heater
5
(1) Check if the IH coil is broken.
(2) Check if the connector of the IH coil is disconnected.
(3) Check if the thermostat is blown.
(4) Check if the connectors on the IH control board are disconnected (AC input connector and LGC
I/F connectors CN455).
(5) Check if the IH control board is abnormal.
•
Replace the IH control board.
4. Check the LGC board
(1) Check if the connectors CN334 are disconnected.
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
(3) Replace the LGC board.
5. Clear the status counter
After repairing the matter which caused the error [C411/C412], perform the following:
(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(2) Key in "400", then press [START].
(3) Change the current status counter value "1" or "2" to "0", then press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
(to cancel [C411/C412]).
(4) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the equipment enters the normal ready
state.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[C443/C445/C446/C447/C449] Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment
1,2.3. Check the thermistors, Heater and LGC board
Check the above components following the procedures 1, 2 and 3 for [C411/C412].
4. Clear the status counter
Change the current status counter value (08-400) "3", "5" , "6" , "9" , "19" , "21" , "22" , "23" , "24" , "25"
, "27" or "29" to "0" for [C44X], taking the same procedure as that for [C41X].
•
The status counter value is as follows in the following cases.
-
-
-
The error occurred during warming-up: "3", "5" or "6"
The error occurred after the equipment has become ready: "7"
The temperature detected by the center thermistor is 240°C or higher, the temperature
detected by the side thermistor is 250°C or higher or the temperature detected by the edge
thermistor is 270°C or higher: "9", "19", "21", "22", "23", "25", "27" or "29".
The error occurred during printing: "24" or "25"
-
-
-
The error occurred during energy saving: "26" or "27"
A paper jam occurred: "28" or "29"
[C471/472/475] IH power voltage abnormality or IH initial abnormality
1. Check the AC input voltage
Check if the AC input voltage is within the specified range.
(especially when the heater becomes ON after the power is turned ON (the copier is warming up))
2. Check the thermostat
Check if the thermostat is blown.
3. Check the IH control board
(1) Check if the AC input connector on the IH control board, the LGC I/F connectors CN455 is dis-
connected?
(2) Check if the fuse on the IH control board has blown.
(3) Replace the IH control board.
4. Check the LGC board
(1) Check if the connector CN334 are disconnected.
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short- or open-circuited.
(3) Replace the LGC board.
5. Clear the status counter
Change the values "10", "11", "12" of the status counter (08-400) to "0".
[C480] Overheating of IGBT
1. Check the operation of the IH control board cooling fan
Check if the IH control board cooling fan is rotating normally. (Is the connector securely connected?)
2. Check the IH board
(1) Check if the IGBT or IGBT radiation plate is normal. (Is the radiation plate securely attached?)
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
(3) Replace the IH board.
3. Clear the status counter
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Change the values “12”, “15” or “18” of the status counter (08-400) to “0”.
*
•
•
•
The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively.
The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40°C: "12"
The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "15"
The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state: "18"
(When the only one side of IH coil is energized continuously for 15 seconds)
[C490] IH control circuit or IH coil abnormality
1. Check the IH board
(1) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
(2) Replace the IH board.
2. Check the IH coil
(1) Check if the coil is broken or short out.
(2) Replace the IH coil.
3. Clear the status counter
Change the values “13”, “16” or “19” of the status counter (08-400) to “0”.
*
•
•
•
The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively.
The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40°C: "13"
The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "16"
5
The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state: "19"
When the problem is solved, [C470], [C480] and [C490] can be cleared by turning OFF and ON the
main switch so the status counter does not have to be changed to "0".
The value of the status counter remains the same until the next service call overwrites the value.
[C4B0] IGBT overheating abnormality
1. Check the LGC board
(1) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
(2) Check if NVRAM is mounted.
(3) Replace the LGC board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.12 Communication related service call
[C550] RADF I/F error
(1) Check if the harness connecting the RADF board and SLG board is disconnected or open cir-
cuited.
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open circuited.
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
(4) Replace the RADF board.
(5) Replace the SLG board.
[C570] Communication error between Engine-CPU and IPC board
(1) Check if the LGC board and IPC board are connected properly.
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited.
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
(4) Replace the IPC board.
(5) Replace the LGC board.
[C580] Communication error between IPC board and finisher
(1) Check if the specified finisher is attached.
(2) Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and the finisher controller PC board is discon-
nected or open circuited.
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited.
(4) Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is short circuited or open cir-
cuited.
(5) Replace the IPC board.
(6) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[F070] Communication error between System-CPU and Engine-CPU
(1) Check if the harness connecting the SYS board and LGC board is disconnected or open cir-
cuited.
(2) Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board.
(3) Check the version of the engine ROM version on the LGC board.
(4) Replace the SYS board.
(5) Replace the LGC board.
[F110] Communication error between System-CPU and Scanner-CPU
[F111] Scanner response abnormality
(1) Check if the harness connecting the SYS board and SLG board is disconnected or open cir-
cuited.
(2) Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board.
(3) Check the version of the scanner ROM version on the SLG board.
(4) Replace the SYS board.
(5) Replace the SLG board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.13 RADF related service call
No service call for the RADF (MR-3018).
5.1.14 Circuit related service call
[C900] Connection error between the SYS board and the LGC board
(1) Check if the connector CN117 on the SYS board is completely inserted or not disconnected.
(2) Check if the connector CN357 on the LGC board is completely inserted or not disconnected.
(3) Check if the harness connecting the SYS board (CN117) and the LGC board (CN357) is open
circuited.
(4) Check if the conductor pattern on each board is short circuited or open circuited.
(5) Replace the SYS board.
(6) Replace the LGC board.
[C940] Engine-CPU abnormality
Does service call still occur even after turning OFF the main switch then back ON?
È
NO Æ Leave it for a while and see how.
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern between the Engine-CPU and FROM is short circuited
or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board if it frequently occurs.
5
[C950] Memory of the LGC board abnormality, ID abnormality
(1) Check if the connectors CN331 and CN 343 on the SYS board are completely inserted or not dis-
connected.
(2) Check if the connector CN434 on the DRV board is completely inserted or not disconnected.
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on each board is short circuited or open circuited.
(4) Replace the NVRAM.
(5) Replace the LGC board.
(6) Replace the DRV board.
(7) Replace the SYS board.
(8) Ask a specialist for a repair (Abnormal ID).
[C960] Connection error between the LGC board and the DRV board, ID abnormality
(1) Check if the connectors CN331 and CN343 on the LGC board are completely inserted or not dis-
connected.
(2) Check if the connector CN434 on the DRV board is completely inserted or not disconnected.
(3) Check if the harness connecting the DRV board (J434) and the LGC board (CN360) is open cir-
cuited.
(4) Check if the harness connecting the LGC board (CN331) and the high-voltage transformer
(J480) is open circuited.
(5) Check if the conductor pattern on each board is short circuited or open circuited.
(6) Replace the DRV board.
(7) Replace the LGC board.
(8) Ask a specialist for a repair (Abnormal ID).
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[C9E0] Connection error between the SLG board and the SYS board
(1) Check if the connector CN18 of the SLG board is completely inserted or not disconnected.
(2) Check if the connector CN102 of the SYS board is completely inserted or not disconnected.
(3) Check if the harness connecting the SLG board (CN18) and the SYS board (CN102) is open cir-
cuited.
(4) Check if the conductor pattern on each board is short circuited or open circuited.
(5) Replace the SLG board.
(6) Replace the SYS board.
[F090] SRAM abnormality on the SYS board
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
(2) When the message “SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?” is displayed on the LCD, press the
[INITIALIZE] button. (SRAM is cleared.)
(3) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the SYS board.
[F091] NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
(2) When the message “NVRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?” is displayed on the LCD, press the
[INTERRUPT] or [INITIALIZE] button. (NVRAM is initialized.)
(3) Perform the panel calibration (08-692).
Note:
When the NVRAM is initialized, the scanner and image processing related adjustments are also
initialized. Readjust them after the NVRAM initialization.
(4) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the NVRAM on the
SYS board.
[F092] SRAM/NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
(2) When the message “NVRAM/SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?” is displayed on the LCD,
press the [INTERRUPT] or [INITIALIZE] button. (SRAM is cleared and NVRAM is initialized.)
(3) Perform the panel calibration (08-692).
Note:
When the NVRAM is initialized, the scanner and image processing related adjustments are also
initialized. Readjust them after the NVRAM initialization.
(4) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the NVRAM on the
SYS board.
[F350] SLG board abnormality
(1) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
(2) Replace the SLG board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.15 Laser optical unit related service call
[CA10] Polygonal motor abnormality
Is the polygonal motor rotating?
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector CN342 on the LGC board is disconnected.
2) Check if the harness is open circuited or the connector pin is disconnected.
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
4) Replace the laser optical unit.
|
|
È
5) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Is the printed image distorted?
|
|
|
|
|
YES Æ 1) Check if the connector CN342 on the LGC board is almost disconnected.
2) Check if the harness is almost open circuited or the connector pin is almost
disconnected.
3) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the laser unit cooling fan is stopped.
5) Check if the suction area of laser unit cooling fan is plugged up.
6) Replace the laser optical unit.
7) Replace the LGC board.
È
NO
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Check if the units with high-voltage (developer unit, transfer belt unit and 2nd transfer roller
unit) are securely grounded.
5
3) Check if the bias supply joints of the units with high-voltage are securely connected or they
are not stained.
4) Check if the plate in paper transport system is securely grounded.
5) Check if the equipment is grounded.
6) Check if the laser unit cooling fan is stopped.
7) Check if the suction area of laser unit cooling fan is plugged up.
8) Replace the laser optical unit.
9) Replace the LGC board.
[CA20] H-Sync detection error
Is the cable (flexible flat type) between the connector (CN345) on the LGC board and connec-
tor (CN201) on the LDR board open circuited, broken or disconnected?
|
|
|
YES Æ 1) Reconnect the cable.
2) Check if the connector on the LGC board hold the cable securely.
3) Replace the laser optical unit.
È
NO
1) Check if the units with high-voltage (developer unit, transfer belt unit and 2nd transfer roller
unit) are securely grounded.
2) Check if the bias supply joints of the units with high-voltage are securely connected or they
are not stained.
3) Check if the plate in paper transport system is securely grounded.
4) Check if the equipment is grounded.
5) Check if the conductor pattern is short circuited or open circuited.
6) Replace the LGC board.
7) Replace the laser optical unit.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.16 Finisher related service call
[CB20] Delivery motor abnormality
MJ-1022
Rotate the delivery roller by hand. Does it rotate smoothly?
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and delivery motor (M1) correct?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the delivery motor clock sensor (S1) working properly?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
1) Replace the delivery motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CB30] Tray 1/2 shift motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Are the tray 1 shift area sensors 1-3 and tray 2 shift area sensors 1-3 normal?
È
NO Æ Replace the tray 1/2 shift area sensor boards.
YES
Are the wirings between the finisher controller PC board and the tray 1/2 shift motors (M37/
M38) correct?
È
NO Æ Correct the wirings.
YES
Is there any problem with the tray lift mechanism?
È
NO Æ Fix the lift mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the tray 1/2 shift motors.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CB40] Rear aligning plate motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Is the rear aligning plate home position sensor (PI37) normal?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate?
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the rear aligning plate motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CB50] Staple motor abnormality
MJ-1022/1023/1024
Is the wiring between the stapler and finisher controller PC board correct?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
1) Replace the stapler.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CB60] Stapler unit shift motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Is the stapler shift home position sensor (PI40) working normally?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the stapler shift motor (M35) cor-
rect?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the stapler stand motion path?
È
YESÆ Fix the lift mechanism.
NO
1) Replace the stapler shift motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
5
[CB80] Backup RAM data abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Is the problem solved by turning the power of the equipment OFF and ON?
È
YESÆ End.
NO
1) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
2) Replace the punch controller PC board.
[CB90] Paper pushing plate motor abnormality
MJ-1024
Are the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14), paper pushing plate top position
sensor (PI15) and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) working normally?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the paper pushing plate drive mechanism normal?
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the paper pushing plate motor (M8).
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CBA0] Stitch motor (front) abnormality
[CBB0] Stitch motor (rear) abnormality
MJ-1024
Are the front and rear stitchers and their stands installed properly?
È
NO Æ Install them properly.
YES
Are the stitcher home position switches (SW7/SW5) and stitcher motors (M7/M6) on the front
and rear stitchers working normally?
È
NO Æ Replace the front or rear stitcher.
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[CBC0] Alignment motor abnormality
MJ-1024
Is the alignment plate home position sensor (PI5) working normally?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the alignment plate drive mechanism normal?
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the alignment motor (M5).
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[CBD0] Guide motor abnormality
MJ-1024
Is the guide home position sensor (PI13) working normally?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the guide plate drive mechanism normal?
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replacing the guide motor (M3).
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[CBE0] Paper folding motor abnormality
MJ-1024
Are the paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and paper folding home position sensor (PI21)
working normally?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensors.
YES
Is the paper folding roller drive mechanism normal?
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replacing the paper folding motor (M2).
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 60
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CBF0] Paper positioning plate motor abnormality
MJ-1024
Is the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7) working normally?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the paper positioning plate drive mechanism normal?
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replacing the paper positioning plate motor (M4).
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[CC00] Sensor connector abnormality
MJ-1024
Are the guide home position sensor (PI13), paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14)
and paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15) connected to the saddle stitcher controller
PC board?
È
NO Æ Connect them to the board.
YES
Is the wiring between the sensors and the saddle stitcher correct?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
Is 5V DC being supplied from the connector pins J9-7, -10 and -13 on the saddle stitcher con-
troller PC board?
5
È
NO Æ Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
Are the connector pins J9-8, -11 and -14 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board correctly
connected to the ground?
È
NO Æ Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
YES
End.
[CC10] Microswitch abnormality
MJ-1024
Are the front cover switch (MS31), inlet door switch (SW1) and delivery door switch (SW3) nor-
mal?
È
NO Æ Replace the switches.
YES
Measure the voltage between J704-1 (+) and J704-2 (-) on the finisher controller PC board. Is
it 24V?
È
NO Æ Replace the finisher controller PC board.
Is the wiring between J704 on the finisher controller PC board and J1 on the saddle stitcher
controller PC board correct?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CC20] Communication error between finisher and saddle stitcher
MJ-1024
Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power switch of the equipment?
È
YESÆ End.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the saddle stitcher controller PC
board connected?
È
NO Æ Connect the wiring.
YES
1) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
2) Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[CC30] Stack processing motor abnormality
MJ-1022
[Procedure 1]
Is the tension of the drive belt normal?
È
NO Æ Loosen the adjustment screw to adjust its tension.
YES
Does the bushing attached to the returning roller shaft smoothly move up and down?
NO Æ Apply grease on the cut-out part of the front side frame with where the bushing
|
È
contacts.
Is the spring of the returning roller detached?
È
YESÆ Attach the spring.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and stack processing motor (M2) cor-
rect?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the stack delivery lever home position sensor (S8) working properly?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
1) Replacing the stack processing motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[Procedure 2]
Does the bushing attached to the returning roller shaft smoothly move up and down?
NO Æ Apply grease on the cut-out part of the front side frame with where the bushing
|
È
contacts.
YES
Is the spring of the returning roller detached?
È
YESÆ Attach the spring.
NO
Is the tension of the stack processing motor drive belt normal?
È
NO Æ Loosen the adjustment screw to adjust its tension.
YES
Is the returning roller home position sensor (S3) working properly?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
1) Replace the stack processing motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CC40] Swing motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Is the swing unit home position sensor (PI35) normal?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the swing motor (M36) correct?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the swing mechanism normal?
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the swing motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CC50] Horizontal registration motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)
Is the horizontal registration home position sensor (PI61) working normally?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the horizontal registration home position sensor and finisher controller
PC board correct?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
5
YES
Is the horizontal registration mechanism normal?
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the horizontal registration motor (M62).
2) Replace the punch controller PC board.
3) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CC60] Punch motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)
Are the punch home position sensor (PI63) and punch motor clock sensor (PI62) working nor-
mally?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensors.
YES
Is the wiring between the sensors and finisher controller PC board correct?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
Is the punching mechanism normal?
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the punch motor (M61).
2) Replace the punch controller PC board.
3) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CC80] Front jogging motor abnormality/Front aligning plate motor abnormality
MJ-1022 (Front jogging motor abnormality)
Is the front jogging plate home position sensor (S6) working properly?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and front jogging motor (M3) correct?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll?
È
YES Æ Fix it.
NO
1) Replace the front jogging motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024 (Front aligning plate motor abnormality)
Is the front aligning plate home position sensor (PI36) normal?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the front aligning plate motor (M33)
correct?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate?
È
NO Æ Fix the mechanism.
YES
1) Replace the front aligning plate motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CC90] Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality
MJ-1022
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and upper stack tray lift motor (M5) cor-
rect?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
Are the front and rear sides of the upper stack tray leveled?
È
NO Æ Level them.
YES
Is the upper stack tray lift motor clock sensor (S19) working properly?
È
NO Æ Level them.
YES
Is the stack tray paper height sensor (S10) working properly?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
Are the upper stack tray upper limit sensor (S25), upper stack tray full sensor (S23) and stack
processing safety switch (S26) working properly?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board.
YES
Does the voltage between the pins J14-1 and -2 on the finisher controller PC board become
24V when the upper stack tray lift motor starts rotating?
È
NO Æ Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
5
Check the wiring between the upper stack tray lift motor and finisher controller PC board. If
there is no problem, replace the upper stack tray lift motor.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CCA0] Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality
MJ-1022
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and lower stack tray lift motor (M7) cor-
rect?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
Are the front and rear sides of the lower stack tray leveled?
È
NO Æ Level them.
YES
Is the lower stack tray lift motor clock sensor (S9) working properly?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the stack tray paper height sensor (S10) working properly?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
Are the lower stack tray upper limit sensor (S13) and lower stack tray full sensor (S23) working
properly?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board.
YES
Does the voltage between the pins J3-1 and -2 on the finisher controller PC board become
24V when the lower stack tray lift motor starts rotating?
È
NO Æ Replace the finisher controller PC board.
YES
Check the wiring between the upper stack tray lift motor and finisher controller PC board. If
there is no problem, replace the motor.
[CCB0] Rear jogging motor abnormality
MJ-1022
Is the rear jogging plate home position sensor (S7) working properly?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and rear jogging motor (M4) correct?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll?
È
YESÆ Fix it.
NO
1) Replace the rear jogging motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CCD0] Stack ejection motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Is the shutter home position sensor (PI45) normal?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
Are the wirings between the finisher controller PC board and the stack ejection motor (M32)/
shutter clutch (CL31) correct?
È
NO Æ Correct the wirings.
YES
Is there any problem with the shutter mechanism?
È
YESÆ Fix the shutter mechanism.
NO
1) Replace the stack ejection motor and shutter clutch.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CCE0] Rear end assist motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Is the rear end assist guide home position sensor (PI39) normal?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the rear end assist motor (M39) cor-
rect?
5
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any problem with the rear end assist mechanism?
È
YESÆ Fix the rear end assist mechanism.
NO
1) Replace the rear end assist motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CCF0] Gear change motor abnormality
MJ-1023/1024
Is the gear change home position sensor (PI49) normal?
È
NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the gear change motor (M40) cor-
rect?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
Is there any problem with the gear change mechanism?
È
YESÆ Fix the gear change mechanism.
NO
1) Replace the gear change motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CE00] Communication error between finisher and puncher unit
MJ-1023/1024 (When MJ-6004 is installed)
Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power of the equipment?
È
YESÆ End.
NO
Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and punch controller PC board correct?
È
NO Æ Correct the wiring.
YES
1) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
2) Replace the punch controller PC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.17 Image control related service call
(1) Based on the procedure of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] described below, check the status and
take appropriate actions. And then perform the forced performing of image quality closed-loop
control according to the following procedure.
1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power.
2. Key in [395], and then press the [START] button. Confirm that the image quality control
has finished normally.
(2) After confirming the items in (1), clear the abnormal detection counter of image quality control.
1. While pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously, turn ON the power.
2. Key in [573], and then press the [START] button.
3. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER]
or [INTERRUPT] button.
4. Key in [574], and then press the [START] button.
5. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER]
or [INTERRUPT] button.
6. Key in [575], and then press the [START] button.
7. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER]
or [INTERRUPT] button.
5
8. Key in [576], and then press the [START] button.
9. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER]
or [INTERRUPT] button.
[CE10] Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level)
Is the connector of the image quality sensor, or the connector CN338 on the LGC board dis-
connected?
Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor, or the harness between
the LGC board and the switching power supply open circuited?
È
YESÆ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the output voltage from the 12V-power supply normal?
È
NO Æ Check the power supply system and replace the switching power supply.
YES
1) Replace the image quality sensor.
2) Replace the LGC board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CE20] Image quality sensor abnormality (no pattern level)
1) Check if the transfer belt or transfer belt unit are securely installed.
2) Check for any abnormal stain caused by poor cleaning, large flaw or break on the transfer belt sur-
face.
3) Check if the drum and the transfer belt are rotating. If any abnormality is found, correct any mechan-
ical problem.
Is the connectors CN338 on the LGC board disconnected?
Is the connector of the image quality sensor disconnected or the surface of the sensor
stained?
Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor open circuited?
Is the shutter of image quality sensor opening and closing normally?
Is the shutter damaged?
|
|
|
|
|
YESÆ <Procedure>
1) Take off the transfer belt unit so that the image quality sensor unit can be
easily seen.
2) While pressing the digital keys [0] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power
ON.
|
|
|
|
|
3) Key in “430”.
4) The shutter is opened and closed repeatedly by pressing the [START] but-
ton repeatedly.
|
|
|
|
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. Clean the sensor.
Replace the shutter if it is damaged.
Replace the shutter solenoid if its operation is defective.
È
NO
Is the output voltage from the 12V-power supply normal?
|
È
NO Æ Check the power supply system, and replace the switching power supply.
YES
1) Replace the image quality sensor.
2) Replace the LGC board.
[CE40] Image quality control test pattern abnormality
(1) Use "Image quality control abnormal detection counter Y to K display/0 clearing (08-573 to 576)"
to check the abnormal occurring condition for each color.
(2) Check “Output value display of image quality sensor / Low-density pattern (05-391-0 to 3)” to
check if the low-density pattern abnormality occurs for each color. The values under 320 for Y, M
and C, and under 220 for K are defined as low-density pattern abnormality.
|
|
|
|
|
È
320 or above (Y, M and C)
220 or above (K)
Under 320 (Y, M and C)
Under 220 (K)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Low-density pattern abnormality
Check the transfer belt. If the cleaning is poor, correct the
transfer belt around its cleaning blade.
|
È
|
È
To (9)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) Check “Output value display of image quality sensor / High-density pattern (05-390-0 to 3)” to
check if the high-density pattern abnormality occurs for each color and identify the color which
pattern is abnormal. If the value is 630 or above, it is defined as high-density pattern abnormality.
(4) Set the values of “Image quality closed-loop control / Contrast voltage (08-556)” and “Image
quality closed-loop control / Laser power (08-557)” to “0” (Invalid).
(5) Perform “Enforced performing of image quality open-loop control (05-394)”.
(6) Output the image quality control test pattern (04-270) more than one time and check the patch of
the color identified in step (3) to see if the image is abnormal (Note).
|
|
|
È
Normal
Abnormal
|
|
|
|
Correct the items related to the image.
|
È
To (9)
È
(7) Replace the image quality sensor.
(8) Set the values of “Image quality closed-loop control / Contrast voltage (08-556)” and “Image
quality closed-loop control / Laser power (08-557)” to “1” (Valid).
(9) Perform “Enforced performing of image quality open-loop control (05-394)” and make sure it is
completed normally. (Error [CE40] does not appear.) Then perform “Automatic gamma adjust-
ment“ ( Chapter 3.5.1 and 3.6.1).
5
(10) Clear all "Image quality control abnormal detection counter Y to K display/0 clearing (08-573 to
576)".
Note:
Abnormal image:
Blank print, Solid print, White banding, Color banding, White spots, Poor transfer, Uneven image
density, Faded image (low density), Uneven light distribution, Blotched image.
[CE50] Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality
Is the connector CN333 on the LGC board or the connector of the temperature/humidity sen-
sor disconnected?
Is the harness between the LGC board and the temperature/humidity sensor disconnected ?
È
YESÆ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
1) Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
2) Replace the LGC board.
[CE90] Drum thermistor abnormality
Is the connector CN333 on the LGC board, or the connector of the drum thermistor discon-
nected?
Is the harness between the LGC board and the drum thermistor disconnected?
È
YESÆ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
1) Replace the drum thermistor.
2) Replace the LGC board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.18 Copy process related service call
[C360] Charger cleaner motor abnormality
(1) Check if the main charger is installed normally.
(2) Check if the charger wire is broken.
(3) Check if any of the connector pins of the charger cleaner front/rear position detection switch is
disconnected.
(4) Check if the cleaning pads are damaged or removed.
(5) Check if any of the connector pins of the charger cleaner motor is disconnected.
(6) Replace the charger cleaner motor.
(7) Replace the LGC board.
[C970] High-voltage transformer abnormality
(1) Is the main charger installed securely?
(2) Check if the spring of high-voltage supply contact point is deformed.
(3) Check if the charger wire is broken or the main charger grid is deformed.
(4) Check if any foreign matter is on the charger wire or main charger grid.
[CEA0] Revolver home position detection abnormality
Is the revolver home position sensor working properly?
(Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[C])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector or joint connector of the revolver home position sen-
sor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN331 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are
open circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the revolver home position sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CEB0] Black developer unit lifting movement abnormality
Check the timing of the black developer lifting clutch (stop position), and adjust it if it deviates.
(
È
Is the black developer lifting clutch working properly? (Perform the output check: 03-433)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the black developer lifting clutch is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN339 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are
open circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the black developer lifting clutch.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Are the black developer contact position detection sensor and black developer contact timing
detection sensor working properly? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[C], /[1]/[B]
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the black developer contact position detection
sensor or black developer contact timing detection sensor are discon-
nected.
2) Check if the connector CN333 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are
open circuited.
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5
|
|
|
5) Replace the black developer contact position detection sensor and black
developer contact timing detection sensor.
|
È
6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 73
05/07
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CEC0] 2nd transfer roller position detection abnormality
Is the 2nd transfer roller contact clutch working properly? (Perform the output check: 03-435)
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector or joint connectors of the 2nd transfer contact clutch
are disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are
open circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the 2nd transfer roller contact clutch.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Is the 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor working properly?
(Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[A])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector or joint connectors of the 2nd transfer roller position
detection sensor are disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are
open circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CEE0] Transfer belt position detection abnormality (Normal speed)
[CEE1] Transfer belt position detection abnormality (When decelerating)
If the error [CEE0] has occurred, check the transfer belt home position sensor-1. If the error [CEE1] has
occurred, check the transfer belt home position sensor-2.
Is there any stain or scratch on the reflection tape inside the transfer belt?
YES Æ Clean the transfer belt or replace it.
|
È
Replace the cleaning pad if it is excessively stained.
NO
Are the transfer belt home position sensors-1 and -2 stained?
È
YES Æ Clean them.
NO
Are the transfer belt home position sensors-1 and -2 working properly?
(Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[H])
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the transfer belt home posi-
tion sensors-1 and -2 are disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN361 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are
open circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the transfer belt home position sensor-1 and -2.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
5
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board.
[CEF0] Revolver motor abnormality
Is the revolver motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-450)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the revolver motor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connectors CN435 and CN434 on the DRV board are discon-
nected.
3) Check if the connector CN331 on the LGC board is disconnected.
4) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open cir-
cuited.
5) Check if the conductor patterns on the DRV board and LGC board are short
circuited or open circuited.
|
|
|
6) Replace the revolver motor.
7) Replace the DRV board and LGC board.
È
YES
1) Check if the teeth of the revolver motor gear or the revolver unit gear do not get chipped or
cracked.
2) Check if the conductor patterns on the DRV board and LGC board are short circuited or
open circuited.
3) Replace the DRV board and LGC board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.19 Toner density control related service call
[CF20] Toner density detection voltage abnormality
(1) Specify the developer unit with the abnormality by checking the setting values of 08-824-0 to 08-
824-2. (When the value is “1”, an abnormality occurs.)
(2) Correct the defective section of the unit specified in (1) with the following procedure.
Is the developer material transported properly?
Is the form of magnetic brush is normal?
|
|
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Check if the amount of the developer material is normal or any foreign matter
is mixed in.
2) Correct the transport mechanism of developer material.
3) Check the polar position and correct if necessary.
YES
Is the color auto-toner sensor stained?
È
YES Æ Clean it.
NO
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally?
(Perform the output check: 03-125/175)
Is the color auto-toner sensor working?
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor
shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open cir-
cuited.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
4) Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid.
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
6) Replace the LGC board.
7) Replace the color auto-toner sensor and perform “Enforced correction of
color auto-toner sensor light amount (05-208)”.
YES
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter opening position correct?
(Perform the output check: 03-125/175)
|
|
È
NO Æ Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the sensor holder will touch and
face the positioning component when opening the shutter.
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board.
(3) When the correction is completed, reset the values of 08-824-0 to 08-824-2 from “1” to “0” to
clear the abnormality.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CF30] Reference plate detection voltage abnormality
Are the reference plate and color auto-toner sensor stained?
È
YESÆ Clean them.
NO
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally?
(Perform the output check: 03-125/175)
Is the color auto-toner sensor working?
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor
shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
circuited.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
4) Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid.
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
6) Replace the LGC board.
7) Replace the color auto-toner sensor and perform “Enforced correction of
color auto-toner sensor light amount (05-208)”.
YES
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter closing position correct?
(Perform the output check: 03-125/175)
|
|
È
NO Æ Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the gap between the sensor
holder and stopper will be 1.0 mm when closing the shutter.
5
YES
1) Replace the LGC board.
2) Replace the reference plate and perform “Initialization of color auto-toner sensor light
amount correction target value (05-207)”.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CF40] Light amount correction voltage abnormality
(1) Specify the developer unit with the abnormality by checking the setting values of 08-823-0 to 08-
823-2. (When the value is “1”, an abnormality occurs.)
(2) Correct the defective section of the unit specified in (1) with the following procedure.
Is the developer unit inserted properly?
È
NO Æ Insert it properly.
YES
Is the developer material transported properly?
Is the form of magnetic brush is normal?
|
|
|
|
È
NO Æ 1) Check if the amount of the developer material is normal or any foreign matter
is mixed in.
2) Correct the transport mechanism of developer material.
3) Check the polar position and correct if necessary.
YES
Is the color auto-toner sensor stained?
È
YES Æ Clean it.
NO
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally?
(Perform the output check: 03-125/175)
Is the color auto-toner sensor working?
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor
shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open cir-
cuited.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
È
4) Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid.
5) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
6) Replace the LGC board.
7) Replace the color auto-toner sensor and perform “Enforced correction of
color auto-toner sensor light amount (05-208)”.
YES
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter opening position correct?
(Perform the output check: 03-125/175)
|
|
È
NO Æ Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the sensor holder will touch and
face the positioning component when opening the shutter.
YES
1) Replace the LGC board.
2) Replace the reference plate and perform “Initialization of color auto-toner sensor light
amount correction target value (05-207)”.
(3) When the correction is completed, reset the values of 08-823-0 to 08-823-2 from “1” to “0” to
clear the abnormality.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[CF50] Color auto-toner sensor abnormality
Are the connector of color auto-toner sensor, joint connector and connector CN356 on the LGC
board connected normally?
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Reconnect the connectors.
2) Correct or replace if the connector pins are disconnected or harnesses are
open circuited.
È
YES
Are the color auto-toner sensor and reference plate stained?
È
YES Æ Clean them.
NO
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally?
(Perform the output check: 03-125/175)
|
|
|
|
|
NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor
shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected.
2) Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected.
3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open cir-
cuited.
|
|
|
|
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
circuited.
5) Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid.
6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter closing position correct?
(Perform the output check: 03-125/175)
5
|
|
È
NO Æ Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the gap between the sensor holder
and stopper will be 1.0 mm when closing the shutter.
YES
1) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
2) Replace the LGC board.
3) Replace the reference plate and perform “Initialization of color auto-toner sensor light
amount correction target value (05-207)”.
4) Replace the color auto-toner sensor and perform “Enforced correction of color auto-toner
sensor light amount (05-208)”.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.20 Other service call
[F100] HDD format error
(1) Check if the HDD is mounted.
(2) Check if the specified HDD is mounted.
(3) Check if the connector pins of the HDD are bent.
(4) Check if the connectors CN112, CN113 on the SYS board is disconnected.
(5) Replace the harness.
(6) Format the HDD. (Key in "2" at 08-690.)
(7) Replace the HDD.
(8) Replace the SYS board.
[F101] HDD unmounted
[F102] HDD start error
[F103] HDD transfer time-out
[F104] HDD data error
[F105] HDD other error
(1) Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected.
(2) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are open circuited.
(3) Perform the bad sector check (08-694). If the check result is OK, recover the data in the HDD. If
the check result is failed, replace the HDD.
(4) Replace the SYS board.
[F106] Point and Print partition damage
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
(2) Key in “662” and press the [START] button. (Partition clearing is performed.)
(3) Restart the equipment.
(4) Access TopAccess. Click the [Administration] tab, and then click the Maintenance Menu to open.
Then install the “Point and Print” driver.
[F107] / SHR partition damage
Initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).
[F108] /SHA partition damage
Initialize the shared folder using the Setting Mode (08-667).
[F120] Database abnormality
(1) Rebuild the databases. (Perform 08-684.)
(2) If the error is not recovered, initialize the HDD. (Key in “2” at 08-690.)
*
When “Rebuilding all databases (08-684)” is performed, all data in the Address Book and Mail-
box are deleted. Make sure to back up these data in advance of rebuilding and restore the data
after rebuilding.
[F130] Invalid MAC address
Compare the serial number of the equipment with a number displayed in 08-995. If they are different,
enter the correct serial number at 08-995.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[F200] Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is taken off
Clear the service call “F200”. (Key in “0” at 08-633.)
*
When the Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is taken off from the equipment, the service call “F200”
occurs.
5.1.21 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function
Notes:
1. When initializing the Electronic Filing (Setting Mode (08-666)), all data in the Electronic
Filing are erased. Back up the data in the Electronic Filing by using the Electronic Filing
Function of TopAccess before the initialization.
2. When initializing the shared folder (Setting Mode (08-667)), all data in the shared folder
are erased. Back up the data in the shared folder by using Explorer before the initializa-
tion.
3. When formatting the HDD (Setting Mode (08-690)), all data in the shared folder, Electronic
Filing, Address Book, template, etc. are erased. Back up these data before the initializa-
tion. Note that some of data cannot be backed up ( Page 5-1).
[ 1 ] Internet FAX related error
[1C10] System access abnormality
[1C32] File deletion failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
5
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08-
690).
[1C11] Insufficient memory
When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[1C12] Message reception error
[1C13] Message transmission error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[1C14] Invalid parameter
When a template is used, form the template again.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[1C15] Exceeding file capacity
Reset and extend the "Maximum send to E-mail/iFAX size" or reduce the number of pages and perform
the job again.
[1C20] System management module access abnormality
[1C21] Job control module access abnormality
[1C22] Job control module access abnormality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 81
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[1C30] Directory creation failure
[1C31] File creation failure
[1C33] File access failure
Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[1C40] Image conversion abnormality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
[1C60] HDD full failure during processing
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[1C61] Address Book reading failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.
[1C62] Memory acquiring failure
Check if there is any job being performed and perform the job in error again.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
[1C63] Terminal IP address unset
Reset the Terminal IP address.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[1C64] Terminal mail address unset
Reset the Terminal mail address.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[1C65] SMTP address unset
Reset the SMTP address and perform the job.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[1C66] Server time-out error
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
[1C67] NIC time-out error
[1C68] NIC access error
[1C6D] System error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the SYS board.
[1C69] SMTP server connection error
Reset the login name or password of SMTP server and perform the job again.
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
[1C6A] HOST NAME error
Check if there is an illegal character in the device name.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate device name.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 82
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[1C6B] Terminal mail address error
Check if there is an illegal character in the Terminal mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Terminal mail address, then perform the job
again.
[1C6C] Destination mail address error
Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address, then perform the job
again.
[1C70] SMTP client OFF
Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again.
[1C71] SMTP authentication ERROR
Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password are correct, then perform authenti-
cation again.
[1C72] POP Before SMTP ERROR
Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct, then perform authentica-
tion again.
[1C80] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Reset the "Received InternetFax Forward".
5
[1C81] Onramp Gateway transmission failure
Reset the mail box.
[1C82] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received
Reset the "Received Fax Forward".
[1CC1] Power failure
Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.
Check if the power voltage is unstable.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[ 2 ] RFC related error
[2500] HOST NAME error (RFC: 500) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 500) / Terminal mail
address error (RFC: 500)
[2501] HOST NAME error (RFC: 501) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 501) / Terminal mail
address error (RFC: 501)
Check if the Terminal mail address and Destination mail address are correct.
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2503] Destination mail address error (RFC: 503)
[2504] HOST NAME error (RFC: 504)
[2551] Destination mail address error (RFC: 551)
Check if the mail server is operating properly.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the SYS board.
[2550] Destination mail address error (RFC: 550)
Check the state of the mail box in the mail server.
[2552] Terminal/Destination mail address error (RFC: 552)
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the NIC board.
[2553] Destination mail address error (RFC: 553)
Check if there is an illegal character in the mail box in the mail server.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[ 3 ] Electronic Filing related error
[2B10] No applicable job error in Job control module
[2B11] JOB status abnormality
[2B20] File library function error
[2B30] Insufficient disk space in BOX partition
[2BC0] Fatal failure occurred
[2BC1] System management module resource acquiring failure
Erase some data in the Electronic Filing and perform the job in error again (in case of [2B30]).
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
[2B50] Image library error
[2B90] Insufficient memory capacity
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the main memory.
Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-
666).
[2B31] Status of specified Electronic Filing or folder is undefined or being created/deleted
Check if the specified Electronic Filing or folder exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)
Delete the specified Electronic Filing or folder.
Perform the job in error again.
If the specified Electronic Filing or folder can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Set-
ting Mode (08-666).
5
[2B32] Electronic Filing printing failure: Specified document can not be printed because of cli-
ent's access (being edited, etc.)
Check if the specified document exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)
Delete the specified document.
Perform the job in error again.
If the specified document can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-
666).
[2B51] List library error
Check if the Function List can be printed out.
If it can be printed out, perform the job in error again.
If it can not be printed out, replace the main memory.
If the recovery is still not completed, perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
[2BA0] Invalid Box password
Check if the password is correct.
Reset the password.
When this error occurs when printing the data in the Electronic Filing, perform the printing with the
administrator's password.
If the recovery is still not completed or in case of invalid password for the operation other than printing
(opening the file, etc.), initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).
[2BB1] Power failure
[2BD0] Power failure occurred during restoring of Electronic Filing
Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.
Check if the power voltage is unstable.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[2BE0] Machine parameter reading error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2BF0] Exceeding maximum number of pages
Reduce the number of inserting pages and perform the job again.
[2BF1] Exceeding maximum number of documents
Backup the documents in the box or folder to PC or delete them.
[2BF2] Exceeding maximum number of folders
Backup the folders in the box or folder to PC or delete them.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 86
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[ 4 ] E-mail related error
[2C10] System access abnormality
[2C32] File deletion failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08-
690).
[2C11] Insufficient memory
When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2C12] Message reception error
[2C13] Message transmission error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2C14] Invalid parameter
When a template is used, form the template again.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2C15] Exceeding file capacity
Reset and extend the "Maximum send to E-mail/iFAX size" or reduce the number of pages and perform
the job again.
5
[2C20] System management module access abnormality
[2C21] Job control module access abnormality
[2C22] Job control module access abnormality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
[2C30] Directory creation failure
[2C31] File creation failure
[2C33] File access failure
Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[2C40] Image conversion abnormality
[2C62] Memory acquiring failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
[2C60] HDD full failure during processing
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[2C61] Address Book reading failure
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.
[2C63] Terminal IP address unset
Reset the Terminal IP address.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[2C64] Terminal mail address unset
Reset the Terminal mail address.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2C65] SMTP address unset
Reset the SMTP address and perform the job.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2C66] Server time-out error
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
[2C67] NIC time-out error
[2C68] NIC access error
[2C6D] NIC system error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, replace the SYS board.
[2C69] SMTP server connection error
Reset the login name and password of SMTP server and perform the job again.
Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
[2C6A] HOST NAME error (No RFC error)
Check if there is an illegal character in the device name.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate device name.
[2C6B] Terminal mail address error
Check if there is an illegal character in the Terminal mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Terminal mail address, then perform the job
again.
[2C6C] Destination mail address error (No RFC error)
Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address.
Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address, then perform the job
again.
[2C70] SMTP client OFF
Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again.
[2C71] SMTP authentication ERROR
Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password are correct, then perform authenti-
cation again.
[2C72] POP Before SMTP ERROR
Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct, then perform authentica-
tion again.
[2C80] E-mail transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Reset the "Received InternetFax Forward".
[2C81] Process failure of FAX job received
Reset the setting of the mail box or "Received InternetFax Forward".
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[2CC1] Power failure
Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.
Check if the power voltage is unstable.
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[ 5 ] File sharing related error
[2D10] System access abnormality
[2D32] File deletion failure
[2DA6] File deletion failure
[2DA7] Resource acquiring failure
Delete some files in the shared folder by using Explorer because of automatic/manual file deletion fail-
ure (in case of [2DA6])
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08-
690).
[2D11] Insufficient memory
When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2D12] Message reception error
[2D13] Message transmission error
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2D14] [2D61] Invalid parameter
When a template is used, form the template again.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2D15] Exceeding document number
Delete some documents in the folder, and then perform the job in error again.
[2D20] System management module access abnormality
[2D21] Job control module access abnormality
[2D22] Job control module access abnormality
[2D60] File library access abnormality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
[2D30] Directory creation failure
[2D31] File creation failure
[2D33] File access failure
Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[2D40] Image conversion abnormality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then initialize the shared folder using
the Setting Mode (08-667).
[2D62] File server connection error
Check the IP address or path of the server.
Check if the server is operating properly.
[2D63] Invalid network path
Check the network path.
If the path is correct, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[2D64] Login failure
Reset the login name and password. Perform the job.
Check if the account of the server is properly set up.
[2D65] Exceeding documents in folder: Creating new document is failed
Delete some documents in the folder.
[2D66] HDD full failure during processing
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[2D67] FTP service not available
Check if the setting of FTP service is valid.
[2D68] File sharing service not available
Check if the setting of SMB is valid.
[2DC1] Power failure
Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely.
Check if the power voltage is unstable.
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[ 6 ] E-mail reception related error
[3A10] [3A11] [3A12] E-mail MIME error
The format of the mail is not corresponding to MIME 1.0.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail in the format corresponding to MIME 1.0.
[3A20] [3A21] [3A22] E-mail analysis error
[3B10] [3B11] [3B12] E-mail format error
[3B40] [3B41] [3B42] E-mail decode error
These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the mail.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3A30] Partial mail time-out error
The partial mail is not received in a specified period of time.
Request the sender to retransmit the partial mail, or set the time-out period of the partial mail longer.
[3A40] Partial mail related error
The format of the partial mail is not corresponding to this equipment.
Request the sender to remake and retransmit the partial mail in RFC2046 format.
[3A50] [3A51] [3A52] Insufficient HDD capacity error
[3A60] [3A61] [3A62] Warning of insufficient HDD capacity
These errors occur when the HDD capacity is not sufficient for a temporary concentration of the jobs,
etc.
Request the sender to retransmit after a certain period of time, or divide the mail into more than one.
Insufficient HDD capacity error also occurs when printing is disabled for no printing paper.
In this case, supply the printing paper.
[3A70] Warning of partial mail interruption
This error occurs when the partial mail reception setting becomes OFF during the partial mail reception.
Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3A80] [3A81] [3A82] Partial mail reception setting OFF
Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3B20] [3B21] [3B22] Content-Type error
The format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX).
Request the sender to retransmit the file in TIFF-FX.
[3B30] [3B31] [3B32] Charset error
These errors occur when the standard of the Charset is other than ISO-8559-1 or ISO-8559-2.
Request the sender to reformat the Charset into either of the standards described above and then
retransmit the mail.
[3C10] [3C11] [3C12] [3C13] TIFF analysis error
These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the mail, or
when the format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX).
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3C20] [3C21] [3C22] TIFF compression error
The compression method of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: MH/MR/
MMR/JBIG)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable compression method.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[3C30] [3C31] [3C32] TIFF resolution error
The resolution of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: 200 x 100, 200 x 200,
200 x 400, 400 x 400, 300 x 300 or equivalent)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable resolution.
[3C40] [3C41] [3C42] TIFF paper size error
The paper size of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: A4, B4, A3, B5, LT, LG,
LD or ST)
Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable paper size.
[3C50] [3C51] [3C52] Offramp destination error
These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is incorrect.
Request the sender to correct the FAX number of offramp destination and then retransmit the mail.
[3C60] [3C61] [3C62] Offramp security error
These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is not on the Address Book.
Check if the FAX number of the offramp destination is correctly entered or the number has not been
changed.
[3C70] Power failure error
Check if the mail is recovered after turning ON the power again.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail if it is not recovered.
[3D10] Destination address error
5
Check if the setting of the server or DNS is correct. Correct if any of the setting is incorrect.
When the content of the setting is correct, confirm the sender if the destination is correct.
[3D20] Offramp destination limitation error
Inform the sender that the transfer of the FAX data over 40 is not supported.
[3D30] FAX board error
This error occurs when the FAX board is not installed or the FAX board has an abnormality.
Check if the FAX board is correctly connected.
[3E10] POP3 server connection error
Check if the IP address or domain name of the POP3 server set for this equipment is correct, or check
if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly.
[3E20] POP3 server connection time-out error
Check if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly.
Check if the LAN cable is correctly connected.
[3E30] POP3 login error
Check if the POP3 server login name and password set for this equipment are correct.
[3E40] POP3 Login Type ERROR
Check that the login type (Auto, POP3 or APOP) to the POP3 server is correct.
[3F00] [3F10] [3F20] [3F30] [3F40] File I/O error
These errors occur when the mail data is not transferred properly to the HDD.
Request the sender to retransmit the mail.
Replace the HDD if the error still occurs after retransmission.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[402F] Page memory size error
This error occurs when the expansion memory is not installed or the expansion memory has an abnor-
mality.
Check if the expansion memory exists or not, or it is correctly installed.
[4031] HDD full failure during printing
Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again.
Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[4032] Private-print-only error
Select "Private", and then perform the printing again.
[4033] Printing data storing limitation error
Select "Print", and then perform the printing again.
[4034] e-Filing storing limitation error
Select "Print", and then perform the printing again.
[4035] Local file storing limitation error
Select "Remote" (SMB/FTP) for the destination of the file to save.
[4036] User authentication error
Perform the authentication or register as a user, and then perform the printing again.
[A221] Print job cancellation
This message appears when deleting the job on the screen.
[A222] Print job power failure
When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs.
If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[A290] Limit over error (black)
[A291] Limit over error (black)
[A292] Limit over error (black)
Clear the limit counter (black).
[A2A0] Limit over error (color)
[A2A1] Limit over error (color)
[A2A2] Limit over error (color)
Clear the limit counter (color).
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2 Troubleshooting for the Image
1) Color deviation
<Symptoms>
Original mode
Location
Phenomena
All modes
Color blurred in outline of white text or Color
illustration on a colored background
deviationÆ
Text Mode
Outline in black text on a colored
White voidÆ
Text/Photo Mode background
Photo Mode
Map Mode
Color blurred in outline of line or text
Color
deviationÆ
Fig.5-1
Cause/Section Step
Check Item
Test printing (A3/LD)
Measure
Output the built-in grid pattern
Remark
For the fol-
lowing
1
checks
Drum rotation
abnormality
2
3
4
Check the main motor operation in
the test mode (03) to see if there is
any rotation abnormality of the drum.
Check the main motor operation in
the test mode (03) to see if there is
Replace the main motor.
5
Reconnect the connectors.
Replace the harnesses.
any rotation abnormality of the drum. Replace the LGC board.
Inadequate
main motor
rotation speed
Check the value set for main motor
rotation speed. (Is the value signifi-
cantly different from the default
value?)
Reset main motor speed to 128.
Drum coupling
and coupling
on the equip-
ment side
5
Loose coupling, damage, deforma-
tion
Check if they are installed prop-
erly or replace the couplings.
Transfer belt
6
7
8
9
Deformation or damage of the trans- Clean or replace the transfer belt.
fer belt or stains on the transfer belt.
Is there any abnormality of the trans- Clean or replace the sensor.
fer belt home position sensor?
The reflection tape is stained or dam- Clean or replace the transfer belt.
aged.
Are the couplings on the transfer belt Tighten the screws if they loosen,
side loosen, damaged or deformed? or replace the couplings.
10 Stain or damage of the drive roller
Clean or replace the drive roller.
11 Does the rib of the transfer belt over- Adjust the position of the transfer
lap the collar on both edge of the
drive roller?
belt.
12 Is the belt edge damaged or stained? Clean or replace the transfer belt.
13 Peeling of the cleaning blade
(Large driving load)
Replace the cleaning blade.
14 Is the transfer belt unit installed nor- Check and correct the installing.
mally?
(Is the unit properly grounded?)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cause/Section Step
Check Item
Measure
Remark
Fθ lens
characteris-
tic defect or
reflection
Laser optical
unit
15 Check the grid pattern. Are the lines Replace the laser optical unit.
of the primary scanning direction
warped?
mirror warp
High-voltage
transformer
16 Check the connection of the high-
voltage supply terminal of the 1st or
2nd transfer rollers.
Correct or replace the terminal if
it is loosened or damaged.
*
If the desired image has not been obtained with the above measures or the more qualified image is
needed, adjustment the "deviation amount" in the adjustment mode (05). (Refer to 3.5.2 Color devi-
ation adjustment)
2) Uneven pitch and jitter image
<Symptoms>
Original mode
Location
Phenomena
All modes
Occurs cyclically at right
angles to paper feeding
direction
Uneven pitch
Feeding
direction
Fig.5-2
Cause/Section Step
Check Item
Test printing (A3/LD)
Measure
Remark
1
Output the built-in halftone For the following
and grid patterns.
checks
Drum
2
3
4
Are there uneven pitches approx.
283 mm?
Replace the main motor.
Is there any damage on the drum
surface?
Clean or replace the
drum.
Drum rotation
abnormality
Check the main motor operation in
the test mode (03) to see if there is
any rotation abnormality of the drum.
Replace the main motor.
5
6
7
Check the main motor operation in
the test mode (03) to see if there is
any rotation abnormality of the drum. Replace the harnesses.
Reconnect the connec-
tors.
Replace the LGC board.
Inadequate
main motor
rotation speed
Check the value set for main motor
rotation speed. (Is the value signifi-
cantly different from the default
value?)
Reset main motor speed
to 128.
Drum coupling
Loose coupling, damage, deforma-
tion
Tighten the screws if they
loosen. Or replace the
couplings.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cause/Section Step
Check Item
Measure
Remark
Transfer belt
8
Is the belt tension of the driving unit
normal?
Adjust the tension of the
transfer belt.
Check the halftone
pattern.
(Uneven pitch:
approx. 2.5 mm)
9
Deformation or damage of the trans- Replace the transfer belt. Check the halftone
fer belt
pattern.
(Uneven pitch:
approx. 75 mm)
10 Stain or damage of the drive roller
Clean or replace the drive Check the halftone
roller.
pattern.
(Uneven pitch:
approx. 75 mm)
11
Large driving load due to the peeling Replace the cleaning
of the cleaning blade
blade.
Laser optical
unit
12 Check the halftone pattern to see if
there are uneven pitches of approx.
0.3 mm each in the whole image.
Replace the laser optical
unit.
Check the halftone
pattern.
(Uneven pitch:
approx. 0.3 mm)
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3) Poor image density, color reproduction and gray balance
Check gray balance.
Check image density.
Check color reproduction.
Check color reproduction.
Fig.5-3
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Remarks
Density / Color
reproduction /
Gray balance
1
Check the image density / color
reproduction / gray balance.
Perform the enforced performing of
image quality closed-loop control
(05-395) and then automatic
gamma adjustment.
Printer density
2
Check the density of printer output Output the test patterns and check See step 5
image.
them.
if defect
occurs.
Color: using 04-231 for each color
Black: using 04-113
Scanner
3
4
5
Check if the original glass, mirrors
or lens is dirty.
Clean it.
Parameter
adjustment value
Check the image processing
parameters.
Adjust the color balance (color).
Adjust the image density.
Printer output
image abnormal
Is there any faded image (low den- Perform the troubleshooting proce-
sity)? dures against the faded image.
Is there any fog in the background? Perform the troubleshooting proce-
dures against the background fog-
ging.
Is there any blotch image?
Is there any poor transfer?
Perform the troubleshooting proce-
dures against the blotch image.
Perform the troubleshooting proce-
dures against the poor transfer.
Is there any poor cleaning of the
transfer belt? (Check inside the
equipment.)
Correct the transfer belt area.
(Refer to Service Manual)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4) Background fogging
5
Fig.5-4
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Remarks
Density repro-
duction
1
Check the gradation reproduction.
Perform the forced performing of
image quality closed-loop control
(05-395) and then automatic
gamma adjustment.
Printer section
Scanner
2
Check the printer output image.
Output the test patterns and check See step 6
them.
if defects
occur.
Color: using 04-231 for each color
Black: using 04-113
3
4
Check if the original glass, mirrors
or lens is dirty.
Clean it.
Parameter
adjustment value
Check the image processing
parameters.
Check the value of offsetting
adjustment for background pro-
cessing (color), background adjust-
ment (black) and background peak
adjustment for range correction
(black).
5
Adjust the image processing
parameters.
While checking the above encircled
image, adjust the reproduction level
by the offsetting adjustment for
background processing (color),
background adjustment (black) and
background peak adjustment for
range correction (black).
Cover
6
Is the cover installed properly?
(Is the drum exposed to the exter-
nal light?)
Correct it.
Auto-toner
7
8
Is the auto-toner sensor normal?
Check the operation of autotoner
sensor and readjust.
Is the toner supply operating con-
stantly?
Check the motor and circuits.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Remarks
Main charger
output
9
Is the main charger output normal? Check the circuits.
Developer bias
Developer unit
10 Is the developer bias proper?
Check the circuits.
11 Is the contact between the drum
and developer material proper?
Check the doctor-to-sleeve gap
and pole position.
Developer mate-
rial/Toner/Drum
12 Using the specified developer
material, toner and drum?
Use the specified developer mate-
rial, toner and drum.
13 Have the developer material and
drum reached their PM life?
Replace the developer material and
drum.
14 Is the storage environment of the
Use the toner cartridge stored in
toner cartridge 35oC or less without the environment within specifica-
dew?
tion.
Drum cleaning
blade
15 Is the drum cleaned properly?
Check the drum cleaning blade
pressure.
Transfer belt
cleaning blade
16 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade
contacted and released properly?
Check if the spring of the transfer
belt cleaner clutch is removed or if
any connector is disconnected.
Otherwise replace the clutch.
17 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in Check if the blade pressure spring
proper contact with the transfer
belt?
is installed.
Toner dusting
18 Is the toner accumulated on the
seals of the developer unit?
Remove the toner and clean the
seals.
*
If the trouble is not solved at the step 1 and the step 2 or followings (excluding the parameter adjust-
ment) are performed, make sure to perform “Enforced performing of image quality closed-loop con-
trol” and then “Automatic gamma adjustment” after taking a measure.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5) Moire/lack of sharpness
B
5
A
Fig.5-5
Moire
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Remarks
Density repro-
duction
1
Check the gradation
reproduction.
Perform the forced performing of
image quality closed-loop control
(05-395) and then automatic
gamma adjustment.
Parameter
adjustment value
2
3
Check the image process- Check the sharpness adjustment
ing parameters. value.
Adjust the image process- While checking the above encir-
ing parameters.
cled images A and B, decrease
moire by sharpness adjustment.
Printer section
4
Check the printer output
image.
Output the test patterns and check When defects occur,
them. perform the corre-
Color: using 04-231 for each color sponding trouble-
Black: using 04-113
shooting procedures.
Lack of sharpness
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Remarks
Density repro-
duction
1
Check the gradation
reproduction.
Perform the forced performing of
image quality closed-loop control
(05-395) and then automatic
gamma adjustment.
Parameter
adjustment value
2
3
Check the image process- Check the sharpness adjustment
ing parameters. value.
Adjust the image process- While checking the above encir-
ing parameters.
cled image A, increase sharpness
by sharpness adjustment.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*
If the trouble is not solved at the step 1 and the step 2 or followings (excluding the parameter adjust-
ment) are performed, make sure to perform “Enforced performing of image quality closed-loop con-
trol” and then “Automatic gamma adjustment” after taking a measure.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6)Toner offset
Black solid
Approx.
173 mm
Shadow image
Fig.5-6
5
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 173 mm behind the high density image.)
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Remarks
Fuser unit
1
Is the pressure between the
fuser belt and pressure roller
proper?
Check the pressure removal
parts and pressure mechanism.
2
3
Is the thermostat in contact?
Is there scratch on the fuser belt Replace the fuser belt or the
or pressure roller surface?
Establish its contact.
pressure roller.
4
5
6
Has the fuser belt or pressure
roller reached its PM life?
Is the fuser roller temperature
proper?
Is the paper type corresponding Use the proper type of paper or
to its mode?
Replace the fuser belt or the
pressure roller.
Check and correct the control cir-
cuit.
Paper
select the proper mode.
7
8
Using recommended paper?
Is the specified developer used? Use the specified developer and
toner.
Use the recommended paper.
Developer mate-
rial
Scanner
9
Are the mirrors, original glass or Clean them.
lens dirty?
Image quality
control
10 Is the control activated?
Check the image quality control
related codes.
Density
11 Is the density too high?
Perform the forced performing of
image quality closed-loop control
(05-395) and then automatic
gamma adjustment.
Printer density
12 Check the density of printer out- Output the test patterns and
When defects
occur, perform
the correspond-
ing trouble-
put image.
check them.
Color:
using 04-231 for each color
Black:
using 04-113
shooting
procedures.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7) Blurred image
Fig.5-7
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 173 mm behind the high density image.)
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Is the scanner bedewed?
Is the drum bedewed or dirty?
Measures
Scanner
Drum
1
2
Clean it.
Wipe the drum with dry cloth.
*
Be sure never use alcohol or other
organic solvents because they have
bad effect on the drum.
Ozone exhaust
3
4
Is the ozone exhaust fan operating prop-
erly?
Check the connection of the connector.
Is the ozone filter stained or damaged?
Replace it.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8) Poor fusing
5
Fig.5-8
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 173 mm behind the high density image.)
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
IH electric
power/control
abnormal
1
2
Check if the connector contacts properly. Correct it.
Is the IH coil shorted or broken?
Is the IH control board normal?
Replace the IH coil or IH control board.
3
Are the connectors on the LGC board and Reconnect them.
joint connectors connected properly?
4
5
Is the LGC board normal?
Replace the LGC board.
Is the harness between the LGC board
and IH board short circuited or open cir-
cuited?
Replace the harness.
Pressure
6
7
Are the pressure springs working prop-
erly?
Check/adjust the pressure springs.
between fuser
belt and pres-
sure roller
improper
Fuser roller tem-
perature
Is the temperature of fuser roller too low? Check/correct the setting value of fuser
roller temperature.
Clean or replace the thermistors.
Check/correct the related circuit.
Developer mate-
rial and toner
8
9
Using the specified developer material
and toner?
Use the specified developer material and
toner.
Paper
Is the paper damp?
Change the paper.
10 Is the paper type corresponding to its
mode?
Use the proper type of paper or select the
proper mode.
11 Using the recommended paper?
Use the recommended paper.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9) Blank print
Fig.5-9
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
High-voltage
transformer
1
Is the high-voltage transformer output
defective?
Adjust the output and correct the circuit,
or replace the transformer.
(1st/2nd transfer
roller and devel-
oper bias)
2
Are the connector of the high-voltage har- Reconnect the harness securely.
ness securely connected?
Replace the high-voltage harness.
Is the harness open circuited?
Developer unit
3
4
5
Is the developer unit installed securely?
Check/correct the developer sleeve cou-
pling engaging.
Do the developer sleeve and mixer
rotate?
Check/correct the developer drive sys-
tem.
Is the developer material properly trans-
ported?
Remove foreign matter from the devel-
oper material, if any.
6
7
8
Is there any magnetic brush phase error? Check the developer pole position.
Is the doctor sleeve gap incorrect?
Is the drum rotating?
Adjust the gap with the doctor-sleeve jig.
Drum
Check that the drum shaft is inserted.
Check the drum drive system.
9
Is the drum grounded?
Check the contact of the grounding plate.
Transfer unit
10 Is the transfer belt in proper contact with
the drum?
Check if the contact releasing lever is at
releasing position. Check the installation
of the transfer belt.
11 Is the transport of the transfer belt nor-
mal?
Check the installation of the transfer belt
or transport mechanism.
12 Is the releasing movement of the transfer Check the installation of the transfer belt
belt cleaner is normal? (Does the cleaning cleaning blade. Check the operation of
blade stay in contact?)
the transfer belt cleaner clutch.
13 Is the 2nd transfer roller contacted and
released properly?
Check the connection of the connector of
2nd transfer roller contact clutch and open
circuit of harness.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Switching power
supply
14 Is the power supply output (5.1VD) nor-
mal?
Replace the switching power supply.
Harnesses for
SLG, SYS, LGC
and LDR boards
15 Are the connectors securely connected?
Reconnect the connectors securely.
Is any harness between the boards open Replace the harness.
circuited?
Laser optical unit 16 Was the protection seal of slit removed
when replacing the unit?
Remove the protection seal.
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10)Solid print
Fig.5-10
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Exposure lamp
Inverter
1
Does the exposure lamp light?
Check the contact of the inverter connec-
tor.
If the inverter does not work, replace it.
If the lamp does not work, replace it.
Main charger
2
3
4
Is the main charger securely installed?
Is the main charger wire open circuited?
Reinstall it securely.
Replace it.
High-voltage
transformer
Is the high-voltage transformer output
defective?
Adjust the output and correct the circuit,
or replace the high-voltage transformer.
(main charger
wire/grid bias)
5
6
Are the connector of the high-voltage har- Reconnect the harness securely.
ness securely connected?
Replace the high-voltage harness.
Is the harness open circuited?
Harnesses for
SLG, SYS and
LGC boards
Are the connectors securely connected?
Reconnect the connectors securely.
Is any harness between the boards open Replace the harness.
circuited?
Scanner
7
8
Is there foreign matter in the optical path? Remove it.
Bedewing of
scanner and
drum
Is the scanner or the drum bedewed?
Clean the mirrors, lens and drum.
Keep the power cord plugged so that the
damp heater can work.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11)White banding (in feeding direction)
5
Fig.5-11
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Is there foreign matter or dust on the slit
glass?
Is there foreign matter on the charger
grid?
Is there foreign matter inside the doctor
blade?
Measures
Clean the slit glass.
Laser optical unit
1
2
3
Main charger
grid
Remove foreign matter.
Remove foreign matter.
Developer unit
4
5
Is there foreign matter on the drum seal? Remove foreign matter.
Is the drum seal of developer unit in
proper contact with the drum?
Modify the position of drum seal or
replace it.
Drum
6
7
8
9
Is there scratch or foreign matter on the
drum surface?
Is there scratch or foreign matter on the
transfer belt surface?
Are the harness or foreign matters in con- Correct or remove them.
tact with the transfer belt surface?
Is the transfer belt cleaning blade con-
tacted and released properly?
Replace the drum.
Transfer unit
Replace the transfer belt.
Check if the spring of the transfer belt
cleaner clutch is removed or if any con-
nector is disconnected. Otherwise replace
the clutch.
10 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in
proper contact with the transfer belt?
Check if the blade pressure spring is
installed.
11 Is there any scratch or hole on the 1st/2nd Replace the 1st/2nd transfer roller.
transfer roller?
Transport path
12 Does the toner image touch foreign mat-
ter after transfer, before entering the fuser
unit?
Remove foreign matter.
Discharge lamp
Scanner
13 Has any LED of discharge lamp gone
out?
14 Is there foreign matter or dust in the opti- Clean the lens and mirrors.
cal path?
Replace the discharge lamp.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12)White banding (at right angles to feeding direction)
Fig.5-12
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Remove foreign matter.
Main charger
1
2
3
Is there foreign matter on the charger?
Is the terminal contact poor?
Clean or adjust the terminals.
Replace the drum.
Drum
Is there any abnormalities on the drum
surface?
4
5
Is the drum grounded?
Check the contact of the grounding plate.
Discharge lamp
Developer unit
Is the discharge lamp lighting properly?
Replace the discharge lamp or clean ter-
minals.
6
Is the developer sleeve rotating correctly? Check the developer drive system, or
Is there any abnormalities on the sleeve
surface?
clean the sleeve surface.
7
8
9
Is the connection of developer bias supply Correct it.
terminal normal?
Drive systems
Is the drum, scanner or transfer belt jit-
tery?
Check each drive system.
High-voltage
transformer
Is the high-voltage transformer output
defective?
Check/correct any electric leakage and
related circuits.
(main charger
wire/grid, 1st/
2nd transfer
roller and devel-
oper bias)
If the high-voltage transformer does not
work, replace it.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13)Skew (slantwise copying)
5
Fig.5-13
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Is the drawer or LCF properly installed?
Measures
Drawer/LCF
1
2
Reinstall the drawer or LCF properly.
Is too much paper loaded in the drawer or Reduce paper to 550 sheets or less.
LCF?
(2500 sheets or less/stack for LCF)
Change the paper direction and reinsert it.
Adjust the side guides.
3
4
Is the paper corner folded?
Are the drawer or LCF side guides prop-
erly set?
Paper feed roller
Rollers
5
6
Is the surface of paper feed roller dirty?
Clean the roller surface with alcohol, or
replace the roller.
Is each roller improperly fixed to the
shaft?
Check and reinstall E-rings, pins, clips
and setscrews.
Aligning amount
7
8
Is the aligning amount proper?
Increase the aligning amount.
Registration
roller
Is the registration roller spring removed?
Mount the spring correctly. Clean the
roller if it is dirty.
Pre-registration
guide
9
Is the pre-registration guide improperly
installed?
Correct it.
2nd transfer
front guide
10 Is the 2nd transfer front guide installed
properly?
Correct it.
RADF
11 Is the RADF installed and adjusted prop- Reinstall and readjust it.
erly?
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14)Color banding (in feeding direction)
Fig.5-14
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Scanner
1
2
Is there foreign matter in the optical path? Clean the slit, lens and mirrors.
Is there dust or stain on the shading cor-
rection plate or ADF original glass?
Clean it.
Main charger
3
Is there foreign matter on the charger
grid?
Remove foreign matter.
4
5
Is the charger grid dirty or deformed?
Is there foreign matter on the main
charger?
Clean or replace the charger grid.
Remove foreign matter.
6
7
Is the charger wire dirty or deformed?
Is there foreign matter inside the charger Remove foreign matter.
case?
Clean or replace the charger wire.
8
9
Is the inner surface of charger case dirty? Clean inside.
Are the pads of charger wire cleaner stop- Correct the position.
ping at the position other than their home
position?
Cleaner
10 Is there paper dust on the cleaning blade Clean or replace the paper dust removal
edge?
brush for the registration roller.
Clean or replace the cleaning blade.
11 Is the cleaning blade contact improper?
12 Is toner recovery defective?
Correct it.
Clean the toner recovery auger section.
Transfer unit
13 Are the harness or foreign matters in con- Correct or remove them.
tact with the transfer belt surface?
14 Is there paper dust on the edge of transfer Clean or replace it.
belt cleaning blade?
15 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade con-
tacted and released properly?
Check if the spring of the transfer belt
cleaner clutch is removed or if any con-
nector is disconnected. Otherwise replace
the clutch.
16 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in
proper contact with the transfer belt?
Check if the blade pressure spring is
installed.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Fuser unit
17 a. Is there dirt or scratches on the fuser
belt and pressure roller surface?
b. Is the thermistor dirty?
a. Clean or replace them.
b. Clean the thermistor.
Drum
18 Are there scratches on the drum surface? Replace the drum.
Laser optical unit 19 Is there foreign matter or dust on the slit
glass?
Remove foreign matter or dust.
5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15)Color banding (at right angles to feeding direction)
Fig.5-15
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Main charger
Fuser unit
1
2
Is the charger wire dirty or deformed?
Clean or replace the charger wire.
Is the fuser belt, pressure roller or oil roller Clean them.
dirty?
High-voltage
transformer
(main charger
wire/grid and
transfer roller
bias)
3
4
Is the high-voltage transformer output
defective?
Check the circuit and replace the highvolt-
age transformer if not working.
Is each joint of high-voltage output loos-
ened? (Check if any electric leakage is
causing noise.)
Reconnect each joint.
Drum
5
6
Is there deep scratch on the drum sur-
face?
Replace the drum, especially if the
scratch has reached the aluminum base.
Are there fine scratches on the drum sur- Check and correct the contact of cleaning
face (drum pitting)?
blade and recovery blade.
7
8
Is the drum grounded?
Check the contact of the grounding plate.
Clean the roller area or replace the roller.
2nd transfer
roller
Is the 2nd transfer roller rotating nor-
mally?
Scanner
9
Is there foreign matter on the carriage
rail?
Remove foreign matter.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16)White spots
5
Fig.5-16
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Developer unit/
Toner cartridge
1
Is the toner density of developer material Check and correct the auto-toner sensor
proper?
and toner supply operation.
Check if the amount of toner is sufficient
in the toner cartridge.
2
3
Is the doctor-sleeve gap proper?
Using the specified developer material,
toner and drum?
Adjust the gap.
Use the specified developer material,
toner and drum.
Developer mate-
rial/Toner/Drum
4
5
6
Have the developer material and drum
reached their PM life?
Is the storage environment of the toner
cartridge 35oC or less without dew?
Is there any dent on the surface of the
drum?
Replace the developer material and drum.
Use the toner cartridge stored in the envi-
ronment within specification.
Replace the drum.
7
8
Is there any film forming on the drum?
Is the drum bedewed?
Clean or replace the drum.
Wipe the drum surface with a piece of dry
cloth.
Transfer unit
Main charger
9
Is there foreign matter on the transfer belt Remove foreign matter.
surface?
10 Is there foreign matter on the transfer belt Clean the transfer belt unit.
drive roller?
11 Is there foreign matter on the charger?
12 Is the charger wire dirty or deformed?
13 Is the high-voltage transformer output
defective?
Remove it.
Clean or replace the charger wire.
Adjust the output.
High-voltage
transformer
(main charger
wire/grid, devel-
oper 1st/2nd
transfer roller
bias)
Paper
14 Is the paper type corresponding to its
mode?
Use the proper type of paper or select the
proper mode.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17)Poor transfer
Fig.5-17
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Transfer unit
1
2
3
4
5
Is the transfer belt or 1st/2nd transfer roll- Clean it.
ers dirty?
Is the transfer belt in proper contact with
the drum ?
Correct it.
Is the 2nd transfer roller in proper contact Correct it.
with the transfer belt?
Is there any deformation or abnormalities Replace the belt.
on the transfer belt?
Is the high-voltage fed to the 2nd transfer If any contact failure occurs in the feeding
roller correctly?
area (e.g. the conductive bushing and
spring come off), correct it.
Paper
6
7
8
9
Is paper in the drawer or LCF curled?
Is paper in the drawer or LCF damp?
Is the registration roller malfunctioning?
Is the aligning amount proper?
Reinsert paper with reverse side up or
change paper.
Change paper.
*
Avoid storing paper in damp place.
Registration
roller
Clean the roller, remount the spring, or
replace defective clutch-related parts.
Aligning amount
Inckease the aligning amount
High-voltage
transformer
10 Is the high-voltage transformer output
defective?
Check the circuit and adjust the trans-
former output.
(1st/2nd transfer
roller bias)
11 Are the high-voltage harness and termi-
nals in proper contact?
Correct them if loosened.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18)Uneven image density
5
Fig.5-18
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Is the main charger dirty?
Measures
Main charger
Transfer unit
1
2
Clean it or replace the charger wire.
Is the transfer belt or 1st/2nd transfer roll- Clean the belt.
ers dirty?
3
4
5
6
Is the transfer belt in proper contact with
the drum?
Correct it.
Is 2nd transfer roller in proper contact with Correct it.
the transfer belt? (Is the roller tilted?)
Is there any abnormalities or deformation Replace the transfer belt.
on the transfer belt?
Laser optical unit
Discharge lamp
Is there foreign matter or dust on the slit
glass?
Clean the slit glass.
7
8
Is the discharge lamp dirty?
Clean it.
Has any LED of discharge lamp gone
out?
Replace it.
Developer unit
9
Is the magnetic brush in proper contact
with the drum?
Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap.
10 Is the developer unit pressure mechanism Check the mechanism.
malfunctioning?
11 Is the transport of developer material
poor?
Remove foreign matter if any.
Scanner section
12 a. Is the platen cover or RADF open?
b. Is the original glass, mirrors, or lens
dirty?
a. Close the platen cover or RADF.
b. Clean them.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19)Faded image (low density)
Fig.5-19
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Toner empty
Auto-toner circuit
1
2
3
Is the “ADD TONER” symbol blinking?
Is there enough toner in the cartridge?
Replace the toner cartridge.
Check the auto-toner circuit function.
Is the toner density of developer material
too low?
Toner motor
4
5
Is the toner motor malfunctioning?
Check the motor drive circuit.
Replace the toner cartridge.
Toner cartridge
Are there any abnormalities in the toner
cartridge?
Developer mate-
rial
6
7
Has the developer material reached its
PM life?
Replace developer material.
Developer unit
Is the magnetic brush in proper contact
with the drum?
Check the developer unit installation.
Check the doctor-sleeve gap and pole
position.
Main charger
Drum
8
9
Is the main charger dirty?
Clean it or replace the charger wire.
Is there film forming on the drum surface? Clean or replace the drum.
10 Has the drum reached its PM life?
Replace the drum.
Transfer unit
11 Has the transfer belt, 1st or 2nd transfer
roller reached its PM life?
Replace the transfer belt, 1st or 2nd trans-
fer roller.
High-voltage
transformer
12 Is the high-voltage transformer output set- Adjust the high-voltage transformer out-
tings improper? put.
(developer bias)
13 Are the connector of the high-voltage har- Reconnect the harness securely.
ness securely connected? Is the harness Replace the high-voltage harness.
open circuited?
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20)Image dislocation in feeding directio
5
Fig.5-20
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Adjustment error
of scanner or
1
Is same dislocation on every copy?
Adjust the scanner/printer using the
Adjustment Mode.
printer section
Registration roller
2
3
4
Is the registration roller dirty, or is the
spring removed?
Clean the roller with alcohol.
Reinstall the spring.
Is the registration motor malfunctioning?
Adjust or replace the gears, etc. if they
are not engaged properly.
Is the registration roller clutch operating
normally? (Is the timing of operation
delaying?)
Replace the registration roller clutch.
Paper feed
clutch, Transport
clutch
5
Are the paper feed clutch and transport
clutch malfunctioning?
Check the circuit or the clutch and
replace them if necessary.
Aligning amount
6
7
Is the aligning amount proper?
Decrease the aligning amount.
Reinstall the guide.
Pre-registration
guide
Is the pre-registration guide improperly
installed?
Transfer belt
8
9
Is there any stain or scratch on the reflec- Clean or replace it.
tion tape?
Is the lens of the transfer belt home posi- Clean or replace it.
tion sensor stained?
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
21)Image jittering
Fig.5-21
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Is the toner image on the drum proper?
Measures
-
1
2
3
If proper, perform step 1 to 3; otherwise
perform step 4 and after.
Registration
roller
Is the registration roller rotating normally? Check the registration roller section and
its springs.
Transfer unit
Is the transfer belt or 2nd transfer roller
operating normally?
Check the drive system and replace the
transfer belt or 2nd transfer roller if neces-
sary.
Fuser unit
4
Are the fuser roller and pressure roller
rotation proper?
Check the drive system.
Replace the fuser belt, fuser roller and
Is the fuser belt transportation proper?
pressure roller if necessary.
Drum
5
6
7
Is there large scratch on the drum?
Is the slide sheet defective?
Replace the drum.
Replace it.
Scanner
Are there any abnormalities on the car-
riage feet?
Replace the feet.
8
9
Is the tension of timing belt inappropriate? Correct the tension.
Is the carriage drive system malfunction-
ing?
Check the carriage drive system.
10 Are any mirrors loosely installed?
11 Is the drum drive system malfunctioning? Check the drum drive system.
Clean or replace the belts, pulleys, bush-
ings if they have dirt or scratches.
Install them properly.
Drum drive sys-
tem
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22)Poor cleaning
Note:
Poor cleaning may occur in feeding direction.
5
Fig.5-22
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Developer mate-
rial
1
2
3
4
5
Is the specified developer material used? Use the specified developer material and
toner.
Cleaner
Is there paper dust on the drum cleaning
blade edge?
Clean it.
Is the drum cleaning blade peeled?
Replace the blade.
Check and replace the drum.
Is the cleaning brush rotating normally?
Check the brush driving section.
Clean the brush area.
Is the cleaning brush damaged?
Is there foreign matter on the brush?
Replace the brush and clean the brush
area. Check the drum and replace if there
is any abnormality.
Transfer belt
cleaner
6
Is there paper dust on the edge of transfer Clean or replace it.
belt cleaning blade?
7
8
Is the transfer belt cleaning blade peeled? Replace the blade.
Is the transfer belt cleaning blade con-
tacted and released properly?
Check if the spring of the transfer belt
cleaner clutch is removed or if any con-
nector is disconnected. Otherwise replace
the clutch.
9
Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in
proper contact with the transfer belt?
Check if the blade pressure spring is
installed.
Toner recovery
auger
10 Is the toner recovery defective?
Clean the toner recovery auger.
Check the cleaning blade pressure.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Fuser unit
11 Is the cleaning roller or the oil roller dam- Replace them.
aged?
Have the roller reached their PM life?
12 Is there any bubble-like defect on the
fuser belt (173 mm pitch on the image)?
Replace the fuser belt. Check and modify
the heater control circuit.
13 Have the fuser belt and pressure roller
reached their PM life?
Replace them.
14 Is the pressure between the fuser belt and Check and adjust the pressure mecha-
pressure roller proper? nism.
15 Is the temperature of fuser roller proper? Check/correct the setting value of fuser
roller temperature.
Clean or replace the thermistors.
Check and correct the circuit.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
23)Uneven light distribution
5
Fig.5-23
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Is the original glass dirty?
Measures
Clean the glass.
Original glass
Main charger
1
2
Are the main charger wire, grid and case Clean or replace them.
dirty?
Discharge lamp
Scanner
3
4
Is the discharge lamp dirty?
Clean it.
Are the reflector, exposure lamp, mirrors, Clean them.
lens, etc. dirty?
Exposure lamp
5
6
Is the exposure lamp tilted?
Adjust the installed position of the lamp.
Replace it.
Is the lamp discolored or degraded?
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24)Blotched image
Fig.5-24
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Paper
1
Is the paper type corresponding to its
mode?
Check the paper type and mode.
2
3
Is paper too dry?
Change paper.
Correct it.
Transfer unit
Is the transfer belt in proper contact with
the drum?
4
5
6
Is the 2nd transfer roller in proper contact Correct it.
with the transfer belt?
Are there any abnormalities on the trans- Clean or replace the transfer belt.
fer belt?
High-voltage
transformer
Is the high-voltage transformer output
abnormal?
Adjust the output. Replace the trans-
former, if necessary.
(1st/2nd transfer
roller bias)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25)Stain on the paper back side
Printing side of 1st page
The edge of image
cut off.
5
Back side of 2nd page
Fig.5-25
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cause/Section Step
Check items
Measures
Adjust the margin.
Image adjust-
ment/setting
1
Is the margin adjustment of image cor-
rect?
2
Is the margin adjustment of image correct Adjust the margin.
when the paper size is not selected in
bypass feeding?
3
4
5
Is the margin adjustment of image at
duplexing correct?
Adjust the margin. (05-434)
Is the image location in primary/second-
ary scanning direction correct?
Adjust the location.
Is the reproduction ratio of image in pri-
mary/secondary scanning direction cor-
rect?
Adjust the reproduction ratio.
6
7
Is the tab setting correct?
Correct the setting.
Paper feeding /
Transport area
Does the size of paper in the drawer or
LCF correspond to the setting?
Use the appropriate paper size or correct
the size setting.
8
9
Is the width between the slides in the
drawer correct (too wide)?
Correct the position of the slides.
Is the width between the slides of the
bypass tray correct (too wide)?
Correct the width.
10 Is the sideways deviation adjustment for
drawers or slides of the bypass tray cor-
rect?
Adjust the deviation.
11 Is the paper aligning amount sufficient?
Adjust the aligning amount.
Clean or replace the rollers.
12 Are the feed roller and transport roller
dirty or worn out?
13 Does the paper mode correspond to the
paper type?
Use the appropriate paper type or paper
mode.
14 Using the recommended paper?
Use the recommended paper.
Transfer unit
15 Is there any stain caused by a poor clean- Clean the transfer belt.
ing, etc. on the transfer belt?
16 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in
proper contact with the transfer belt?
Check if the blade pressure spring is
installed.
17 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade con-
tacted or released properly?
Check if the spring of the transfer belt
cleaner clutch is removed or if any con-
nector is disconnected. Otherwise replace
the clutch.
18 Is the 2nd transfer roller rotating properly? Clean the area around the roller.
Otherwise replace the roller.
19 Is there any foreign matter or stain on the Clean or replace the roller.
2nd transfer roller?
20 Has the 2nd transfer roller reached to its
PM life?
Replace the 2nd transfer roller.
Clean the fuser belt and pressure roller.
Clean the rib.
Fuser unit
21 Are the fuser belt and pressure roller
dirty?
22 Is the rib of transport guide dirty?
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3 Replacement of PC Boards and HDD
<CAUTION IN REPLACING PC BOARDS>
The ID for each equipment is registered on the LGC board, the DRV board, the SYS board and the SLG
board. So, if their replacement is required, be sure to replace only one board at a time.
If more than one of the LGC board, the DRV board and the SYS board require replacement, replace
them in the following procedure.
1) First, replace one of the board to be replaced.
2) Turn the power ON and confirm that "READY" is displayed.
3) Turn the power OFF.
4) Replace another board that requires replacement.
5) Repeat steps 2 to 4.
The LGC board and DRV board can be replaced without other settings.
When the HDD requires replacement, see “5.3.1 Replacing HDD”.
When the SYS board requires replacement, see “5.3.2 Replacing SYS board”.
When the SLG board requires replacement, see “5.3.3 Replacing SLG board”.
When NVRAM requires replacement or clearing, see “5.3.4 NVRAM replacing and clearing”.
5.3.1
Replacing HDD
<CAUTION IN REPLACING HDD>
When the HDD is replaced, it is necessary to back up the data in the HDD before replacing and to
recover them after replacing.
5
Notes:
1. To maintain the security, ask users to perform the backup/restore for users’ data/information
in the HDD. The service technician can perform them only when users permit it.
2. Some data in the HDD cannot be backed up and can be kept only on the paper.
The procedure for replacing the HDD is as follows.
(1) Ask users to back up the data in the HDD. See the following for the item of data, and the possibil-
ity and the measure of the backup.
•
•
•
•
•
Image data in the Electronic Filing
Archive them in the “e-Filing” of TopAccess.
F-code information, Template registration information, Address book
Back them up in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
Department management data
Export them in “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
Log data (Print, Scan, FAX (Transmission/Reception))
Export them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess. (Import cannot be performed.)
Data in the shared folder (Scanned data, Saved data of copy / FAX transmission)
-
-
-
-
-
Copy them to the client computer via the network. (The data which have been copied to
the client computer cannot be copied to the shared folder.)
•
Print waiting data (Copying data and FAX reception data that are waiting to be printed due to
the paper run-out and jam, etc.)
-
Finish printing them after the paper supply and the jam release, etc. (The data cannot be
kept.)
•
•
Print job (Private print data, Schedule print data)
If any jobs are left, print them. (The data cannot be backed up.)
FAX saved data (Confidential / Bulletin board data)
-
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-
Print them. (The data cannot be backed up.)
Registration data for FAX transmission (Delayed transmission / Recovery transmission)
The data cannot be backed up.
•
-
(2) Print out the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” (content of Function Mode (13) setting)
list.
•
•
•
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and then the [USER] button.
Press the [LIST] button.
Key in [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [3] and then press the [START] button. The list is outputted.
(3) Print out the “FUNCTION” list.
•
•
•
•
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button.
Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
Press the [LIST/REPORT] button and then the [LIST] button.
Press the [FUNCTION] button. The list is outputted.
(4) Replace the HDD.
(5) Update of HDD program data and UI data.
•
Create partitions. (In case of using the download jig, this is not necessary.)
While pressing [3] and [CLEAR] button, turn the power ON. When “Firmware Version Up
Mode” appears on the LCD, key in [3] and press the [START] button.
Update with the USB storage. See “6. FIRMWARE UPDATING” for details.
Format the HDD. (Setting Mode (08-690: 2))
•
•
*
When the FAX unit (GD-1150) is installed. Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode (1*). Per-
form the 1*-100 (FAX Set Up), 1*-102 (Clearing the image data) of the FAX Clearing Mode.
•
Perform the gamma automatic adjustment of the printer. See “3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjust-
ment” for details.
(6) Ask users to reset the user’s setting items and to restore the data/information. See the following
for the reset and the restore.
•
•
•
•
Printer driver
Upload them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
F-code information, Template registering information, Address book
Restore them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess
Department management data
Import them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
Image data in the Electronic Filing
Upload them in the “e-Filing” of TopAccess.
-
-
-
-
(7) Referring to the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” list which was printed beforehand, per-
form the re-setting.
•
Print out the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” list after the formatting. (Refer to the
procedure of (2).)
•
•
While pressing [1] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Function Mode)
Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting
items having the different setting values. Set the value which was set before the formatting.
Turn the power OFF.
•
(8) Referring to the “FUNCTION” list which was printed beforehand, perform the re-setting of the
default setting of the FAX function.
•
•
•
•
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button.
Press the [ADMIN] button, enter the password, and then press the [ENTER] button.
Press the [FAX] button and then the [TERMINAL ID] button to set each item.
Press the [INITIAL SETUP] button to set each item.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.2
Replacing SYS board
<<CAUTION IN REPLACING the SYS board>>
Perform the following procedures and settings when the SYS board is replaced.
<After replacing the SYS board>
(1) Install DIMM (main memory) to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(2) Install NVRAM to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(3) Update the version of system ROMs (System Firmware, OS data, UI data) (The ROMs had been
used for the old SYS board).
*
See “6. FIRMWARE UPDATING” for the details of System ROM update.
(4) Turn the power OFF and start up with the Setting Mode (08).
(5) When the message “SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?” is displayed on the LCD, press the
[INITIALIZE] button.
*
*
SRAM is cleared
If SRAM is not performed, F090 error occurs when starting up.
Notes:
• When SRAM is cleared, following items need to be re-set, so make sure the contents of set
tings are kept as a record.
<FAX settings>
5
Terminal ID
Default setting of fax
<E-mail settings>
Setting of properties for E-mail message
<Internet Fax>
Setting of properties for Internet Fax
When SRAM is cleared, the toner cartridge consumed count of Automatic ordering function of
supplies becomes 0, however, it cannot be re-set.
•
(6) [If a scrambler board has already been installed]
Perform 08-698 (Entering the key code for scrambler board). Have the user enter the key code.
(7) Perform 08-200 (date and time setting) to set Date/Time.
(8) Check the serial number after performing 08 Code 995. If the number is different from the num-
ber on the label attached on the rear cover of the machine, re-input the correct number with 08
Code 995.
(9) Perform 08-693 (initialization of the NIC information).
(10) Turn the power OFF.
*
If the FAX board has not been installed, skip to step (14).
(11) Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode (1*)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(12) Perform 1*-102 (Clearing the image data).
Notes:
Following image data are deleted when 1*-102 is performed.
•
•
•
•
Images of fax polling transmission
Images of fax Mailbox and box information
Images of fax transmission
Images of fax reception
(13) Turn the power OFF.
(14) Turn the power ON.
(15) Set the dial type. [USER FUNCTIONS] → [ADMIN] → [FAX] → [INITIAL SETUP]
5.3.3
Replacing SLG board
<CAUTION IN REPLACING SLG BOARD>
When the SLG board has been replaced, “Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner / SYS board
→ SLG board (05-363)” must be performed.
5.3.4
Replacing or clearing NVRAM
<<Caution in replacing or clearing NVRAM>>
When NVRAM has been replaced or cleared (”System all clearing (08-669)”), the setting must be per-
formed according to the following procedure.
<After replacing or clearing NVRAM>
(1) Take off the FAX board if installed.
(2) Start up with the Setting Mode (08).
(3) Check the serial number after performing 08-995 (Equipment number display). If the number is
different from the one on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment, enter the correct
serial number again with 08-995.
Note:
The MAC address of the equipment is generated based on this serial number. Entering the incor-
rect serial number may result in an inability to access the network due to an invalid MAC
address.
(4) Perform 08-693 (initialization of the NIC information).
(5) Perform “Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner / SLG board Æ SYS board (05-364)”.
(6) Perform “Image quality control initialization (05-396)” (Chapter 3.3), and then perform “Automatic
gamma adjustment (05-1642, 1000 and 1002)” consecutively (Chapters 3.5.1 and 3.6.1).
(7) Perform “1: Electrical counter -> Backup counter” of 08-257 (Counter copy) to recover the total
counter.
(8) Shut down the equipment.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 130
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(9) Install the FAX board taken off in step (1).
If the FAX board has not been installed, the following steps are not necessary.
*
(10) Start up with the Setting Mode (08).
(11) Set the destination with 08-701 (Destination setting of FAX machine).
(12) Start up with the FAX Clearing Mode (1*).
(13) Perform 1*-100 (FAX Set Up).
(14) Turn the power OFF.
(15) Turn the power ON.
(16) Set the dial type. [USER FUNCTIONS] → [ADMIN] → [FAX] → [INITIAL SETUP]
5.3.5
Cautions when Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is installed
When the Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is installed, follow the cautions below.
<<Cautions when disposing of the HDD>>
Before disposing of the HDD of the equipment, be sure to perform 08-1426 (forcible HDD data clearing)
and confirm that deleting of the HDD data is completed.
5
•
•
Check that the percentage is 100% and “HDD Erase [OK]” appears on the upper left of the screen.
Check that the version (SYS V1.0) is displayed on the lower right of the screen.
*
When the scrambler board is installed, data in the HDD are overwritten with encrypted data and
erased.
<<Caution when disposing of the SYS board>>
Before the SYS board is disposed, the following codes can be performed.
•
08-1427 (Forcible NVRAM data all clearing)
•
08-1428 (Forcible SRAM backup data all clearing)
If these codes are performed, the equipment cannot be started up.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 131
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.6
HDD information display
This code displays the HDD operation history, which is recorded in the HDD, on the control panel. HDD
failure can be diagnosed or predicted with the information displayed.
1) Display
The following screen is displayed with setting code 08-670.
HDD manufacturer
Model name
HDD serial number
-
-
Items supported differ depending on the HDD manufacturer.
"---" is displayed on the VALUE, NAV and Worst columns if items are not supported.
2) Usage
The combination of the values of ID=05 and c5 is used to diagnose whether or not the HDD has a
physical failure when HDD failure is suspected (service call F100-180 or 120 occurred).
Result
Description
Low possibility of physical failure
Diagnosis
ID
05
c5
05
c5
05
c5
05
c5
05
c5
VALUE
0
0
HDD replacement
is not required.
From 1 to 999
0
Any value
1 or more
Either one is at
least 1000.
Defective sector has been reassigned and HDD is recovered.
HDD replacement
is not required.
High possibility of defective sector existence. (There will be a
possibility of physical failure depending on the use of HDD.)
HDD replacement
is recommended.
High possibility of physical failure
HDD replacement
is recommended.
All values are dis- High possibility of physical failure (A HDD connector, harness or HDD replacement
played as "-------". SYS board may be one of the causes.) is recommended.
3) ID=05 and c5
ID
Name
Description
Remarks
05 Re-allocated Sector Count
The number of sectors reassigned
This value tends to increase at
HDD failure.
c5 Current Pending Sector Count The number of candidate sectors to
be reassigned
This value tends to increase at
HDD failure.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 132
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4) Description of each ID
ID
Name
Meaning
01 Read Error Rate
02 Throughput Performance
03 Spin Up Time
This attribute is a measure of the read error rate.
This attribute is a measure of the throughput performance.
This attribute is a measure of how quickly the drive is able to
spin up from a spun down condition.
04 Spin Start/Stop Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin ups
from a spun down condition.
05 Re-allocated Sector Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of reallocated
sectors.
07 Seek Error Rate
This is a measure of the seek error rate.
08 Seek Time Performance
This attribute is a measure of a drive's seek performance dur-
ing normal online operations.
09 Power-On Hours
This attribute is a measure of the total time (hours or minutes
depending on disk manufacturer) the drive has been on.
0a Spin Retry Count
0c Power Cycle Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin retries.
This attribute is a measure of the number of times the drive
has been turned on.
c0 Power off Retract Count
c1 Load Cycle Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of emergency
unloads.
5
This attribute is a measure of the total number of load/
unloads.
c2 Temperature
This attribute is a measure of the temperature in the HDD.
c3 ECC On the Fly Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of the ECC On
the Fly.
c4 Reallocation Event Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of the reallo-
cation events.
c5 Current Pending Sector Count
This attribute is a measure of the total number of candidate
sectors to be reallocated.
c6 Off-Line Scan Uncorrectable Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of uncorrect-
able sectors found during the off-line scan.
c7 Ultra DMA CRC Error Count (Rate)
This attribute is a measure of the total number of errors found
in data transfer in the Ultra-DMA mode.
c8 Write Error Rate
This attribute is a measure of the write error rate.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
5 - 133
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4 Other errors
1) Operation cannot be performed (operation from the control panel is not successful) after installing
the option(s) such as Wireless LAN module, Scrambler board and/or Parallel board.
-
Check if the optional board is installed properly.
2) The connection to the Wireless LAN cannot be made even though it is set to “Enabled”.
-
The connection state and settings of the Wireless LAN can be checked with [USER FUNC-
TIONS] → [ADMIN] → [WIRELESS LAN] → [SETTING CHECK].
Confirm the settings with the administrator.
*
“NIC INITIALIZING” does not disappear at the time of the power being turned ON and it dis-
appears after 6 minutes with the NIC initializing time-out. In this case, the connection to the
Wireless LAN did not succeed even though “NIC INITIALIZING” disappears.
The connection to the Wireless LAN cannot be made if the Access Point to be connected is
not found or security settings are not correct.
*
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c TROUBLESHOOTING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
5 - 134
05/07
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. FIRMWARE UPDATING
In this equipment, following firmware is written on the ROM on each board.
Firmware
Stored
Update method
Master data
Hard disk
USB Storage Device
(HDD program data, UI data)
System ROM
(System firmware, OS data, UI
data)
System control PC board
(SYS board)
USB Storage Device
*
Update with Download jig also
possible.
Engine ROM
(Machine firmware)
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
USB Storage Device
*
Update with Download jig also
possible.
Scanner ROM
(Scanner firmware)
Scanning section control PC
board
USB Storage Device
*
Update with Download jig also
(SLG board)
possible.
RADF ROM
(RADF firmware)
RADF control PC board
(MR-3018)
Download jig
Download jig
Download jig
Download jig
Finisher ROM
(Finisher firmware)
Finisher control PC board
(MJ-1023/ MJ-1024)
Finisher ROM
(Saddle stitcher firmware)
Finisher control PC board
(MJ-1024)
FAX ROM
(FAX firmware)
FAX board
(GD-1200)
When you want to update the firmware above or the equipment becomes inoperative status due to
some defectives of the firmware, updating the firmware is available by the following actions.
•
•
Updating with the download jig
Updating with the USB Storage Device
6
Notes:
•
Written firmware varies depending on the kinds of the boards provided as service parts. For
updating, only the minimum firmware is installed on the system control PC board, logic PC
board, and scanning section control PC board. No firmware is installed on the FAX board. The
latest version of the firmware at the delivery is written on the RADF control PC board and fin-
isher control PC board.
When any of above boards is replaced with a new one in the field, confirm the other firmware
version used with and then write the suitable version of the firmware.
•
The firmware (master data) is not installed on the hard disk provided as a service part. When
the hard disk is replaced with a new one, confirm the other firmware version used with and
then write the suitable version of the firmware.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware automatically by connecting the download jig
using the dedicated connector and turning ON the equipment.
The download jig consists of the ROM, in which the program is written, and the jig board.
And two types of the download jigs are available for each type of the firmware.
For updating the firmware, in addition to the current ways such as updating each firmware individually,
the batch update of the firmware of the equipment is available (except the hard disk and the option).
Download jig
Firmware
System ROM
Stored
Batch update
Individual update
System control PC board
(SYS board)
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2
(48 MB)
-
<Two download jigs are
needed.>
Engine ROM
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
K-PWA-DLM-320
K-PWA-DLM-320
Scanner ROM
Scanning section control
PC board
(SLG board)
RADF ROM
RADF control PC board
(MR-3018)
-
-
-
-
K-PWA-DLM-320
K-PWA-DLM-320
K-PWA-DLM-320
K-PWA-DLM-320
Finisher ROM
(Finisher firmware)
Finisher control PC board
(MJ-1023/MJ-1024)
Finisher ROM
(Saddle stitcher firmware) (MJ-1024)
Finisher control PC board
FAX ROM FAX board (GD-1200)
Refer to the following for the details to update with each download jig.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 2
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48MB)
Connector
Connector
(
(
for SYS board
)
connection
for ROM writer
adapter connection
)
ROM4 ROM1
ROM5 ROM2
ROM6 ROM3
Fig.6-1 Jig board: PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)
Important:
•
•
To perform update, two download jigs (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2) are needed.
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on
the board directly. Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write the
data to these Flash ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data.
K-PWA-DLM-320
Connector
Mark for ROM
installation direction
LED
6
ROM
Fig.6-2 Jig board: K-PWA-DLM-320
Important:
Pay attention to the direction of the ROM.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.1.1
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)
The firmware of the equipment except for the hard disk and the option can be updated individually or in
a batch by using PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB). Update the ROM data written on each board
according to the need such as the case of replacing the system control PC board, logic PC board or
scanning section control PC board.
The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows.
<Updating System ROM>
•
•
•
System firmware (System firmware data, FROM internal program data)
OS data (FROM basic section software)
UI data (fixed section data, common section data, UI data in FROM displayed at power ON)
<Updating Engine ROM>
Engine ROM data
<Updating Scanner ROM>
Scanner ROM data
[A] Update procedure
Important:
•
•
•
Use two “PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2” for the download jigs.
Turn OFF the power before installing and removing the download jig.
Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be oper-
ated properly.
(1) Write the ROM data to be updated to the download jig.
(2) Shut down the equipment.
(3) Take off the connector cover.
Connector cover
Fig.6-3
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN105, CN106) on the SYS board.
Connector
Download jig 1
Download jig 0
Fig.6-4
Download jig number
Download jig 0
Connector name
CN105
Download jig 1
CN106
(5) Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed. “*” is displayed next to the items to
be updated. (All items are selected in the default settings.)
6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(6) Select the item with the digital keys.
“*” is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the “*” by pressing the number of the
item. All items are selected in the default settings.
•
•
Select all items to update the firmware of the equipment in a batch.
Select items as follows to update it individually.
<Updating System ROM>
Select “0. OS Update”, “1. UI Update”, and “2. System Firmware”.
<Updating Engine ROM>
Select “3. Engine Firmware Update” only.
<Updating Scanner ROM>
Select “4. Scanner Firmware Update” only.
Example: Updating the system ROM
(Updating all the items is taken as an example and explained in the following procedures.)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) Press the [START] button.
Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Status display during update
Status display when update is completed
OS Update ....... Completed
OS Update
.......
UI Data Update .......
UI Data Update ....... Completed
SysFirm Update ....... Completed
Engine MAIN Update .. Completed
Scanner Firm Update.. Completed
SysFirm Update .......
Engine MAIN Update .. Flash Update
Scanner Firm Update..Flash Update
(8) “Update Completed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is com-
pleted properly.
6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not com-
pleted properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display. Turn OFF the
power, and then check the following items. After confirming and cleaning the problems, restart
updating from the beginning.
•
•
•
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the updating data written to the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(9) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
(10) Perform the initialization of the updating data.
•
•
•
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Key in “947”, and then press the [START] button.
Press the [INITIALIZE] button.
[B] Confirmation of the updated data
After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data was overwritten properly.
<Updating System ROM>
08-900: System ROM version
08-920: FROM basic section software version
08-921: FROM internal program version
08-922: UI data fixed section version
08-923: UI data common section version
08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON
<Updating Engine ROM>
08-903: Engine ROM version
<Updating Scanner ROM>
08-905: Scanner ROM version
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 8
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[C] Display during the update
Update is performed in parallel as shown in the transition diagram below.
Item Selection Screen for Update
［System ROM］
［Engine ROM］
［Scanner ROM］
0. OS Update
3. Engine Firmware Update
4. Scanner Firmware Update
1. UI Data Update
2. System Firmware Update
Update Completed
Below is an example of the changes of the LCD screen during update.
Note that the screen order may be different from the actual one, because a parallel update is performed
in the process.
Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously
6
Select items to be updated and press the
[START] button to start updating the
[System ROM], [Engine ROM] and
[Scanner ROM] in parallel.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the [System ROM]-[OS Update] has
been updated, “OS Update…Completed” is
displayed and the [UI Update] update will start.
When the [System ROM]-[UI Update] has been
updated, “UI Data Update…Completed” is dis-
played and the [System Firmware Update]
update will start.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the [Engine ROM] has been updated,
“Engine MAIN Update..Flash Update” is
changed to “Engine MAIN Update..Com-
pleted”.
When the [System ROM]-[System Firmware
Update] has been updated, “SysFirm
Update…Completed” is displayed.
6
When the [Scanner ROM] has been updated,
“Scanner Firm Update..Flash Update” is
changed to “Scanner Firm Update..Com-
pleted”.
When all data has been updated, “Update
Completed” is displayed.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed
properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display.
Failed items
Error message
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.1.2
Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the board
directly. The ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write data to these Flash ROMs.
Connect the download jig with the ROM writer via ROM writer adapter to write data. For the procedure
to write data, refer to the download procedure, instruction manual of each ROM writer, or others.
Download jig
(
)
PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG
ROM writer adapter
(
)
PWA-DL-ADP-350
PC
ROM writer
Fig.6-5
Note:
There are two types of the ROM writer adapter. Use the proper one according to the ROM writer
to be used. Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model
name indicated on the board. Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used
before connecting them. If an unapplied adapter is connected, the application of the ROM writer
judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented. Applicable combinations of the
ROM writer and adapter are as follows.
6
ROM writer
ROM writer adapter
Minato Electronics MODEL 1881XP
(or equivalent)
PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881 (model 1881)
Minato Electronics MODEL 1893/1895/1931/1940 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931 (model 1931)
(or equivalent)
model 1881
model 1931
(
)
LV650
[
]
[
]
PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881
PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931
Fig.6-6 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881
Fig.6-7 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
Precaution when writing the data
-
Consider two download jigs (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2) as “Download jig 0” and “Down load jig 2”
and do not mix them up when writing.
-
-
Set the writing voltage (VID) to 3.3 V.
When writing the data, set the address from 0 to 3FFFFF. The data may not be written correctly if
it is not set.
-
The Flash ROM in which the data will be written, on the download jig is selected by switching the
rotary switch on the adapter. Be sure to switch the rotary switch on the adapter depending on the
data (file) to be written.
File Name
RotarySwitch
Flash ROM
Download jig 0
jigu0-1.bin
jigu1-1.bin
jigu2-1.bin
N/A
Download jig 1
jigu0-0.bin
jigu1-0.bin
jigu2-0.bin
N/A
1
2
3
4
5
6
ROM1
ROM2
ROM3
ROM4
ROM5
ROM6
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Note:
Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM
version is different.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.1.3
K-PWA-DLM-320
The firmware of the equipment (engine ROM, scanner ROM) and the option (RADF ROM, Finisher
ROM, FAX ROM) can be updated individually by using K-PWA-DLM-320. Update the ROM data written
on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the board.
The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows.
<Updating Engine ROM>
Engine ROM data
<Updating Scanner ROM>
Scanner ROM data
<Updating RADF ROM>
RADF ROM data
<Updating Finisher ROM>
•
•
Finisher firmware
Saddle stitcher firmware
<Updating FAX ROM>
FAX ROM data
[A] Update Procedure
Since the procedure differs depending on the data, see the each procedure below.
Important:
•
•
Turn OFF the power before installing or removing the download jig.
Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be oper-
ated properly.
6
<Updating Engine ROM>
(1) Install the ROM to the download jig.
(2) Shut down the equipment.
(3) Take off the connector cover.
Connector cover
Fig.6-8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) Remove the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig.6-9
(5) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN344) on the logic PC board (LGC board).
Connector
Fig.6-10
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7) When the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts
blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does
not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the
following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
•
•
•
•
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<Updating Scanner ROM>
(1) Install the ROM to the download jig.
(2) Shut down the equipment.
(3) Take off the right upper cover.
Right upper cover
Fig.6-11
(4) Remove the cover plate.
6
Cover plate
Fig.6-12
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN16) on the scanning section control PC
board (SLG board).
Connector
Fig.6-13
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blink-
ing in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the fol-
lowing items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
•
•
•
•
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the right upper
cover.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<Updating RADF ROM>
(1) Install the ROM to the download jig.
(2) Shut down the equipment.
(3) Take off the RADF rear cover.
RADF rear cover
Fig.6-14
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN81) on the RADF control PC board.
6
Connector
Fig.6-15
(5) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(6) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly (at an interval
of approx. 0.8 sec.). The LED starts blinking in approx. 15 sec. since the update starts. It is
assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed or
the LED blinks fast (at an interval of approx. 0.1 sec.). In this case, turn OFF the power and
check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
•
•
•
•
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(7) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the RADF rear cover.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<Updating Finisher ROM>
Finisher firmware (MJ-1023/1024) and saddle stitcher firmware (MJ-1024 only) are written on the fin-
isher ROM. These two kinds of firmware can be updated individually by installing the download jig to
the finisher control PC board.
Remark:
The following updates are needed according to the finisher model.
•
•
MJ-1023 (Console type):
Only the update of “Finisher firmware” is needed.
MJ-1024 (Console type with the saddle stitcher):
Two kinds of update “Finisher firmware” and “Saddle stitcher firmware” are needed.
(1) Install the ROM to the download jig.
(2) Shut down the equipment.
(3) Take off the finisher rear cover.
Finisher rear cover
Finisher rear cover
[
]
[
]
MJ-1023
MJ-1024
Fig.6-16
*
Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board.
Connector
Fig.6-17
(5) Change the setting of the DIP switch on the finisher contorol PC board.
Change the setting of the DIP switch as follows according to the firmware to be updated.
Note:
Record the current settings of the DIP switch before changing them. After the updating is com-
pleted, return the DIP switch to the status as record.
6
Fig.6-18
<Updating Finisher Firmware>
Change all the setting of the DIP switch (1-8) to OFF.
<Updating Saddle Stitcher Firmware>
Change the setting of the DIP switch 1-6 to OFF and 7-8 to ON.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
Important:
The processing status can be confirmed by the lighting of the LED (LED 101-103) on the finisher
control board.
Fig.6-19
LED
Processing status
LED103
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
LED102
OFF
ON
LED101
ON
0% or above
15% or above
30% or above
45% or above
60% or above
75% or above
90% or above
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly (at interval of
0.8 sec). The LED starts blinking in approx. 30 sec. (finisher section) or 2 min. 30 sec. (saddle
stitcher section) since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start
blinking even though 1 min. has passed (finisher section) or 3 min. (saddle stitcher section), or
LED flashes fast (at interval of 0.1 sec.). In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following
items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
•
•
•
•
•
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
Is the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board set properly according to the download sec-
tion (finisher or saddle stitcher)?
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and return the DIP switch to the status before
updating.
(9) Install the finisher rear cover.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<Updating FAX ROM>
Important:
•
Before updating the FAX ROM, make sure to print out the current Function list for mainte-
nance, Function list (ADMIN), Phone book number information and Group number informa-
tion. In case the updating is failed and the registered information of the users is lost for some
reason, re-register the user information referring to the lists and recover it.
Confirm the following items before turning OFF the power of the equipment. Turning OFF the
power may clear the data below.
•
-
-
-
Confirm that the “MEMORY RX” LED is OFF and there are no memory reception data.
Print the “Mailbox/Relay box report” and then confirm that there are no F code data.
Press the [JOB STATUS] button to display the screen and then confirm that there are no
memory transmission data.
(2) Shut down the equipment.
(3) Take off the connector cover.
Connector cover
6
Fig.6-20
(4) Remove the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig.6-21
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN602) on the FAX board.
Connector
Fig.6-22
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blink-
ing in approx. 30 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the fol-
lowing items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
•
•
•
•
Is the download jig connected properly?
Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
(9) In the FAX Clearing Mode, perform the “FAX Set Up”.
•
Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
Key in “100”.
•
•
•
Press the [START] button.
Notes:
If the equipment does not work properly after the operation (9), follow the procedure below and
then perform the “Clearing the image data” in the FAX Clearing Mode to erase the image data in
the memory.
•
Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
Key in “102”.
•
•
•
Press the [START] button.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[B] Confirmation of the updated data
After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
was overwritten properly.
<Updating Engine ROM>
08-903: Engine ROM version
<Updating Scanner ROM>
08-905: Scanner ROM version
<Updating RADF ROM>
08-907: RADF ROM version
<Updating Finisher ROM>
08-908: Finisher ROM version
<Updating FAX ROM>
08-915: FAX ROM version
6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device
In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware by connecting the USB storage device on which
the firmware data is written to the USB connector mounted on the system control PC board and turning
ON the power.
The type of firmware to be updated can be selected on the LCD screen in this method. This allows to
update only the necessary firmware individually or to update all firmware in a batch.
The type of firmware which can be updated with this method are as follows in the table below.
Model specific
Firmware
Stored
Data file name
folder name
Master data
Hard disk
1, 2, 3 ... n
*
The file name should be consecutive
numbers from 1 to “n” without file
extension. The capacity of each file
is approx. 8 MB. However, the file
capacity of “n” (last number) may be
less than 8 MB.
28_451C
System ROM System control PC board
(SYS board)
firmImage0.bin, firmImage1.bin
Engine ROM
Logic PC board
(LGC board)
firmImage2.bin
Scanner ROM Scanning section control PC board
(SLG board)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 26
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important:
• Only the USB storage device which meets the following conditions should be used for updat-
ing. Be careful since updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed.
-
A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the
USB port) and its capacity is between 64 MB to 512 MB (or 1 GB).
Operation of the USB storage device used for updating has been confirmed at the input
check of this equipment (Test mode 03).
-
(
-
A USB storage device which is complied with the following standards regulated by USB-IF
(USB Implementers Forum)
Class number:
Sub-class number:
Protocol number:
8 (=08h) (Mass-storage class)
6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only)
*
Most common USB storage devices are complied with the specification above and can
be used for updating. However, the operation in all the Multi Functional Digital Color
Systems and Multi Functional Digital Systems is not necessarily guaranteed since the
most of these devices are developed based on the use in PC environment (Windows or
Macintosh). Therefore, confirm thoroughly that the device is operational in the equip-
ment for which the updating will be performed when purchasing the device.
•
The data file for updating is stored in the model specific folder.
Never change the model specific folder name since it is used for discriminating the data file
when the updating data files for multiple models are stored in the USB storage device.
•
•
Store the model specific folder in the root directory of the USB storage device.
Storing the data file directly in the root directory is possible when the updating data files for
one specific model is stored in the USB storage device.
However, if the model specific folder for the same model as that of the data file stored in the
root directory already exists, the model specific folder will have the priority.
6
•
•
The USB storage device complied with USB1.1 and USB2.0 can be used for updating. How-
ever, the update is performed in the speed of USB1.1 when the device complied with USB2.0
is used.
Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a USB
connection type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk) since it is never guaran-
teed.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 27
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[A] Update procedure
Important:
•
The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format. Be careful since
the devices formatted in FAT32 or NTFS format will not be operated. The file system can be
confirmed on the properties in applications such as Explorer of Windows.
Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not to be
operated properly.
•
(1) Connect the USB storage device to the PC and write the model specific folder in which the data
file is stored.
•
Confirm the model specific folder name and data file name before writing the data (
•
•
The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format.
Windows 95 and NT do not support USB. Be careful since the data can not be written on the
devices in the PCs with these operating systems.
(2) Shut down the equipment.
(3) Take off the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig.6-23
(4) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB storage device
(
)
USB connector host
Fig.6-24
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 28
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5) Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed after 3 minutes. “*” is displayed
next to the items to be updated. (All items other than "0. OS Update" are selected in the default
settings.)
Note:
The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB
storage device. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB storage
device in the following conditions.
Item
Condition
firmImage0.bin is written.
0. OS Update
1. HDD Update
All master data files (1, 2, 3 ... n) are written.
firmImage0.bin is written.
2. UI Data Update
3. System Firmware Update
4. Engine Firmware Update
5. Scanner Firmware Update
firmImage0.bin and firmImage1.bin are written.
firmImage2.bin is written.
6
firmImage2.bin is written.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 29
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed. In this
case, turn OFF the power of the equipment and connect the device properly. Then repeat the
procedure from (5).
If the updating data file does not exist or a data file for other model is stored, the following mes-
sage is displayed. In this case, turn OFF the power of the equipment and confirm if the data file
stored in the USB storage device is correct. Then repeat the procedure from (5).
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 30
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(6) Select the item with the digital keys.
“*” is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the “*” by pressing the number of the
item. All items are selected in the default settings.
•
•
Select all items to update the firmware of the equipment in a batch.
Select items as follows to update individually.
<Updating OS data>
Select “0. OS Update” only.
<Updating Master data>
Select “1. HDD Update” only.
<Updating System ROM>
Select “2. UI Data Update” and “3. System Firmware Update”.
<Updating Engine ROM>
Select “4. Machine Firmware Update” only.
<Updating Scanner ROM>
Select “5. Scanner Firmware Update” only.
Example: Updating the master data and system ROM
6
(Updating all the items is taken as an example and explained in the following procedures.)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) Press the [START] button.
Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Status display during update
Status display when update is completed
OS Update ....... Completed
OS Update
.......
HD Data Update .......
HD Data Update ....... Completed
UI Data Update ....... Completed
SysFirm Update ....... Completed
Engine MAIN Update .. Completed
Scanner Firm Update.. Completed
UI Data Update .......
SysFirm Update .......
Engine MAIN Update .. Flash Update
Scanner Firm Update.. Flash Update
(8) “Update Completed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is com-
pleted properly.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not com-
pleted properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display. Turn OFF the
power, and then check the following items. After confirming and clearing the problems, restart
updating from the beginning.
•
•
•
•
Is the data file written properly on the USB storage device?
Is the USB storage device installed properly?
Do the USB storage device and equipment operate properly?
(9) Turn OFF the power, remove the USB storage device and install the cover plate.
(10) Perform the initialization of the updating data.
•
•
•
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Key in “947”, and then press the [START] button.
Press the [INITIALIZE] button.
6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[B] Confirmation of the updated data
After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the
data was overwritten properly.
<Updating Master data>
08-924: Version of UI data language 1 in HDD
08-925: Version of UI data language 2 in HDD
08-926: Version of UI data language 3 in HDD
08-927: Version of UI data language 4 in HDD
08-928: Version of UI data language 5 in HDD
08-929: Version of UI data language 6 in HDD
08-931: Version of UI data language 7 in HDD
08-933: HDD unit data version
08-934: Version of Web UI data language 1 in HDD
08-935: Version of Web UI data language 2 in HDD
08-936: Version of Web UI data language 3 in HDD
08-937: Version of Web UI data language 4 in HDD
08-938: Version of Web UI data language 5 in HDD
08-939: Version of Web UI data language 6 in HDD
<Updating System ROM>
08-900: System ROM version
08-922: UI data fixed section version
08-923: UI data common section version
08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON
<Updating Engine ROM>
08-903: Engine ROM version
<Updating Scanner ROM>
08-905: Scanner ROM version
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[C] Display during the update
Update is performed in parallel as shown in the transition diagram below.
Item Selection Screen for Update
[System ROM]
0. OS Update
[Master data]
[Engine ROM]
[scanner ROM]
4. Engine
Firmware Update
5. Scanner
Firmware Update
1. HDD Update
2. UI Data Update
3. System
Firmware Update
Update Completed
6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Below is an example of the changes of the LCD screen during update.
Note that the screen order may be different from the actual one, because a parallel update is performed
in the process.
Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously
The initial screen is displayed and the recogni-
tion of the USB storage device connected to
the equipment is started.
When the device is recognized properly, the
screen for selecting update items is displayed.
Select items to be updated and press the
[START] button to start updating the
[System ROM], [Master Data], [Engine ROM]
and [Scanner ROM] in parallel.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the [System ROM]-[OS Update] has
been updated, “OS Update…Completed” is
displayed and the [UI Update] update will start.
6
When the [System ROM]-[UI Update] has been
updated, “UI Data Update…Completed” is dis-
played and the [System Firmware Update]
update will start.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the [Engine ROM] has been updated,
“Engine MAIN Update..Flash Update” is
changed to “Engine MAIN Update..Com-
pleted”.
When the [System ROM]-[System Firmware
Update] has been updated, “SysFirm
Update…Completed” is displayed.
Total files
Copies
File name of
master data
When the [Master Data] has been updated,
“HD Data Update…Completed” is displayed.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the [Scanner ROM] has been updated,
“Scanner Firm Update..Flash Update” is
changed to “Scanner Firm Update..Com-
pleted”.
When all data has been updated, “Update
Completed” is displayed.
6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
*
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed and the
update is interrupted.
*
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed
properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display.
Failed items
Error message
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2.1
Appendix
[A] Assist Mode
This equipment has the Assist Mode to enable the following functions.
(1) NVRAM flag clearing (“Clear NvRAM flags.”)
Even if the firmware downloading has been completed normally, the Recovery Mode may acci-
dentally start up when the power is turned ON again. In this case, clear the NVRAM flags used in
the download process with this function. (Normally, the flags are automatically cleared in the
download process.)
Also in the case the Recovery Mode accidentally starts up after the replacement of NVRAM on
the SYS board, the flags are cleared with this function.
(2) Data storage partition formatting (“Format Loader Partition.”)
When a defection occurs on the UI data, etc. which are stored in the HDD, the partition with the
stored UI data, etc. is formatted with this function. (Do not use this function since it is not nor-
mally necessary.)
(3) HDD partition creation (“All Partition Delete and Create Loader Partition.”)
When the HDD is replaced or UI data, etc. are downloaded using the USB storage, it is neces-
sary to format a partition in the HDD before downloading. In this case, the partition is created in
the HDD with this function.
Notes:
1. When downloading with a download jig, it is not necessary to format a partition in advance.
2. Perform the HDD partition formatting only when a new HDD and scrambler board are installed
since all data in the current HDD are erased by this operation.
[B] Operating Procedure of Assist Mode
6
(1) Turn ON the power while [3] button and [CLEAR] button are pressed simultaneously.
•
The following screen is displayed.
(2) Select the item with the digital keys and press the [START] button.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
6 - 41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c FIRMWARE UPDATING
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
6 - 42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7.1 Output Channel
The followings are three output channels which are not linked with the cover switch.
1) +3.3V
+3.3VA:
+3.3VB:
+3.3VB:
+3.3VB:
CN464 Pins 9, 10 and 11
Output to the SYS board
CN464 Pins 15 and 16
Output to the SYS board
CN466 Pin 3
Output to the LGC board
CN467 Pins 17 and 18
Output to the SLG board
2) +5.1V
+5.1VA:
+5.1VB:
+5.1VB:
+5.1VB:
+5.1VB:
+5.1VB:
+5.1VB:
CN464 Pins 21, 22, 23 and 24
Output to the SYS board
CN464 Pin 19
Output to the SYS board
CN466 Pin 1
Output to the LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit (via LGC board)
CN467 Pins 5 and 6
Output to the RADF
CN467 Pins 21 and 22
Output to the SLG board
CN468 Pin 4
Output to the finisher
CN469 Pin 5
Output to the FIL board
3) +12V
+12VA:
+12VB:
+12VB:
+12VB:
CN464 Pin 5
Output to the SYS board
CN464 Pin 3
Output to the SYS board
CN466 Pin 16
Output to the LGC board
CN471 Pin 1
7
Output to the FAX unit
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The followings are two output channels which are linked with the cover switch.
1) +5.1V
+5.1VD:
CN466 Pin 11
Output to the LGC board
2) +24V
+24VD1:
+24VD1:
+24VD1:
+24VD2:
+24VD3:
+24VD4:
+24VD5:
CN465 Pins 1 and 2
Output to the LGC board, Bridge unit (via LGC board)
CN469 Pins 1 and 2
Output to the PFP/LCF
CN470 Pin 1
Output to the power supply cooling fan
CN465 Pins 5 and 6
Output to the DRV board
CN467 Pins 1 and 2
Output to the RADF
CN467 Pins 10, 12 and 14
Output to the SLG board
CN468 Pin 2
Output to the finisher
Output voltage by the type of connector
Main switch line
Connector
Destination
Voltage
CN464
SYS board
+3.3VA, +3.3VB, +5.1VA, +5.1VB, +12VA,
+12VB
CN466
LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board),
Bridge unit (via LGC board)
+3.3VB, +5.1VB, +12VB
CN467
CN468
CN469
CN471
SLG board, RADF
Finisher
+3.3VB, 5.1VB
+5.1VB
FIL board
+5.1VB
FAX unit
+12VB
Cover switch line
Connector
Destination
Voltage
CN465
LGC board, DRV board, PFP/LCF (via LGC +24VD1, +24VD2
board), Bridge unit (via LGC board)
CN466
CN467
CN468
CN469
CN470
LGC board
+5.1VD
SLG board, RADF
Finisher
+24VD3, +24VD4
+24VD5
PFP/LCF
+24VD1
Power supply cooling fan
+24VD1
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c POWER SUPPLY UNIT
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
7 - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2 Fuse
When the power supply secondary fuse is blown out, confirm that there is no abnormally with each part
using the following table.
Voltage
Board/Unit
Part
Fuse type
+24VD1
LGC
Polygonal motor
Tray-up motor
ADU motor
F3:8A (Semi time-lag)
Main motor
Developer motor
Transport motor
Drum cleaner brush motor
Transfer belt cleaner auger motor
Toner motor
Laser unit cooling fan
IH control board cooling fan
Ozone exhaust fan
Internal cooling fan
2nd transfer roller contact clutch
Bypass feed clutch
Registration clutch
Upper transport clutch (high speed)
Upper transport clutch (low speed)
Lower transport clutch (high speed)
Lower transport clutch (low speed)
Upper drawer feed clutch
Lower drawer feed clutch
ADU clutch
Color developer toner supply clutch
Color developer drive clutch
Black developer drive clutch
Black developer lifting clutch
Transfer belt cleaner contact clutch
Bypass pickup solenoid
Image quality sensor shutter solenoid
Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid
Discharge LED
7
Key copy counter / Copy key card
Charger cleaner motor
Power supply Power supply cooling fan
PFP/LCF
Bridge unit
+24VD2
DRV
Revolver motor
Exit motor
F4:8A (Semi time-lag)
F5:8A (Semi time-lag)
+24VD3
+24VD4
RADF
SLG
Exposure lamp (lamp inverter)
CCD drive circuit (CCD board)
Scanner unit cooling fan
Scan motor
+24VD5
Finisher
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c POWER SUPPLY UNIT
7 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. REMOTE SERVICE
There are following functions as Remote Service.
(1) Auto Supply Order
Automatically orders the toner and used toner container by FAX or E-mail.
(2) Service Notification
Notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or FAX.
8.1 Auto Supply Order
8.1.1
Outline
Automatically orders the toner and used toner container.
(1) Placing an Order
There are two ways to place an order.
•
•
FAX
Installation of the FAX board is required.
If the FAX board has not been installed, it is regarded as OFF setting.
E-mail (E-mail body + TIFF image)
(2) Order Intervals
When the toner empty occurs, the number of occurrences is counted. And when it reaches the
specified number for CONDITION, the order is placed automatically.
With regard to the used toner container, it is done according to the number of the used toner con-
tainer full detection.
The number of the CONDITION can be set respectively for the toner and used toner container.
(3) If Order Failure Occurs
If some problems occur and the order cannot be placed after registering an order as a job, refer
to the standard countermeasure for the FAX/E-mail transmission failure.
8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.1.2
Setting Item
To enable Auto Supply Order, the following settings are required.
Note:
When selecting E-mail to place an order, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails are
available. Confirm the details to the administrator.
(1) Self-diagnosis (08) Setting
As the default setting, the Auto Supply Order setting screen is not displayed on the touch panel.
To display it, switching the Valid/Invalid setting (08-765) is required.
0: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX)
1: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX/HTTP)*
2: Invalid (Default)
When changing the setting value from "2" (default) to "0", the Auto Supply Order setting screen is
displayed. (* HTTP has not been supported yet.)
(2) Touch Panel Setting
Each item is set from the Auto Supply Order screen on the touch panel.
Entering the password and customer information is required because the setting is made from
the ADMIN screen. Setting it with the administrator is a must.
•
Basic setting
[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [ORDER INFORMATION]
AUTO SUPPLY ORDER
FAX NUMBER
E-MAIL
Ordered by: [FAX], [MAIL], [HTTP] (*1)
FAX number of supplier (*2)
E-mail address of supplier (*3)
Customer information
CUSTOMER
NAME
TEL NUMBER
E-MAIL
ADDRESS
SUPPLIER
NAME
Supplier information
ADDRESS
SERVICE TECNICIAN
NUMBER
Service technician information
NAME
TEL NUMBER
E-MAIL
*1 HTTP has not been supported yet.
*2 Even when "FAX" is selected, the order is not placed without entering the FAX number.
*3 Even when "MAIL" is selected, the order is not placed without entering the E-mail address.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
Detailed setting for the order
[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [TONER ORDERING]
***** TONER ORDER
PART NUMBER
CONDITIOIN
Order information (TONER /USED TONER CONTAINER)
Part number to be ordered
The number of conditions (*)
QUANTITY
The quantity to be ordered
AUTO ORDER
ON/OFF setting of order for each part
*
The order is placed when the number of replacement reaches the number specified for the
CONDITION.
•
•
FAX number of this equipment (common information)
[ADMIN] > [FAX] > [TERMINAL ID]
ID NAME
ID name of this equipment
FAX NUMBER
FAX number of this equipment
E-mail information of this equipment (common information)
[ADMIN] > [E-MAIL]
FROM ADDRESS
E-mail address of this equipment (*)
FROM NAME
E-mail username of this equipment
*
When sending an E-mail, validity of the address is checked. If the address is invalid, it is
not sent.
(3) Output of setting list of the Auto Supply Order Keying in the following buttons and keys prints the
setting list.
[USER FUNCTIONS] [USER] [LISTS] [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [8] [START]
8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.1.3
Setting procedure
(1) Start up the self-diagnosis setting mode 08-765, and then change the setting value to "0".
(2) Turn the power OFF, and then ON.
(3) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button to enter the user function screen.
(4) Press the [ADMIN] button.
•
When the Administrator Password has been set, ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD screen is
displayed.
Fig.8-1
(5) Press the [PASSWORD] button and the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then key in the
Administrator Password and press the [ENTER] button.
*
Confirm the password to the administrator.
Fig.8-2
(6) Press the [SERVICE] button in the ADMIN screen.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 4
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) The SERVICE screen is displayed.
Fig.8-3
(8) Press the [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] button.
Fig.8-4
(9) Press the [ORDER INFORMATION] button.
(10) The ORDER INFORMATION screen is displayed.
8
Fig.8-5
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(11) Press the buttons on the screen of ORDER INFORMATION to set the required item.
[FAX]/[MAIL]/[OFF] Select the [FAX] or the [MAIL] button for the transmitting way of order.
(HTTP has not been supported yet.)
[OFF]: Turn off the AUTO SUPPLY ORDER function.
[FAX NUMBER]
[E-MAIL]
Input the FAX number of supplier.
(To transmit by FAX, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do not
input the number.)
Input the E-mail address of supplier.
(To transmit by E-mail, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do
not input the address.)
(12) Press the [NEXT] button.
(Press the [ENTER] button to register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SERVICE screen.
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel this register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SER-
VICE screen.)
(13) The CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER screen is displayed.
Fig.8-6
(14) Press the buttons of the screen of CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER to set the required item.
CUSTOMER
[NAME]
Input the name of customer.
[TEL NUMBER]
[E-MAIL]
[ADDRESS]
Input the telephone number of customer.
Input the E-mail address of customer.
nput the address of customer.
SUPPLIER
[NAME]
[ADDRESS]
Input the name of supplier.
Input the address of supplier.
(15) Press the [NEXT] button.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(16) The SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING screen is displayed.
Fig.8-7
(17) Press a button on the screen of SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING to set the required
item.
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NUMBER]
[NAME]
Input the number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
Input the name of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[TEL NUMBER]
[E-MAIL]
Input the telephone number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
Input the E-mail address of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[DESCRIPTION] Input the remarks if you want to register.
RESULT PRINTING
[OFF] / [ALWAYS] / [ON ERROR]
Whichever you press, the result list is printed.
(18) Press the [ENTER] button to register and complete the order information setting.
(19) The SERVICE screen is returned.
8
Fig.8-8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(20) Press the [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] button.
Fig.8-9
(21) Press the [TONER ORDERING] button.
(22) The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed.
Fig.8-10
(23) Press the [YELLOW(Y)] button. (Select the part to be ordered.)
Fig.8-11
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(24) Input the order information of TONER.
[PART NUMBER]
Toner number
[CONDITION]
The order is placed when the number of toner empty reaches the number
specified for the CONDITION.
[QUANTITY]
Quantity to be ordered
AUTO ORDER
[ON]/[OFF]
Allows you to select whether each part to be ordered is placed automati-
cally or not.
(25) Press the [ENTER] button to register the setting of toner order.
(26) The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed.
Fig.8-12
(27) Press the [MAGENTA(M)] / [CYAN(C)] / [BLACK(K)] / [USED TONER CONTAINER] button, and
then input the order information in the same way.
8
Fig.8-13
(28) Press the [ENTER] button to register the order information.
(29) The screen returns to the TONER ORDERING.
(30) Press the [USER FUNCTION] button to be switched from the ADMIN screen on touch panel and
returned to the BASIC screen, so that the setting of Auto Supply Order is finished.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note:
Auto Supply Order setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).
Items
08 code
Contents
The transmitting way of order
[FAX]/[MAIL] /[OFF]
732
0: Ordered by FAX
1: Ordered by E-mail
2: Ordered by HTTP
3: OFF
SUPPLIER
[FAX NUMBER]
733
734
738
739
740
741
746
747
742
743
744
745
748
764
Maximum 32 digits
Maximum 192 letters
Maximum 50 letters
Maximum 32 digits
Maximum 192 letters
Maximum 100 letters
Maximum 50 letters
Maximum 100 letters
Maximum 5 digits
SUPPLIER
[E-MAIL]
CUSTOMER
[NAME]
CUSTOMER
[TEL NUMBER]
CUSTOMER
[E-MAIL]
CUSTOMER
[ADDRESS]
SUPPLIER
[NAME]
SUPPLIER
[ADDRESS]
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NUMBER]
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NAME]
Maximum 50 letters
Maximum 32 digits
Maximum 192 letters
Maximum 128 letters
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[TEL NUMBER]
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[E-MAIL]
Remarks
[DESCRIPTION]
RESULT PRINTING
0: OFF
[OFF] / [ALWAYS] / [ON ERROR]
1: Always
2: ON Error
YELLOW(Y) TONER
[PART NUMBER]
755
757
756
752
754
753
749
751
Maximum 20 digits
YELLOW(Y) TONER
[CONDITION]
1-99
YELLOW(Y) TONER
[QUANTITY]
1-99
MAGENTA(M) TONER
[PART NUMBER]
Maximum 20 digits
MAGENTA(M) TONER
[CONDITION]
1-99
MAGENTA(M) TONER
[QUANTITY]
1-99
CYAN(C) TONER
[PART NUMBER]
Maximum 20 digits
1-99
CYAN(C) TONER
[CONDITION]
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Items
CYAN(C) TONER
08 code
Contents
750
1-99
[QUANTITY]
BLACK(K) TONER
[PART NUMBER]
758
760
759
761
763
762
Maximum 20 digits
BLACK(K) TONER
[CONDITION]
1-99
BLACK(K) TONER
[QUANTITY]
1-99
USED TONER CONTAINER
[PART NUMBER]
Maximum 20 digits
USED TONER CONTAINER
[CONDITION]
1-99
1-99
USED TONER CONTAINER
[QUANTITY]
8.1.4
Order Sheet Format
The sample of order sheet is as follows.
(1) FAX (This format is the same as that of TIFF image attached E-mail.)
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
DATE & TIME
:99-99-'99 99:99
CUSTOMER NUMBER
CUSTOMER NAME
:XXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER ADDRESS
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS
SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL
SUPPLIER NAME
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SUPPLIER ADDRESS
PART NUMBER
QUANTITY
TONER CARTRIDGE
CYAN
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
99
99
MAGENTA
(*1)
YELLOW
99
99
99
BLACK
USED TONER CONTAINER
DESCRIPTION AREA ..............................................
.................................................................
8
DEVICE DESCRIPTION
SERIAL NUMBER
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
DEVICE FAX NUMBER
DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS
TOTAL
BLACK
TWIN COLOR
999999999
999999999
FULL COLOR
999999999
999999999
PRINT COUNTER
SCAN COUNTER
999999999
999999999
999999999
999999999
Fig.8-14
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(2) E-MAIL (TIFF image attached with the E-mail is the same format with that of the FAX order
sheet.)
SUBJECT: SUPPLY ORDER REQUEST
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
Date&Time: '05-06-14 00:17
Customer Number: S01 MachineName: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c
SerialNumber: 1234567890
Device FAX Number:
Device Email: [email protected]
OrderInformation:
YELLOW PartNumber: YELLOW-03 Quantity:17
CounterInformation:
PrintCounter(Small) FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 141
(*1)
PrintCounter(Large) FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 0
ScanCounter FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 7
Fig.8-15
(3) Result list
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
ORDER XXXXXXXXX
DATE & TIME
:99-99-'99 99:99
CUSTOMER NUMBER
CUSTOMER NAME
:XXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER ADDRESS
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
TEL NUMBER
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL
SUPPLIER NAME
SUPPLIER ADDRESS
PART NUMBER
QUANTITY
TONER CARTRIDGE
CYAN
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXX
99
99
MAGENTA
YELLOW
99
99
99
(*1)
BLACK
USED TONER CONTAINER
DESCRIPTION AREA ..............................................
.................................................................
DEVICE DESCRIPTION
SERIAL NUMBER
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
DEVICE FAX NUMBER
DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS
TOTAL
BLACK
TWIN COLOR
999999999
999999999
FULL COLOR
999999999
999999999
PRINT COUNTER
SCAN COUNTER
999999999
999999999
999999999
999999999
Fig.8-16
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.2 Service Notification
8.2.1
Outline
This function automatically notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or
FAX. The following three are the items to be notified.
•
•
•
Total Counter Transmit
When this function is effective, it notifies each counter information periodically (on the set date and
time every month).
Service Call Transmit (E-mail only)
When this function is effective, it notifies the corresponding error code and such at a service call
error.
PM Counter Transmit
When this function is effective, it notifies that the PM timing has come when the present PM count
has reached to its setting value, or the present PM driving count has reached to its setting value.
8.2.2
Setting
Note:
When using this function, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails or FAXes are avail-
able. Confirm the details to the administrator.
[ 1 ] Preparation
The screen to set this function is not displayed at the default setting.
Set this screen to be displayed with the following code (08).
08-774 Setting of notification display
0: Invalid (Default)
1: Valid
8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[ 2 ] Setting procedure
(1) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and select the [ADMIN] button. Then enter the password
and press the [ENTER] button.
•
Confirm the password to the administrator.
Fig.8-17
(2) Press the [SERVICE] button.
Fig.8-18
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) Press the [SERVICE NOTIFICATION] button.
Fig.8-19
(4) Press the [E-MAIL] or [FAX] button in "SERVICE NOTIFICATION".
•
When the [OFF] button is pressed, all functions related Service Notification become ineffec-
tive.
Fig.8-20
8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5) Enter the E-mail address or FAX number of the destination.
•
When pressing the [E-MAIL] button, the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then enter the
E-mail addresses and press the [ENTER] button. (Maximum 3 addresses can be set.)
Fig.8-21
•
Press the [FAX NUMBER] button, key in the FAX number and then press the [ENTER] button.
Fig.8-22
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(6) Press the [ON] button to notify or [OFF] button not to notify of each item for E-mail and FAX.
When the Total Count Transmit is set ON, the screen to set the notification date is displayed.
Then set the notification date with the following procedure. (The information is notified on the set
date and time every month.)
Fig.8-23
•
•
Key in the date (acceptable values: 1-31) in "Date" and press the [SET] button. (Correct the
value by pressing the [CLEAR] button if the [SET] button is not yet pressed. Correct the value
by pressing the [RESET] button to move the cursor back to the digit to be corrected if the
[SET] button is already pressed.)
Key in the time (acceptable values: 00:00-23:59) in "Time".
Key in the time in the hour column of "Time", press the [SET] button, key in the time in the
minute column of "Time" and press the [SET] button. (Correct the value by pressing the
[CLEAR] button if the [SET] button is not yet pressed. Correct the value by pressing the
[RESET] button to move the cursor back to the digit to be corrected if the [SET] button is
already pressed.)
•
Press the [ENTER] button to set all. The display returns to the screen at procedure 5).
(7) Press the [ENTER] button. The setting completes.
8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note:
Service Notification setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).
Items
08 code
767
Contents
0: OFF (Invalid) 1:E-mail 2:FAX
Maximum 192 letters
Maximum 192 letters
Maximum 192 letters
Maximum 32 digits
0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)
1 to 31
Service Notification setting
E-mail address 1
768
E-mail address 2
777
E-mail address 3
778
FAX number
1145
769
Total Counter Transmit setting
Total counter transmission date setting
770
Total counter transmission interval setting
(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
776
00:00-23:59
Service Call Transmit setting
PM Counter Transmit setting
775
771
0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)
0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.2.3
Items to be notified
The items to be notified are shown below.
1) Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by E-mail (XML file attached to E-mail has also the
same format.)
Subject: Counter Notification
(In case of the PM Counter Transmit, it is shown as "Periodical Maintenance Notification".)
Date
: 06/14/2005 13:47
1
2
3
4
Machine Model : TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c
SerialNumber : 1234567890
Total Counter : 00004787
ChargeCounterFormat:
LargeSizeChargeCount
1
LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition 1
5
6
PMCounterFormat:
LargeSizePMCount
LargeSizePMPaperDefinition
7
8
1
0
Charge Counter:
Large
Small
<Print Counter>
Full Color -------------------------------------
9
Copy
Print
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
10
Twin Color ------------------------------------
Copy 00000000 00000000
Black ------------------------------------------
11
Copy
Print
List
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
12
13
14
15
FAX
<Scan Counter>
Full Color -------------------------------------
Copy Scan 00000000 00000000
16
17
Net Scan
00000000 00000000
Twin Color ------------------------------------
Copy Scan 00000000 00000000
Black ------------------------------------------
Copy Scan 00000000 00000000
18
19
20
21
FAX Scan
Net Scan
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
<FAX Counter>
Transmit
Receive
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
22
23
Periodical Maintenance Counter:
Set PM
Current PM
Set PMTime
00150000
00004787
00000000
24
25
26
27
8
CurrentPMTime 00000000
28
Printer Error History:
Date
Time
-----------------------------------------------
ErrorCode
06/13/2005 16:44
06/12/2005 22:28
06/12/2005 22:23
05/15/2005 22:23
04/25/2005 11:12
F110
F110
F110
F110
F110
(*1)
Fig.8-24
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Date
1
2
Machine model name
Serial number
3
Total counter value
4
Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
5
6
7
Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
8
Number of output pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR)
Number of output pages in the Printer Function (FULL COLOR)
Number of output pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)
Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK)
Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK)
Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR)
Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (FULL COLOR)
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (BLACK)
Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
Number of received pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
PM count setting value
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
PM count present value
PM driving count setting value
PM driving count present value
History of error
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2) Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by FAX
*1 In case of the PM Counter Transmit, the title is replaced to "PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
NOTIFICATION".
COUNTER NOTIFICATION (*1)
DATE
: 05/06/14 13:47
1
2
3
4
MACHINE MODEL : TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c
SERIAL NUMBER : 1234567890
TOTAL COUNTER : 00004787
CHARGE COUNTER FORMAT
PM COUNTER FORMAT
LARGE SIZE PM COUNT
LARGE SIZE PM PAPER DEFINITION : 1
5
6
LARGE SIZE CHARGE COUNT : 1
LARGE SIZE CHARGE PAPER DEFINITION : 1
: 1
7 8
CHARGE COUNTER
PRINT COUNTER
SCAN COUNTER
FULL COLOR
COPY SCAN 00000000 00000000
FULL COLOR
COPY
PRINT
LARGE
SMALL
LARGE
SMALL
9
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
16
17
10
NET SCAN
TWIN COLOR
00000000 00000000
LARGE SMALL
TWIN COLOR LARGE
SMALL
00000000 00000000
LARGE SMALL
11
18
COPY
BLACK
COPY
PRINT
LIST
COPY SCAN 00000000 00000000
BLACK LARGE SMALL
COPY SCAN 00000000 00000000
12
13
14
15
19
20
21
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
FAX SCAN
NET SCAN
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
FAX
FAX COUNTER
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE COUNTER
LARGE
SMALL
22
23
24
25
26
27
TRANSMIT
RECEIVE
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
SET PM
CURRENT PM
SET PM TIME
: 00000000
: 00000000
: 00000000
CURRENT PM TIME : 00000000
28
PRINTER ERROR HISTORY
DATE
TIME ERROR CODE
DATE
TIME ERROR CODE
05/06/13
05/06/12
05/06/12
05/05/15
05/04/25
16:44
22:28
22:23
22:23
11:12
F110
F110
F110
F110
F110
(*2)
Fig.8-25
8
Date
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Machine model name
Serial number
Total counter value
Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
8
Number of output pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR)
Number of output pages in the Printer Function (FULL COLOR)
Number of output pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)
Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK)
Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK)
Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR)
Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (FULL COLOR)
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (BLACK)
Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (BLACK)
Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
Number of received pages in the FAX Function (BLACK)
PM count setting value
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
PM count present value
PM driving count setting value
PM driving count present value
History of error
*2 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3) Service Call Transmit
Subject: Service Call Notification
1
Date: 06/14/2005 13:47
Machine Name: e-STUDIO451c SerialNumber:1234567890
2
3
Function: Print
Severity: Error
ErrorCode: XXXX
Message:
4
5
6
7
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
8
Printer Error History:
Date
Time
ErrorCode
------------------------------------------
06/13/2005 16:44
06/12/2005 22:28
06/12/2005 22:23
05/15/2005 22:23
04/25/2005 11:12
F110
F110
F110
F110
F110
(*1)
Fig.8-26
Date (When an error occurs)
Machine model name
Serial number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Function: Fixed at "Print"
Severity: Fixed at "Error"
Error code
Error message: The content of error is displayed.
History of error
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c REMOTE SERVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
8 - 24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
In this equipment, the user data, setting items and SRAM data can be backed up / restored by turning
the power ON after connecting the USB storage device on which the data cloning programs have been
written to the USB connector mounted on the SYS board.
The type of data to be backed up/restored can be selected on the LCD screen in this method.
This allows you to back up/restore only the necessary data individually or to back up/restore all data in
a batch.
Programs needed for data cloning with this method are given in the following table.
Storage location
Program file name
Root directory
rootusb, clone_28_451c
Important:
•
It is assumed that data cloning is to be performed when equipment is installed or options are
installed. If the address book has been registered, do not perform data cloning. Registered /
set data are lost.
•
The USB storage device for the data cloning must meet the following conditions. A data clon-
ing operation with any devices other than the following will not be guaranteed.
-
A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the
USB port) and its capacity is between 128 MB and 512 MB (or 1 GB).
A device compliant with the following specifications established by USB-IF (USB Imple-
menters Forum)
-
Class number:
Sub-Class number: 6 (=06h)
Protocol number: 80 (=50h)
8 (=08h)
(Mass storage class)
(SCSI transfer command set)
(Bulk-only)
*
Most of the common USB storage devices are compliant with the above specifications and
are therefore applicable to this data cloning. However, most of these devices were origi-
nally developed to be used in an environment for PCs (e.g. Windows or Macintosh) and
thus operations exclusively with this equipment have not been fully guaranteed. Therefore,
the user must thoroughly check in advance whether there will be any problem in operating
with this equipment when adopting one of these devices.
•
•
The USB storage devices compliant with both USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 can be used for this data
cloning. However, the operating speed when using a device compliant with USB 2.0 is equiv-
alent to the one with a device compliant with USB 1.1.
Data cloning with any storage devices other than a flash memory (e.g. USB-connectable
memory card reader, CD/DVD drive, hard disk) will never be guaranteed. Therefore never use
them for this operation.
•
•
Be sure to unplug the LAN cable and Fax line before data are backed up / restored. Also, do
not use the RADF and open the cover, drawer, etc. during the data cloning.
Data can be backed up / restored only for the same model and version. If the version is differ-
ent, update the firmware and back up / restore data in the same version.
•
•
Restore data to equipment which has the same options as when the data are backed up.
If "Department management" or "User management information" is restored, the counter val-
ues are copied as well, so clear all of them. However, the total counter is not copied.
Delete the backed up data in the USB storage device after the data cloning.
9
•
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 1
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[A] Data cloning procedure (Backup)
Important:
•
The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format. Note that any device
formatted in FAT32 or NTFS will not be operated. Its file system can be confirmed by opening
the properties of the device from Windows Explorer.
•
Never turn the power of the equipment OFF during data cloning, or the data could be dam-
aged and the operation not carried out properly.
(1) Connect the USB storage device to the PC and delete all data in the USB storage device.
•
•
The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format.
Windows95 and NT do not support USB. The data cannot be written into the device with the
PC in which these OS are installed.
(2) Write the program file.
•
Write the data cloning program into the root directory.
(3) Shut down the equipment.
(4) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB storage device
(
)
USB connector host
Fig. 9-1
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 2
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<User Data Backup>
(5) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-2
(6) Select the items to be performed with the digital keys.
•
In case of backup, select one of the following items.
<Backing up User data>
Select "1: User Data Back Up".
<Backing up Setting item>
Select "3: Setting Back Up".
<Backing up SRAM data>
Select "5: SRAM Data Back Up".
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
(7) Press the [1] button.
The screen to select the user data backup item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be
backed up are shown after the mark "*". (The items "4", "5" and "6" are selected in the screen by
default.)
9
Fig. 9-3
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 3
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(8) Select the items to be backed up with the digital keys.
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the
corresponding digital key is pressed.
•
To back up the data in a batch, select "4", "5" or "6". (Selecting "4" performs "1", "2" and "3"
together.)
•
To back up the data individually, select the following items.
<Backing up Address book>
Select "1: Address Book" only.
<Backing up Mail box>
Select "2: Mail Box" only.
<Backing up Template>
Select "3: Template" only.
<Backing up 1: Address Book, 2: Mail Box and 3: Template in a batch>
Select "4: Combined" only.
<Backing up Department management>
Select "5: Department Code" only.
<Backing up User management information>
Select "6: User Info" only.
E.g.:
In case of backing up the department management and user management information
Fig. 9-4
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 4
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(The following screens are given as an example of when all items are backed up.)
(9) Press the [Start] button.
The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-5
(10) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly com-
pleted.
Fig. 9-6
(11) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
9
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 5
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<Setting Backup>
(12) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(13) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-7
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
(14) Press the [3] button.
The screen to select the setting backup item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be backed
up are shown after the mark "*". (No items are selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-8
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 6
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(15) Select the items to be backed up with the digital keys.
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the
corresponding digital key is pressed.
•
To back up the data individually, select the following items.
<Backing up TopAccess: Network/Print Service>
Select "1: Network/Print Service" only.
<Backing up TopAccess: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX>
Select "2: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX" only.
<Backing up TopAccess: Notification >
Select "3: Notification" only.
<Backing up TopAccess: Directory Service>
Select "4: Directory Service" only.
<Backing up Option: Fax setting>
Select "5: FAX Kit" only.
<Backing up Option: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth setting>
Select "6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit" only.
(The following screens are given as an example of when all TopAccess items are backed up.)
(16) Press the [Start] button.
The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-9
9
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 7
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(17) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly com-
pleted.
Fig. 9-10
(18) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
<SRAM Data Backup>
(19) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(20) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-11
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 8
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(21) Press the [5] button.
The screen to select the SRAM data backup item is displayed. In this screen, the item to be
backed up is shown after the mark "*". (The item is not selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-12
(22) Select the item to be backed up with the digital keys.
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the
corresponding digital key is pressed.
•
To back up the data individually, select the following item.
<Backing up SRAM Data>
Select "1. SRAM".
Note:
The backup/restore of the SRAM data can be performed only for the same model.
The ROM version must be the same when the data are backed up and restored.
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are backed up.)
(23) Press the [Start] button.
The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen.
9
Fig. 9-13
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 9
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(24) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly com-
pleted.
Fig. 9-14
(25) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 10
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[B] Data cloning procedure (Restore)
Important:
•
The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format. Note that any device
formatted in FAT32 or NTFS will not be operated. Its file system can be confirmed by opening
the properties of the device from Windows Explorer.
•
Never turn the power of the equipment OFF during data cloning, or the data could be dam-
aged and the operation not carried out properly.
(1) Shut down the equipment.
(2) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB storage device
(
)
USB connector host
Fig. 9-15
9
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 11
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<User Data Restore>
(3) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-16
(4) Select the items to be performed with the digital keys.
•
In case of restore, select the following items.
<Restoring User data>
Select "2: User Data Restore".
<Restoring Setting item>
Select "4: Setting Restore".
<Restoring SRAM data>
Select "6: SRAM Data Restore".
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
(5) Press the [2] button.
The screen to select the user data restore item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be
restored are shown after the mark "*". (The items "4", "5" and "6" are selected in the screen by
default.)
Fig. 9-17
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 12
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(6) Select the items to be restored with the digital keys.
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the
corresponding digital key is pressed.
•
To restore the data in a batch, select "4", "5" or "6". (Selecting "4" performs "1", "2" and "3"
together.)
•
To restore the data individually, select the following items.
Be sure to select the same item as the one backed up individually.
<Restoring Address book>
Select "1: Address Book" only.
<Restoring Mail box>
Select "2: Mail Box" only.
<Restoring Template>
Select "3: Template" only.
<Restoring 1: Address Book, 2: Mail Box and 3: Template in a batch>
Select "4: Combined" only.
<Restoring Department management>
Select "5: Department Code" only.
<Restoring User management information>
Select "6: User Info" only.
E.g.:
In case of restoring the department management and user management information
Fig. 9-18
9
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 13
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(The following screens are given as an example of when all items are restored.)
(7) Press the [Start] button.
The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-19
(8) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly com-
pleted.
Fig. 9-20
(9) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
(10) Clear the counter (in case of restoring "Department Code" and "User Info").
Since the counter values are also copied, clear all of them. However, the total counter is not cop-
ied.
<Procedure>
Press the buttons as follows: [USER FUNCTION] → [ADMIN] → Enter the password →
[COUNTER] → [DEPARTMENT SETTING] → Enter the password → [RESET ALL COUNTERS]
*
Enable the department management when the [RESET ALL COUNTERS] button is set to be
disabled.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 14
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<Setting Restore>
(11) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(12) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-21
Note:
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
(13) Press the [4] button.
The screen to select the setting restore item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be restored
are shown after the mark "*". (No items are selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-22
9
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 15
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(14) Select the items to be restored with the digital keys.
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the
corresponding digital key is pressed.
•
To restore the data individually, select the following items.
<Restoring TopAccess: Network/Print Service>
Select "1: Network/Print Service" only.
<Restoring TopAccess: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX>
Select "2: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX" only.
<Restoring TopAccess: Notification >
Select "3: Notification" only.
<Restoring TopAccess: Directory Service>
Select "4: Directory Service" only.
<Restoring Option: Fax setting>
Select "5: FAX Kit" only.
<Restoring Option: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth setting>
Select "6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit" only.
Note:
Be sure to restore the same option items in the same condition as when the option items were
backed up.
(The following screens are given as an example of when all TopAccess items are restored.)
(15) Press the [Start] button.
The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-23
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 16
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(16) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly com-
pleted.
Fig. 9-24
(17) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
<SRAM Data Restore>
(18) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(19) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-25
Note:
9
After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 17
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(20) Press the [6] button.
The screen to select the SRAM data restore item is displayed. In this screen, the item to be
restored is shown after the mark "*". (The item is not selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-26
(21) Select the item to be restored with the digital keys.
The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the
corresponding digital key is pressed.
•
To restore the data individually, select the following item.
<Restoring SRAM Data>
Select "1. SRAM".
Note:
The backup/restore of the SRAM data can be performed only for the same model.
The ROM version must be the same when the data are backed up and restored.
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are restored.)
(22) Press the [Start] button.
The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-27
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 18
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(23) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly com-
pleted.
Fig. 9-28
(24) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
9
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 19
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[C] Confirmation of the error
"Back Up ERROR X" (X: Error number) is displayed at the top of the LCD screen when the data have
not been properly backed up / restored. In this case, turn the power OFF and then check the following
items. After confirming and solving the problem, back up / restore the data again from the beginning.
•
•
•
•
Does the USB storage device meet the conditions being used for this cloning?
Is the updated program file written on the USB storage device properly?
Is the USB storage device installed properly?
Is the USB storage device or the equipment damaged?
Fig. 9-29
Error number
ERROR 1
Error content
Copy error
I/F error
ERROR 2
ERROR 3
ERROR 4
ERROR 5
ERROR 6
ERROR 7
ERROR 8
ERROR 9
ERROR 10
ERROR 11
USB memory full error
Working folder error
File not found error
Security error
Checksum error
Model check error
Version check error
Destination check error
Serial number check error
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 20
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[D] Backup file
Backed up data files are encrypted.
<User data file>
The folder "user_data" is created in the root directory and the following files are stored in it.
Data item
File name
Address book
Mailbox
Template
BACKUP_ADDR.sct
BACKUP_MBOX.sct
BACKUP_TEMP.sct
Back up the Address book, Mailbox and Template in a batch BACKUP_ALL.sct
Department management information
User management information
BACKUP_Department.sct
BACKUP_User.sct
<Setting data file>
The folder "setting_data" is created in the root directory and the following files are stored in it.
Data item File name
Network / Print service
SaveAsFile / Email / InternetFAX
Notification setting
network.sct
scan.sct
notice.sct
ldap.sct
Directory Service
FAX setting
fax.sct
Wireless LAN setting / Bluetooth setting
wl.sct, bl.sct
<SRAM data file>
The folder "sram_data" is created in the root directory and the following file is stored in it.
Data item File name
SRAM
sram.sct
*
In addition to the backed up data, the following files are created in each folder.
Back up item File name
User data
Setting item data
SRAM data
user_data.txt
setting_data.txt
sram_data.txt
<Contents of file>
Version: VTD08.100 J
Serial Number: 0123456789
Date: MON SEP 26 18:34:40 2005
•
File format (user_data.txt, setting_data.txt, sram_data.txt: all in common)
9
Line 1: Version
Line 2: Serial number
Line 3: Date
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 21
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
9 - 22
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e-STUDIO281c/351c/451c WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
June 2005 © TOSHIBA TEC
10 - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.2 DC Wire Harness
d r a w e r
1 s t
d r a w e r
2 n d
d r a w e r
1 s t
d r a w e r
2 n d
1 s t d r a w e r
2 n d d r a w e r
S G 3 0
+ 5 . 1 V 2 B 9
I P R S 2 T 8
O E 2 7
S G 2 6
I / F 0 7 2 5
I / F 0 5 2 4
I / F 0 3 2 3
I / F 0 1 2 2
A D 7 2 1
A D 5 2 0
A D 3 1 9
A D 1 1 8
+ 5 . 1 V 1 B 7
S G 1 6
I P C S 1 W 5
+ 5 . 1 V 1 B 4
C S I P 1 2 3
W E 1 2
S G 1 1
I / F 6 1 0
I / F 4 9
3 0
2 9
2 8
2 7
2 6
2 5
2 4
2 3
2 2
2 1
2 0
1 9
1 8
1 7
1 6
1 5
1 4
1 3
1 2
1 1
1 0
9
I / F 2 8
8
I / F 0 7
7
A D 6 6
6
1 0
C N T - G N D
F - C N T
A D 4 5
5
9
A D 2 4
4
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
N C
N C
N C
N C
S G
A D 0 3
3
+ 5 . 1 V 2 B
2
1
S G
1
C N 3 J 4 1 9
T X D
S G
R X D
J 2
B 8
C T R C N T 2
+ 5 . 1 V B
B 7
B 6
B 5
B 4
B 3
B 2
B 1
A 8
A 7
S I Z E 0
S I Z E 1
S I Z E 2
S I Z E 3
S G
F L C T R
M N C T R
B K C T R
A 6
A 5
A 4
A 3
A 2
A 1
P G
E X T C T R
M C R U M
C T R C N T
C T R O N
+ 2 4 V D 1
C N 3 5 2
D o w n l o a d j i g ( L G C )
5 0
4 9
4 8
4 7
4 6
4 5
4 4
4 3
4 2
4 1
4 0
3 9
3 8
3 7
3 6
3 5
3 4
3 3
3 2
3 1
3 0
2 9
2 8
2 7
2 6
2 5
2 4
2 3
2 2
2 1
2 0
1 9
1 8
1 7
1 6
1 5
1 4
1 3
1 2
1 1
1 0
5 0
4 9
4 8
4 7
4 6
4 5
4 4
4 3
4 2
4 1
4 0
3 9
3 8
3 7
3 6
3 5
3 4
3 3
3 2
3 1
3 0
2 9
2 8
2 7
2 6
2 5
2 4
2 3
2 2
2 1
2 0
1 9
1 8
1 7
1 6
1 5
1 4
1 3
1 2
1 1
1 0
S G
S G
/ W R X
R M S L
+ 3 . 3 V A
/ C S
D o w n l o a d j i g ( F A X )
A 2 2
A 0 2
A 0 4
A 0 6
A 0 8
A 1 0
A 1 2
A 1 4
A 1 6
A 1 8
A 2 0
D A T A 1 5
D A T A 1 3
D A T A 1 1
D A T A 9
D A T A 7
D A T A 5
D A T A 3
D A T A 1
1 1
1 0
N C
S G
S G
1 0
1 0 1 0
D F C N T - 0 A
9
9
D F R Q - 0 A
9
9
b o a r d
M O D E M b o a r d
+ 3 . 3 V A
+ 3 . 3 V A
C S 0 - B
C S 0 - A
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
D F R R Q - 0 A
8
8
7
D F R A K - 0 A
7
7
6
6
6
S G
S G
5
D F T X D - 0 A
5
5
R D X
4
4
4
A 0 3
A 0 5
A 0 7
A 0 9
A 1 1
A 1 3
A 1 5
A 1 7
A 1 9
A 2 1
3
D F R X D - 0 A
3
3
2
2
D F S C S T - 0 A
2
1
1
1
D F A K - 0 A
J 4 2
C N 7 1
C N 1 1
D o w n l o a d j i g ( S L G )
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D A T A 1 4
D A T A 1 2
D A T A 1 0
[ L i n e 1 ] b o a r d N C U b o a r d [ L i n e 1 ]
[ L i n e 2 ] b o a r d N C U b o a r d [ L i n e 2 ]
D A T A 8
D A T A 6
D A T A 4
D A T A 2
D A T A 0
C N 1 0 5
B l u e t o o t h m o d u l e
( C C D )
P W A - F - C C D
5 0
5 0
S G
S G
4 9
4 8
4 7
4 6
4 5
4 4
4 3
4 2
4 1
4 0
3 9
3 8
3 7
3 6
3 5
3 4
3 3
3 2
3 1
3 0
2 9
2 8
2 7
2 6
2 5
2 4
2 3
2 2
2 1
2 0
1 9
1 8
1 7
1 6
1 5
1 4
1 3
1 2
1 1
1 0
4 9
4 8
4 7
4 6
4 5
4 4
4 3
4 2
4 1
4 0
3 9
3 8
3 7
3 6
3 5
3 4
3 3
3 2
3 1
3 0
2 9
2 8
2 7
2 6
2 5
2 4
2 3
2 2
2 1
2 0
1 9
1 8
1 7
1 6
1 5
1 4
1 3
1 2
1 1
1 0
/ W R X
R M S L
+ 3 . 3 V A
/ C S
A 2 2
A 0 2
A 0 4
A 0 6
A 0 8
A 1 0
A 1 2
A 1 4
A 1 6
A 1 8
A 2 0
D A T A 1 5
D A T A 1 3
D A T A 1 1
D A T A 9
D A T A 7
D A T A 5
D A T A 3
D A T A 1
D D R D I M M
W i r e l e s s L A N m o d u l e
S G
S G
+ 3 . 3 V A
+ 3 . 3 V A
C S 0 - B
C S 0 - A
R D X
A 0 3
A 0 5
A 0 7
A 0 9
A 1 1
A 1 3
A 1 5
A 1 7
A 1 9
A 2 1
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D A T A 1 4
D A T A 1 2
D A T A 1 0
D I M M [ 0 ]
D I M M [ 1 ]
D A T A 8
D A T A 6
D A T A 4
D A T A 2
D A T A 0
C N 1 0 6
P C I s l o t
( D S P )
P W A - F - D S P
k i t
i n t e r f a c e P a r a l l e l i n t e r f a c e k i t
b o a r d
S c r a m b l e r b o a r d
P C i n t e r f a c e ( I E E E 1 2 8 4 )
( L C D )
L C D
( K E Y )
P W A - F - K E Y
L C D b a c k l i g h t
T o u c h p a n e l
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.3 Electric Parts Layout
[A] Unit construction
[B] Scanner unit
[B-1] Motor, sensor, lamp
A4 series
[B] Scanner unit
[B-2] Switch, PC board, heater, thermostat, other parts
[C] Control panel unit
[D] Process unit
[D-1] Motor, sensor, switch, clutch, solenoid
M15
M1
Drive unit
S5
S7
S6
Scanner unit
PC board unit
M2
S16
Control panel unit
S4
KEY
S15
DH2*
CLT1
SLG
LCD
Fuser unit
Automatic
EXP
CCD
S1
Front side
S9
S2
S3
duplexing
unit
S41
S19
S8
THMO2*
LT series
S12
S11
DH1*
Bypass unit
M15
M1
S10
Front side
INV
Front side
DSP
SOL1
Transport unit
M20
Front side
S5
M16
S7
S6
Process unit
Front side
Paper feeder unit
Laser unit
S4
EXP
Front side
S2
S3
[D] Process unit
[D-2] Motor, sensor, switch, solenoid, heater, ther-
mistor, thermostat
[D] Process unit
[D-3] Motor, switch
[E] Laser unit
[F] Paper feeder unit
[G] Transport unit
S45*
CLT2
S31
CLT3
M3
CLT5
S22
S27
S20
S14
S33
S32
S29
S18
SNS
SOL2
S25
S28
S34
S17
S23
M13
S42
ERS
S26
S30
S43
S44
LDR
THM4
THMO3*
DH4*
S24
Front side
M4
Front side
DH3*
Front side
Front side
S13
Front side
[H] Bypass unit
[I] Automatic duplexing unit
[J] Fuser unit
[K] Drive unit
[L] PC board unit
M17
HDD
M21
M6
IH
SFB
S37
M7
M18
M8
S38
SYS
S39
S40
M5
CLT6
DRV
M12
IH-COIL
M19
CLT12
M9
CLT7
ADU
LGC
CLT14
CLT13
THMO1
THM2
CLT8
SOL3
CLT15
CLT9
CLT16
BRK
S35
M10
CLT11
Front side
Front side
THM3
THM1
CLT10
FIL
S36
Front side
PS
Front side
M11
Front side
HVT
Wire harness
location
Motors
Sensors and Switches
PC boards
Symbol
S43
Name
Figure
[G]
Wire harness
location
Wire harness
location
4-E
Wire harness
location
COV-INTLCK-SW
Symbol
Name
Figure
[B-1]
[D-1]
[D-2]
[E]
Symbol
S1-5
S6
Name
Figure
[B-1]
[B-1]
[B-1]
[D-1]
[D-1]
[D-1]
[D-1]
[D-1]
[D-2]
[D-2]
[D-1]
[D-1]
[D-2]
[G]
Symbol
Name
Figure
[B-2]
[B-2]
[C]
AC wire harness
8-G
Cover opening/closing interlock switch
SIDE-COV-SW
SCAN-MOT
M1
APS 1-3, APS-C, APS-R
PWA-F-CCD
4-G
7-F
8-G
8-B
6-G
6-B
6-G
8-D
6-C
8-F
6-B
6-F
8-C
4-F
7-D
8-A
8-A
5-H
7-D
5-A
CCD
SLG
DSP
KEY
LDR
SNS
3-F
4-G
1-G
1-H
8-B
8-B
S44
[G]
Scan motor
Automatic original detection sensor
HOME-SNR
4-F
CCD driving PC board (CCD board)
PWA-F-SLG
Side cover opening/closing switch
CLING-SNR
BELT-CLN-MOT
M2
4-F
4-F
6-F
7-D
7-C
7-E
7-E
7-E
8-G
7-F
7-F
8-H
8-G
7-D
8-C
8-G
8-G
8-G
8-C
8-C
8-E
8-E
8-E
8-E
8-E
8-F
8-E
8-E
6-H
6-G
6-G
6-F
6-F
6-C
Transfer belt cleaner auger motor
TNR-MOT
Carriage home position sensor
PLTN-SNR
Scanning section control PC board (SLG board)
PWA-F-DSP
S45
Paper clinging detection sensor
* Only for JPD model of all equipments
[G]
8-F
M3
M4
S7
Toner motor
Platen sensor
Display PC board (DSP board)
PWA-F-KEY
M/DC-POL
REVLV-HP-SNR
S8
[C]
Polygonal motor
ADU-MOT
Revolver home position sensor
COLR-TNR-SNR
Key control PC board (KEY board)
PWA-F-LDR
Electromagnetic spring clutches
M5
[I]
S9
[E]
ADU motor
Color toner cartridge sensor
COLR-ATTNR-SNR
Laser driving PC board (LDR board)
PWA-F-SNS
Wire harness
location
MAIN-MOT
Symbol
Name
Figure
[D-1]
[F]
M6
[K]
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
S16
S17
S18
S19
S20
S22
S23
S24
S25
S26
S27
S28
S29
S30
S31
S32
S33
S34
S35
S36
S37
S38
S39
S40
S41
S42
[E]
Main motor
Color auto-toner sensor
K-DEV-POS-SNR
H-sync signal detection PC board (SNS board)
PWA-F-SFB
TRBLT-CLN-CLT
EXIT-MOT
CLT1
7-D
8-D
8-F
8-F
6-H
6-F
8-D
8-D
8-D
8-C
8-D
8-D
8-D
8-F
8-F
M7
[K]
Transfer belt cleaner clutch
CST-U-FEED-CLT
Exit motor
Black developer contact position detection sensor
K-DEV-TIM-SNR
SFB
Bypass tray slide guide width detection PC board
(SFB board)
[H]
6-H
7-G
DRM-CLN-MOT
Drum cleaner brush motor
TRSP-MOT
CLT2
M8
[K]
Upper drawer feed clutch
CST-L-FEED-CLT
Black developer contact timing detection sensor
K-ATTNR-SNR
PWA-F-ADU
ADU
IH
[I]
ADU driving PC board (ADU board)
PS-IH
CLT3
[F]
M9
[K]
Lower drawer feed clutch
2TR-CONT-CLT
Transport motor
TRY-MOT
Black auto-toner sensor
K-TNR-SW
7-B
[K]
[K]
[L]
[L]
[L]
IH control PC board (IH board)
PWA-F-DRV
AC wire harness
CLT5
[G]
[H]
[I]
M10
M11
M12
M13
M15
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
[K]
2nd transfer roller contact clutch
SFB-FEED-CLT
Tray-up motor
Black toner cartridge switch
TRBLT-HP-SNR1
DRV
SYS
LGC
FIL
6-G
3-A
6-A
Driving PC board (DRV board)
PWA-F-SYS
DEV-MOT
CLT6
[K]
Bypass feed clutch
Developer motor
REVLV-MOT
Transfer belt home position sensor-1
TRBLT-HP-SNR2
ADU-CLT
System control PC board (SYS board)
PWA-F-LGC
CLT7
[K]
ADU clutch
Revolver motor
CCL-MOT
Transfer belt home position sensor-2
TNLVL-SNR
COLR-DEV-TNR-CLT
Color developer toner supply clutch
COLR-DEV-CLT
Logic PC board (LGC board)
PWA-F-FIL
CLT8
[K]
[B-1]
[B-1]
[D-1]
[K]
Charger cleaner motor
SCAN-FAN-MOT
Scanner unit cooling fan
LSU-FAN-MOT
Laser unit cooling fan
IH-FAN-MOT
Image quality sensor
TR2-POS-SNR
6-H
Filter PC board (FIL board)
AC wire harness
CLT9
[K]
Color developer drive clutch
K-DEV-CLT
2nd transfer roller position detection sensor
TEMP/HUMI-SNR
CLT10
CLT11
CLT12
CLT13
CLT14
CLT15
CLT16
[K]
[D-1]
[D-2]
[G]
Black developer drive clutch
K-DEV-LIFT-CLT
Temperature/humidity sensor
USD-TNR-FLL-SNR
Toner bag full detection sensor
RGST-SNR
[K]
Thermistors and thermostats
Black developer lifting clutch
RGST-CLT
IH control board cooling fan
OZN-FAN-MOT
Ozone exhaust fan
PS-FAN-MOT
Wire harness
location
[K]
Symbol
Name
Figure
[J]
[K]
Registration clutch
Registration sensor
CST-U-TR-L-CLT
THMS-EDGE-FBLT
Front edge thermistor
THMS-MAIN-FBLT
Main thermistor
THMS-SUB-FBLT
Sub thermistor
FED-U-SNR
[K]
THM1
7-C
7-C
[L]
[G]
Upper transport clutch (Low speed)
CST-U-TR-H-CLT
Power supply cooling fan
INTRNL-FAN-MOT
Internal cooling fan
HDD-FAN-MOT
HDD cooling fan
Upper drawer feed sensor
FED-L-SNR
[K]
THM2
[J]
[D-1]
[L]
[G]
Upper transport clutch (High speed)
CST-L-TR-L-CLT
Lower drawer feed sensor
CCL-F-POS-SW
[K]
THM3
[J]
7-C
[D-3]
[D-3]
[F]
Lower transport clutch (Low speed)
CST-L-TR-H-CLT
Charger cleaner front position detection switch
CCL-R-POS-SW
THMS-DRM
[K]
THM4
[D-2]
[J]
7-F
Lower transport clutch (High speed)
Drum thermistor
THERMO-FSR
Charger cleaner rear position detection switch
CST-U-TRY-SNR
THMO1
THMO2
THMO3
AC wire harness
AC wire harness
AC wire harness
Fuser thermostat
THERMO-SCN-DH
Upper drawer tray-up sensor
CST-L-TRY-SNR
Lamps and heaters
[B-2]
[D-2]
Wire harness
location
[F]
Scanner damp heater thermostat
THERMO-DRM-DH
Lower drawer tray-up sensor
EMP-U-SNR
Symbol
Name
Figure
[B-1]
[D-2]
[J]
Solenoids
Symbol
Wire harness
location
[F]
LP-EXPO
Drum damp heater thermostat
Name
Figure
[D-1]
[D-2]
[H]
EXP
3-G
7-E
Upper drawer empty sensor
EMP-L-SNR
Exposure lamp
LP-ERS
ATTNR-SHUT-SOL
[F]
SOL1
SOL2
SOL3
7-D
8-H
6-G
ERS
Lower drawer empty sensor
NEMP-U-SNR
Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid
TNLVL-SHUT-SOL
Discharge LED
IH-COIL
[F]
Upper drawer paper stock sensor
NEMP-L-SNR
IH-COIL
AC wire harness
Others
Image quality sensor shutter solenoid
SFB-SOL
IH coil
Wire harness
location
[F]
SCN-L-DH
Symbol
Name
Figure
[B-2]
[C]
Lower drawer paper stock sensor
CST-U-SW
Bypass pickup solenoid
Scanner damp heater (Left)
DH1
DH2
[B-2]
[B-2]
AC wire harness
AC wire harness
INV-EXP
* Optional for NAD/MJD model, standard for other
[F]
INV
LCD
HDD
PS
4-G
1-G
5-B
Upper drawer detection switch
CST-L-SW
Inverter board
LCD
models
SCN-R-DH
[F]
Lower drawer detection switch
SFB-SNR
LCD panel
HDD
Scanner damp heater (Right)
Transformer
Symbol
* Optional for NAD/MJD model, standard for other
[H]
[L]
Bypass paper sensor
SFB-FED-SNR
Wire harness
location
models
Hard disk
PS-ACC
Name
Figure
DRM-DH
5-G
[H]
[L]
Bypass feed sensor
PS-HVT
HVT
Drum damp heater
Switching regulator
BREAKER
Breaker
AC wire harness
[K]
6-D
DH3
DH4
[D-2]
[F]
AC wire harness
AC wire harness
High-voltage transformer
ADU-SET-SW
* Optional for NAD/MJD model, standard for other
models
[I]
BRK
[L]
AC wire harness
ADU opening/closing switch
ADU-TRU-SNR
CST-DH
[I]
ADU entrance sensor
ADU-TRL-SNR
Drawer damp heater
* Only for JPD model of all equipments
[I]
ADU exit sensor
EXIT-SNR
[J]
Exit sensor
MAIN-SW
8-A
[B-2]
[G]
Main switch
AC wire harness
FRNT-COV-SW
8-H
Front cover opening/closing switch
05/11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|